DIPLOMA IN ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

ENGINEERING
C18 CURRICULUM

STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION AND TRAINING

SANKETHIKA VIDYA BHAVAN, MASAB TANK, TELANGANA, HYDERABAD

1
 C-18 - CURRICULUM
FOR DIPLOMA PROGRAMMES IN TELANGANA

I. PREAMBLE

The State Board of Technical Education and Training, Telangana under the aegis of the Department
of Technical Education, Telangana regularly reviews the Curricula in tune with the developments both in
academic and industry side. However, recognizing the changing needs as stated by the catchment
industries, the Board has decided to bring about the revision of curriculum. Thus, the Board, with the
assistance of senior faculty of the branches concerned, has reviewed C-16/C-16S Curriculum in force.
On finding the merits and shortcomings of C-16/C-16S Curriculum, the faculty has made a thorough
assessment of the curricular changes that have to be brought in. It was felt that there is an urgent need
to improve hands-on experience among the students pursuing diploma courses. Further, the urgency of
enhancing communication skills in English has also been highlighted in the feedback and
suggestions made by the user industries. Keeping these in view, a number of meetings and deliberations
were held at State level, with experts from industry, academia and senior faculty of the department. The
new Curricula for the different diploma courses have been designed with the active participation of the
members of the faculty teaching in the Polytechnics of Telangana, besides reviewed by Expert
Committee constituted with eminent academicians.

The new C-18 curriculum is designed, duly taking into consideration the Outcome Based
Education model as per NBA norms and Credit system has also been introduced.
This new Curriculum has taken the Telangana State Industrial Policy in the course of Industrial
Management and Entrepreneurship. Skill Upgradation is given importance by allotting 2.5 grade
points per semester.
The primary objective of the curriculum change is to produce best technicians in the country by
correlating growing needs of the industries with the academic inputs.
The revised New Curriculum i.e., Curriculum – 2018 or C-18 is planned and designed by
making 6 months industrial training is mandatory.

Salient Features:

1. Duration of course is 3 years of Regular Academic instruction.

2
  The Curriculum is Outcome based, Semester Pattern, more practical oriented,
Flexible, Relevant to the industry needs and oriented to develop entrepreneurship
skills in Diploma students.
 A maximum of 20% credits be permitted in specialized electives offered in VI
semester that can be pursued through MOOC like SWAYAM / NPTEL
 To start with a robust curriculum structure is designed
 Course structure contains 5 theory courses and 5 Laboratory courses per semester
 All theory courses will be of Lecture -Tutorial-Practicals (L:T:P) pattern
 In order to ensure continuous evaluation, total course content is divided into 3 parts
i.e., Mid Semester- I should be conducted for 20 marks from part I and Mid Semester-
II should be conducted for 20 marks from part II, End Examination shall be
conducted for 40 marks of which 20 marks should be covered from part III, 20 marks
covered from overall course content.
 The sessional marks of 20 are assigned to slip tests, assignments, seminars, quiz etc.
 The question paper pattern is comprising of short answer questions, Essay questions,
Application based Questions covering the attributes of understanding, remembering
and Application.
 Scoring of the candidate in the examination is reflected in terms of grade points
blending with relative grade point award system.
2. Keeping in view the increased need of communication skills that is playing a vital role in the
success of Diploma Level students in the Industries, emphasis is given for learning and
acquiring listening, speaking, reading and writing skills in English. Communication Skills lab
and Life Skills lab are therefore introduced in III Semester and Advanced Communication
Skills lab and Life Skills lab as lab electives from IV Semester for all the branches.
3. Latest topics relevant to the needs of the industry and global scenario suitable to be taught at
Diploma level are also incorporated in the curriculum.
4. CAD specific to the branch has been given more emphasis in the curriculum. Preparing
drawings using CAD software has been given more importance.

5. Every student is exposed to the computer lab at the 1 styear itself in order to familiarize
himself/herself with skills required for keyboard/mouse operation, internet usage and e-mailing.

3
6. The number of teaching hours allotted to a particular topic/chapter has been rationalized
keeping in view the past experience.
7. Upon reviewing the existing C-16 curriculum, more emphasis is given to the practical content of
Laboratories and Workshops, thus strengthening the practical skills in C-18 Curriculum.
8. With increased emphasis for the student to acquire Practical skills, the course content in all the
courses is thoroughly reviewed and structured as outcome based than the conventional
procedure based. While the course content in certain courses felt overloaded is reduced, in rest
of the courses the content has been enhanced as per the need.
9. Curriculum of Laboratory and Workshops have been thoroughly revised based on the
suggestions received from the industry and faculty, for better utilization of the equipment
available at the Polytechnics. The experiments /exercises that are chosen for the practical
sessions are identified to conform to the field requirements of industry.
10. The course of skill up-gradation in each semester is incorporated in the time table for one
complete day consisting of 7 periods..
11. The student shall be awarded satisfactory through RUBRICS only if he/she puts in at-least 75%
attendance in the skill up-gradation course apart from the satisfactory performance in the
activities allotted.
12. The activities suggested for skill up-gradation in the curriculum at the end of each course will
be assessed by the respective course teacher through RUBRICS and duly certified by the
HOS/Principal.
13. The Members of the working group are grateful to Sri Navin Mittal I.A.S., Commissioner of
Technical Education & Chairman, S.B.T.E.T.(TS) for his constant guidance and valuable
inputs in revising, modifying and updating the curriculum.
14. The Members acknowledge thanks for cooperation and guidance extended by Sri. U.V.S.N.
Murthy, Secretary and his team of SBTET, Telangana, Dr C. Srinath, Additional Secretary,
SBTET and Sri A. Pullaiah, RJD and other officials of Directorate of Technical Education and
the State Board of Technical Education, Telangana.
15. The Members acknowledge thanks for cooperation and guidance extended by Dr.Uma
Shanker Sahu of NITTTR, Hyderabad and experts from industry, academia from the
universities and higher learning institutions and all teaching fraternity from the Polytechnics
who are directly and indirectly involved in preparation of the curricula.
4
II. RULES AND REGULATIONS
1. ADMISSION PROCEDURES:
1.1 DUR ATION AND PATTERN OF THE COURSES
All the Diploma programs run at various institutions are of AICTE approved 3 years duration of
Academic Instruction.
All the Diploma courses are run on semester-wise pattern.
1. 2 PROCEDURE FOR ADMISSION INTO THE DIPLOMA COURSES:
Selection of candidates is governed by the Rules and regulations laid down in this regard from
time to time.
i) Candidates who wish to seek admission in any of the Diploma courses will have to appear for
Common Entrance Test for admissions into Polytechnics (POLYCET) conducted by the State
Board of Technical Education and Training, Telangana, Hyderabad.
The candidates satisfying the following requirements only are eligible to appear for the
Common Entrance Test for admissions into Polytechnics (POLYCET).
a) The candidates seeking admission should have appeared for the X class examination,
conducted by the Board of Secondary Education, Telangana or equivalent examination at the
time of making application to the Common Entrance Test for Polytechnics for admissions
into Polytechnics (POLYCET). In case of candidates who apply with pending results of their
qualifying examinations, their selection shall be subject to production of proof of their passing
the qualifying examination in one attempt or compartmentally at the time of counselling for
admission.
b) Admissions are made based on the merit obtained in the Common Entrance Test (POLYCET)
and the reservation rules stipulated by the Government of Telangana from time to time.
c) For admission into the Diploma in Pharmacy Course for which entry qualification is 10+2,
candidates need not appear for POLYCET. A separate notification will be issued for admission
into these courses.
d) Admission into DHMCT Course shall be based on the Merit in Intermediate for which
admissions are made by DOST conducted by TSCHE.

1.3 MEDIUM OF INSTRUCTION

The medium of instruction and examination shall be English.

5
 1.4 PERMANENT IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (PIN)

A cumulative / academic record is to be maintained of the Marks secured in sessional work and
end examination of each year for determining the eligibility for promotion etc., a Permanent
Identification Number (PIN) will be allotted to each candidate, which is computer generated so
as to facilitate this work and avoid errors in tabulation of results.
1.5 NUMBER OF WORKING DAYS PER SEMESTER:
a). The Academic Year for all the Courses usually shall be from June 1st week of the year of

admission to the 31st March of the succeeding year.

b). The Working days in a week shall be from Monday to Saturday
c). There shall be 7 periods of 50 minutes duration on all working days.
d). The minimum number of Instructional working days for each semester shall be 90 days excluding
examination days/ Public holidays/ orientation programme/ Sports and games Period. If this
prescribed minimum is not achieved due to any reason, special arrangements shall be made to
conduct classes to cover the syllabus.
1.6 ELIGIBILITY OF ATTENDANCE TO APPEAR FOR THE END
EXAMINATION
Note: Student attendance is recorded, twice a day using Aadhar Based Attendance System with
Bio metric Device.

a). A candidate shall be permitted to appear for the end examination in all courses, if he or she has
attended a minimum of 75% of Instructional working days during the Semester.

b). Condonation of shortage of attendance in aggregate upto 10% (65% and above and below
75%) in each semester may be granted on medical grounds.

c). Candidates having less than 65% attendance shall be detained.

d). Students whose shortage of attendance is not condoned in any semester are not eligible to take
their end examination of that class and their admissions shall stand cancelled. They may seek
re-admission for that semester when offered next.

e). A stipulated fee shall be payable towards condonation for shortage of attendance.

1.7 READMISSION

6
 Readmission shall be granted to eligible candidates by the respective Principal of the institutions
concerned. 10% of approved intake are eligible for Readmission and preference will be given
to first-cum-first-serve basis, while according permission for re-admission of the Diploma
candidates:-
1. The percentage of attendance to a readmitted candidate is to be calculated from the
first day of beginning of the class work of that year / semester, but not from the date,
a readmitted candidate reports for class work, after given readmission.
No. of working
No. of working
S No. of days required
Year/Semester days required for
No Working days for 65%
75% attendance
attendance
Any Semester
1 (Except for 90 67.5 58.5
Industrial Training

2. The Principals of all Polytechnics shall ensure that the readmission cases should
considered and granted:-

a) Within 15 days after commencement of class work in any semester

Otherwise such cases should not be considered for readmission for that Semester/year,
and the candidates concerned may be advised to seek readmission in the next subsequent
semester/year.
Before issuing readmission orders, an undertaking letter from the student is to be
obtained, stating that he/she will agree to the rule that the percentage of attendance to him/her
shall be calculated from the first day of beginning of the regular class work for that year /
semester, as officially announced by DTE/SBTET but not from the day on which he/she has
actually reported to the class work, after readmission is granted, and that he/she will complete
the Diploma in twice the duration of the course from the date of the first admission, otherwise
he/she will forfeit the claim for qualifying for the award of Diploma.
2. SCHEME OF EXAMINATION

2.1 I, II, III, IV, V and VI Semesters:

THEORY EXAMINATION: Each semester end examination carries 40 marks in respect

of specified courses of 2 hours duration, along with 60 marks for continuous evaluation.

7
  The Semester End Examination paper shall be set for 40 marks
 PRACTICAL EXAMINATION: Each laboratory course carries 40 marks of 2/3 hours
duration and 60 sessional marks for continuous internal evaluation.

2.2 ASSESSMENT SCHEME

I. Assessment: In order to ensure continuous evaluation the examination pattern is formulated as
End 40 marks
Examination
Mid Sem 1 20 marks
Mid Sem 2 20 marks
Tutorials 20 marks
/Sessionals
Total marks 100 Marks

 Total course content shall be divided into three parts as Part 1, Part 2, Part 3
 Mid sem 1 Exam should be conducted from Part 1
 Mid sem II Exam should be conducted from Part 2
 End Examination to be conducted for 40 marks of which
 20 Marks should be covered from Part 3
 Remaining 20 marks covered from over all course contents
 The tutorial/sessionals shall consist of following marks division
1. Slip test 1 -- 5 marks
2. Slip test 2 -- 5 Marks
3. Assignments -- 5 Marks
4. Seminar/paper presentation/group discussion -- 5 Marks
II. Mid semester Question paper pattern
 Part A shall consist of ‘Remember’ based questions
 Part B shall consist of ‘Understanding’ questions
 Part C shall be of ‘Application’ based Questions
III. Semester End Examination:

 The Regular Examinations and Backlog Examinations shall be conducted separately.

8
 Backlog examinations should be held before the commencement of Academic Year to
give sufficient time for the student to prepare for Backlog examinations.

9
IV. Examination Pattern (End Semester Examination):
Part 3 Unit 5&6 ‘Remember’ based questions
Part A
Entire syllabus ‘Remember’ based questions

Part 3
Part B ‘Understanding’ based questions
Unit 5&6
Entire syllabus ‘Understanding’ based questions
Part 3
‘Application’ based questions
Unit 5&6
Part C
Entire syllabus ‘Application’ based questions

V. Award of Grades and Grade points criteria for C-18 Curriculum

1. Marks : In order to ensure continuous evaluation the examination pattern is formulated

as:
Theory Practical
End Examination 40 marks End Examination 40 marks
Mid Sem-I 20 marks Mid Sem-I 20 marks
Mid Sem-II 20 marks Mid Sem-II 20 marks
Internal 20 marks Internal 20 marks
Total marks 100 Marks Total marks 100 Marks

2. Hybrid grading system for regular students:

Absolute Grade Cut off Hybrid Grade Cut off
Grade Relative Grade
Grade Practical &
Point Theory Subjects Cut off
Drawing
Min of
A+ 10 > 90% > 90% Min of Top 1/8
Abs. or Rel. grade %
Min of
A 9 > 80 to < 90% > 82.5 to < 90% Min of Top 2/8
Abs. or Rel. grade %
Min of
B+ 8 > 70 to < 80% > 75 to < 82.5% Min of Top 3/8
Abs. or Rel. grade %
Min of
B 7 > 60 to < 70% > 67.5 to < 75% Min of Top 4/8
Abs. or Rel. grade %
Min of
C+ 6 > 50 to < 60% > 60 to < 67.5% Min of Top 5/8
Abs. or Rel. grade %
Min of
C 5 > 40 to < 50% > 55 to < 60% Min of Top 6/8
Abs. or Rel. grade %
Min of
D 4 > 35 to < 40% > 50 to < 55% Min of Top 7/8
Abs. or Rel. grade %
E 0 Rest of the Candidates

10
 Based on the minimum of Absolute Grade cut off and Relative Grade cut off, a Hybrid grade
cut off shall be arrived and the appropriate grade shall allotted to the student and based on the Grade, a
Grade point shall be allotted in each subject provided the Candidate passes in the subject.

Pass Criteria for Regular Candidate: The Candidate is declared pass only if he/she secures
above the Hybrid Grade cut off of ‘D’ grade and 35% or above in Theory Examination and 50% or
above in Practical and Drawing Examinations, as per the formula below in Sem End Examination:-
End semester marks secured X 100
End semester Topper marks

Grades for backlog subjects : The Candidate shall be awarded ‘P’ or ‘F’ Grade based on
‘Pass’ or ‘Fail’ respectively in the Backlog Subjects. The ‘P’ or ‘F’ Grade has no Grade point but P
grade will count towards credits earned for awarding Diploma. The Candidate shall get P Grade if
he/she secures 35% or above in Theory Examination and 50% or above in Practical and Drawing
Examinations, as per the formula below in End Sem Examination:-
End semester marks secured X 100
End semester Topper marks of Regular exam of that batch

VI. Credits:
For theory courses-- 3 Credits
For Laboratory courses- 1.5 Credits
Skill up-gradation 2.5 Credits
Total credits per semester 25 Credits

 CGPA will be calculated for Regular Examinations only and not for backlog exams.
 Backlog exams will count for credits.
 Skill up gradation course will not count for CGPA but for Credits.
 Minimum credits for obtaining Diploma are 130 out of 150
VII. Electives:

a) The students are permitted to choose two electives in V semester.

Or
Specialized electives related to V semester course contents offered in MOOCs, like
SWAYAM/NPTEL
b) The student has to complete one Project in V Semester

11
Industrial Training (VI Semester)
Swapping of Industrial Training in C-18 Curriculum in V and VI Semesters
(50% of each Polytechnic students undergo Industrial Training in V Semester and
remaining in VI Semester).
 Evaluation and assessment of Industrial Training, shall be done and marks be awarded
in the following manner, provided the candidates concerned have put up minimum 90%
attendance of Industrial Training.

Industrial assessment at Industry : 600 marks (in two spells of 300 marks each)

Institutional Evaluation : 300 marks

Semester End Examination : 100 marks

(Seminar/viva-voce at Institution)
_________
TOTAL 1000 marks

Assessment parameters at Industry

Assessment
Assessment I
Sl No II (Second
Learning Parameter (First Quarter)
Quarter)
1 Attendance and punctuality 20 20

2 Familiarity of tools and material 30 30

3 Engineering skills 50 50

4 Application of knowledge & Problem solving skills 50 50

5 Comprehension and observation 10 10

6 Professionalism/Professional ethics 20 20

7 Safety and environmental consciousness 10 10

8 Communication skills 20 20

9 Supervisory skills 50 50

10 General conduct during the period 40 40

Total marks for Industry Evaluation 300

300
600 marks
Assessment parameters at Institution (End Examination)

12
 Institution Level Evaluation Scheme
Sl Criteria Marks Time
No
1 1st Report Submission 50 within 4 Weeks
2 Seminar-I 50 9th to 10th week
3 2nd Report Submission 50 Within 12 weeks
4 Log book 100 --
5 Seminar-II 50 Before Viva-Voce
Institute Evaluation 300
Total
Semester End Examination
1 Viva-Voce 50 After 24 weeks
2 Presentation/Demonstration 50
of skills
Total 100

 The assessment at the institute level will be done by a minimum of three members i.e.
Internal Faculty, Industrial Experts/External Examiner and H.O.D. and the shall be
averaged

a) Theory Courses: Theory Courses carry 20 marks for Mid Sem I and 20 marks for Mid Sem II
and 20 marks for Tutorials which consists of Slip Test-I 5 Marks, Slip Test-II 5 Marks,
Assignment-5 Marks and Seminar -5Marks. Mid Sem examinations will be conducted on the
dates specified by SBTET. The remaining 40 marks of theory will be conducted as End
Semester Exam.
b) Practicals: Student’s performance in Laboratories / Workshop shall be assessed during each
semester of study for 40 marks in end practical course and internal assessment carries 20 marks
for Mid Sem I and 20 marks for Mid Sem II and 20 marks for Tutorials. Each student has to
write a record / log book for assessment purpose. In the course of Drawing, which is also
considered as a practical paper, the same rules hold good. Drawing exercises are to be filed in
seriatim.
c) Internal assessment in Labs / workshops / Survey field etc., during the course of study shall be
done and sessional marks shall be awarded by the concerned Lecturer / Senior Lecturer /
Workshop superintendent with the concurrence of concerned HOS as the case maybe.
d) For practical examinations, there shall be two examiners. External examiner shall be

13
 appointed by the Principal in consultation with respective head of the department preferably
choosing a person from an Industry/Academician. At least one External Examiner from
Industry should be appointed for core labs.The Internal examiner shall be the person
concerned with internal assessment as in (c) above. The end examination shall be held
along with all theory papers in respect of drawing.
e) Question Paper for Practicals: Question paper should cover all the experiments / exercise
prescribed.
f) Records pertaining to internal assessment marks of both theory and practical courses are to be
maintained for official inspection.
g) In case of D.C.C.P., though the pass mark for typewriting and short hand is 50% in the end
examination, equivalency will be given for the students who got 45% with the examinations
held by SBTET, TS.
3 RULES OF PROMOTION FOR NEXT LEVEL:
3.1 For Diploma Courses for 1st ,2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5thand 6thSemesters:
1. A candidate shall be permitted to appear for first Semester examination provided he / she puts
the required percentage of attendance (i.e., 75%) and pays the examination fee. However,
attendance can be condoned by the Principal on Medical grounds upto 10% (i.e. attendance after
condonation on Medical grounds should not be less than 65%) and he/she has to pay the
condonation fee along with examination fee as prescribed by SBTET from time to time.
2. A candidate shall be promoted to 2ndsemester if he/she puts the required percentage of
attendance (i.e., 75% in general and 65% on medical grounds) in the first semester and pays the
examination fee. A candidate who could not pay the first semester examination fee has to pay
the promotion fee as prescribed by State Board of Technical Education and Training from time
to time before commencement of 2nd semester.
A candidate is eligible to appear for the 2nd semester exam if he/she puts the required
percentage of attendance (i.e., 75% in general and 65% on medical condonation) in the 2nd
semester.

3. A candidate shall be promoted to 3rdsemester if he/she puts the required percentage of

attendance (i.e., 75% in general and 65% on medical grounds) in the 2nd semester and pays the
examination fee and earned more than 25 credits (upto regular End Semester Exams of 2nd
semester). A candidate who could not pay the 2nd semester examination fee has to pay the

14
 promotion fee as prescribed by State Board of Technical Education and Training from time to

time before commencement of 3rd semester.

A candidate is eligible to appear for the 3 rd semester exam if he/she puts the required
percentage of attendance (i.e., 75% in general and 65% on medical condonation) and pays the
examination fee in the 3rd semester and earned 25 credits up the end of 2nd Semester.

4. A candidate shall be promoted to 4th semester provided he/she puts the required percentage of

attendance (i.e., 75% in general and 65% on medical condonation) in the 3rdsemester and pays
the examination fee and earned 25 credits up the end of 2 nd Semester. A candidate, who could

not pay the 3rdsemester exam fee but fulfilling all other conditions has to pay the promotion
fee as prescribed by State Board of Technical Education and Training from time to time

before commencement of 4th semester. IVC pass out students admitted into 3 rd semester
through lateral entry shall be promoted to 4th Semester, if he/she Puts the required percentage
of attendance (i.e., 75% in general and 65% on medical grounds) and pays examination in the
3rd semester.
5. A candidate shall be promoted to 5thsemester provided he / she puts the required percentage of
attendance (i.e., 75% in general and 65% on medical grounds) in the 4thsemester and pays the
examination fee and earns 75 Credits (upto regular End Semester Exams of 4th semester). A
candidate, who could not pay the 4thsemester examination fee but earned 75 credits has to pay
the promotion fee as prescribed by State Board of Technical Education and Training from time
to time before commencement of 5thsemester as the case may be.
6. A candidate shall be promoted to 6thsemester provided he / she puts the required percentage of
attendance (i.e., 75% in general and 65% on medical grounds) in the 5thsemester and pays the
examination fee and earned 75 credits upto the end of 4th Semester. A candidate, who could not
pay the 5thsemester examination fee, has to pay the promotion fee as prescribed by State Board
of Technical Education and Training from time to time before commencement of 6thsemester as
the case may be.
(a) A candidate is eligible to appear for the 6th semester (Theory) exam if he/she
i) Puts the required percentage of attendance in the 6th semester
ii) Should have appeared for 5th semester examination.

15
 (b) A candidate is eligible to appear for 6th (Industrial Training) semester examination if
he/she

i) Puts the required percentage of attendance i.e., 90% in 6thsemester (Industrial

Training)
ii) Should have completed the Industrial Training
iii) Should have submitted Industrial Training assessment report.
(c) In case a candidate does not successfully complete the Industrial training, he / she
will have to repeat the training at his / her own cost.
Promotion rules for C-18
S From To Cumulative
Attendance Remarks
No. Sem Sem Credits
75%
1 I II -
(65% on medical grounds)
Cumulative credits are
2 II III -do- 25
applicable from the
3 III IV -do- 25
A.Y. 2021-22 onwards
4 IV V -do- 75
5 V VI -do- 75
Note: Ineligible candidates are not permitted to next higher semester classwork till he/she
fulfills the above eligibility criteria.

Promotion rules for C-18 (IVC)

From To Cumulative
S No. Attendance Remarks
Sem Sem Credits
75% (65% IVC candidates should be
1 III IV on medical - allotted 50 credits during
grounds) admission into 3rd semester
2 IV V -do- 75 From A.Y. 2021-22
3 V VI -do- 75 -do-
Note: Ineligible candidates are not permitted to next higher semester classwork till he/she
fulfills the above eligibility criteria.

4.1 EXAMINATION FEE SCHEDULE:

The examination fee should be paid as per the notification issued by State Board of Technical
Education and Training from time to time.

4.2 ISSUE OF GRADE CARD:

16
 All candidates who appear for the end examination will be issued Grade Card without any
payment of fee. However, candidates who lose the original Grade Card have to pay the
prescribed fee to the Secretary, State Board of Technical Education and Training, Telangana for
each duplicate Grade Card.
4.3 MAXIMUM PERIOD FOR COMPLETION OF DIPLOMA COURSES:
Maximum period for completion of the course is twice the prescribed duration of the course
from the date of First admission (includes the period of detention and discontinuation of studies
by student etc) failing which they will have to forfeit the claim for qualifying for the award of
Diploma. (They will not be permitted to appear for examinations after that date). This rule
applies for all Diploma courses of 3 years of engineering and non-engineering courses
including candidates seek admission under lateral entry. In respect of Pharmacy courses the
completion period s 4 years as the prescribed duration of the course is 2 years.
4.4 ELIGIBILITY FOR AWARD OF DIPLOMA
A candidate is eligible for award of Diploma Certificate if he / she fulfill the following
academic regulations.
i. He / She pursued a course of study for not less than 3 academic years & not more than 6
academic years.
ii. He / she should have earned 130 credits out of 150 credits.
Students who fail to fulfill all the academic requirements for the award of the Diploma within 6
academic years from the year of admission shall forfeit their seat in the course & their seat
shall stand cancelled.
4.5 RE-VALUATION / ISSUE OF PHOTO COPY:
4.5.1 a) As per the SBTET notification.
A candidate desirous of applying for Revaluation / issue of Photocopy of valued
answer scripts should submit the application online to the Secretary, State Board of
Technical Education and Training, Telangana., Hyderabad – 500 063 as per the notification
issued for Revaluation /issue of Photo copy of answer Script.

4.5.2 MALPRACTICE CASES:

17
 If any candidate resorts to any Mal Practice during examinations, he / she shall be booked and
the Punishment shall be awarded as per rules and regulations framed by SBTET,TS from time
to time.

4.5.3 DISCREPANCIES/PLEAS:
Any Discrepancy regarding results etc., shall be represented to the Board within one month
from the date of issue of results. Thereafter, no such cases shall be entertained in any manner.
4.6 EQUIVALENCE:
In general there is no equivalency of CGPA and marks percentage:
However : 60% is insisted a CGPA of 6.50
55% is insisted a CGPA of 6.00
50% is insisted a CGPA of 5.50

With respect to the intermediate vocational candidates, who are admitted directly into diploma

course at the 3rdsemester (i.e., second year) level, the CGPA over 4 semesters shall alone be
taken into consideration for award of Diploma.

5 ISSUE OF CERTIFICATES :
5.1 ISSUE OF DUPLICATE DIPLOMA:
If the candidate desires for a duplicate certificate of Diploma, he/she may obtain on payment of
prescribed fee, duly following the procedure.
5.2 ISSUE OF MIGRATION CERTIFICATE AND TRANSCRIPTS:
The Board on payment of prescribed fee will issue these certificates for the candidates who
intend to pursue Higher Studies in India or Abroad.
5.3 GENERAL
i. The Board may change or amend the academic rules and regulations or syllabi at any
time and the changes or amendments made shall be applicable to all the students, for
whom it is intended, with effect from the dates notified by the competent authority.
ii. All legal matters pertaining to the State Board of Technical Education and Training are
within the jurisdiction of Hyderabad.
iii. In case of any ambiguity in the interpretation of the above rules, the decision of the
Secretary, SBTET (TS) is final

18
DIPLOMA IN ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING
I SEMESTER

19
 I SEMESTER
TEACHING AND EXAMINATION SCHEME

Sl Course Course Name Teaching Scheme Examination Scheme

No Code Instruction Total Credits Continuous internal Semester end examination
Periods per Periods evaluation
week per
semester

L T P Mid Mid Internal Max Min Total Min

sem sem evaluati Mark Mark marks marks for
1 2 on s s passing
including
internal
1 18EE- Basic English 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35
101F 3 1

2 18EE- Basic Engineering 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35

102F Mathematics 3 1

3 18EE- Basic Physics 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35

3 1
103F
4 18EE- General Engineering 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35
104F Chemistry 3 1

5 18EE- Basic Electrical 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35

105C Engineering 3 1

6 18EE- Basic Engineering 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50

106P Drawing

7 18EE- Basic Computer 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50

107P Aided Drafting
8 18EE- Basic Electrical 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
108P Workshop Practice

9 18EE- Basic Science Lab 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50

109P- Practice
A+B

1018EE- Computer 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50

110P Fundamentals Lab
Practice
11 Skill Upgradation 0 0 7 105 2.5 0 0 Rubrics -- -
20 5 17 630 25 200 200 200 400 170 1000 425

Activities: student performance is to be assessed through Rubrics

20
 BASIC ENGLISH

Course Title : Basic English Course Code : 18EE-101F

Semester : I Course Group : Foundation
Teaching Scheme in Periods (L:T:P:) : 45:15:0 Credits :3
Methodology : Lecture + Total Contact Periods : 60
Tutorial
SEE : 40 Marks
CIE : 60 Marks

(Semester End Exam)

(Continuous Internal Evaluation)

This Course is Common to all Programs of Diploma in Engineering

Prerequisites: Basic knowledge of English Language

COURSE OUTCOMES
At the end of the course, the students will have the ability to:
101.1 communicate effectively, express their likes, dislikes and feelings and make
requests
101.2 listen and reciprocate appropriately
101.3 use a dictionary and acquire vocabulary for social interaction
101.4 speak and write grammatically correct sentences
101.5 analyse and evaluate the written material
101.6 convey ideas in the form of paragraphs and letters

COURSE CONTENTS

UNIT – 1: SPEAKING Duration: 12 Periods

1. Need For English
2. Classroom English
3. Expressing Feelings
4. Expressing Likes & Dislikes
5. Making Requests

UNIT - 2: LISTENING Duration: 6 Periods

6. Describing Words

UNIT –3: VOCABULARY Duration: 8 Periods

21
 7. How to use a Dictionary
8. Words Often Confused

UNIT -4 : GRAMMAR Duration: 16 Periods

9. Tenses
10. Basic Sentence Structures
11. Voice
12. Asking Questions

UNIT - 5: READING Duration: 6 Periods

9. The Mighty Mountain and Little Lads of Telangana

10. The Adventures of Toto
11. Tiller turns Engineer - An Innovation

UNIT- 6: WRITING Duration: 12 Periods

16. Paragraph Writing - I

17. Paragraph Writing - II
18. Letter Writing – I
19. Letter Writing – II

Suggested Learning Outcomes:

On completion of the course the students will be able to

 express feelings, likes and dislikes and make requests.
 communicate fluently.
 use dictionary
 use describing words and distinguish between confusing words.
 read, comprehend and answer the questions.
 use appropriate tenses, voices, structures and ask questions.
 write paragraphs and letters.

22
 Internal evaluation

Test Units Marks Pattern

Mid Sem 1 Speaking Part A 4 short answer questions
Listening 20 Part B 2 short essay questions with internal
choice
Part C 2 essay questions with internal choice
Mid Sem 2 Vocabulary Part A 4 short answer questions
Grammar 20 Part B 2 short essay questions with internal
choice
Part C 2 essay questions with internal choice
Slip Test 1 Speaking 5 2 questions out of 3 questions
Listening

Slip Test 2 Vocabulary 5 2 questions out of 3 questions

Grammar
Assignment One assignment per one 5 Different group assignments of higher order
semester questions that develop problem solving skills
and critical thinking should be given

Seminars One seminar per one 5 Oral presentations using audio –visual
semester equipment, charts, etc.
Total 60

Suggested Student Activities

 Setting short term goals for learning English

 Identifying the suitable solutions for the skill gap
 Listen to a passage / conversations / dialogues / speeches and answer the questions
 Self introduction
 Talking about routines
 Talking about one’s emotions
 Debates
 Elocution
 Role Plays
 Quiz
 Reading a selected text / news paper for specific purpose
 Reading aloud with proper pronunciation and intonation
 Describing people
 Describing places
 Describing events

23
  Creating Advertisements
 Selling a product with appropriate vocabulary
 Interpreting advertisements
 Writing short messages
 Writing a bio note / paragraph / letter
 How to use translate using Google application
 Using a dictionary
 Vocabulary games

Textbook: English for Polytechnics

(English Textbook for First-Year Diploma Students)

REFERENCES:
1. Practical English Grammar by A.J Thomson and A.V. Martinet
2. A Course in Phonetics and Spoken English by J. Sethi and P.V Dhamija
3. Word Power Made Easy by Norman Lewis
4. Games for Language Learning by Andrew Wright, David Betteridge and Michael Buckby
5. Five Minute Activities by Penny Ur
6. English Dialogues by M. Martin
e-learning:

1.www.duolingo.com
2. www.bbc.co.uk
3. www.babbel.com
4. www.merriam-webster.com
5. www.ello.org
6. www.lang-8.com
7. youtube.com

8. Hello English (app)

9. mooc.org
10. https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in

24
 CO-PO Matrix

CO PO PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 Mapping POs
1

101.1 2 1 1 - - 2 - 3 3 3 1,2,3,6,8,9,10

101.2 2 2 -- 2 -- 2 -- 3 3 3 1,2,4,6,8,9,10

101.3 2 2 -- -- 1 1 2 3 3 3 1,2,5,6,7,8,9,10

101.4 2 2 2 -- 2 1 2 3 3 3 1,2,3,5,6,7,8,9,10

101.5 2 2 -- -- 2 -- 2 3 3 3 1,2,5,6,7,8,9,10

101.6 2 2 -- -- -- -- -- 3 3 3 1,2,8,9,10

25
 MID SEM-I EXAM
S.No Unit Name R U A Remarks
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-I 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)

6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-II 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)
Total Questions 4 4 4
MID SEM –II EXAM
S.No Unit Name R U A Remarks
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-III 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-IV 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)
Total Questions 4 4 4

Semester End Examination

Questions to be set for SEE Remarks

Sl No Unit No.
R U A  
1 I
1 9(a) 13(a)  
2 II  
3 III
2 10(a) 14(a)  
4 IV  
9(b) 13(b)
4
5 V 5, 6 11(a) 15(a)  
 
11(b) 15(b)  
3
10(b) 14(b)

6 VI 7,8 12(a) 16(a)  

 
12(b) 16(b)  
Total Questions 8 8 8  

26
 Remembering (R) 1 Mark
Legend: Understanding (U) 3 Marks

Application (A) 5 Marks

18EE-101F
BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATION (C-18)
DEEE I- SEMESTER 18EE-101F
BASIC ENGLISH
MID SEM -I
Time : 1 Hour Total Marks: 20 Marks

PART - A 1X4=4
Instructions: Answer all the questions. Each carries one mark.
1. Rewrite the following as requests.
a. Pass the milk.
b. Give me your cell.
2. Write your feelings in the given situations.
a. Your mother scolded you.
b. Your friends gave you a surprise party.
3. Describe your classroom in a couple of sentences.
4. Fill in the blanks with the suitable describing words.

My friend is ________. She bought a _______ house.

(dirty, clever, rich, fat, intelligent, big)
PART - B2 X 3 = 6
Instructions: Answer the following questions. Each question carries three marks
5. a.) What are the advantages of learning English?
(Or)
b). Write three situations in which you feel the following emotions.

i. Anger ii. Jealousy iii. Worry

6. a) Identify the describing words in the following sentences.

27
 Harry Potter series is very interesting and popular. He is very sensitive and brave. The author
was once poor. But now she has become rich.
(Or)
b) Fill in the blanks with the appropriate words of description given below in brackets.

The Sun was shining brightly. It was a ___ day. The sky was ___. There were no clouds in the sky. A
__ girl came out of her house. She was very ___. Suddenly a ___ cloud loomed over. There was ___
rain.
( large, dark, pretty, young, sunny, clear, heavy. silly)

PART-C 2 X 5 = 10
Instructions: Answer the following questions. Each question carries five marks.
7 a) Mention any five problems you faced in learning English?
(Or)

b) Write any five expressions used by the teacher in the classroom.

8 a). Describe your friend using appropriate describing words.
(Or)
b) Use the following words and write a paragraph on your town.
(spacious, big, beautiful, narrow, clean, dirty, wide, small, tall, polluted)

28
 18EE-101F
BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATION (C-18)
DEEE I- SEMESTER 18EE-101F
BASIC ENGLISH
MID SEM -II
Time : 1 Hour Total Marks: 20 Marks

PART - A 1X4=4

Instructions: Answer all the questions. Each carries one mark.

1. Use the following pair of homonyms in your own sentences to bring out the difference in meaning.
a. Watch
b. Watch
2. Write any three basic uses of a dictionary?

a. He always ____ (visit) his parents on Sunday.

b. She ___ (be) late yesterday.

3. Change the voice.

a. Cats chase mice.
b. The wires were cut by him.
4. Change the following into yes / no questions.

a. Satish likes sweets.

b. Desserts are hot.

PART - B2 X 3 = 6
Instructions: Answer the following questions. Each question carries three marks

5 a). Write about different kinds of dictionaries.

(Or)

29
b). Fill in the blanks with the appropriate homophones given below in brackets.
I tell _______ (stories, storeys) to my friends. My hobby is to tell _______ ( tales, tails) with animal
characters in them. _______ (Two, Too) of my friends like to listen to my stories always. I told them a
story about a ______(bear, bare). I bought it for them at a _______ (fair, fare). I became very _______
(week, weak) as I suffered from fever.
6 a). Frame three ‘wh-’ questions for the following passage.
One of the most famous monuments in the world, the Statue of Liberty was presented to the
U.S.A.by the people of France. It took ten years to complete it. It was made of copper with a metal
frame to support it. The sculptor Auguste Bartholdi made it.

(Or)
b). Change the voice.

a. He plays hockey.
b. The novel had been written by him.
c. We will be helped by them.
PART-C 2 X 5 = 10
Instructions: Answer the following questions. Each question carries five marks.
7 a). How will you locate a word in a dictionary?
(Or)
b). Write the following pairs of words in your own sentences.

i. Son, Sun
ii. Live, Live
iii. Hair, Hare
iv. Meet, Meat
v. Air, Heir

8 a). Write five sentences about your childhood using past tense.
(Or)
b). Write one sentence each for the given structures.
i. S.V.
ii. S.V.O.
iii. S.V.SC.
iv. S.V.O.OC.
v. S.V.IO.DO.

30
 18EE-101F
BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATION (C-18)
DEEE I- SEMESTER 18EE-101F
BASIC ENGLISH
SEMESTER END EXAMINATION
Time: 2 Hours Total Marks: 40

PART – A 8 X 1 = 08
Instructions: 1. Answer all the questions.
2. Each question carries one mark.
1. Fill the blanks with suitable expressions of feelings:
a) I feel _________ when I get a first class in diploma first semester.
b) The teacher was ________ with me when I was late to class.
2. Use raise and rise in your own sentences.
3. Write at least four supporting sentences for the following topic sentence:
I want to become an engineer.
4. Write one sentence each for the following structures:
a. S V IO DO
b. S V SC
5. Read the following passage and answer the questions that follow:
Communication is the process of transmitting ideas from a human communicator to a human
communicate, directly or through a medium. Technical communication, which is concerned with
the transmission of technical information, uses a variety of graphics, such as charts, diagrams,
pictures and tables to illustrate the information presented in a language. Every illustration
communicates facts clearly, concisely, attractively and accurately. A technician should shape his
ideas into language as well as graphics. It must also be possible for a technician to convert the
ideas available in the form of language into graphics and vice versa.
a) What is technical communication concerned with?
b) Why does technical communication use graphics?

31
6. Read the above paragraph and answer the following questions:
a) How should the technician develop his ability of communication?
b) Suggest a suitable title for the passage.
7. Write any three complimentary closures used in official letters.
8. Write a short paragraph on your long term goal.

PART- B 4 X 3 = 12

Instructions: 1. Answer the following questions.

2. Each question carries three marks.
9 a. Write any five expressions used by your teacher in classroom.
(or)
b). Read the following paragraph and answer the questions that follow:
JalagamVengal Rao open caste mine is located in Sathupally in Khammam district. When coal
deposits were discovered in Sathupally, it was tested by its owners – Singareni Collieries Company
Limited, to determine the quality. Surveys showed that coal available underneath Sathupally area
would last for about 50 years.
The farmers who had to leave their lands were compensated with lands elsewhere and
some of them were given jobs in mines. Open cast mining started at Sathupally in 2005.
Almost all the work at this mine are done using machines such as bulldozers, motor
graders, shovels, drills, water sprinklers, tipper trucks, dumpers and different trucks which can carry
heavy loads of coal. Shovel and bulldozers are first used to remove top soil or overburden and
rocks. Then a series of benches are made (benches are vertical sections of a mine from where the
coal or overburden is removed). Roads have been laid in the mining area all the way down to the
bottom of the mine, connecting all the benches. Over burden and waste rocks are removed from
sides of benches by blasting. Coal blasted in benches is then lifted using shovels and dumpers and
transported through tipper trucks. Coal is transported to the coal handling plant and through railway
wagons to power plants, cement factories and other industries. Every day, about 10,000 tonnes of
coal is mined and transported from JVR Open Cast Mine.

Questions:
a) Where is JalagamVengal Rao Open Cast Mine located?
b) Why were the farmers compensated with land or given jobs in mines?
c) What is a bench in a coal mine?

32
10 a). Rewrite the following sentences changing the voice.
a) I was helped by her.
b) She cleaned the house.
c) Windows have been painted by Ramesh.
(or)
b) Write a letter to your principal requesting him to issue a duplicate hall ticket.

11 a). Read the following paragraph and answer the questions that follow:
Subhash Chandra Bose was born on 23 January 1897 in Cuttack, Orissa. He studied in Cuttack
and then moved to Presidency College in Calcutta for further studies. He did his B.A. in Philosophy and
went to England to appear for the Civil Services examination Although he did well in the exam he soon
resigned from the services because it meant working against the interests of his country. .He returned to
India and started a newspaper called Swaraj. His mentor Chittaranjan Das was active and open in his
criticism of British rule. Bose followed his footsteps and was arrested and sent to prison in Mandalay. He
joined the Indian National Congress. Later he parted ways with the Congress. He revived the Indian
National Army. He is believed to have coined the slogan Jai Hind.
Questions:
a) What was ChittaranjanDas's attitude towards the British?
b) How did Bose fight against the British?
c) Why did Bose resign from the Civil Services?

(or)
b) Read the following paragraph and answer the questions that follow:
What influenced Asuthosh most was the company of the brilliant friends of his father. They were
eminent men in their several walks of life, and they fired the boy’s ambition. He was especially
impressed by Mr. Justice DwarkaNathMitter who often visited their house. In his heart he wanted to
emulate him in all ways. Thus at a very early age Asutosh formed the ambition of being a judge of the
Calcutta High Court. He also wanted to be a scholar and win the PremchandRoychand Studentship which
is held to be the most coveted academic distinction in Bengal. It will be seen later how he was able to
realize both his ambitions.
But he had to cut his studies short because he fell seriously ill. The doctors said that he suffered from
palpitation of the heart and advised him to have a complete rest and change. His father sent him to Muttra
for a holiday. The change had a very beneficial effect on him, for Muttra had a fine climate and beautiful
scenery, and Autosh returned fully restored in health and sprits.

33
 Mathematics attracted Asutosh most, and he came to be looked upon as a prodigy in this subject. One
day one of his teachers thought of testing his ability in mathematics and set the class very difficult
problem. All the other students looked blank on reading the problem, but not so Asutosh. He solved it
correctly in a few minutes and showed it to the teacher, who was amazed at the evidence of his ability.
As time went on he developed much originality in solving other mathematical problems.
Questions:

a) What was Asutosh’s ambition?

b) What did he want to win?
c) Why did doctors advise him to take rest?

12 a). Write a paragraph using the hints given below.

Library in our polytechnic – a big hall – several tables and chairs – newspapers – journals –
visiting hours – two computers with internet – three cards to each student – 20000 books – many
reference books
(or)
b). Write a letter to your friend describing your first day in your institute.

PART-C 4 X5 = 20
Instructions: 1. Answer the following questions.
2. Each question carries five marks
13 a). List any five problems you face in learning English and suggest solutions.
(or)
b). Read the following paragraph and answer the question given below it.
In1920, the Congress meeting was held at Nagpur under the leadership of Gandhiji. It was
attended by 15000 delegates and the Congress Constitution was amended and resolutions were taken
to fight for Swaraj by nonviolent methods and undo the injustice done to Punjab and Turkey.

This movement was called Non-Cooperation Movement. Renunciation of honorary titles

like ‘Sir’ given by British, boycott of legislatures, schools and colleges, courts, tendering resignation
to government jobs nonpayment of taxes to government were the important programmes of this
movement. Gandhi returned his Kaiser-i-Hind title in August, 1920. There were strikes, hartals and
burning of foreign goods all over the country. Many Indians were killed in firings and many others
were jailed.

34
 In Kerala, a rebellion broke out by Mophlah peasants and it was suppressed brutally.
Though Gandhiji warned the people many times not to resort to violent methods, on 5 th February,
1922 in Chauri-Chaura in Uttar Pradesh people resorted to violence. When policemen opened fire
on peaceful demonstrations, the angry people set ablaze the police station and 22 policemen were
killed. Gandhiji stopped the movement because it lost its nonviolent nature. On 10 th March, 1922
Gandhiji was arrested for six years.
Questions:
a) What resolutions were taken at the Congress meeting held at Nagpur?
b) Why was the movement called Non-Cooperation Movement?
c) Why did Gandhiji return his Kaiser-i-Hind title?
d) Why did people set ablaze the police station at Chauri-Chaura?
e) Why did Gandhiji stop the movement?

14 a). Write the basic uses of a dictionary.

(or)
b). Write a letter to the Principal of your institute requesting him to provide you admission into
hostel.

15 a). Read the passage given and answer the questions.

It was way back in 1972 that NASA began developing a space shuttle that could launch like a
rocket but fly and land like an airplane—a unique transportation system for deploying satellites and
payloads into outer space. It was indeed a technological wonder as it was reusable unlike the earlier , one
shot disposable rockets, which were used to place astronauts and equipment into the Earth's orbit.
Basically , a space shuttle consists of an orbiter that carries astronauts and payload attached to solid
rocket boosters and an external fuel tank.To lift the space shuttle , weighing about 2 million kg, from the
launch pad to its orbit that is about 185 to 643 km above the Earth , the shuttle uses two poweful solid
rocket boosters, which provide a thrust of about 11.7 million N. In addition the SRB's support the entire
weight of the space shuttle orbiter and fuel tank on the launch pad.

Questions:
a) Why is the space shuttle unique?
b) What are the parts of the space shuttle?
c) What are the functions of the solid rocket boosters?
d) What is the space shuttle used for?

35
 e) Find one word in the passage that means throw away after use.

(or)
b). Read the following paragraph and answer the questions given below it.
Another important environmental movement is the Chipko Movement which started in the early
1970s in the Garhwal Himalayas of Uttarakhand by SunderlalBahuguna. Like the tribal people of
Narmada valley, the forests are a critical resource for the subsistence of people in hilly and mountainous
areas. This is both because of their direct provision of food, fuel and fodder and because of their role in
the stabilizing soil and water resources. As these forests were being increasingly felled for commerce and
industry, villagers sought to protect their livelihoods through non-violent resistance. The name of the
movement comes from the word ‘chipko’ meaning ‘embrace’: the villagers hugged the trees, saving them
by interposing their bodies between them and the contractors’ axes. Village women were the main force
of this movement. It inspired many people to look closely at the issue of environment sustainability.
Questions:
1. Where was Chipko movement started?
2. Why did the villagers want to protect the trees?
3. How did the villagers protect the trees?
4. What is the synonym of the word, ‘important’?
5. What do you think of this movement?

16 a). Write a letter to your uncle about your plan to visit his place during summer.
(or)
b). Write a paragraph in 150 words about the importance of following traffic rules.

36
 BASIC ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS

Course Title : Basic Engineering

Course Code : 18EE-102F
Mathematics
Semester : I Course Group : Foundation
Teaching Scheme ( L : T : P ) : 45 :15: 0 Credits : 3
( in periods)
Methodology : Lecture + Tutorial Total Contact Periods : 60
CIE : 60 Marks SEE : 40 Marks

(Continuous Internal Evaluation) (Semester End Examination)

This Course is Common to all Programs of Diploma in Engineering

Pre requisites :

This course requires the basic knowledge of Algebra, Trigonometry in Mathematics at Secondary school
level

Course Outcomes: COs

At the end of the course, the student will have the ability to:

CO 1 Solve the problems on Logarithms

CO 2 Resolve a given fraction into Partial Fractions
CO 3 Find the Sum, Product of Matrices, Value of the determinant and Inverse of a Matrix .
CO 4 Solve simple problems using concepts of Trigonometric Functions
CO 5 Solve simultaneous Linear Equations using Matrices and Determinants
CO 6 Solve a Triangle and an Inverse Trigonometric Equation.

37
Course Content:

Algebra

Unit-I Duration: 06 Periods (L: 4.5 – T: 1.5)

1. Logarithms:
Definition of logarithm and its properties, natural and common logarithms; the meaning of e and
exponential function, logarithm as a function and its graphical representation – Solve some simple
problems.

2. Partial Fractions:
Rational, proper and improper fractions of polynomials. Resolving rational fractions in to their partial
fractions covering the types mentioned below:
f ( x) f ( x)
i) ii ) 2
( x  a )( x  b)( x  c ) ( x  a ) ( x  b)( x  c)
f ( x) f ( x)
iii ) 2
iv)
( x  a)( x  b) ( x  a )( x 2  b)2
Unit – II Duration: 12Periods (L: 9.0 – T:3.0)
3. Matrices and Determinants: Definition of matrix, types of matrices-examples, algebra of matrices-
equality of two matrices, sum, difference, scalar multiplication and product of matrices. Transpose of a
Matrix- Symmetric, Skew symmetric matrices- Minor, cofactor of an element-Determinant of a square
matrix up to 3rd order -Laplace’s expansion, properties of determinants. Singular and non-singular
matrices- Adjoint and multiplicative inverse of a square matrix –related problems.

Trigonometry:

38
Unit-III Duration: 12Periods (L: 9.0 – T:3.0)

4. Compound angles: Formulae of Sin (A±B), Cos (A±B), Tan (A±B), Cot(A±B), and related
identities with problems - Derive the values of sin15 0, cos150 , sin750 , cos750 , tan 150 , tan750 etc.-
Derive identities like sin(A+B) sin(A-B) = sin 2 A –sin2 B etc.,

5. Multiple and sub multiple angles: Trigonometric ratios of multiple angles 2A,3A and
submultiples angle A/2 with problems - Derive useful allied formulas like

sin 2 A= ( 1−cos2 2 A ) etc., - Solve simple problems using the above formulae
Unit – IV Duration: 08Periods (L: 6.0 – T: 2.0)

6. Properties of triangles: Statements of Sine rule, Cosine rule, Tangent rule and Projection rule

7. Hyperbolic functions: Definitions of hyperbolic functions – Sinh(x), cosh(x) ,tanh(x) etc., - identities
of hyperbolic functions, inverse hyperbolic functions and expression of inverse hyperbolic functions
in terms of logarithms.

8. Complex Numbers: Definition of a complex number, Modulus and conjugate of a complex number,
Arithmetic operations on complex numbers, Modulus- Amplitude (polar) form, Exponential (Euler)
form of a complex number.

Algebra & Trigonometry

Unit – V Duration: 12Periods (L: 9.0 – T: 3.0)

9. Transformations: Transformation of products into sums or differences and vice versa -

Simple problems - Solve problems by applying these formulae to sum or difference or product of three
or more terms.

10 Inverse trigonometric functions: Define inverses of six trigonometric functions along with their
domains and ranges - Derive relations between inverse trigonometric functions so that given
A=sin-1x, express angle A in terms of other inverse trigonometric functions - with examples -
State various properties of inverse trigonometric functions and identities like sin -1x+cos-1 x =

39
 
x+ y
2 etc - Derive formulae like tan−1 x + tan−1 y=tan−1 ( 1−xy ) where x ≥ 0 , y ≥ 0 , xy <1
etc., and solve simple problems.

Unit – VI Duration: 10Periods (L:7.5 – T:2.5)

11.Solution of Simultaneous equations using Matrices & Determinants.: System of linear equations in
3 Variables-Solutions by Cramer’s rule, Matrix inversion method – Examples- Elementary row
operations on Matrices -Gauss-Jordan method to solve a system of equations in 3 unknowns.

12. Solutions of triangles: Solve a triangle when (i) three sides (SSS) (ii) two sides and an
Included angle (SAS) (iii) one side and two angles are given (SAA) - Simple problems.

References

1. Text Book of Matrices – by Shanti Narayan

2. Plane Trigonometry - by S.L.Loney

3. NCERT Mathematics Text Books Of ClassXI, XII .

4. Intermediate Mathematics Text Books (TeluguAcademy)

Suggested E-Learning references

1. www.freebookcentre.net/mathematics/introductory-mathematics-books.html
2. E-books:www.mathebook.net

Suggested Learning Outcomes

Algebra

UNIT – I

1.0 Use Logarithms in engineering calculations

1.1 Define logarithm and list its properties.

40
 1.2 Distinguish natural logarithms and common logarithms.
1.3 Explain the meaning of e and exponential function.
1.4 State logarithm as a function and its graphical representation.
1.5 Use the logarithms in engineering calculations.
2.0 Resolve Rational Fraction into sum of Partial Fractions in engineering problems
2.1 Define the following fractions of polynomials:
1. Rational
2. Proper and
3. Improper
2.2 Explain the procedure of resolving rational fractions of the type mentioned below into partial
fractions
f ( x) f ( x)
i) ii)
( x  a )( x  b)( x  c ) ( x  a)2 ( x  b)( x  c)
f ( x) f ( x)
iii ) iv )
( x 2  a)( x  b) ( x  a )( x 2  b) 2

UNIT – II

3.0 Use Matrices for solving engineering problems

3.1 Define a matrix and order of a matrix.
3.2 State various types of matrices with examples (emphasis on 3 rd order square matrices).
3.3 Compute sum, difference, scalar multiplication and product of matrices.
3.4 Illustrate the properties of these operations such as associative, distributive, commutative
properties with examples and counter examples.
3.5 Define the transpose of a matrix and write its properties.
3.6 Define symmetric and skew-symmetric matrices.
3.7 Resolve a square matrix into a sum of symmetric and skew- symmetric matrices with
examples in all cases.
3.8 Define minor, co-factor of an element of a 3x3 square matrix with examples.
3.9 Expand the determinant of a 3 x 3 matrix using Laplace expansion formula.
3.10 Distinguish singular and non-singular matrices.
3.11 Apply the properties of determinants to solve problems.
3.12 Define multiplicative inverse of a matrix and list properties of adjoint and inverse.
3.13 Compute adjoint and multiplicative inverse of a square matrix.

41
Trigonometry:
UNIT – III

4.0 Solve simple problems on Compound Angles

4.1 Define compound angles and state the formulae of sin(A±B), cos(A±B), tan(A±B) and
cot(A±B)
4.2 Give simple examples on compound angles to derive the values of sin15 0, cos150 , sin750 ,
cos750 , tan 150 , tan750 etc.
4.3 Derive identities like sin(A+B) sin(A-B) = sin 2 A –sin2B etc.,
4.4 Solve simple problems on compound angles.
5.0 Solve problems using the formulae for Multiple and Sub- Multiple Angles
5.1 Derive the formulae of multiple angles 2A, 3A etc and sub multiple angles A/2 in terms of
angle A of trigonometric functions.
5.2 Derive useful allied formulas like sin A= (1- cos2A)/2 etc.,
5.3 Solve simple problems using the above formulae

UNIT – IV

6.0 Appreciate Properties of triangles

6.1 State sine rule, cosine rule, tangent rule and projection rule.
7.0 Represent the Hyperbolic Functions in terms of logarithm functions
7.1 Define Sinh x, cosh x and tanh x and list the hyperbolic identities.
7.2 Represent inverse hyperbolic functions in terms of logarithms.
8.0 Represent Complex numbers in various forms
8.1 Define complex number, its modulus, and conjugate and list their properties.
8.2 Define the operations on complex numbers with examples.
8.3 Define amplitude of a complex number
8.4 Represent the complex number in various forms like modulus-amplitude (polar) form,
Exponential (Euler) form – illustrate with examples.
UNIT – V

9.0 Apply Transformations for solving the problems in Trigonometry

9.1 Derive the formulae on transforming sum or difference of two trigonometric ratios in to a

product and vice versa- examples on these formulae.

42
 9.2 Solve problems by applying these formulae to sum or difference or product of three or more
terms.
10.0 Use Inverse Trigonometric Functions for solving engineering problems
10.1 Explain the concept of the inverse of a trigonometric function by selecting an appropriate

domain and range.

10.2 Define inverses of six trigonometric functions along with their domains and ranges.
10.3 Derive relations between inverse trigonometric functions so that given A= sin -1x, express angle
A in terms of other inverse trigonometric functions - with examples.
10.4 State various properties of inverse trigonometric functions and identities like sin -


1
x+cos-1 x = 2 etc.

10.5 Derive formulae like

tan
1
x  tan
1
y  tan
1

 
x y

1  xy
, where x  0, y  0, xy  1
etc.,
and solve simple problems.

UNIT – VI

11.0 Apply Matrices and Determinants in solving system of Linear Equations

11.1 Solve system of 3 linear equations in 3 unknowns using Cramer’s rule.

11.2 Solve system of 3 linear equations in 3 unknowns by matrix inversion method
11.3 State elementary row operations.
11.4 Solve a system of 3 linear equations in 3 unknowns by Gauss- Jordan method

12.0 Apply Properties of Triangles to solve a triangle.

12.1 Solve a triangle when (i) three sides (SSS), (ii) two sides and an included angle(SAS), (iii)
one side and two angles are given(SAA).

Suggested Student Activities

1. Student visits Library to refer Standard Books on Mathematics and collect related material.
2. Quiz
3. Group discussion
4. Surprise tests

43
 5. Seminars
6. Home Assignments.

CO / PO - MAPPING

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 Mapped
POs
CO1 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10

CO2 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10

CO3 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10

CO4 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10

CO5 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10

CO6 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10

MID SEM-I EXAM

S.No Unit Name R U A Remarks

5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-I 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)

6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-II 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)
Total Questions 4 4 4

MID SEM –II EXAM

S.No Unit Name R U A Remarks

5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-III 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-IV 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)
Total Questions 4 4 4

44
 Semester End Examination
Sl Questions to be set for SEE Remarks
Unit No.
No R U A  
1 I
1 9(a) 13(a)  
2 II  
3 III  
2 10(a) 14(a)
4 IV  
9(b) 13(b)
5 V 4 5, 6  
11(a) 15(a)
 
3 11(b) 15(b)  
10(b) 14(b)
6 VI 7,8 12(a) 16(a)  
 
12(b) 16(b)  
Total Questions 8 8 8  

Remembering (R) 1 Mark

Legend: Understanding (U) 3 Marks

Application (A) 5 Marks

45
 Code: 18EE-102F

STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION & TRAINING, TELANGANA

BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATIONS

MID SEM –I, MODEL PAPER, I SEMESTER

BASIC ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS

TIME: 1: 00 Hour Max. Marks: 20

PART-A

Instructions: 1. Answer ALL questions 04 X 01 = 04

2 Each question carries ONE mark

1. Find the value of

log8 2
2. Define Proper fraction and give an example.

[ 1 2¿]¿¿¿
3. If A= ¿ Compute 3A+ 5B.

4. Find the value of |13 24|

.

PART-B

Instructions: 1. Answer any TWO questions 02 X 03 = 06

2. Each question carries THREE marks

46
 x
5(a) Resolve: in to partial fractions
( x−1 ) (x−2)

Or

+ 3log 8 32
5(b) Find the value of log 2 16

2 1 2
6 (a) If
( )
1 4 1 , then Compute A2 +2 A−3 I , where I is a unit matrix of order 3 .
1 3 2

Or

1 0 0
6 (b) Find x , if
|
2 3 4 =48
5 −6 x |
PART C

Instructions: 1. Answer any TWO questions 02 X 05 = 10

2. Each question carries FIVE marks

9
7 a).Resolve into Partial fractions: ( x  1)( x  2)
2

Or

75 5 32
7b) . Prove that log −2 log +log =log 2
60 9 243

1 1 2 2
8 a). If A=
3 [ ]
−1
2 1 −2 , then show that A = A
−2 2 −1
T

Or

b +c a a
8 b).Show that
| b
c
c +a
c
b =4 abc .
a+ b |
47
 @@@

Code: 18EE-102F

STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION & TRAINING, TELANGANA

BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATIONS

MID SEM –II, MODEL PAPER,

DEEE I - SEMESTER

BASIC ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS

TIME: 1: 00 Hour Max. Marks: 20

PART-A

Instructions: 1. Answer ALL questions 04 X 01 = 04

2 Each question carries ONE mark

1. Write the formulae for Sin (A - B) and Cos (A – B)

2. If Tan A = 2, Find the value of Cos2A.

3. Write the formula for Cosine rule.

2
4. Find the Modulus of 3  2i

PART-B

48
 Instructions: 1. Answer any TWO questions 02 X 03 = 06

2. Each question carries THREE marks

cos 12+sin 12
5 a) Show that = Tan570
cos 12−sin 12

Or

√3
5 b) Prove that Cos200 Cos300 Cos400 Cos800= 16 .

6 a) Write any 3 formulae from Hyperbolic functions.

Or

1
6 b) Find the modulus of z=
2+4 i

PART C

Instructions: 1. Answer any TWO questions 02 X 05 = 10

2. Each question carries FIVE marks

1 1 π
7a). If TanA= ∧TanB= then show that A +B=
2 3 4

Or

7 b) If A+ B=1350 ,then prove that ( 1+CotA ) ( 1+ CotB )=2

8 a) Find the additive and multiplicative Inverse of 4 + 3i

Or

1+i
8 b) Express the complex number in Exponential form
1−i

@@@

49
 Code: 18EE-102F

STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION & TRAINING, TELANGANA

MODEL PAPER

DEEE I- SEMESTER EXAMINATION

BASIC ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS

Time: 2 hours [Total Marks: 40]

PART-A

Instructions: 1. Answer ALL questions 08 X 01 = 08

2 Each question carries ONE mark

1. Define proper fraction.

2. Write the formula for cos ( A+ B ) ∧cot ( A + B ) .
3. Define solution of a triangle.
4. Find the value of log 4 16.
5. Convert cos 4 A+cos 6 A into product.
−1 3
6. Ifsin =A then find cotA.
5
50
7. List the elements of a triangle ABC.
8. What is the formula for the solution of triangle ABC when three sides are given

PART-B

Instructions: 1. Answer any FOUR questions 04 X 03 = 12

2. Each question carries THREE marks

1
9 (a) Resolve: into partial fractions.
( x+1 ) ( x+ 3 )

Or

sin 8 A+sin 6 A
9(b). Prove that =tan 7 A
cos 8 A+cos 6 A

9
10(a). Express in the form of a+ib .
4+ 3i

Or

10(b) Solve the triangle ABC with a=2, A=300 , C=300 .

11(a) Prove thatsin 500−sin70 0+ sin10 0=0 .

Or

−1 2 1 17
11(b) Prove that tan +tan −1 =tan−1 .
7 5 33

12(a) Solve [ 32 −32 ][ xy ]=[ 47 ] .

Or

12 (b) Find the angle C in any triangle ABC if b=√ 2 ,c =√ 3 , B=450 .

PART C

Instructions: 1. Answer any FOUR questions 04 X 05 = 20

2. Each question carries FIVE marks

1 2 2
13(a) Find the inverse of the matrix 2 1 2
[ ]
2 2 1

Or

51
 13 (b) Prove that sinA +sin ( 1200 + A ) −sin ( 1200− A )=0

0 0 0 0 1
14 (a) Prove that cos 20 cos 40 cos 60 cos 80 = .
16

Or

14 (b) Solve x + y + z=6 , x+ 2 y +3 z=14 , x +4 y+ 9 z=3 by using Gauss Jordan methods.

15(a) In any triangle ABC prove that sin 2 A +sin 2 B+sin 2 C=4 sinAsinBsinC .

Or

15(b) if tan−1 x + tan−1 y+ tan −1 z=π then prove that x + y + z=xyz .

16(a) Solve x +2 y −z=−3 , 3 x+ y + z=4 , x− y +2 z=6 by Cramer’s Rule.

Or

16 (b) Solve the triangle ABC with a=1 b=2 c= √ 2.

@@@

BASIC PHYSICS

Course Title : Basic Physics Course Code : 18EE-103F

Semester :I Course Group : Foundation
Teaching Scheme in Periods : 45:15:00 Credits :3
(L:T:P)
Methodology :Lecture+Tutorial Total Contact Periods :60
CIE : 60 Marks SEE : 40 Marks
(Continuous Internal Evaluation) (Semester End Examination)

This Course is Common to all Programs of Diploma in Engineering

Pre requisites: Basic High School Science, Basic Mathematics

52
Course Objectives: After studying this course, the student will be able to understand and appreciate the role of
Physics in different areas of engineering and technology.

Course Outcomes: On successful completion of the course, the student will have the ability to attain
below Course Outcomes (CO):

Course Outcomes Linked POs Teaching

Periods

Write the correct units and dimensions of physical

CO 1 PO1,PO2 10
quantities and know the concept of friction
Apply knowledge of vectors as a tool to solve engineering
CO 2 PO1, PO2 10
problems
Apply knowledge of mechanics to solve engineering
CO 3 PO1, PO2 10
problems
Apply knowledge of properties of matter to understand
CO 4 PO1, PO2 10
engineering problems
Apply Heat and thermodynamic processes to solve
CO 5 PO1, PO2 10
engineering problems
Apply conservation laws to engineering problems and PO1, PO2,
CO 6 10
utilization of energy sources PO3,PO6

BASIC PHYSICS
Course Contents

1. UNIT – 1 UNITS, DIMENSIONS AND FRICTION

Duration: 10 periods (L: 7.5 – T: 2.5)

Physical quantity - Fundamental and derived quantities – Unit –definitions - S.I units -
Advantages of S.I. units - Dimensions and dimensional formula - definitions-units and
dimensional formula for physical quantities - Principle of homogeneity - Applications of
dimensional analysis–Friction – causes - types of friction - Normal reaction - Laws of static
friction - coefficients of friction - expression-rough horizontal surface - expressions for
Acceleration, Displacement, Time taken to come to rest and Work done - Advantages and
disadvantages of friction - Methods to reduce friction – Problems on friction only.

2. UNIT – 2 ELEMENTS OF VECTORS Duration: 10 periods (L: 7.5 – T: 2.5)

53
 Scalar and vector quantities – definitions and examples –Graphical representation of a vector -
Classification of vectors (Proper vector, Unit vector, Equal vector, Negative vector, Collinear
vector and Position vector) Resolution of a vector - Triangle law of vector addition –
Parallelogram law of vectors – statement- expression for magnitude and direction of resultant
vector –derivation- illustrations (working of sling and flying bird) - Representation of a vector in
unit vectors i, j and k– Scalar product of vectors-definition- application to work done by force –
properties of scalar product - Vector product of vectors –definition – Right hand thumb rule and
right hand screw rule - application to moment of force - properties of vector product - area of
parallelogram and triangle in terms of vector product - related problems

3. UNIT – 3 MECHANICS Duration: 10 periods (L: 7.5 – T: 2.5)

Projectile motion – definition - examples - Horizontal projection – Time of flight and Horizontal
range – derivations - Oblique projection – Expression for path of a projectile in oblique projection
- derivation– Maximum height, Time of ascent, Time of descent, Time of flight, Horizontal range
and maximum horizontal range - derivations – Circular motion, angular velocity, time period and
frequency of revolutions–Definitions– Relation between linear velocity and angular velocity -
derivation–centripetal force – centrifugal force – definitions and expressions only- application
(banking of curved path) - angle of banking- expression only - related problems

4. UNIT – 4 PROPERTIES OF MATTER Duration: 10 periods (L: 7.5 – T: 2.5)

Elasticity and plasticity- definitions – examples - Stress and Strain – definitions and expressions
- elastic limit - Hooke’s law – statement - modulus of elasticity - Young’s modulus – Derivation
– Cohesive and adhesive forces - Surface tension - Illustrations - Capillarity –angle of contact –
definition- examples for capillarity- Formula for Surface tension based on capillarity (no
derivation) – Viscosity - Illustrations of viscosity - Newton’s formula for viscous force –
derivation - Coefficient of viscosity - Poiseuille’s equation - Effect of temperature on viscosity of
liquids and gases– streamlines - laminar flow - turbulent flow - Reynold’s number - equation of
continuity – statement - related problems.

5. UNIT – 5 HEAT AND THERMODYNAMICS

Duration: 10 periods (L: 7.5 – T: 2.5)

Heat – expansion of gases - Boyle’s law –concept of absolute zero - Absolute scale of
temperature – Charles’ laws - Ideal gas equation – derivation - value of universal gas constant
‘R’ –Isothermal and Adiabatic processes - Differences between isothermal and adiabatic
processes - Internal energy and external work done – Expression for work done – derivation –
first law of thermodynamics –application of first law to isothermal and adiabatic processes -
second law of thermodynamics – specific heat of a gas – molar specific heat of a gas – definitions
– derive relation between CP and Cv- related problems.

6. UNIT – 6 CONSERVATION LAWS AND ENERGY SOURCES

Duration: 10 periods (L: 7.5 – T: 2.5)

Work and Energy - Potential Energy and kinetic energy–examples – expressions for PE and KE -
derivations - Work-Energy theorem – derivation – Law of conservation of energy – examples -
Law of conservation of energy in the case of freely falling body – proof – Illustration of

54
 conservation of energy in the case of simple pendulum– Non renewable and renewable energy
sources – definition and applications (solar cooker, wind mill and biogas) – Green house effect -
related problems

References:

1. Engineering. Physics by R.K. Gaur, S.L. Gupta, Dhanpatrai Publications, New Delhi.
2. ISC Physics, Book I&II, P. Vivekanandan, DK Banerjee, S Chand, New Delhi.
3. Intermediate Physics, Vol. I&II, Telugu Academy, TS, Hyderabad.
4. Fundamentals of Physics by Halliday and Resnick.

Suggested learning outcomes:

Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to

1. know the concepts of units, dimensions and friction

1.1 Define Physical quantity, fundamental quantity and derived physical quantities
1.2 Define Unit.
1.3 S.I. Units. List the advantages of S.I. units.
1.4 Define dimensions and dimensional formula.
1.5 Write dimensional formulae of physical quantities.
1.6 State principle of homogeneity of dimensions.
1.7 State applications of dimensional analysis.
1.8 Define friction and state its causes.
1.9 State types of friction.
1.10 Explain normal reaction.
1.11 State laws of static friction.
1.12 Define coefficients of friction.
1.13 Derive expression for acceleration of a body moving on rough horizontal surface.
1.14 Derive expressions for displacement and time taken to come to rest and work done in the
case of a body moving on a rough horizontal surface.
1.15 List the advantages and disadvantages of friction.
1.16 Solve related numerical problems on friction only.
1.17 Explain the Methods to reduce friction.

2. know the concepts of Elements of Vectors

2.1 Define scalar and vector quantities with examples.

2.2 Represent a vector graphically.
2.3 Classify types of vectors – Proper vector, Unit vector, Equal vector, Negative vector,
Collinear vectors and Position vector.
2.4 Resolve a vector – Vector and Scalar components and relation between them.
2.5 State and explain Triangle law of vector addition.
2.6 State Parallelogram law of vectors – derive expressions for magnitude and direction of resultant
vector.
2.7 Illustrations of parallelogram law – working of sling and flying bird.
2.8 Representation of a vector in terms of unit vectors (i, j ,k)

55
 2.9 Define Scalar product of vectors.
2.10 Application of scalar product for work done by force.
2.11 List the properties of scalar product.
2.12 Define Vector product of vectors.
2.13 Explain Right hand screw rule and right hand thumb rule.
2.14 Apply vector product in the case of moment of force.
2.15 Expressions for area of parallelogram and triangle in terms of cross product.
2.16 List the properties of vector product.
2.17 Solve related problems.

3. know the concepts of Mechanics

3.1 Define Projectile motion with examples.

3.2 Define Horizontal projection – Derive expressions for (a) Time of flight and (b)
Horizontal range
3.3 Define Oblique projection- Derive expression for path of a projectile in oblique projection.
3.4 Derive expressions for (a) Maximum height (b) Time of ascent (c) Time of descent
(d) Time of flight (e) Horizontal range and (f) maximum horizontal range in oblique
projection.
3.5 Define circular motion.
3.6 Define angular velocity, time period and frequency of revolutions in circular motion.
3.7 Derive the relation between linear velocity and angular velocity.
3.8 Define centripetal and centrifugal forces. Write their expressions.
3.9 Define angle of banking.
3.10 Explain banking of curved path and write the expression for angle of banking.
3.11 Solve related numerical problems.
4. know the concepts of Properties of matter

4.1 Define the terms Elasticity and Plasticity with examples.

4.2 Define Stress and Strain and write their expressions.
4.3 Define elastic limit and state Hooke’s law.
4.4 Define modulus of elasticity.
4.5 Define Young’s modulus.
4.6 Derive the formula for Young’s modulus.
4.7 Define cohesive force and adhesive force.
4.8 Define Surface tension. Give illustrations of Surface tension.
4.9 Define capillarity and angle of contact.
4.10 List the examples for capillarity.
4.11 Write the formula for Surface tension based on capillarity (T = ½ hdgr). Explain the terms.
4.12 Define Viscosity. Give illustrations of viscosity.
4.13 Derive Newton’s formula for viscous force.
4.14 Define coefficient of viscosity.
4.15 Write Poiseuille’s equation for coefficient of viscosity.
4.16 Discuss effect of temperature on viscosity of liquids and gases.
4.17 Define streamline flow and turbulent flow.
4.18 Define Reynold’s number.
4.19 State equation of continuity and explain the terms with diagram.
4.20 Solve related problems.

5. know the concepts of Heat and Thermodynamics

56
 5.1 Explain expansion of gases.
5.2 State and explain Boyle’s law. Mention its limitations.
5.3 Explain concept of absolute zero using the relations Pt=P0(1+t/273) and Vt= V0(1+ t/273)
5.4 Define Absolute scale of temperature.
5.5 State Charles’ laws in terms of absolute temperature.
5.6 Define Ideal gas and derive ideal gas equation.
5.7 Calculate the value of Universal gas constant (R).
5.8 State gas equation in terms of density.
5.9 Define Isothermal and Adiabatic processes.
5.10 Distinguish between isothermal and adiabatic processes.
5.11 Explain the terms internal energy and external work done.
5.12 Derive the expression for work done by the gas [W=P(V2-V1)].
5.13 State first law of thermodynamics.
5.14 Application of first law of thermodynamics to isothermal and adiabatic processes.
5.15 State second law of thermodynamics.
5.16 Define specific heat of a gas.
5.17 Define molar specific heat of a gas.
5.18 Derive the relation between CP, Cv and R.
5.19 Solve related problems
6. know the concepts of conservation laws and energy sources

6.1 Define work and energy.

6.2 Define potential energy and kinetic energy with examples.
6.3 Derive the expressions for Potential energy and Kinetic energy.
6.4 State and prove Work-Energy theorem.
6.5 State law of conservation of energy with example.
6.6 Prove law of conservation of energy in the case of a freely falling body.
6.7 Illustrate law of conservation of energy in the case of simple pendulum.
6.8 Define non renewable and renewable energy sources. Give examples.
6.9 Explain solar cooker, wind mill and biogas.
6.10 Explain briefly Green house effect.
6.11 Solve related numerical problems.

MID SEM-I EXAM

S.N
Unit Name R U A Remarks
o
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-I 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-II 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)
Total Questions 4 4 4
MID SEM –II EXAM
S.N
Unit Name R U A Remarks
o
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-III 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
2 Unit-IV 3, 4 6(a) 8(a)

57
 6(b) 8(b)
Total Questions 4 4 4

Semester End Examination

Questions to be set for SEE Remarks

Sl No Unit No.
R U A  
1 I
1 9(a) 13(a)  
2 II  
3 III
2 10(a) 14(a)  
4 IV  
9(b) 13(b)
4
5 V 5, 6 11(a) 15(a)  
 
11(b) 15(b)  
3
10(b) 14(b)

6 VI 7,8 12(a) 16(a)  

 
12(b) 16(b)  
Total Questions 8 8 8  

Remembering (R) 1 Mark

Legend: Understanding (U) 3 Marks

Application (A) 5 Marks

18EE-103F

BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATION, (C-18)

MIDSEM – I
DEEE I- SEMESTER EXAMINATION
BASIC PHYSICS
TIME: 1 Hour TOTAL MARKS: 20

58
Important Note: Wherever any question has choice, marks will be allotted only to first attempted
question. No marks will be allotted for extra questions answered

PART - A (4x1 = 4M)

Note: Answer ALL the questions. Each question carries 1 mark.

The length of the answer shall not exceed 1/4 of page

1. Define unit.
2. State principle of homogeneity.
3. Define vector quantity.
4. Define position vector.

PART- B (2 x 3 = 6M)

Note: Answer the following questions. Each question carries 3 marks.

The length of the answer shall not exceed 1 page

5 (a).State three laws of static friction.

(OR)
(b). State three applications of dimensional analysis.
6 (a). State and explain triangle law of vector addition.
(OR)
(b). State any three properties of scalar product of two vectors.

PART-C (2×5=10M)

Note: Answer the following questions. Each question carries 5 marks

The length of the answer shall not exceed 2 pages

7 (a). Derive the expression for acceleration of a body moving on rough horizontal surface.
(OR)
(b). Explain any five methods of reducing friction.

8 (a). Derive the expression for magnitude of resultant of two vectors using parallelogram
law of vectors.
(OR)
(b). Find the area of parallelogram formed by two vectors
A=2 i+3
⃗ ^ ^j+5 k^ ∧⃗ ^
B =2 i−3 ^j + k^ as two adjacent sides.
18EE-103F

BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATION, (C-18)

MIDSEM – II
DEEE I- SEMESTER EXAMINATION
BASIC PHYSICS
TIME: 1 Hour TOTAL MARKS: 20

59
Important Note: Wherever any question has choice, marks will be allotted only to first attempted
question. No marks will be allotted for extra questions answered

PART - A (4x1 = 4M)

Note: Answer ALL the questions. Each question carries 1 mark.

The length of the answer shall not exceed 1/4 of page

1. Define projectile.
2. Define centripetal force.
3. Define stress.
4. Write the formula for surface tension based on capillarity.

PART- B (2 x 3 = 6M)

Note: Answer the following questions. Each question carries 3 marks.

The length of the answer shall not exceed 1 page

5 (a). A body is projected into air with velocity of 20 ms-1 at an angle 300 with the earth
surface. Find the maximum height reached.
(OR)
(b). Explain banking of curved path.

6 (a). Distinguish between Cohesive force and Adhesive force.

(OR)
(b). Discuss the effect of temperature on viscosity of liquids and gases.

PART-C (2×5=10M)

Note: Answer the following questions. Each question carries 5 marks

The length of the answer shall not exceed 2 pages

7 (a). Derive the expression for path of a projectile in oblique projection.

(OR)
(b). Derive the relation between linear velocity and angular velocity.

8 (a). Derive the formula for Young’s modulus.

(OR)
(b). Derive Newton’s formula for viscous force.
18EE-103F

BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATION, (C-18)

MODEL PAPER
DEEE I - SEMESTER EXAMINATION

BASIC PHYSICS

60
Time: 2 Hours] [Total Marks: 40

PART – A

Instructions: 1. Answer ALL questions. 8X1=8

2. Each question carries ONE mark.

1. Write dimensional formula of Pressure.

2. Define modulus of elasticity.
3. Define non renewable energy source.
4. Define absolute zero.
5. State Charles’ constant pressure law.
6. Define molar specific heat of a gas.
7. Define Energy.
8. What is basic principle of wind mill?

PART – B

Instructions: 1. Answer any FOUR questions. 4X3=12

2. Each question carries THREE marks.

9(a). State any three laws of friction.

(or)
9(b). State first law of thermodynamics and write mathematical expression for it.

10(a). Distinguish between streamline and turbulent flow.

(or)
10(b). Derive an expression for Potential energy.

11(a). Derive formula for work done by the ideal gas.

(or)
11(b). Calculate the value of universal gas constant ( R ).

12(a). Prove work-energy theorem.

(or)
12(b). Explain briefly Green house effect.

PART – C 4X5 = 20

Instructions: 1. Answer any FOUR questions.

2. Each question carries FIVE marks.

13(a).Derive expressions for magnitude and direction of resultant of two vectors using
Parallelogram law of vectors.

61
 (or)
13(b). Show that Cp - Cv = R.

14(a). Show that the path of a projectile is a parabola in case of oblique projection.
(or)
14(b). Prove law of conservation of energy in the case of a freely falling body.

15(a). Derive Ideal gas equation PV=RT

(or)
15(b). Distinguish between Isothermal and adiabatic processes.

16(a). Derive an expression for kinetic energy.

(or)
16(b). Explain solar cooker with neat diagram

** *** ***

GENERAL ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY

Course Title :General Engineering Chemistry Course Code : 18EE-104F

Semester :I Course Group : Foundation
Teaching Scheme Credits :3
in Periods(L:T:P) : 45:15:0

62
Type of course : Lecture + Tutorial Total Contact Periods :60

CIE : 60 Marks SEE : 40 Marks

(Continuous Internal Evaluation) (Semester End Examination)
This Course is Common to all Programs of Diploma in Engineering

Prerequisite: Basic knowledge of chemistry in secondary education.

Course Objectives: After studying this course, the student will be able to understand and appreciate the
role of Chemistry and environmental studies in different spheres of industries.

Course Outcome: On successful completion of the course, the students will have ability to attain below
Course Outcomes (CO):

CO Course outcome CL Linked PO Teaching

periods

CO1 Explain Bohr’s atomic model, the R/U/A 1,2,9 12

different types of chemical bonding in
certain molecules and concept of
oxidation, reduction and oxidation
number
CO2 Understand and explain mole, molarity R/U/A 1,2,9 8
and normality and solve the problems
and colloids and their applications.
CO3 Explain the different theories of acids R/U/A 1,2,3,9 12
and bases, concept of pH, buffer
solutions and buffer action.
CO4 Compare the renewable and non R/U/A 1,2,5,6,7,9,10 8
renewable energy sources, to take
measures to protect the biodiversity
and also the environment.
CO5 Distinguish the temporary and R/U/A 1,2,3,9,10 10
permanent hardness, apply the
different methods of softening of hard
water and desalination.
CO6 Explain electrolysis and applications of R/U/A 12,3, 4. 10
electrolysis, Solve the problems on
Faraday’s laws of electrolysis
Total Periods 60
Cognitive levels: R = Remember, U= Understand, A = Apply

COURSE CONTENTS

UNIT-I: Fundamentals of Chemistry 12Periods (L : 9.0 Periods, T : 3.0 Periods)

63
Atomic Structure: Introduction – Atomic number – Mass number- Bohr's Atomic theory - Aufbau
principle - Hund's rule - Pauli's exclusion Principle- Orbitals, shapes of s, p and d orbitals - Electronic
configuration of elements
Chemical Bonding: Introduction – Electronic theory of valency - Types of chemical bonds - Ionic,
covalent and co-ordinate covalent bond with examples - Properties of Ionic and Covalent compounds
Oxidation-Reduction: Electronic Concepts of Oxidation-Reduction, Oxidation Number- calculations.

UNIT-II: Solutions and Colloids 8Periods (L : 6.0 Periods, T : 2.0 Periods)

Introduction-Classification of solutions based on physical state- Molecular weights ,Equivalent weights-
Expression of concentration – Mole concept, Molarity, Normality, Numerical problems on Mole,
molarity and normality - Colloids- Types of colloids- Lyophilic and Lyophobic- Industrial applications of
colloids.

UNIT-III: Acids and Bases 12Periods (L : 9.0 Periods, T : 3.0 Periods)

Introduction - theories of acids and bases and limitations - Arrhenius theory-Bronsted -Lowry theory -
Lewis acid base theory - Ionic product of water - pH and related numerical problems - Buffer solutions-
buffer action - applications of buffer solution.

UNIT-IV: Environmental Studies-I 8Periods (L : 6.0 Periods, T : 2.0 Periods)

Introduction - environment -scope and importance of environmental studies- important terms - renewable
and non renewable energy sources - Concept of ecosystem, producers, consumers and decomposers -
Biodiversity, definition and threats to Biodiversity- Forest resources- Over exploitation-Deforestation.

UNIT-V: Water Technology 10Periods (L : 7.5 Periods, T : 2.5 Periods)

Introduction -soft and hard water - causes of hardness – types of hardness -disadvantages of hard water -
degree of hardness (ppm) - softening methods - permutit process - ion exchange
process - drinking water - municipal treatment of water for drinking purpose - Osmosis, Reverse Osmosis
- advantages of Reverse osmosis – Desalination by Electro -dialysis – Defluoridation – Nalgonda
technique.

UNIT-VI: Electrochemistry: 10Periods (L : 7.5 Periods, T : 2.5 Periods)

Conductors, insulators, electrolytes –Types of electrolytes - Arrhenius theory of electrolytic dissociation -
electrolysis –electrolysis of fused NaCl and aqueous NaCl – applications of electrolysis - Faraday's laws
of electrolysis- numerical problems.

Reference Books:

1. Engineering chemistry – Jain & Jain – Dhanpat Rai Publishing Company.

2. A Text book of Engineering Chemistry – S.S.Dara – S.Chand Publications.
3. Environmental Studies – A.K.De.
4. Environmental Studies, R. Rajagopalan, 2nd Edition, 2011, Oxford University Press
5. Intermediate Chemistry I and II – Telugu Academy TS

Specific Learning Outcomes

Upon completion of the course, the student will have ability to

64
UNIT- I: FUNDAMENTALS OF CHEMISTRY
1.1 Explain the concept of atomic number and mass number
1.2 State the postulates of Bohr's atomic theory and its limitations
1.3 Explain 1.Aufbau's principle, 2.Hund's rule and 3.Pauli's exclusion principle with examples.
1.4 Define Orbital.
1.5 Draw the shapes of s, p and d Orbitals.
1.6 Distinguish between Orbit and Orbital
1.7 Write the electronic configuration of elements up to atomic number 30
1.8 Define chemical bond.
1.9 Explain the Postulates of Electronic theory of valency.
1.10 Define and explain three types of Chemical bonding viz., Ionic, Covalent, Coordinate
Covalent bond with examples.
1.11 Explain bond formation in NaCl and MgO.
1.12 List the Properties of Ionic compounds.
1.13 Explain covalent bond formation in Hydrogen molecule, Oxygen molecule, and Nitrogen
Molecules using Lewis dot method.
1.14 List the Properties of Covalent compounds.
1.15 Distinguish between ionic compounds and covalent compounds.
1.16 Electronic concept of Oxidation and Reduction.
1.17 Define Oxidation Number
1.18 Calculate the Oxidation Number.

UNIT-II: SOLUTIONS AND COLLOIDS

2.1 Define the terms 1.Solution, 2.Solute and 3.Solvent.
2.2 Classify solutions based on physical state.
2.3 Calculate Molecular weight and equivalent weights of acids, bases and salts.
2.4 Define mole.
2.5 Explain Mole concept with examples.
2.6 Define Molarity and Normality.
2.7 Solve Numerical problems on Mole, Molarity and Normality.
2.8 Define Colloids.
2.9 Types of colloids- Lyophilic and Lyophobic.
2.10 Industrial applications of colloids.

UNIT-III: ACIDS AND BASES

3.1 Explain Arrhenius theory of Acids and Bases.
3.2 State the limitations of Arrhenius theory of Acids and Bases
3.3 Explain Bronsted - Lowry theory of acids and bases.
3.4 State the limitations of Bronsted - Lowry theory of acids and bases.
3.5 Explain Lewis theory of acids and bases.
3.6 State the limitations of Lewis theory of acids and bases.
3.7 Explain the Ionic product of water.
3.8 Define pH and explain Sorenson scale.
3.9 Solve the Numerical problems on pH (Strong Acids and Bases).
3.10 Define buffer solutions and give examples of acidic and basic buffers.
3.11 State the applications of buffer solutions.
3.12 Explain the buffer action of acidic and basic buffers.

65
UNIT-IV: ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES-I
4.1 Define the term environment
4.2 Explain the scope and importance of environmental studies
4.3 Define and understand the following terms
1) Lithosphere, 2) Hydrosphere, 3) Atmosphere, 4) Biosphere, 5) Pollutant, 6) Contaminant
7) Pollution, 8) receptor, 9) sink, 10) particulates, 11) Dissolved oxygen (DO),
12) Threshold limit value (TLV),13).BOD and 14).COD
4.4 Explain the growing energy needs.
4.5 Explain renewable (non-conventional) and non renewable (conventional) energy sources
with examples.
4.6 Define an Ecosystem. Understand biotic and abiotic components of ecosystem.
4.7 Define and explain the terms:
1) Producers, 2) Consumers and 3) Decomposers with examples.
4.8 Explain biodiversity and threats to biodiversity.
4.9 Explain the uses of forests and over exploitation of forest resources and deforestation.

UNIT V: WATER TECHNOLOGY

5.1 State the various Sources of water.
5.2 Define the terms soft water and hard water with examples
5.3 Define hardness of water.
5.4 Explain temporary and permanent hardness of water.
5.5 List the usual chemical compounds causing hardness (with Formulae)
5.6 Disadvantages of using hard water in industries.
5.7 Define Degree of hardness, units of hardness in ppm (mg/L) and numerical problems related
to hardness.
5.8 Explain the methods of softening of hard water: a) Permutit process b).Ion-Exchange
process.
5.9 Essential qualities of drinking water.
5.10 Explain municipal treatment of water for drinking purpose.
5.11 Define Osmosis and Reverse Osmosis (RO).
5.12 List the applications and advantages of RO.
5.13 Desalination of sea water by Electro dialysis.
5.14 Defluoridation - Nalgonda Technique.

UNIT VI: ELECTROCHEMISTRY

6.1 Define the terms1. Conductor, 2. Insulator, 3.Electrolyte and 4.Non - electrolyte
6.2 Types of electrolytes - strong and weak electrolytes with examples.
6.3 Distinguish between metallic conductors and Electrolytic conductors.
6.4 Arrhenius theory of electrolytic dissociation
6.5 Explain electrolysis of fused NaCl and aqueous NaCl
6.6 Applications of Electrolysis- Electroplating-Electrolytic refining of metal (Copper)
6.7 Explain Faraday's laws of electrolysis
6.8 Define chemical equivalent, electrochemical equivalent.
6.9 Relationship between chemical equivalent and electrochemical equivalent
6.10 Solve the Numerical problems based on Faraday's laws of electrolysis

Suggested Student Activities or Induction Program:

Forenoon Afternoon

66
 Day1 Registration Class work as per Time table
Day2 Rules and Regulations Chemistry Lab practice classes may be
Day3 Getting acquainted with Head and faculty conducted
Day4 Familiarization with Institutional facilities
Day5 Interaction with Class teacher and Seniors
Day6 Introducing the mentor
Day7 Parent –Teacher meeting

Suggested Student Activities

1. Student visits Library to refer to Text books, reference books and manuals to find their specifications
2. Student inspects the available equipment in the Chemistry Lab to familiarize with them.
3. Quiz
4. Group discussion
5. Seminar
6. Surprise test

E - learning links:
https://iupac.org/
https://www.youtube.com
https://www.khanacademy.org/
www.nptel.ac.in

Blue Print

MID SEM-I EXAM

67
S.No Unit Name R U A Remarks
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-I 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)

6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-II 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)
Total Questions 4 4 4
MID SEM –II EXAM
S.No Unit Name R U A Remarks
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-III 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-IV 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)
Total Questions 4 4 4

Semester End Examination

Questions to be set for SEE Remarks

Sl No Unit No.
R U A  
1 I
1 9(a) 13(a)  
2 II  
3 III
2 10(a) 14(a)  
4 IV  
9(b) 13(b)
4
5 V 5, 6 11(a) 15(a)  
 
11(b) 15(b)  
3
10(b) 14(b)

6 VI 7,8 12(a) 16(a)  

 
12(b) 16(b)  
Total Questions 8 8 8  

Remembering (R) 1 Mark

68
 Understanding (U) 3 Marks
Legend:
Application (A) 5 Marks

Model Question Papers

18EE-104F
STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION & TRAINING, TELANGANA
DEEE I -SEMESTER,
MIDSEM – I MODEL QUESTION PAPER
General Engineering Chemistry
Sub. Code: 18EE-104F

Time: 1 Hour Max. Marks: 20

PART – A

Instructions: Answer all questions. Each question carries one mark. 4X1=4
marks

1. State Hund’s rule.

2. Write the electronic configuration of Cr.
3. Define mole.
4. What are colloids?

PART – B
Instructions: Answer the following questions. Each question carries three marks 2 x 3 =6 Marks

5. a. Draw the shapes of s and d orbitals.

or
b. Explain the covalent bond formation in Nitrogen molecule by Lewis dot method.
6. a. Classify solutions based on their physical state.

or
b. Compare any three properties of lyophilic and lyophobic colloids.
PART – C
Instructions: Answer the following questions. Each question carries five marks 2 x 5 =10 Marks

7. a. Distinguish the ionic compounds from covalent compounds.

or
b. What is oxidation number? Find the oxidation number of ‘S’ in H2SO4 and ‘Mn’ in KMnO4.
8. a. Define Molarity. Find the weight of H2SO4 required to prepare 400 ml of 0.5M solution.

or
b. Define Normality. Calculate the normality of 500 ml solution containing 0.53 grams of
Na2CO3.

69
 18EE-104F

STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION & TRAINING, TELANGANA

DEEE I -SEMESTER,

MIDSEM – II MODEL QUESTION PAPER

General Engineering Chemistry

Time: 1 Hour Max.Marks : 20

PART – A

Instructions: i. Answer all questions. Each question carries one mark. 4 X 1 = 4 marks
1. What is conjugate acid base pair?
2. Define ionic product of water.
3. Define an ecosystem.
4. What is threshold limit value?

PART – B
Instructions: Answer the following questions. Each question carries three marks 2 x 3 =6 Marks

5. a. What are the limitations of Arrhenius theory of acids and bases?

or
b. Explain the neutralization according to Lewis theory of acids and bases with an example.
6. a. Explain the terms producers, consumers and decomposers with example.

or
b. What are renewable and non renewable energy sources? Give examples.
PART – C
Instructions: Answer the following questions. Each question carries five marks 2 x 5 =10 Marks

7. a. Define pH. Find the pH of 0.5M NaOH solution.

or
b. What are buffer solutions? State the applications of buffer solutions.
8. a. What is Biodiversity? Explain any two threats to biodiversity.

70
 or
b. What is deforestation? What are its consequences?

18EE-104F

STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION & TRAINING, TELANGANA

DEEE I -SEMESTER,

END SEM MODEL QUESTION PAPER

General Engineering Chemistry

Time: 2 Hours Max. Marks: 40

PART – A

Instructions: Answer all questions. Each question carries one mark. 8 X 1 = 8 marks

1. Define atomic mass number.

2. What is biodiversity?
3. Define degree of hardness of water.
4. What are buffer solutions?
5. Define soft water and hard water.
6. Name the salts responsible for temporary hardness of water.
7. Define the terms conductor and insulator.
8. What is an electrolyte?

PART – B
Instructions: Answer the following questions. Each question carries three marks 4 x 3 =12 Marks

9. a. State and explain Hund’ rule.

or
b. Write any six essential qualities of drinking water.
10. a. Explain the terms producers, consumers and decomposers with example.

or
b. What are strong and weak electrolytes? Give examples.

71
 11. a. Define reverse osmosis and state its advantages.

or
b. Explain defluoridation of water by Nalgonda technique
12. a. Distinguish between metallic and electrolytic conductors.

Or
b. State Faraday’s Laws of electrolysis.

PART – C
Instructions: Answer the following questions. Each question carries five marks 4 x 5 =20 Marks

13. a. Find the molarity and normality of the solution containing 10.6 grams of Na 2CO3 in 2 litres of
solution. .

or
b. Calculate the temporary and permanent hardness of water containing the following salts per
litre
i. Ca(HCO3)2 =32.4 mg, ii. Mg(HCO3)2 = 29.2 mg, iii. CaSO4 =13.6 mg, iv. MgCl2 = 19 mg
14. a. Explain Lewis theory of acids and bases.

or
b. Explain the process of electrolysis of fused NaCl.
15. a. Explain the permutit process of softening of hard water with a neat diagram.

or
b. What are the disadvantages of using hard water in industries?
16. a. Explain the process of electrolytic refining of copper.

Or
b. Calculate the weight of Al deposited on the cathode if 0.5 amperes of electric current is
passed through AlCl3 solution for 1 hour.

72
 BASIC ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING

Course Title : Basic Electrical Engineering Course Code : 18EE-105C

Semester :I Course Group : Core

Teaching Scheme in Periods (L:T:P) : 45:15:0 Credits :3

Methodology : Lecture + Tutorial Total Contact Periods :60

CIE : 60 Marks SEE : 40 Marks

(Continuous Internal Evaluation) (Semester End Examination)

Pre requisites

This course requires the knowledge of basic principles of electricity.

Course Outcomes

CO1 : Apply the basic principles of electricity

CO2 : Solve the problems on series and parallel resistance circuits

73
CO3 : Distinguish between work, power, energy, apply heating effects of electric current and solve
problems on domestic electricity bill

CO4 : Classify conducting materials, state their properties and give their electrical engineering
applications

CO5 : Categorize insulating materials, special purpose materials, state their properties and applications

CO6 : Mention the properties and applications of various magnetic materials

Blue Print of Marks for SEE

Unit
No
Unit Name Periods Questions to be set for SEE

R U A

I Basic Principles of
8
Electricity. Q1 Q9A Q13A
II Series and Parallel circuits 10

III Work Power and Energy,

Heating effects of electric 10
current. Q2 Q10A Q14A
Q
IV Conducting Materials. 10 4

V Insulating materials and Q5,Q Q9(b),Q11(a), Q13(b),Q15(a),

12
Special Purpose materials 6 Q11(b) Q15(b)

VI Magnetic materials Q3 Q10(b),Q12(a),

Q7,Q Q12(b) Q14(b),Q16(a),
10
8 Q16(b)

Total 60 8 8 8

Course Content

74
UNIT 1 - Basic principles of electricity Duration: 8 Periods (L:6 - T: 2)
Different types of materials- conductors, insulators, semiconductors, electric current EMF - voltage -
Ohm's law – limitations of Ohm’s law resistance –– specific resistance – conductivity – temperature
coefficient of resistance – simple problems on Ohm’s law, resistance and temperature coefficient of
resistance.

UNIT 2– Series and parallel resistance circuits Duration: 10 Periods (L: 7.5 – T:2.5)
Resistance in series, parallel and series parallel combinations voltage division in series circuits, current
division in parallel circuits – simple problems.

UNIT 3 –Work power and energy, heating effects of electric current Duration: 10 Periods(L:7.5 –
T:.2.5)
Work, power and energy – conversion of units efficiency mechanical equivalent of heat – Joule’s law –
heat produced due to flow of current in resistance thermal efficiency – problems - domestic consumer
electricity bill calculation - applications of heating effects of electric current.

UNIT 4 - Conducting materials Duration: 10 Periods (L: 7.5 – T:2.5)

Conducting materials : Hardening, annealing - low resistive materials – properties and applications of
Copper and Aluminium - comparison between Copper and Aluminium - ACSR Conductors - high
resistive materials – properties and applications.

UNIT 5 - Insulating materials and special purpose materials Duration: 12 Periods (L:9 – T:3)
Insulating materials : Properties - insulation resistance - factors effecting insulation resistance -
classification of insulation materials based on temperature - properties – applications - thermoplastic &
thermosetting resins.
Special purpose materials: protective materials – thermocouple - bimetals - soldering - fuses –
galvanizing and impregnating -enamel coated copper wires - nanomaterials.

UNIT 6 - Magnetic materials Duration: 10 Periods (L:7.5 – T:2.5)

Magnetic materials : Definition of terms related to magnetism - classification of magnetic materials soft
& hard magnetic materials BH Curves hysteresis loop hysteresis loss Steinmetz equation eddy current
loss Curie point – magnetostriction.

Recommended Books
75
1. Introduction to Engineering materials – B.K.Agarwal.
2. Materials science for Electrical and Electronic Engineers – Ian P.Jones (Oxford Publications)
3.Electrical Engineering Materials and Semiconductors J.B.Guptha and Rena Guptha,SKKotaria&Sons
Publishers
4. B.L.Theraja Electrical Technology Vol.I S.Chand&co
5. T.K.Nagsarkar&M.S.Sukhija Basic Electrical Engineering– Oxford
6. Principles of Electrical Engg.& Electronics V.K.Mehtha, RohithMehthaS.Chand Publishers
7. Theory and Problems of Basic Electrical EngineeringD.P.Kothari&I.J.Nagarath – PHI

Suggested E-Learning references

1.http://electrical4u.com/
2. www.nptel.ac.in
3. https://ocw.mit.edu/courses/electrical-engineering-and-computer-science/

Suggested Learning Outcomes

1.1 Distinguish between conductor, insulator and semiconductor.
1.2 Draw energy level diagrams of conductors, insulators and semiconductors.
1.3 Define (i) electric current (ii) EMF (iii) voltage
1.4 State Ohm's Law.
1.5 Explain Ohm's Law
1.6 List the limitations of Ohms Law.
1.7 Explain the concept of resistance to flow of electrons.
1.8 Define the terms i) specific resistance ii) conductance and iii) conductivity.
1.9 Deduce the relation R = ( pl ) / a
1.10 Solve simple problems based on the Ohm's Law & R = (pl) / a
1.11 Explain the effects of temperature on resistance
1.12 Develop the expression for resistance at any temperature as R t=Ro(1+αot)
1.13 Define temperature coefficient of resistance and give its unit.
1.14 Develop the formula for coefficient of resistance at any temperature as αt=αo/(1+αot)
1.15 Solve problems based on the Rt= Ro(1+αot) &αt=αo/(1+αot).

76
2.1 Develop the expressions for equivalent resistance with simple series connections.
2.2 Develop the expressions for equivalent resistance with simple parallel connections.
2.3 Solve problems on equivalent resistance in the case of series circuits.
2.4 Solve problems on equivalent resistance in the case of parallel circuits.
2.5 Solve problems on equivalent resistance in the case of series-parallel circuits.
2.6 Solve problems on division of voltage when resistors are connected in series.
2.7 Solve problems on division of current when resistors are connected in parallel.

3.1 Define work, power and energy and state their SI units
3.2 Express work, power and energy in Electrical, Mechanical and Thermal Units
3.3 Solve problems on work, power and energy in Electrical, Mechanical and Thermal units.
3.4 Explain the Mechanical equivalent of heat.
3.5 State Joule’s law
3.6 State the heat produced due to flow of current.
3.7 Define thermal efficiency.
3.8 Solve problems on the above.
3.9 Calculate electricity bill for domestic consumers.
3.10 Explain the applications of heat produced due to electric current in i) Metal Filament lamps
ii)Electric kettle iii) Electric cooker iv) Electric Iron v) Space heaters vi) Geyser vii) Infrared lamp.

4.1 Define conducting materials.

4.2 State the properties of conducting materials.
4.3 Define the terms (i) hardening (ii) annealing
4.4 Explain the effects of hardening and annealing on copper with regard to electrical and mechanical
properties.
4.5 State the requirements of low resistivity materials.
4.6 List some examples of i) low resistivity materials ii) high resistivity materials
4.7 Mention the properties & applications of Copper and Aluminium.
4.8 Distinguish between Copper and Aluminium.
4.9 Mention the properties & applications of ACSR conductors.
4.10 State the requirements of high resistive materials.
4.11 State the types of high resistive materials.
4.12 List the properties & applications of high resistive materials i) Manganin ii) Eureka iii) Constantan
iv) Nichrome v) Tungsten vi) Carbon

77
5.1 Define insulating materials
5.2 State the important electrical properties of insulating materials
5.3 Explain factors affecting insulating resistance.
5.4 Classify insulating materials based on temperature.
5.5 State the properties and applications of i) Impregnated paper ii)Asbestos iii) Mica iv) Ceramics.
5.6 Explain Thermoplastic & Thermosetting resins with examples.
5.7 Explain the properties of PVC
5.8 List the applications of PVC.
5.9 State the properties and applications of the following gases i) Nitrogen ii) Hydrogen iii) Sulphur–
Hexafluoride (SF6).
5.10 State the need for protective materials
5.11 Explain the thermo couple materials.
5.12 State the bimetals.
5.13 State the soldering materials.
5.14 Define fuse
5.15 State the different types of materials used for fuse.
5.16 Explain the process of galvanizing and impregnating.
5.17 State the need for enamel coated copper wires and mention its applications.
5.18 List the application of nanomaterials.
6.1 Define the terms (i) magnetic field (ii) magnetic flux (iii) magnetic flux density (iv) MMF (v)
magnetizing field strength (vi) permeability (vii) susceptance (viii) reluctance
6.2 Classify the magnetic material as: (i) ferro (ii) para (iii) diamagnetic materials with examples
6.3 Explain i) soft magnetic materials ii) hard magnetic materials
6.4 Draw and explain BH Curve
6.5 Draw and explain Hysteresis loop.
6.6 Explain Hysteresis loss and state Steinmetz equation (No Problems).
6.7 Explain Eddy Current Losses.
6.8 State Curie point.
6.9 Define Magnetostriction.

Suggested Student Activities

1.Student visits Library to refer to Electrical Manuals

78
2.Student visits the Lab to identify the available electrical equipment
3.Visit nearby Industry to familiarize with electrical and electronics devices and components
4.Quiz
5.Group discussion
6.Surprise test

CO-PO Mapping Matrix

Basic knowledge

Engineer and society

Communication

Lifelong learning
Discipline Knowledge

Engineering Tools

Ethics
sustainability Environment &

work Individual and Team

practice Experiments and

Linked PO
CO PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO
10

CO1 2 2 2 2 1,2,3,10
CO2 2 2 2 2 1,2,3,10
CO3 2 2 2 2 1,2,5,10
CO4 2 2 2,10
CO5 2 2 2,10
CO6 2 2 2,10

Internal Evaluation

Test Units Marks

Mid Sem 1 1 and 2 20

Mid Sem 2 3 and 4 20

Slip Test 1 1 and 2 5

79
 Slip Test 2 3 and 4 5

Assignments - 5

Seminars - 5

Total 60

QUESTION PAPER PATTERN FOR MID SEMESTER EXAMS

Sl.No Description Level No of Marks for Choice Total Marks

Questions each question

01 Part-A Remembering(R) 4 1 Nil 4 Marks

02 Part-B Understanding(U) 4 3 2 6 Marks

03 Part-C Application(A) 4 5 2 10 Marks

Total Marks 20 Marks

MID SEM-I EXAM

S.No Unit Name R U A Remarks
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-I 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)

6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-II 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)
Total Questions 4 4 4
MID SEM –II EXAM
S.No Unit Name R U A Remarks
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-III 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-IV 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)
Total Questions 4 4 4

The length of answer for each question framed in respect of Part-A, B&C shall not exceed ¼ of a
page,1 page and 2 pages respectively

80
 QUESTION PAPER PATTERN FOR SEMESTER END EXAM

Sl.No Description Level No of Marks for Choice Total Marks

Questions each question

01 Part-A Remembering(R) 8 1 Nil 8 Marks

02 Part-B Understanding(U) 8 3 4 12 Marks

03 Part-C Application(A) 8 5 4 20 Marks

Total Marks 40 Marks

Unit No

Questions to be set for SEE

R U A

I
Q1 Q9(a) Q13(a)
II

III
Q2 Q10(a) Q14(a)
IV
Q4
V Q9(b),Q11(a),
Q5,Q6 Q13(b),Q15(a), Q15(b)
Q11(b)

VI Q3 Q10(b),Q12(a),
Q7,Q8 Q12(b) Q14(b),Q16(a), Q16(b)

Total 8 8 8

81
 18EE-105C
STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION AND TRAINING, TELANGANA
MODEL QUESTION PAPER
DEEE I - SEMESTER
MID SEM - I EXAMINATION

Corse Code: 18EE-105C Duration: 1 Hour

Course Name: Basic Electrical Engineering Max. Marks: 20

PART-A

Answer all questions, Each Question carries one mark 4x1 = 4 Marks

1) Draw the energy level diagram of Insulator.

2) State the units of Resistivity.
3) Two resistors of 10 Ω and 15 Ω are connected in parallel. Find their equivalent resistance.
4) Two resistors of 10 Ω and 15 Ω are connected in series across a 100V supply. Find the voltage
across 10 Ω resistor.
PART-B

Answer the following questions. Each question carries three marks 2x 3 = 6 Marks

5) a) Distinguish between conductors, insulators and semi-conductors based on number of valence

electrons.
(OR)
b) State the laws of resistance.
6) a) Find the equivalent resistance between terminals A and B for the circuit shown below.

(OR)
b) Two resistors of 10 Ω and 15 Ω are connected in parallel across a 100V supply. Find the current
through 10 Ω resistor.

PART-C

Answer the following questions. Each question carries five marks 2x5 = 10Marks

7) a) Develop the expression for resistance at any temperature as R t=Ro(1+αot).

(OR)
b) A piece of Silver wire has a resistance of 1 Ω. What will be the resistance of Manganin wire of
one-third the length and one – third the diameter, if the specifi resistance of manganin is 30
times that of silver.

82
8) a) Derive an expression for equivalent resistance when three resistances are connected in parallel.
(OR)
b) Calculate the equivalent resistance between terminals A and B for the circuit shown
below

83
 18EE-105C
STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION AND TRAINING, TELANGANA
MODEL QUESTION PAPER
DEEE I - SEMESTER
MID SEM - II EXAMINATION

Corse Code: 18EE-105C Duration: 1 Hour

Course Name: Basic Electrical Engineering Max. Marks: 20
PART-A

Answer all questions, Each Question carries one mark 4x1 = 4 Marks

1) State the units of Electrical power.

2) Define electrical efficiency.
3) List any two low resistivity materials.
4) State any two applications of Manganain.
PART-B

Answer the following questions. Each question carries three marks 2x 3 = 6 Marks

5) a) State Joule’s Law

(OR)
b) An immersion heater has a resistance of 125 ohms and is connected to a 500 V dc supply. Find
the kwh energy taken in 45 minutes.
6) a) List any six properties of conucting materials.
(OR)
b) Define the terms Annealing and Hardening.

PART-C

Answer the following questions. Each question carries five marks 2x5 = 10Marks

7) a) Two lamps of rating 100W, 220V and 100W , 250 V are connected in series across 250V
supply.
Find (a) Voltage across each lamp (b) Power consumed by each lamp.

(OR)
b) Calculate the monthly bill of domestic service with the following loads for a month of June
a) 4 lamps of 100W each used for 6 hours a day.
b) 3 fans of 60 W each used for 10 hours a day.
The cost per unit of consumption is 50 paise.

8) a) Mention the properties & applications of Copper and Aluminium.

(OR)
b) Mention the properties & applications of ACSR conductors.

84
 18EE-105C
STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION AND TRAINING, TELANGANA
MODEL QUESTION PAPER
DEEE I - SEMESTER
END SEM EXAMINATION

Corse Code: 18EE-105C Duration: 2 Hours

Course Name: Basic Electrical Engineering Maximum .Marks: 40

PART-A

Answer all questions 8x1 = 8 Marks

1) State Ohm’s Law.

2) State the units of Electrical Energy.
3) Define the Magnetic field.
4) Find the equivalent resistance when six resistors each of 10 ohms are connected in series.
5) Define Insulating materials.
6) List any two applications of Nano-materials.
7) State the units of Magnetic Field strength.
8) Define flux density.
PART-B
Answer the following questions 4x3= 12 Marks
9)
a) State the effect of temperature on resistance of a material.
(OR)
b) State the important electrical properties of insulating materials
10)
a) An electric heater draws 12A current at 230V for a period of 10 hours. If the cost of electrical
energy is Rs. 2.50/- paise per Kwh, find the total cost of energy.
(OR)
b) Classify Magnetic Materials.
11)
a) List the applications of PVC.
(OR)
b) State the different types of materials used for fuse.
12)
a) State Curie Point.
(OR)
b) Define Magnetostriction.

85
 PART-C
Answer the following questions 4x 5=20 Marks
13)
a) Calculate the current I for the circuit shown below.

(OR)
b) Classify Insulating materials based on temperature.
14)
a) Calculate the monthly bill of domestic service with the following loads for a month of May
i) 4 lamps of 100W each used for 6 hours a day.
ii) 2000 W immersion heater used for 1 hour a day.
iii) 3 fans of 60 W each used for 10 hours a day.
iv) 1000 W electrical iron used for 1 hour a day.
The cost per unit of consumption is 50 paise.

(OR)
b) Write a short note on Soft Magnetic Materials
15)
a) Explain Thermoplastic & Thermosetting resins with examples.
(OR)
b) Explain the process of galvanizing and impregnating

16)
a) Draw and explain Hysteresis loop.
(OR)
b) Explain Eddy Current Losses.

86
 BASIC ENGINEERING DRAWING

Course Title : BASIC ENGINEERING Course Code : 18EE-106P

DRAWING
Semester :I Course Group : Practical
Teaching Scheme in Periods : 15:0:30 Credits : 1.5
(L:T:P)
Methodology : Lecture + Practical Total Contact Periods :45
CIE : 60 Marks SEE : 40 Marks
(Continuous Internal Evaluation) (Semester End Examination)

This Course is Common to all Programs of Diploma in Engineering

This Course is aimed at developing basic graphic skills to enable them to use these skills in preparation of
engineering drawings, their reading and interpretation.

Prerequisites: Enthusiasm to learn this course and requires basic knowledge of Mathematics.

Blue Print of Marks for SEE

Questions to be set for SEE

R U A
Unit
Name of the Unit PART-A (2
No Periods PART-B (6
Marks Marks
Questions) Questions)

Importance of Engineering
1, 2 Drawing and Instruments, Free
12 Q1 Q9(a)
&3 hand lettering and Numbering
and Dimensioning Practice

Geometric constructions (i.e. up

4 06 Q2 Q9(b)
to construction of Polygon)

Geometric constructions (i.e. up

4 to construction of general 06 Q3 Q10(a)
curves)

Projection of points, Lines,

5 06 Q4 Q10(b)
Planes

87
 Q11(a), Q11(b),
6 Orthographic projections 15 Q5, Q6, Q7, Q8
Q12(a), Q12(b)

Total Periods / Total Questions 45 8 4

[ R: Remembering, U: Understanding – 2 Marks Questions ] [A: Application – 6 Marks

Questions]

Note: Question Paper consists PART – A and PART-B

PART – A consists 8 (Eight questions) and student have to answer ALL questions, each question
carries 2 marks. (8*2 = 16)

PART – B consists 4 questions (either or / (a) or (b)), student have to attempt FOUR questions,
each question carries 6 marks (4*6=24)

Course Outcomes (CO)

Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to attain the following Course
Outcomes (CO):

Course Outcome

CO1 Acquire the knowledge on Importance of Engineering drawing and instruments.

CO2 Practice free hand Lettering in different styles.

CO3 Acquire the knowledge on different styles of dimensioning systems.

Appreciate the usage of engineering curves for tracing the paths and surface profile of the
CO3
machine components such as gear profile from involute and cycloid.

Realize the concept of projection and attain visualization projection of points, Lines and Planes.
CO3 The student will also be able to draw the views related to projection of Points, Lines and
Planes.

Realize the concept of orthographic projections and student will be able to draw orthographic
CO4
views of an object from its pictorial drawing.

Course Contents

NOTE
1. B.I.S Specification should invariably be followed in all the topics.
2. A-3 Size Drawing Sheets are to be used for all Drawing Practice Exercises.
1.0 The importance of Engineering Drawing and Engineering Instruments (Periods: 3)

88
 Explanation of the scope and objectives of the subject of Engineering Drawing Its importance as
a graphic communication -Need for preparing drawing as per standards – (SP-46 –1988) –
Mention B.I.S - Role of drawing in -engineering education – Link between Engineering drawing
and other subjects of study.

Engineering drawing Instruments

Classifications: Basic Tools, tools for drawing straight lines, tools for curved lines, tools for
measuring distances and special tools like mini drafter & drafting machine – Mentioning of
names under each classification and their brief description -Scales: Recommended scales reduced
& enlarged -Lines: Types of lines, selection of line thickness - Selection of Pencils -Sheet Sizes:
A0, A1, A2, A3, A4, A5, Layout of drawing sheets in respect of A0, A1, A3 sizes, Sizes of the
Title block and its contents, Care and maintenance of Drawing Sheet,
Drawing plate: La out of sheet – as per SP-46-1988 to a suitable scale.

2.0 Free hand lettering & numbering (Periods: 3)

Importance of lettering – Types of lettering -Guide Lines for Lettering
Practicing of letters & numbers of given sizes (7mm, 10mm and 14mm)
Advantages of single stroke or simple style of lettering - Use of lettering stencils

3.0 Dimensioning practice (Periods: 6)

Purpose of engineering drawing, Need of B.I.S code in dimensioning -Shape description of an
Engineering object - Definition of dimensioning size description -Location of features, surface
finish, fully dimensioned Drawing -Notations or tools of dimensioning, dimension line, extension
line, leader line, arrows, symbols, number and notes, rules to be observed in the use of above
tools -Placing dimensions: Aligned system and unidirectional system (SP-46-1988)-Arrangement
of dimensions - Chain, parallel, combined progressive and dimensioning by co-ordinate methods-
Rules for dimensioning standard - features: Circles (holes) arcs, angles, tapers, chamfers, and
dimension of narrow spaces.

4.0 Geometric Construction (Periods: 12)

Division of a line: to divide a straight line into given number of equal parts internally examples in
engineering application. Construction of tangent lines: to draw tangent lines touching circles
internally and externally.
Construction of tangent arcs
a) To draw tangent arc of given radius to touch two lines inclined at given angle (acute, right
and obtuse angles).
b) Tangent arc of given radius touching a circle or an arc and a given line.
c) Tangent arcs of radius ‘R’, touching two given circles internally and externally.

Construction of polygon: construction of any regular polygon of given side length using general
method.

Conical Curves: Explanation of Ellipse, Parabola, Hyperbola, as sections of a double cone and a
loci of a moving point, eccentricity of above curves – Their engineering application viz.
Projectiles, reflectors, P-V Diagram of a hyperbolic process.
Construction of any conic section of given eccentricity by general method.
Construction of ellipse by concentric circles method.
Construction of parabola by rectangle method.
Construction of rectangular hyperbola.

89
 General Curves: Involute, Cycloid and Helix, explanations as locus of a moving point, their
engineering application, viz, Gear tooth profile, screw threads, springs etc. - their construction

5.0 Projection of points, lines and planes (Periods: 6)

Projecting a point on two planes of projection -Projecting a point on three planes of projection
-Projection of straight line.
a) Parallel to both the planes.
b) Perpendicular to one of the planes.
c) Inclined to one plane and parallel to other planes.
Projection of regular planes.
a) Plane perpendicular to HP and parallel to VP and vice versa.
b) Plane perpendicular to HP and inclined to VP and vice versa.
c)
6.0 Orthographic Projections (Periods: 15)
Meaning of orthographic projection -Using a viewing box and a model – Number of views
obtained on the six faces of the box - Legible sketches of 3 views for describing object -Concept
of front view, top view, and side view for sketching these views of engineering objects -
Explanation of first angle projection. – Positioning of three views in First angle projection -
Projection of points as a means of locating the corners of the surfaces of an object – Use of miter
line in drawing a third view when other two views are given -Method of representing hidden lines
-Selection of minimum number of views to describe full object.
Recommended Books

Engineering Drawing by Kapildev – (Asian Publisher)

Engineering Drawing by BasantAgarwal&C.M Agarwal - (McGraw-hill)
Engineering Drawing by N.D.Bhatt. (Charotar Publishing House Pvt. Ltd.)
A Textbook on Engineering Drawing by P. Kannaiah, K. L. Narayana, K. Venkata Reddy
NPTEL Videos of Engineering Dwawing.

Suggested Specific Learning Outcomes

Upon completion of the subject, the student shall be able to -

1.0 Understand the basic concepts of engineering drawing
1.1 State the importance of drawing as an engineering communication medium
1.2 State the necessity of B.I.S. Code of practice for Engineering Drawing.
1.3 Explain the linkages between Engineering drawing and other subjects of study in
diploma course.
Use of Engineering Drawing Instruments
1. 4 select the correct instruments and draw lines of different orientation.
1.5 Select the correct instruments and draw small and large Circles.
1.6 Select the correct instruments for measuring distances on the drawing.
1.7 Use correct grade of pencil for different types of lines, thickness and given function.
1.8 Select and use appropriate scales for a given application.
1.9 Identify different drawing sheet sizes as per I.S. and Standard Lay- outs.
1.10 Prepare Title block as per B.I.S. Specifications.

2.0 Write Free Hand Lettering and Numbers

2.1 Write titles using sloping lettering and numerals of 7mm, 10mm and 14mm height
2.2 Write titles using vertical lettering and numerals of 7mm, 10mm and 14mm height
2.3 Select suitable sizes of lettering for different layouts and applications
2.4 Practice the use of lettering stencils.

90
3.0 Understand Dimensioning Practice
3.1 Define “Dimensioning.
3.2 State the need of dimensioning of drawing according to accepted standard.
3.3 Identify notations of Dimensioning used in dimensioned drawing.
3.4 Identify the system of placement of dimensions in the given dimensioned drawing.
3.5 Dimension a given drawing using standard notations and desired system of dimensioning.
3.6 Dimensioning standard features applying necessary rules.
3.7 Arrange dimensions in a desired method given in a drawing.
3.8 Identify the departures if any made in the given dimensioned drawing with reference to
SP-46-1988, and dimension the same correctly.

4.0 Apply Principles of Geometric Constructions

4.1 Divide a given line into desired number of equal parts internally.
4.2 Draw tangent lines and arcs.
4.3 Use General method to construct any polygon.
4.4 Explain the importance of conics.
4.5 Construct conics (ellipse, parabola and hyperbola) by general method.
4.6 Construct ellipse by concentric circles method.
4.7 Construct parabola by rectangle method.
4.8 Construct rectangular hyperbola from the given data.
4.9 Construct involute from the given data.
4.10 Construct cycloid and helix from the given data.
4.11 State the applications of the above constructions in engineering practice.

5.0 Apply Principles of Projection of points, lines and planes (06 Hours)
5.1 Visualize the objects
5.2 Explain the I-angle and III-angle projections
5.3 Practice the I-angle projections
5.4 Draw the projection of a point with respect to reference planes (HP&VP)
5.5 Draw the projections of straight lines with respect to two reference
Planes (up to lines parallel to one plane and inclined to other plane)
5.6 Draw the projections of planes (up to planes perpendicular to one plane and inclined to
other plane)

6.0 Apply principles of orthographic projection

6.1 Explain the principles of orthographic projection with simple sketches.
6.2 Draw the orthographic view of an object from its pictorial drawing.
6.3 Draw the minimum number of views needed to represent complete engineering
component.

91
 CIE Question Paper Pattern and Syllabus

Questions to be set for SEE

Unit
Unit Name R U A
No
2 Marks Questions 6 Marks Questions

Mid Semester - I Examination

1, 2, Free hand lettering, Numbering

Q1, Q2 Q5 (a), Q5(b),
3 & Dimensioning Practice

Geometric constructions (i.e. up

4 Q3, Q4 Q6(a), Q6(b)
to construction of Polygon)

Total 4 2

Mid Semester - II Examination

Geometric constructions (i.e. up

4 Q1, Q2 Q5 (a), Q5(b),
to construction of general curves)

5 Projection of points, Lines, Planes Q3, Q4 Q6(a), Q6(b)

Total 4 2

[R: Remembering, U: Understanding – 2 Marks Questions ] [A: Applying – 6 Marks Questions]

CIE Question Paper Pattern:

Maximum Marks: 20, Time: 1 Hour

Part A:

Consists 4 Short questions, students have to attempt 4 questions and each question carries 2 Marks.(4
X 2 = 08 Marks)

Part B:

Consists 2 (Either or type) Essay type questions, students have to attempt 2 questions and each
question carries 06 Marks.(2 X 6 = 12 Marks)

Course Outcome Cognizant Level Linked Program

Objectives

92
 (PO)

Acquire the knowledge on Importance of

CO1 R 1, 2, 3, 4, 9, 10
Engineering drawing and instruments.

CO2 Practice free hand Lettering in different styles. R/U 1, 2, 3, 4, 9, 10

Acquire the knowledge on different styles of

CO3 R/U 1, 2, 3, 4, 9, 10
dimensioning systems.

Appreciate the usage of engineering curves for

tracing the paths and surface profile of the machine
CO3 R/U/A 1, 2, 3, 4, 9, 10
components such as gear profile from involute and
cycloid.

Realize the concept of projection and attain

visualization projection of points, Lines and Planes.
CO3 R/U/A 1, 2, 3, 4, 9, 10
The student will also be able to draw the views
related to projection of Points, Lines and Planes.

Realize the concept of orthographic projections and

CO4 student will be able to draw orthographic views of R/U/A 1, 2, 3, 4, 9, 10
an object from its pictorial drawing.

Course-PO Attainment Matrix

Program Outcomes (PO)
Course Name
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Basic
Engineering 3 3 3 2 -- -- -- -- 3 3
Drawing

Level 3- Highly Addressed, Level 2-Moderately Addressed, Level 1-Low Addressed

MID SEMESTER – I MODEL PAPER

C18EE-106P
BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATION, (C-18)
DEEE – I SEMESTER
MID SEMESTER - I EXAMINATION

93
 BASIC ENGINEERING DRAWING
Time: 1 Hours] [Total Marks: 20
___________________________________________________________________________

PART-A
04X02=08

Instructions : 1. Answer ALL questions.

2. Each question carries TWO marks.

1. Write freehand the following, using single stroke vertical CAPITAL letters:
BE A LEADER NOT A FOLLOWER (h = 10)
2. Represent the following Figure in Chain Dimensioning Method.

3. To divide a straight line of 90 mm into 5 equal parts.

4. Bisect a given angle of 65 Degrees.

PART-B
02X06=12
Instructions : 1. Answer any TWO questions.
2. Each question carries SIX marks.

5. (a) Redraw the following Figure with Correct Dimensioning Rules.

94
 (or)

5. (b) Represent the following Figure in a) parallel and b) Uni-directional system.

6. (a) Draw an arc of given radius 30 mm touching two straight lines at right angles to each other.

(or)
6. (b) Draw a tangent to a circle from a point P at 50 mm distance on the circle of Radius 30 mm.

MID SEMESTER – II MODEL PAPER

C18EE-106P
BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATION, (C-18)
DEEE – I SEMESTER
MID SEMESTER - II EXAMINATION
BASIC ENGINEERING DRAWING
Time: 1 Hours] [Total Marks: 20
___________________________________________________________________________

95
 PART-A
04X02=08

Instructions : 1. Answer ALL questions.

2. Each question carries TWO marks.
1. Draw an arc of given radius 30 mm touching two straight lines at right angles to each other.
2. Draw a tangent to a circle from a point P at 50 mm distance on the circle of Radius 30 mm.
3. Draw the projections of a point A lying on VP and 70 mm above HP.
4. A line of 30 mm long is parallel to both the planes. The line is 40 mm above HP and 20 mm
in front of VP. Draw its projection.

PART-B
02X06=12
Instructions : 1. Answer any TWO questions.
2. Each question carries SIX marks.
5. (a) Draw a parabola with the distance of the focus from the directrix at 50 mm using
Eccentricity method also draw a normal and tangent through a point 40 mm from the
directrix.

or
5. (b) Draw a cycloid, given the radius 30 mm of the generating circle.
6. (a) Draw the projections of straight line AB 60 mm long parallel to HP and inclined at an
angle of 400 to VP. The end A is 30 mm above HP. and 20 mm in front of VP.
or
6. (b) Rectangle 30mm and 50mm sides is resting on HP on one small side which is 300
inclined to VP, while the surface of the plane makes 450 inclination with HP. Draw it’s
projections.

C18EE-106P
BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATION, (C–18) MARCH/APRIL—2019
DEEE – I SEMESTER EXAMINATION
END SEM MODEL QUESTION PAPER

BASIC ENGINEERING DRAWING

96
 Time: 2hours Total Marks:40
Important Note: Wherever any question has choice, marks will be allotted only to first attempted
question. No marks will be allotted for extra questions answered.

PART-A
08X02=16
Instructions : 1. Answer ALL questions.
2. Each question carries TWO marks.
3. All the dimensions are in mm.
1. Write freehand the following, using single stroke vertical CAPITAL letters:
BE A LEADER NOT A FOLLOWER (h = 10)
2. Bisect a given angle of 450.
3. Inscribe a hexagon in a given circle of Radius 60 mm.
4. Draw the projections of a point A lying on VP and 70 mm above HP.
5. Draw the top view of the cone resting base on the ground with base diameter 50mm height
60mm.
6. Draw the top view with the given front and right side views of the componenet shown in
Figure (1) assuming suitable dimentions.
Right Side View Front View

Figure (1)
7. Draw the front view of the block shown in Figure (2)
8. Draw the front view of the block shown in Figure (3)

Figure (2) Figure (3)

PART-B
04X06=24
Instructions : 1. Answer any FOUR questions.
2. Each question carries SIX marks.
3. All the dimensions are in mm.
9. (a) Draw the below Figure (4) with correct dimensioning principles.

97
 Figure (4)
(or)
9. (b) Circumscribe a hexagon on a given circle of radius R is 30mm.

10. (a) Draw a parabola with the distance of the focus from the directrix at 50 mm using
eccentricity method and draw a normal and tangent through a point 40 mm from the directrix.
(or)
10. (b) A line AB 40 mm long is parallel to V.P. and inclined at 300 to H.P. The end A is 15 mm
above H.P and 20 mm in front of V.P. Draw the projections of the line and find its traces.
(or)
11. (a) Draw the front view of the component shown in Figure (5).

Figure (5). Figure (6).

(or)
11. (b) Draw the Top View from the component as shown in Figure (6).

12. (a) Draw the Top View of component shown in Figure (7)

98
 Figure (7) Figure (8)
or
12. (b) Develop the Top View from the Front and Right side views as shown in Figure (8) assuming
suitable dimensions.

BASIC COMPUTER AIDED DRAFTING

99
Course Title : Basic Computer Aided Course Code : 18EE-107P
Drafting
Semester :I Course Group : Practical
Teaching Scheme in Periods : 15:0:30 Credits : 1.5
(L:T:P)
Methodology : Lecture + Practical Total Contact Periods :45
CIE : 60 Marks SEE : 40 Marks
(Continuous Internal Evaluation) (Semester End Examination)

This Course is Common to all Programs of Diploma in Engineering

Pre requisites : basics of computer operation

This course requires the Basic Computer Skills and Practice concepts of engineering drawing

Course Outcomes

CO1 Importance and advantages of CAD. Set drawing area and draw geometric shapes and
modify as per requirement
CO2 Add text with required font and size and also dimension by various methods
CO3 Generate isometric model and draw circle on three iso planes
CO4 Create 2D drawings with front, side view with all above features

UNIT -1 Duration: 15 periods (L:5 + P:10)

1.1 The Computer Aided Drafting and its software

Definition of Computer Aided Drafting, the Advantages and importance of CAD software LIKE
Course Content
Auto CAD, Intelli Cad, ProG CAD etc., the features of Graphic Work station, CAD Environment:
Screen, Various tool bars and menus.

1.2 Selection of commands

Commands using toolbars, menus, command bar. Repeating a command, Nesting a command and
modifying a command.Use of prompt history window and scripts, mouse shortcuts.Creating the
drawing.Opening existing and, saving of drawing, setting up a drawing. Setting and changing the
grid and snapping alignment, and the Entity snaps.

1.3 Use of viewing tools of CAD & Use of coordinate systems of the drawing

100
 Use of mouse, Scroll bar to move around within drawing, changing of magnification of drawing.
Displaying of multiple views, the use of controlling visual elements like Line weight.

Two dimensional coordinates such as Absolute, Cartesian, Relative Cartesian and Polar coordinates
and direct method of drawing line.

1.4 Creating simple and complex entities

Drawing of lines, circles, arcs, ellipses, elliptical arcs, rays and infinite lines, rectangles, polygons,

1.5 Use the Modifying tools to modify the properties of entities

Entity selection and de selection methods, the Deletion of entities.Copying of entities within a
drawing, between drawings, parallel copies, Mirroring entities and arraying entities.The
Rearranging of entities by Moving, Rotating and Reordering.The Resizing of entities by Stretching,
Scaling, Extending, Trimming, and editing the length.The Braking and joining of entities. Editing
of polylines: The Exploding of entities, the Chamfering and Filleting of entities
UNIT -2 Duration: 15 periods (L:5 + 10P)

2.1 Creating complex entities

Drawing of shapes like polylines, Splines, donuts, and adding of hatch pattern

2.2 Use the drawing information retrieving tools Measure, Divide, Calculate and Display
Creating and editing of point entities. Dividing the entities in to segments. Calculation of areas of
defined by points, closed entities, and combined entities, calculate the distance and angle between
the entities. Displaying the information about the entities and drawing status.

2.3 Use the Text tool to create and formatting the various types of text Fonts and its styles
The creating, naming and modifying the text fonts, the Creation of line text, paragraph text, setting
of line text style and its alignment.The Setting of Paragraph text style and its alignment, and
modifying the text.

2.5 Use Dimensioning concepts to create, Edit ,Control dimension styles & variables and Adding
geometric tolerances
The creating of linear, Angular, Diametral, Radial, Ordinate dimensions. The creating leaders and
annotations, making dimensions oblique, Editing the dimension text, controlling of dimension
arrows and format. The Controlling of line settings and dimension text, the Controlling of
dimension units, and dimension tolerance.

2.6 Isometric Views

Setting of isometric grid – change of iso planes, drawing straight line and circle
Create Isometric views of simple objects

.UNIT -3 Duration: 15 periods (L:5 + P:10)

Practice of 2D Drawings consisting of different line types, line weights, hatch, dimensioning
and Text

101
 Using
Specific appropriate
Learning commands creation of 2D drawings of standard components
Outcomes

1 Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to Understand about the Computer
Aided Drafting and its software
1.1 Define Computer Aided Drafting
1.2 List the Advantages of CAD and also various CAD software’s
1.3 Explain the importance of CAD software
1.4 Explain the features of Graphic Work station
1.5 Explain CAD Screen, Various tool bars and menus
1.6 Explain the benefits of Templates
1.7
2 Use appropriate selection commands
2.1. Practice commands using toolbars, menus, command bar
2.2. Practice repeating a command, Nesting a command and modifying a command
2.3. Use prompt history window and scripts
2.4. Practice mouse shortcuts
2.5. Practice the Creating the drawing, saving the drawing with .drawing extension and Opening
Existing drawing
2.6. Practice the setting up a drawing with drawing limits and drawing units.
2.7. Practice the setting and changing the grid and snapping alignment
2.8. Practice the Entity snaps

3 Use viewing tools of CAD & Use coordinate systems of the drawing
3.1. Practice the use of Scroll bar, pan command and rotating view to move around within
drawing
3.2. Practice the changing of magnification of drawing
3.3. Practice how the coordinate system work and it is displayed
3.4 Practice the Find tool to determine the coordinates of a point
3.5. Practice the Two dimensional coordinates such as Absolute Cartesian, Relative Cartesian,
Polar coordinates and direct method to draw a line.
3.6. Explain importance and use of Osnap/ Esnap points.
3.7. Practice to draw with other drawing commands like circle, polygon and other.

4 Create the simple and complex entities

4.1. Draw the lines, circles, arcs, ellipses, elliptical arcs, rays and infinite lines and shapes like
Rectangles, Polygons, Polylines, Splines, donuts
4.2. Practice the adding of hatch with required pattern and adjusting line angle and line space.

5 Use the modifying tools to modify the properties of entities

5.1. Practice the various methods of entity selection like window, cross window, fence, last and
previous methods and deselection method
5.2. Practice the Deletion, breaking and trimming of entities
5.3. Practice the Copying of entities within a drawing, between drawings
5.4. Practice the Chamfering and Filleting of entities
5.5. Practice the making of parallel copies, Mirroring entities and Arraying entities

102
 5.6. Practice the Rearranging of entities by Moving, Rotating and Reordering
5.7. Practice the Resizing of entities by Stretching, Scaling, and Extending.
5.8. Practice the Editing of polylines: Opening, Closing, Curving, Decurving, Joining,
Changing width and editing vertices
5.9. Practice the Exploding of entities
6. Use the drawing information retrieving tools Measure, Divide, Calculate, Display, and
Track
6.1. Divide the entities in to required number of segments
6.2. Calculate the areas defined by points, of closed entities, and combined entities
6.3. Calculate the distance between the entities
6.4. Calculate the angle between the entities
6.5. Display the information about the entities and drawing status
6.6. Track time spent working on a drawing

7. Use the Text tool to create and formatting the various types of text fonts and its styles
7.1. Practice the creating, naming and modifying the text fonts
7.2. Practice the Creation of line text, paragraph text
7.3. Practice the Setting of line text style and its alignment
7.4. Practice the Setting of Paragraph text style and its alignment
7.5. Practice the Changing of line text and Paragraph text
7.6. Practice the use of alternate text editor

8 Use Dimensioning concepts to create dimensions, Edit dimensions,Control dimension styles

& variables and Adding geometric tolerances
8.1. Practice the creating of linear, Angular, Diametral, Radial, Ordinate dimensions
8.2. Practice the creating leaders and annotations
8.3. Practice the making dimensions oblique,
8.4. Edit the dimension text
8.5. Practice the Controlling of dimension properties like arrow types, size, dim line
adjustment, dim offset, text size: primary and secondary units and format
8.6. Practice the Controlling of dimension units, and dimension tolerance

9 Create 2D Drawings
Create 2D drawings of standard mechanical components

Recommended Books
1. Auto cad by George Omura
2. 4MCAD User Guide- IntelliCAD Technology Consortium

103
Key competence to be achieved by students / Suggested Learning Outcomes

S.No Experiment Title Key components

 Open / close AutoCAD program

1 Introduction to CAD  Understands AutoCAD Graphic User
 Interface(GUI) and various toolbars
2 Selecting commands &  Use prompt history window and scripts
Working withdrawing  Practice the setting up a drawing
 Practice the Entity
 Use Scroll bar, pan command, and rotating view
to move around within drawing
a) Viewing drawing
 Control visual elements like Fill, Text, Blips and
 Line weight
3  Use Two dimensional coordinates and Three
 dimensional coordinates
b) Working with coordinates  Use right-hand rule
 Use filters in two and three dimensions
 Define user coordinate system
Creating simple and complex  Draw the simple shapes like lines, circles, arcs
4 and complex shapes like polygons, planes etc.,
entities
 Practice adding of hatch pattern
 Measure the intervals and distance between
Entities.
5 Getting Drawing information  Divide the entities in to segments
 Calculate the areas defined by points, of closed
entities, and Combined entities
 Calculate the areas defined by points, of closed
Use the Text tool to create entities, and Combined entities
6 various types of text fonts and  Use filters in two and three dimensions
its styles  Draw the simple shapes like lines, circles, arcs
and complex shapes like polygons, planes etc.,
 Practice the adding of hatch pattern

 Practice the Controlling of dimension properties like

arrow types, size, dim line adjustment, dim offset, text
7 Dimensioning drawing size , primary and secondary units and format
 Practice the Controlling of dimension units, and
dimension tolerance

8 Isometric Views Use Iso snap command to create Isometric views

9 2D Drawings Use proper 2D commands to create 2D drawings

Course Outcomes CL Linked PO Teaching

Hours

104
 Importance and advantages of CAD. Set drawing area
CO1 and draw geometric shapes and modify as per U/A 1,2,3,9,10 15
requirement

CO2 Add text with required font and size and also U/A 1,2,3,9,10
dimension by various methods 9

CO3 Generate isometric model and draw circle on three U/A 1,2,3,9,10
iso planes 6

CO4 Create 2D drawings with front, side view with all A 1,2,3,10
above features 15

MID SEM-I EXAM

S.No Unit Name R A Remarks

1 Unit-I 1, 2,3,4 5,6

Total Questions 4 2

MID SEM –II EXAM

S.No Unit Name R A Remarks

1 Unit-II 1, 2,3,4 5,6

Total Questions 4 2

Questions to be set for SEE Remarks

SN Unit name
R,U (Q No’s) A (Q No’s)

1 Unit-1 1,2

Unit-2 3,4

Unit-3 5,6

18EE-107P- CAD LAB PRACTISE

MODEL PAPER FOR MID SEM -1 (CIE)
TIME: 1hr Marks: 20M

105
 PART-A
NOTE: Answer all questions 4 X 2 = 8marks
1. Draw a rectangle of 80x30mm by using any CAD software.
2. Draw an equilateral triangle of 50mm side by using any CAD software.
3. Draw a pentagon by circumscribe method for a radius of 60mm by using any CAD software.
4. Draw an ellipse of major and minor axis of 60 & 25mm respectively by using any CAD software.
PART-B
NOTE: Answer any one questions 1 X 2 = 12marks

5. Draw the following using any CAD software without dimensioning.

106
6. Draw the following using any CAD software without dimensioning.

107
 18EE-107P- CAD LAB PRACTISE
DEEE I- SEMESTER MODEL PAPER
MID SEM -II (CIE)
TIME: 1hr Marks: 20M

PART-A
NOTE: Answer all questions 4 X 2 = 8marks
1. Write text ”CAD Lab” with Calibri font style and font size 10 by using any CAD software.
2. Draw a line of 10mm and divide it into four equal parts by modifying the point style to x shape.
3. Add continuous dimensions to divided line drawn in Q no. 2 .
4. Draw a pentagon of side 60mm and calculate its area by using any CAD software.
PART-B
NOTE: Answer any one questions 1 X 2 = 12marks

5. Draw the following using any CAD software and add dimensioning.

108
6. Draw the following using any CAD software and add dimensioning.

109
 18EE-107P- CAD LAB PRACTISE
DEEE I - MODEL PAPER
SEMESTER END EXAMINATION
TIME: 2hr Marks: 40M

PART-A
NOTE: Answer all questions 4 X 4 = 16marks
1.Draw the following fig by using any CAD software, change the line type and add dimensions. Also list
the commands used in sequence.

2. Draw the following arrow mark by using any CAD software, and add complete dimensions.
Also list the commands used in sequence.

.
3.Redraw the following figure and add dimensions as shown in figure.

110
4. Draw isometric view of a cube of 100mm side by using any CAD software.
PART-B
NOTE: Answer any one questions 1 X 24 = 24marks

5. (a) Draw the following using any CAD software and add dimensioning. 15+5+4 marks
(b) List the commands in sequence and also write the procedure
(c) Add title box containing Student PIN, name and college name

111
6. (a) Draw the following using any CAD software and add dimensioning. 15+5+4 marks
(b) List the commands in sequence and also write the procedure
(c) Add title box containing Student PIN, name and college name

112
 BASIC ELECTRICAL WORKSHOP PRACTICE

Course Title : Basic Electrical Workshop Course Code : 18EE-108P

Practice6
Semester :I Course Group : Practical
Teaching Scheme in Periods : 15:00:30 Credits : 1.5
(L:T:P)
Methodology :Lecture + Practical Total Contact Periods :45
CIE : 60 Marks
(Continuous Internal Evaluation) SEE : 40 Marks
(Semester End Examination)

Pre requisites

This course requires the knowledge of basic electricity

Course Outcomes

Course Outcome CL Linked PO Teaching

Hours

CO1 Familiarize with wires, cables, protective devices & handle R/U/ 2,3,4,7,8,10 9
various wiring tools, accessories. A

CO2 Perform various electrical wiring joints U/A 2,3,4,7,8,10 6

CO3 Perform electrical wiring of lighting loads U/A 2,3,4,7,8,10 21

CO4 Populate the PCB U/A 2,3,4,7,8,10 9

Course Contents

1.0 Handle the Wiring Tools and Accessories

1.1 Identify the following electrical wiring tools with respect to
i) Size ii) Shape iii) Purpose iv) Use
a) Screw drivers b) Pliers
c) Drilling machines & Drilling Bits. d) Rawl plug jumper, and poker
e) Voltage/line tester f) Splicers (insulation remover)
g) Standard Wire gauge
1.2 Identify different types of Electrical Wiring accessories with respect to

113
 i) Size ii) Shape iii) Purpose iv) Use
a) Switches b) Ceiling roses
c) Lamp holders and adopters d) Sockets
e) Plug socket f) Plug top
1.3 Identify different types of main switches with respect to
i) Rating ii) Purpose iii) Use.
SP, DP mains, TP,ICDP, ICTP, SPDT, DPDT, TPDT, Change over Knife type/globular, Rotary,
micro, modular switches.
1.4 Identify fuse, 1-pole, 2-pole and 3-pole MCB's, ELCBs and RCCBs with respect to rating, purpose,
and use etc.
1.5 Identify various types of wires and cables with respect to sizes, rating, purpose and use etc.
2.0 Make Electrical Wiring Joints
2.1 Make straight joint/ married joint
2.2 Make T joint
2.3 Make Western union joint
2.4 Make pigtail joint

3.0 Lamp Circuits

3.1 Make a circuit for one lamp controlled by one switch with PVC surface conduit system.
3.2 Make a circuit for two lamps controlled by two switches with PVC surface conduit system.
3.3 Make a circuit for one lamp controlled by one switch and provision of 2/3pin socket.
3.4 Make a circuit for stair case wiring.
3.5 Make a circuit for godown wiring.
3.6 Make a circuit for electrical bell connection.
3.7 Make a circuit for ceiling fan with regulator
3.8 Make a circuit for series connection of lamps
3.9 Make a circuit for parallel connection of lamps

4.0 Soldering
4.1 Identify and handle various soldering tools and components
4.2 Perform soldering on PCB.
Note :
1. All experiments to be done on PVC surface conduit.
2. PVC casing capping may be demonstrated for any one of the exercises.

114
 State Board of Technical Education and Training, Telangana
Model Question paper
DEEE I Semester
Mid Semester-I Examination

Course Code: 18EE-108P Duration: 1 Hour

Course Name: Basic Electrical Workshop Practice Max.Marks: 20

Note: Answer allotted Question.

1. Perform married jointing of given wires.

2. Make T joint of given wires
3. Perform Western union jointing of given wires
4. Make pigtail joint of given wires
5. Perform installation of a wiring circuit for one lamp controlled by one switch with PVC surface
conduit system.
6. Perform installation of a wiring circuit a circuit for two lamps controlled by two switches with
PVC surface conduit system.

115
 State Board of Technical Education and Training, Telangana
Model Question paper
DEEE I Semester
Mid Semester-II Examination

Course Code: 18EE-108P Duration: 1 Hour

Course Name: Basic Electrical Workshop Practice Max. Marks: 20

Note: Answer allotted Question.

1. Connect a circuit for one lamp controlled by one switch and provision of 2/3pin socket.
2. Perform installation of a circuit for stair case wiring.
3. Connect a circuit for godown wiring.
4. Connect a circuit for electrical bell connection.
5. Perform installation a circuit for ceiling fan with regulator.
6. Perform installation a circuit for series connection of lamps.
7. Perform installation a circuit for parallel connection of lamps.

116
 State Board of Technical Education and Training, Telangana
Model Question paper
DEEE I Semester
SEMESTER END EXAMINATION

Course Code: 18EE-108P Duration: 2 Hour

Course Name: Basic Electrical Workshop Practice Max. Marks: 40

Note: Answer allotted Question.

1. Perform married jointing of given wires.

2. Make T joint of given wires
3. Perform Western union jointing of given wires
4. Make pigtail joint of given wires
5. Perform installation of a wiring circuit for one lamp controlled by one switch with PVC surface
conduit system.
6. Perform installation of a wiring circuit a circuit for two lamps controlled by two switches with
PVC surface conduit system.
7. Connect a circuit for one lamp controlled by one switch and provision of 2/3pin socket.
8. Perform installation of a circuit for stair case wiring.
9. Connect a circuit for Godown wiring.
10. Connect a circuit for electrical bell connection.
11. Perform installation a circuit for ceiling fan with regulator.
12. Perform installation a circuit for series connection of lamps.
13. Perform installation a circuit for parallel connection of lamps.
14. Perform soldering wherever it is required in a given electronic device.
15. Perform soldering on PCB.

117
 BASIC SCIENCE LAB PRACTICE (PHYSICS LAB + CHEMISTRY LAB)

Course Title : Basic Science Lab Practice Course Code : 18EE-109P

(Physics Lab + Chemistry
Lab) Course Group : Practical
Semester :I Credits : 1.5
Teaching Scheme in Periods : 15:0:30
(L:T:P) Total Contact Periods :45
Methodology : Lecture & practical SEE : 20 Marks
CIE : 60 Marks (Semester End Examination)
(Continuous Internal Evaluation)
This Course is Common to all Programs of Diploma in Engineering

Physics Lab – 109P(A)

Pre requisites: Knowledge of basic concepts of High School Science, Basic Mathematics

Course objectives: To provide practical knowledge about the basics of Physics instrumentation
and calculations/measurements.

Lecture and Demonstration: 1 Period

1. Introduction to Physics practical and its importance, safety precautions in maintenance of

equipment in the laboratory.
2. Maintenance of apparatus and equipment.
3. Following Do’s and Don’ts.
4. Maintenance of data in manual and record book.
5. Write the procedure of the experiment before the commencement of each experiment.
6. Strictly following of instructions given from time to time by the lecturer-in-charge.
7. Demonstration of each experiment by the lecturer in charge.

Conduct of an experiment: 2 Periods

Course outcomes:

On successful completion of the course, the student will have ability to:

1. Use Vernier caliper to determine the volumes of objects like cylinder and sphere.
2: use Screw gauge to determine thickness /diameter of small objects like glass plate and wire.
3: prove Boyle’s law employing Quill tube.
4: determine the viscosity of liquid using capillary method.
5: verify the parallelogram law and triangle law of forces.

References:

118
 1. Basic Applied Physics – R.K. Gaur
2. Laboratory manual for class XI and XII - NCERT
PHYSICS PRACTICALS

List of experiments

Semester I

1. Vernier calliper - determine the volumes of a cylinder and sphere.

2. Screw gauge - determine thickness of a glass plate and cross section of a wire.
3. Boyle’s law - verification using Quill tube.
4. Coefficient of viscosity of liquid - using capillary method.
5. Parallelogram law and Triangle law of forces – verification.

Course Delivery:

The course will be delivered through lectures, class room interaction, group discussions, graded exercises,
demonstration and practice.

Conduction of experiments: 2 periods/Experiment.

Student must perform experiment individually under the supervision of the lecturer-in charge.

On successful completion of the course, the student will have the ability to attain below Course outcomes
(CO):

Course Outcomes CL Linked Teaching

POs Periods

CO 1 Hands on practice on Vernier Caliper U/A 1,2,3,8,9 L:P::1:2

CO 2 Hands on practice on Screw gauge U/A 1,2,3,8,9 L:P::1:2

CO 3 Boyle’s law verification U/A 1,2,3,8,9 L:P::1:2

CO 4 Coefficient of Viscosity by capillary method U/A 1,2,3,8,9 L:P::1:2

CO 5 Verification of Parallelogram law of forces U/A 1,2,3,8,9

and Triangle law of forces L:P::1:2

CO 6 Relate the answers to the oral questions

Cognitive levels (CL): U=Understand, A=Application

Specific learning outcomes:

119
 Name of the Experiment
Competencies Key competencies

1. Hands on practice on Vernier  Find the Least count  Read the scales
 Fix the specimen in position  Calculate the volume
Calipers – Cylinder and sphere  Read the scales of given object
 Calculate the volume of given
object

2. Hands on practice on Screw  Find the Least count  Read the scales
gauge – Wire and glass plate  Fix the specimen in position  Calculate thickness of
 Read the scales given glass plate
 Calculate thickness of glass plate  Calculate cross section
and cross section of wire
of wire
3. Boyle’s law verification – Quill  Find the length of air
tube  Note the atmospheric pressure column
 Fix the quill tube to retort stand  Find the pressure of
 Find the length of air column enclosed air
 Find the pressure of enclosed air  Find the value P x l
 Find and compare the calculated
value P x l

4. Coefficient of viscosity by  Find the least count of vernier  Find the pressure head
capillary  Fix the capillary tube to aspiratory  Calculate rate of
bottle volume of liquid
Method - water  Find the mass of collected water collected
 Find the pressure head
 Find the radius of
 Calculate rate of volume of liquid
collected capillary tube
 Find the radius of capillary tube  Calculate the
 Calculate the viscosity of water viscosity of water
using capillary method

5. Verification of Parallelogram  Fix suitable weights  Find the angle at

law of forces and Triangle law of  Note the positions of threads on equilibrium point
forces drawing sheet  Constructing
 Find the angle at equilibrium point parallelogram
 Construct parallelogram
 Compare the measured diagonal  Construct triangle
 Construct triangle  Compare the ratios of
 Find the length of sides force and length
 Compare the ratios

120
 EXAMINATION & EXPERIMENTS

S.NO EXAMINATION EXPERIMENTS

1 MIDSEM-I EXPERIMENT NO 1 & 2
2 MIDSEM-II EXPERIMENT NO 3 & 4
SEMESTER END
3 EXPERIMENT NO 1,2,3,4 and 5
EXAMINATION

Scheme of Valuation of SEE

S.No Particulars Marks
1. Objective/Aim 01
2. Apparatus/Equipment 02
3. Observations 02
4. Principle including formula 02
5. Experiment (Tabular form, readings, etc) 05
6. Calculation and Result 05
7. Viva Voce 03
Total 20

CHEMISTRY LAB PRACTICE - 109P(B)

Prerequisite:
Knowledge of basic concepts of chemistry of secondary education.

Course Objectives:
To provide practical knowledge about the basics of preparation of chemical solutions and volumetric
analysis of chemical compounds.

Course Outcomes:

On successful completion of the course, the student will have ability to attain CO:

Course Outcome CL Linked Teaching

PO Periods
CO1 Prepare the standard solution. U/A 1,2,3,8 L:P ::1:2
CO2 Estimate the amount of the chemical U/A 1,2,3,8 L:P ::1:2
substance in the given sample of
solutions(HCl, NaOH& H2SO4).
CO3 Determination of hardness of water in the U/A 1,2,3,8 L:P ::1:2
given sample.
CO4 Relate the answers to the oral questions U/A

U = Understand, A = Application
Course Delivery:

121
 The course will be delivered through lectures, classroom interaction, group discussion,
demonstration and practicals.
Conduction of experiments: Lecture 1 period + Experiment 2 periods.

Student must conduct experiment individually under the supervision of the staff-in-charge.

Lecture and Demonstration: 1 Period

1. Introduction of chemistry practical and its importance, safety precautions in maintenance of
cleanliness and orderliness of chemicals in the laboratory.
2. Maintenance of apparatus and equipment.
3. Follow of DO’s and Don’ts.
4. Maintenance of data in record book.
5. Write the procedure of the experiment before the commencement of each experiment.
6. Strict following of instructions given from time to time by the staff-in- charge.
7. Demonstration of each experiment by the staff in charge.

Course content

Volumetric Analysis: (22.5 Periods)

Volumetric analysis by Titrimetric Method:-

Volumetric Analysis -Titration – Standard Solutions- Concentration of solutions-

Indicators- acid base indicators- selection of indicators-endpoint of titration-Neutralization.
List of experiments:
1. Preparation of 0.05M sodium carbonate solution.
2. Estimation of hydrochloric acid present in 250 ml of solution by using

Standard sodium carbonate solution.

3. Estimation of sodium hydroxide present in 250ml of solution by using standard hydrochloric acid
solution.
4. Estimation of sulphuric acid present in 250ml of solution by using standard sodium hydroxide
solution.
5. Determination of total hardness of water sample by 0.02N EDTA solution.

Specific Learning Outcomes

Upon completion of the course, the student will have ability to

1. Prepare standard sodium carbonate solution.
2. Estimate hydrochloric acid present given volume of solution by using

standard sodium carbonate solution.

3. Estimate sodium hydroxide present in the given volume of solution by using standard
hydrochloric acid solution.
4. Estimate sulphuric acid present in the given volume of solution by using standard sodium
hydroxide solution.
5. Determine the total hardness of water sample by using 0.02N EDTA solution.

Reference Books:

1. Vogel’s Inorganic Qualitative and Quantitative Analysis.

2. Practical chemistry by O.P.Pande& others.
3. Qualitative and quantitative analysis by Alex.

122
 Scheme of Valuation for MID I & II and SEE

Sl. No. Particulars Marks

1 Identification of apparatus/equipment/chemical 2
compounds/tools/etc.

2 Writing Procedure 5

3 Conducting of experiment 4

4 Observation and Results 6

5 Viva-voice 3

Total 20

123
 18EE-109P

BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATION, (C-18)

MIDSEM – I
DEEE I - SEMESTER EXAMINATION
BASIC SCIENCE LAB PRACTICE
TIME: 1 Hour TOTAL MARKS: 20

Instructions: (1) Answer both PART-A AND PART-B on separate answer sheets.
(2) Each question carries TEN marks.

PART-A (PHYSICS LAB)

Perform ONE experiment allotted by the examiner. 1 x 10 = 10

1. Find the volume of given sphere using Vernier caliper.

2. Find the volume of given cylinder using Vernier caliper.
3. Determine the thickness of given glass plate using Screw gauge.
4. Find the cross sectional area of given wire using Screw gauge.

PART-B (CHEMISTRY LAB)

Perform ONE experiment allotted by the examiner. 1 x 10 = 10

5. Prepare 250 ml of 0.05M sodium carbonate solution.

6. Estimate the amount of hydrochloric acid present in 500 ml of the given solution using 0.02M
sodium carbonate solution.
7. Estimate the amount of hydrochloric acid present in 250 ml of the given solution using 0.05M
sodium carbonate solution.

124
 18EE-109P

BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATION, (C-18)

MIDSEM – II
DEEE I - SEMESTER EXAMINATION
BASIC SCIENCE LAB PRACTICE
TIME: 1 Hour TOTAL MARKS: 20

Instructions: (1) Answer both PART-A AND PART-B on separate answer sheets.
(2) Each question carries TEN marks.

PART-A (PHYSICS LAB)

Perform ONE experiment allotted by the examiner. 1 x 10 = 10

1. Verify Boyle’s law using Quill tube.

2. Determine coefficient of viscosity of water using capillary method.

PART-B (CHEMISTRY LAB)

Perform ONE experiment allotted by the examiner. 1 x 10 = 10

3. Estimate the amount of NaOH present in 500 ml solution using 0.02M HCl solution
4. Find the Molarity and estimate the amount of Sulphuric acid present in 250 ml solution using
0.01M NaOH solution.

125
 18EE-109P

BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATION, (C-18)

MODEL PAPER
DEEE– I SEMESTER EXAMINATION

BASIC SCIENCE LAB PRACTICE

Time: 2 Hours] [Total Marks: 40

Instructions: (1) Answer both PART-A AND PART-B on separate answer sheets.
(2) Each question carries TWENTY marks.

PART-A (PHYSICS LAB)

Perform ONE experiment allotted by the examiner. 1 x 20 = 20

1. Find the volume of given sphere using Vernier caliper.

2. Find the volume of given cylinder using Vernier caliper.
3. Determine the thickness of given glass plate using Screw gauge.
4. Find the cross sectional area of given wire using Screw gauge.
5. Verify Boyle’s law using Quill tube.
6. Determine coefficient of viscosity of water using capillary method.
7. Verify parallelogram law of forces.
8. Verify triangle law of forces.

PART-B (CHEMISTRY LAB)

Perform ONE experiment allotted by the examiner. 1 x 20 = 20

9. Prepare 250 ml of 0.05M sodium carbonate solution.

10. Estimate the amount of hydrochloric acid present in 500 ml of the given solution using 0.02M
sodium carbonate solution.
11. Estimate the amount of hydrochloric acid present in 250 ml of the given solution using 0.05M
sodium carbonate solution.
12. Find the Molarity and estimate the amount of NaOH present in 100 ml of the given solution using
0.01M HCl solution.
13. Estimate the amount of Sulphuric acid present in a litre of solution using 0.01M NaOH solution.
14. Determine the total hardness of the given water sample using 0.02N EDTA solution

126
 COMPUTER FUNDAMENTALS LAB PRACTICE
Course Title : Computer Course Code : 18 EE-110P
Fundamentals Lab
Practice Course Group : Practical

Semester :I Credits : 1.5

Teaching Scheme in Periods (L:T:P) :15:0:30 Total Contact Periods : 45

Methodology : Lecture + Practical SEE : 40 Marks

CIE : 60 Marks

This Course is Common to all Programs of Diploma in Engineering

Prerequisites
Knowledge of English comprehension, Basic Computer operation and IO devices

Course Outcome
On successful completion of the course, the students will be able to attain below Course Outcome
(CO):

Course Outcome CL Linked PO Teaching

Hours

CO1 Identify hardware and software components and R,U, 1,2,3,4,8,9,10 5

work with DOS OS A

CO2 Operate the computer system with Windows OS R,U, 1,2,3,4,8,9,10 15

A

CO3 Access the internet R,U, 1,2,3,4,8,9,10 5

A

CO4 Draft the documents using word processing R,U, 1,2,3,4,8,9,10 20

A
software
Total Sessions 45

Legends: R = Remember U= Understand; A= Apply and above levels (Bloom’s revised taxonomy)

Course Contents

COMPUTER BASICS

1. Identify the various components of a Computer system

2. Differentiate between hardware and software
3. State the configuration of a computer system
4. Practice on DOS Internal and External commands.

127
 5. Create and use Batch Files.
6. Know the usage of Editors.

WINDOWS Operating System

7. Exercise on creation of text Files using Notepad, WordPad

8. Exercise on creation of .jpeg, .bmp files using MS Paint
9. Exercise how to use calculator
10. Exercise on creation of folders and organizing files in different folders
11. Exercise on use of Recycle Bin, My Computer and My Documents
12. Exercise on creation of shortcut to files and folders (in other folders) on Desktop
13. Exercise on arranging of icons – name wise, size, type, Modified
14. Exercise on searching, accessing and organizing files / folders
15. Change resolution, colour, appearance, screen server options of Display, date and time

INTERNET
16. Importance of web browser software
17. Structure of URL
18. Create an E-mail account
19. Send & Receive an E-mail
20. Browse the Internet using various search engines

WORD Processing Software

21. Open MS-word and Identify the components on the screen

22. Create a document using MS-word and save it.
23. Create a table using MS-Word and save it.
24. Apply formulas in table & sort the table
25. Convert text into table & table into text.
26. Insertion of new rows and columns in the existing table and changing background colour in Table
27. Merge and split cells in a Table
28. Change the font of a text
29. Exercise with Headers and Footers, paragraph tool bar
30. Insert objects into the document like pictures, shapes, charts, and word-art.
31. Printing a document , page setting, different views of a document
32. Import & export files to & from Word.
33. Create a letter and send to multiple users using mail merge tool of MS-word
34. Create a Simple Newsletter with minimum three columns. Insert a Clip Art in the Newsletter.
35. Create a Resume for a Job Application.
36. Create the Cover Page of a Project Report (use Word Art, insert Picture Image).
37. Prepare the class time table of your class.

Resources:

128
1. Computer Fundamentals Concepts, Systems, Application, D.P.Nagapal, S.Chand
Publication, RP-2014, ISBN: 81-219-2388-3
2. http://www.tutorialsforopenoffice.org/
3. http://www.libreoffice.org/get-help/documentation/

Software Tool
Any open source tool or equivalent proprietary tools
Composition of Educational Components:
Questions for CIE and SEE will be designed to evaluate the various educational components
(Bloom’s taxonomy) such as:

Sl. Bloom’s Category %

No.

1 Remembrance 20

2 Understanding 20

3 Application 60

Mapping Course Outcomes with Program Outcomes:

(Course Outcome linkage to Cognitive Level)

Course Outcome Experiment Linked PO CL Lab

Linked Sessions

CO Identify hardware and software 1,2,3,4,5,6 1,2,3,4,8,9,1 R, U, A 5

1 components and work with DOS 0
OS
CO Operate the computer system 7,8,9,10,11,12,13, 1,2,3,4,8,9,1 R, U, A 15
2 with Windows OS 0
14,15

CO Access the internet 16,17,18,19,20 1,2,3,4,8,9,1 R,U, A 5

3 0

CO Draft the documents using word 21,22,23,24,25,26, 1,2,3,4,8,9,1 U, A 20

4 processing 0
27,28,29,30,31,32,
software
33,34,35,36,37

U-Understanding; A-application/ Analysis; App-Application

Student Activity
1. Observe newspaper pattern of printing.
2. Submit a report of one page

129
3. Collection of data

Model Question Bank

1. Identify Physical components of a Computer System.

2. Demonstrate Internal and External DOS Commands and differentiate between them.
3. Create and Rename the file using DOS Commands.
4. Create a directory and copy a file inside the directory using DOS Commands.
5. Demonstrate the basic formatting features in Text Editors.
6. Create two file in a folder and place the shortcut of these files on the desktop.
7. Demonstrate how search engine may be used in browsing Internet.
8. Create an E-mail account
9. Create and Send an E-mail with a picture attachment.
10. Demonstrate how documents can be downloaded using Internet.
11. Using Word Processor Application create a Simple Newsletter with minimum of three
columns. Insert a Clip art in the newsletter.
12. Using Word Processor Application create a Resume for a Job application.
13. Using Word Processor Application create the cover page of a Project Report (use
Word Art, insert Picture Image).
14. Prepare the class time table for your class using Word Processor Application.

DEEE SKILL UPGRADATION ACTIVITY SHEET

Course Title : Skill Upgradation Credits :2.5

130
Semester : I Total Contact Periods : 105
Methodology : Activities

Suggested Course Outcomes

CO.1 Address the identified needs of the community collaboratively to facilitate positive
social change.
a. Prepare a chart related to the topics covered in the present semester.
b. Listen to expert talk, guest lecture, youtube video and write a summary.
c. Participate in Haritha Haram and submit a small report about the activities.
d. Prepare a report / PPT / poster on waste water recycling or any eco-friendly practices.
e. Seminar on problems with possible solutions in the campus or nearby places
f. Group discussions or enacting a play on topics creating awareness about socio-economic
problems
g. Take up a case study on identification of latest technologies to tackle day to day problems
such as pollution control or traffic management and submit a report / PPT/ poster
h. Participate in NCC

(PO5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10)

CO.2 Listen attentively to others and respond appropriately

a. Listen to expert talk, guest lecture, youtube video and write a summary.
b. Participating in Group discussions or enacting a play on topics creating awareness about
socio-economic problems that can be mitigated by technologies.
c. Participate in quiz on technical aspects or current affairs
d. Participate in Mock Interview

(PO5, 7, 8, 9, 10)

CO.3 Adapt your style to the occasion, task, and audience

a. Group discussions or enacting a play on topics creating awareness about socio-economic
problems that can be mitigated by technologies.
b. Seminar on problems with possible solutions in the campus or nearby places
c. Participate in Mock Interview

(PO5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10)

CO.4 Articulate ideas in various formats including oral, written, nonverbal, visual, and
electronic devices.
a. Prepare a chart related to the topics covered in the present semester.
b. Refer to an e-journal and submit a summary report on upcoming technologies.

131
 c. Visit factory / industry and submit a report/PPT on the observations made.
d. Prepare a mini project and submit report.
e. Prepare a report / PPT / poster on waste water recycling or any eco-friendly practices.
f. Take up a case study on identification of latest technologies to tackle day to day problems
such as pollution control or traffic management and submit a report / PPT/ poster
g. Seminar on problems with possible solutions in the campus or nearby places
h. Participate in Mock Interview

(PO5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10)

CO.5 Demonstrate ability to recognize and effectively manage ambiguous ideas,

experiences and situations
a. Take up a case study on identification of latest technologies to tackle day to day problems
such as pollution control or traffic management and submit a report / PPT/ poster
b. Seminar on problems with possible solutions in the campus or nearby places

(PO5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10)

CO.6 Analyze the interconnections between individuals and society as well as how
individual actions have an impact on others.
a. Participate in Haritha Haram and submit a small report about the activities.
b. Participate in Swatch Bharath and write an essay on the importance of the program
c. Participate in NCC

(PO5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10)

CO.7 Utilize others’ ideas, strengths, knowledge, and abilities to foster an inclusive
environment & Develop and sustain healthy and meaningful relationships with others
a. Prepare a mini project and submit report.
b. Participate in Haritha Haram and submit a small report about the activities.
c. Participate in Swatch Bharath and write an essay on the importance of the program
d. Participate in NCC

(PO5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10)

CO.8 Ability to recognize their strengths and those of others to work towards a shared
vision.
a. Prepare a mini project and submit report.
b. Participate in Haritha Haram and submit a small report about the activities.
c. Participate in Swatch Bharath and write an essay on the importance of the program
d. Participate in NCC

(PO5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10)
CO.9 Act in alignment with one’s own values to contribute to one’s life-long growth and
learning.
a. Physical activities such as sports, yoga, meditation and other relaxation techniques

132
 (PO5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10)

CO.10 Gain, process, and act upon knowledge regarding the effects of individual,
community, national, and international level choices on ecosystems and people.
a. Prepare a report / PPT / poster on waste water recycling or any eco-friendly practices.
b. Take up a case study on identification of latest technologies to tackle day to day problems
such as pollution control or traffic management and submit a report / PPT/ poster
c. Take up a case study on identification of latest technologies to tackle day to day problems
such as pollution control or traffic management and submit a report / PPT/ poster
d. Seminar on problems with possible solutions in the campus or nearby places

(PO5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10)

CO Outcome CO/PO
Mapping

CO1 Address the identified needs of the community collaboratively to 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10

facilitate positive social change.
CO2 Listen attentively to others and respond appropriately 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10

CO3 Adapt your style to the occasion, task, and audience 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10

CO4 Articulate ideas in various formats including oral, written, nonverbal, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10

visual, and electronic devices.
CO5 Demonstrate ability to recognize and effectively manage ambiguous 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10
ideas, experiences and situations
CO6 Analyze the interconnections between individuals and society as well 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10
as how individual actions have an impact on others.
CO7 Utilize others’ ideas, strengths, knowledge, and abilities to foster an 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10
inclusive environment & Develop and sustain healthy and
meaningful relationships with others
CO8 Ability to recognize their strengths and those of others to work 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10
towards a shared vision
CO9 Act in alignment with one’s own values to contribute to one’s life- 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10
long growth and learning.
CO10 Gain, process, and act upon knowledge regarding the effects of 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10
individual, community, national, and international level choices on
ecosystems and people.

Note: The above COs may be mapped to other POs from 1 to 4 apart from PO’s 5 to 10
depending on the topic

Suggested Student Activities

1. Prepare a chart related to the topics covered in the present semester.

2. Refer to an e-journal and submit a summary report on upcoming technologies.

133
 3. Visit factory / industry and submit a report/PPT on the observations made.
4. Prepare a mini project and submit report.
5. Listen to expert talk, guest lecture, youtube video and write a summary.
6. Participate in Haritha Haram and submit a small report about the activities.
7. Prepare a report / PPT / poster on waste water recycling or any eco-friendly practices.
8. Take up a case study on identification of latest technologies to tackle day to day problems such as
pollution control or traffic management and submit a report / PPT/ poster
9. Participate in Swatch Bharath and write an essay on the importance of the program
10. Group discussions or enacting a play on topics creating awareness about socio-economic
problems
11. Physical activities such as sports, games, yoga, meditation and other relaxation techniques
12. Participate in quiz on technical aspects or current affairs
13. Seminar on problems with possible solutions in the campus or nearby places
14. Participate in NCC
15. Participate in Mock interviews

Note: The above student activities will be assessed using rubrics. A sample rubrics template is given
below. The subject teacher can assess students using rubrics with atleast four relevant aspects.

1. RUBRICS MODEL (For assessing Presentation skills)

Aspects Needs improvement Satisfactory Good Exemplary

Collection Collects very Collect much Collects Collects a

134
 Information with some basic
limited great deal of
very information with
of data information information with
limited relevance little bit of
relevance
to the topic irrelevance
Presents data well;
Presents data well Presents data in an
Presentation Clumsy but presentation
but need to improve understandable yet
of data presentation of data needs to be more
clarity concise manner
meaningful
Performs all
Fulfill Performs very Performs very Performs
duties of
team’s roles little duties but little duties and is nearly all
assigned
& duties Unreliable. inactive duties
team roles
Rarely does Usually does Always does
Normally
Shares the assigned the assigned the assigned
does the
work work; often work; rarely work without
assigned
equally needs needs having to be
work
reminding reminding reminded
Usually does Talks good;
Listens, but
Interaction with most of the but never Listens and
sometimes
other team talking; rarely show interest speaks a fair
talks too
mates allows others in listening to amount
much
to speak others
Audibility and Very little
Hardly audible and Audible most of the
clarity in audibility and Audible and clear
unclear time with clarity
speech clarity
Some depth of
Lacks content Insight and depth
Little depth of content
Understanding understanding and of content
content understanding is
content is clearly a work in understanding are
understanding evident but needs
progress evident
improvement
Content is Content is accurate
Content is accurate
inaccurate and but some Content is
and information is
information is not information is not accurate and
Content not presented in a
presented in a presented in a information is
Presentation logical order
logical order logical order but is presented in a
making it difficult
making it difficult still generally easy logical order
to follow
to follow to follow

2. Suggested additional aspects for assessing Leadership Qualities:

1. Carrying self
2. Punctuality
3. Team work abilities
4. Moral values
5. Communication skills
6. Ensures the work is done in time

3. Suggested additional aspects for assessing “Participation in social task”

1 Interested to know the current situation of society.

135
 2 Shows interest to participate in given social task.
3 Reliable
4 Helping nature
5 Inter personal skills
6 Ensures task is completed

4. Suggested additional aspects for assessing “Participation in Technical task”

1. Updated to new technologies

2. Identifies problems in society that can be solved using technology
3. Interested to participate in finding possible technical solutions to identified project
4. Reliable
5. Interpersonal skills

5. Suggested additional aspects for Carrying Self:

1 Stand or sit straight.

2 Keep your head level.
3 Relax your shoulders.
4 Spread your weight evenly on both legs.
5 If sitting, keep your elbows on the arms of your chair, rather than tightly against your sides.
6 Make appropriate eye contact while communicating.
7 Lower the pitch of your voice.
8 Speak more clearly.

RUBRICS FOR GENERAL SUBJECTS

ENGLISH

136
Method of evaluation of the student activities ( Rubrics)

Model Rubrics

S.No Sub Performance

activity excellent Good Satisfactory Need
improvement
1 Step-1 Data was collected Data was collected Data was Data was
from more than from three to four collected from collected only
four sources. sources two sources. one source.
2 Step-2 All materials and Almost all The materials The materials
data required for materials and data and data and data
the activity were required for the required for the required for the
accurately activity were activity were activity were
prepared based on accurately accurately inaccurately
the data collected prepared based on prepared based prepared
independently. the data collected on the data
independently. collected with
the help of
teacher.
3 Step-3 Procedures were Procedures were Procedures that Procedures that
outlined in a step- outlined in a step- outlined were outlined were
by-step fashion by-step fashion, complete with 1 not sequential,
that could be require or 2 gaps and & performed
followed by explanation & require the activity in a
anyone & performed the explanation & poor way
performed the activity performed the
activity effectively. activity normally
effectively.
4 Step-4 Presented/ Presented/ Presented/ Presented/
explained the explained the explained the explained the
information about information about information information
the activity in the activity in about the about the
logical, interesting logical sequence activity in activity
sequence with with visuals or logical sequence without
attractive visuals diagrams. with less visuals sequence and
or diagrams. or diagrams. visuals or
diagrams.
5 Conclusio Provided a Provided a Student provided Conclusions
n/ detailed conclusion / a conclusion/ /summary was
summary conclusion/ summary clearly summary less not relevant.
summary clearly based on the data effectively
based on the data and activity
and activity

Note: Separate rubrics may be prepared according to the activity

I SEMESTER

137
 SKILL UPGRADATION IN - BASIC ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS

ACTIVITY ASSESSMENT Steps

1. Mathematical concepts
2. Procedure
3. Explanation
4. Working with others
5. Mathematical errors

ACTIVITIES

1. Prepare a presentation to explain Logarithms.

2. Prepare a list of articles purchased from a super market and arrange in a matrix form to
Compute the total amount using matrix multiplication.

3. Prepare a presentation to resolve a Partial fraction into simpler fractions.

4. Prepare a presentation stating the applications of Trigonometry.

5. List the methods to solve system of equations using Matrices and Determinants. Describe
their features.

6. Visit the library, refer books on Mathematics and collect the detailsrelated to 2 Mathematicians.

7. Prepare a presentation to solve a triangle ABC in different cases.

CO / PO - MAPPING OF ACTIVITIES

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10
CO1 3 2 2 1 1 2 2 3

CO2 3 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 3

CO3 3 2 2 1 1 2 2 3

CO4 3 2 2 1 1 2 2 3

CO5 3 2 2 1 1 2 2 3

CO6 3 2 2 1 1 2 2 3

CO7 3 2 2 1 1 2 2 3

Rubrics for Activity assessment

CATEGORY 4 3 2 1
Mathematical Explanation shows Explanation shows Explanation shows Explanation shows

138
Concepts complete substantial some very limited
understanding of understanding of understanding of understanding of
the mathematical the mathematical the mathematical the underlying
concepts used to concepts used to concepts needed to concepts needed to
solve the solve the solve the solve the
problem(s). problem(s). problem(s). problem(s) OR is
not written.
Procedures Typically, uses an Typically, uses an Sometimes uses an Rarely uses an
efficient and effective procedure effective procedure effective procedure
effective procedure to solve the to solve problems, to solve problems.
to solve the problem(s). but does not do it
problem(s). consistently.

Explanation Explanation is Explanation is Explanation is a Explanation is

detailed and clear. clear. little difficult to difficult to
understand, but understand and is
includes critical missing several
components. components OR
was not included.
Working with Student was an Student was an Student cooperated Student did not
Others engaged partner, engaged partner with others, but work effectively
listening to but had trouble needed prompting with others.
suggestions of listening to others to stay on-task.
others and working and/or working
cooperatively cooperatively.
throughout lesson.
Mathematical 90-100% of the Almost all (85- Most (75-84%) of More than 75% of
Errors steps and solutions 89%) of the steps the steps and the steps and
have no and solutions have solutions have no solutions have
mathematical no mathematical mathematical mathematical
errors. errors. errors. errors.

PASS SCORE: 2.5

STUDENT ASSESSMENT by RUBRICS

AVER
S.NO PIN CO1 CO2 CO3 CO4 CO5 CO6 CO7
AGE

SEMESTER – I

139
 SKILL UPGRATION – BASIC PHYSICS

TASK

LEVEL 1: Concept, Ethical Data, Materials, Source (Library/internet/others)

LEVEL 2: Methodology/procedure

LEVEL 3: Analysis/experiment

LEVEL 4: Interpretation/inference/evaluation.

Bridge activity: - Visiting your college Library:

(A) Prepare a list of available reference books in Physics with details such as author, publisher,
edition etc.
(B) Prepare a list of Physics/Science journals, magazines, monographs with details.
(C) Prepare a log book of your visits to college library with brief description.

Activities:-

1. Discover some physical equations and apply principle of homogeneity.

2. Visit your College Physics laboratory. Collect equal amounts (mass in gm) of water and
mercury. Calculate the density of each in CGS units. Express them in SI system of units using
dimensional analysis. Infer the result.

3. Identify the bodies which have rolling objects like wheels, ball bearings. Prepare a chart with
drawings and explain the importance of rolling friction.

4. Identify the objects where you apply various methods of reducing friction. Make each method as
a module to one individual. Integrate all modules and generate a chart with brief explanation by
the use of drawings.

5. Take two vectors with varying angles of inclination. Find the resultant using triangle law of
vector addition by drawing the vectors in each case on a graph paper. Draw the conclusions.
Correlate the result using parallelogram law of vector addition.

6. Three forces F1, F2 and F3 are acting on a body with an angles θ1, θ2, and θ3 with the horizontal
respectively. Calculate the resultant force acting on that body. Draw the diagram.

140
7. Survey the places where curved paths are banked. Take photographs and reconstruct on the chart.
Prepare a report.

8. Verify Hooke’s Law by performing experiment using weights, spring and ruler.

9. Explore the internet. Prepare a power point report on surface tension and wetting.

10. Construct a model thermometer having centigrade scale and absolute scale with the help of
available simple objects. Formulate the method of development.

11. Debate on green house effect and global warming. Justify the advantage of green house effect.
Prepare a video clip and power point report with diagrams.

12. Design a mini wind mill as an application of conversion of energy.

NOTE:The above activities are indicative. The teacher may assign any other activity relevant
to the course based on resources available.

Course Outcomes (CO) Linked Pos Activity

Hours
CO1 Application of principle of homogeneity PO1, PO2 3
CO2 Conversion of one system to other system using
PO1, PO2, PO3 3
dimensions
CO3 Preparation of a chart with drawings explaining
PO1, PO2, PO8 3
the importance of friction
CO4 Preparation of a chart on reducing friction PO1, PO2, PO4,
3
PO5, PO8
CO5 Triangle law of vector addition - graphical
analysis – correlation with parallelogram law of PO1, PO4, 3
vector addition
CO6 Calculation of resultant force by component
PO1, PO2, PO4 3
method
CO7 Banking of roads – practical observations PO1, PO2, PO5 3
CO8 Verification of Hooke’s law with simple materials PO1, PO2, PO3,
3
PO4
CO9 Power point report on surface tension and PO1, PO2, PO7,
3
wetting by exploring internet PO9, PO10,
CO10 Construct a model thermometer having
centigrade scale and absolute scale. Formulate PO1, PO2, PO4 3
the development.
CO11 Debate ongreen house effect and global warming. PO6, PO7 3
Advantage of green house effect - justification.

141
 Prepare a video clip and power point report with
diagrams.
CO12 Design a wind mill as an application of conversion
PO1, PO2,PO10 3
of energy

Rubrics for Task Assessments

General Scale for scoring student performance in Skill Upgradation

Type of
4 3 2 1
Skill/Score
All Data/Material All Data/Material All All Data/Material
was collected one was collected more Data/Material was collected
Data/Material
time independently. than one time was collected several times
Collection
independently. several times with assistance.
independently.
Procedures were Procedures were Procedures were Procedures that
outlined in a step- outlined in a step-by- outlined in a were outlined
by-step fashion thatstep fashion that step-by-step were incomplete
could be followed could be followed by fashion, but had or not sequential,
Methodology/
by anyone without anyone without 1 or 2 gaps that even after Expert
Procedure
additional additional require feedback had
explanations. explanations. Expert explanation been given.
help was needed to even after expert
accomplish this. feedback.
Quality of Skill is Skill is mastered to Skill is present Skill needs
Activity/
high. the level of but with errors improvement.
Development
expectation. and omissions.
Student provided a Student provided a Student No conclusion
Interpretation/ detailed conclusion somewhat detailed provided a was apparent.
summary clearly. conclusion clearly. conclusion with
some reference.

NOTE: The above types of skills are indicative. The teacher may change the skills
depending on type of activity.

PASS SCORE: 2.5

STUDENT ASSESSMENT (RUBRICS)

S. PIN Course Outcomes (Skill Activities) AVE

142
 RAG
N E
O CO CO CO
CO1 CO2 CO3 CO4 CO5 CO6 CO7 CO8 CO9
10 11 12

GENERAL ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY

Suggested Skill Upgradation Activities
Activity – 1
Oral/Power point presentation on the different types of orbitals and electronic configuration:
Step-1: Data collection on orbitals and rules to be followed to write the electronic
configuration .
Step -2: Prepare for a oral/power point presentation on shapes of orbitals and electronic configuration
Step-3: Explain the electronic configuration with oral presentation or power point presentation
Step-4: Submission of the report.

Activity – 2
Oral/Power point presentation on ionic and covalent bonding:
Step-1: Data collection on electronic configuration and chemical bonding.
Step -2: Prepare for a oral/power point presentation on ionic and covalent bonding
Step-3: Explain the ionic and covalent bonding with oral presentation or power point presentation
Step-4: Submit the report along with ppt.

Activity – 3

Preparation and study of physical properties of True Solution, Colloidal Solution, and Suspension

Step-1: Data/ literature collection.

Step-2: Summarization of data collected.
Step -3: Preparation/ collection of true solution, colloidal solution and suspention
Step-4: Recording of observations and comparison of physical properties like Nature of the solutions,
Diffusion of the solution, Sedimentation, Visibility of particles, Tyndall effect.
Step-5: Overall presentation of the activity

Activity – 4

Study of the acidic, basic or neutral nature of water sample collected from various sources.

Step-1: Data/ literature collection.

Step-2: Summarization of data/ literature collected.
Step -3: Collection of water samples from various sources.

143
Step-4: Recording the pH values of different water samples by using universal indicator, pH paper, pH
meter etc.
Step-5: Overall presentation of the activity

Activity – 5

Comparison of renewable and non renewable energy sources.

Step-1: Data/ literature collection.

Step-2: Summarization of data/ literature collected.
Step -3: Comparison of renewable and non renewable energy sources available.
Step-4: Identify the advantages of renewable energy sources over non renewable energy sources in
protecting the environment.
Step-5: Overall presentation of the activity

Activity – 6

Study and analysis of ecosystem (lake, pond etc) existing in your surroundings.

Step-1: Data/ literature collection.

Step-2: Summarization of data/ literature collected.
Step -3: Study of the biotic and abiotic components and effect of the pollutants if any on them.
Step-4: Prepare a report on the selected ecosystem and suggest measures to protect it from pollution.
Step-5: Overall presentation of the activity

Activity – 7
Study of bio diversity in your surroundings.
Step-1: Data/ literature collection.
Step-2: Summarization of data/ literature collected.
Step -3: Study of the biodiversity in your surroundings, understand its advantages and threats that
affect the bio diversity.
Step-4: Prepare a report on the selected bio diversity and suggest measures to protect it.
Step-5: Overall presentation of the activity

Activity – 8

Importance of forests resources.

Step-1: Data/ literature collection.

Step-2: Summarization of data/ literature collected.
Step -3: Study of the nearby forest area.
Step-4: Prepare a report on the forest selected and report its importance and resources.
Step-5: Overall presentation of the activity

Activity – 9

Importance of osmosis and reverse osmosis.

144
Step-1: Data/ literature collection.
Step-2: Summarization of data/ literature collected.
Step -3: Demonstrate the process of osmosis and reverse osmosis by using any semi permeable
membrane .
Step-4: Prepare a report on the advantages of osmosis and reverse osmosis.
Step-5: Overall presentation of the activity

Activity – 10

Method of purification of drinking water adopted at your residence .

Step-1: Data/ literature collection.

Step-2: Summarization of data/ literature collected.
Step -3: Explanation of the process through oral presentation or power point presentation
Step-4: Prepare a report on the advantages of the process.
Activity – 11

Oral/Power point presentation on the softening of water by different methods and comparison.
Step-1: Data/ literature collection.
Step-2: Summarization of data/ literature collected.
Step -3: Explain the process and compare them with the help of power point presentation.
Step-4: Submit the report.
Activity – 12
Study of electrolytes and non electrolytes .

Step-1: Data/ literature collection.

Step-2: Summarization of data/ literature collected.
Step -3: Differentiate the electrolyte from non electrolyte through the process of electrolysis.
Step-4: Prepare a report on electrolytes and non electrolytes.
Step-5: Overall presentation of the activity

Note: Any other skill upgradation activity related to the course may be taken up.

Mapping of POs to Skill Upgradation Activities

S.N Name of the activity Linked POs

o
1 Oral/Power point presentation on the different types of 1,2,4,8,9
orbitals and electronic configuration
2 Oral/Power point presentation on ionic and covalent bonding 1,2,4,8,9
3 Preparation and study of physical properties of True Solution, 1,2,3,4,8,9,10
Colloidal Solution, and Suspension
4 Study of the acidic, basic or neutral nature of water sample 1,2,3,4,8,9,10
collected from various sources
5 Comparison of renewable and non renewable energy sources 1,2,4,5,6,7,8,9,10
6 Study and analysis of ecosystem (lake, pond etc) existing in 1,2,4,5,6,7,8,9,10

145
 your surroundings
7 Study of bio diversity in your surroundings 1,2,4,5,6,7,8,9,10
8 Importance of forests resources 1,2,4,5,6,7,8,9,10
9 Importance of osmosis and reverse osmosis 1,2,3,4,5,6,8,9,10
10 Method of purification of drinking water adopted at your 1,2,4,5,8,9
residence
11 Study of electrolytes and non electrolytes 1,2,3,4,8,9
12 Power point presentation on the softening of water by 1,2,3,4,8,9
different methods and comparison

Method of evaluation of the student activities ( Rubrics)

Model Rubrics

S Sub Performance
. activity excellent Good Satisfactory Need
N improvement
o
1 Step-1 Data was collected Data was collected Data was Data was
from more than from three to four collected from collected only
four sources. sources two sources. one source.
2 Step-2 All materials and Almost all The materials and The materials
data required for materials and data data required for and data
the activity were required for the the activity were required for the
accurately prepared activity were accurately activity were
based on the data accurately prepared prepared based on inaccurately
collected based on the data the data collected prepared
independently. collected with the help of
independently. teacher.
3 Step-3 Procedures were Procedures were Procedures that Procedures that
outlined in a step- outlined in a step- outlined were outlined were
by-step fashion that by-step fashion, complete with 1 not sequential,
could be followed require explanation or 2 gaps and & performed the
by anyone & & performed the require activity in a
performed the activity effectively. explanation & poor way
activity effectively. performed the
activity normally
4 Step-4 Presented/ Presented/ Presented/ Presented/
explained the explained the explained the explained the
information about information about information about information
the activity in the activity in the activity in about the
logical, interesting logical sequence logical sequence activity
sequence with with visuals or with less visuals without
attractive visuals or diagrams. or diagrams. sequence and
diagrams. visuals or

146
 diagrams.
5 Conclusio Provided a detailed Provided a Student provided Conclusions
n/ conclusion/ conclusion / a conclusion/ /summary was
summary summary clearly summary clearly summary less not relevant.
based on the data based on the data effectively
and activity and activity

Note: Separate rubrics may be prepared according to the activity.

147
DIPLOMA IN ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING
II SEMESTER

148
 II SEMESTER
TEACHING AND EXAMINATION SCHEME

Sl Course Course Name Teaching Scheme Examination Scheme

No Code Continuous internal Semester end examination
Instruction Total Credits
periods periods evaluation
per per
week semest
er
L T P Mid Mid Internal Max Marks Total Min
sem1 sem evaluati Min Marks marks marks for
2 on passing
including
internal
1 18EE- Advanced English 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35
3 1
201F
2 18EE- Engineering 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35
202F Mathematics 3 1

3 18EE- Applied Physics 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35

3 1
203F
4 18EE- Engineering 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35
Chemistry
204F &Environmental 3 1
Studies
5 18EE- Electrical 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35
205C Engineering & 3 1
Electronics Devices
6 18EE- Advanced 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
206P Engineering
Drawing
7 18EE- Advanced Computer 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
207P Aided Drafting

8 18EE- Advanced Electrical 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50

208P Workshop Practice

9 18EE- Applied Science 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50

209P- Lab Practice
A+B
1018EE- Information 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
210P Technology Lab
Practice
11 Skill Upgradation 0 0 7 105 2.5 0 0 Rubrics -- -
20 5 17 630 25 200 200 200 400 170 1000 425

Activities: student performance is to be assessed through Rubrics

149
 ADVANCED ENGLISH

Course Title :Advanced Course Code : 18EE-201F

English
Semester : II Course Group : Foundation

Teaching Scheme in Periods (L:T:P) : 45:15:0 Credits :3

Methodology : Total Contact Periods : 60

Communicative
Language
Lecture +
Tutorial
CIE : 60 Marks SEE : 40 Marks

This Course is Common to all Programs of Diploma in Engineering

Prerequisites: Basic knowledge of English Language

COURSE OUTCOMES
At the end of the course the students will have the ability to:
201.1 communicate effectively in English
201.2 listen for specific details and use prepositions appropriately.
201.3 learn vocabulary and use them in professional interaction
201.4 analyse errors and make communication flawless
201.5 comprehend central idea and minute details
201.6 make notes, write resumes, prepare cover letters and draft reports

CO-PO Matrix

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 Mapping POs

201.1 2 2 2 -- 1 -- -- 3 3 3 1,2,3,5,8,9,10
201.2 2 2 1 2 -- -- -- 3 3 3 1,2,3,4,8,9,10

201.3 2 2 -- 1 1 1 2 3 3 3 1,2,4,5,6,7,8,9,10

201.4 2 2 2 2 1 -- 2 3 3 3 1,2,3,4,5,7,8,9,10

201.5 2 2 2 -- 1 -- 2 3 3 3 1,2,3,57,8,9,10

201.6 2 2 -- -- -- -- -- 3 3 3 1,2,8,9,10

150
 COURSE CONTENTS

UNIT – 1 SPEAKING Duration: 12 Periods

1. Expressing Obligation
2. Fixing and Cancelling Appointments
3. Extending and Accepting Invitations
4. Giving Instructions
5. Asking for and Giving Directions

UNIT - 2: LISTENING Duration: 6 Periods

6. The Here and Now!

UNIT –3: VOCABULARY Duration: 8 Periods

7. How to Learn a New Word
8. Synonyms, Antonyms and One word Substitutes

UNIT -4: GRAMMAR Duration: 12 Periods

9. Reported Speech
10. Error Analysis - I
11. Error Analysis - II
12. Error Analysis - III

UNIT - 5: READING Duration: 6 Periods

13. An Environmental challenge

14. The Will to Succeed
15. Waiting for Mr. Clean

UNIT- 6: WRITING Duration: 16 Periods

16. Data Interpretation- I
17. Data Interpretation- II
18. Data Interpretation- III

151
 19. Writing a Resume
20. Writing a Cover Letter
21. Note Making
22. Writing a Report

Suggested Learning Outcomes:

On completion of the course the students will be able to:

 express obligation, fix and cancel appointments

 extend, accept and decline invitations.
 give instructions and directions
 identify and use prepositions
 enhance their vocabulary
 learn synonyms, antonyms and use one word substitutes
 read and understand main ideas and answer the questions
 write in reported speech
 identify and correct common errors
 interpret data and write a paragraph
 learn to prepare cover letter and resume
 make notes and write reports

152
 Internal evaluation
Test Units Marks Pattern

Mid Sem 1 Speaking 20 Part A 4 short answer questions

Listening Part B 2 short essay questions with internal
choice
Part C 2 essay questions with internal choice
Mid Sem 2 Vocabulary 20 Part A 4 short answer questions
Grammar Part B 2 short essay questions with internal
choice
Part C 2 essay questions with internal choice
Slip Test 1 Speaking 5 2 questions out of 3 questions
Listening

Slip Test 2 Vocabulary 5 2 questions out of 3 questions

Grammar
Assignment One assignment per one 5 Different group assignments of higher order
semester questions that develop problem solving skills
and critical thinking should be given

Seminars One seminar per one 5 Oral presentations using audio –visual
semester equipment, charts, etc.
Total 60

Suggested Student Activities

 Listen to a passage /conversation / dialogue / speech and answer the questions

 Group Discussions
 Seminars
 Review a movie
 Review a book
 Narrating a story
 Chain stories
 JAM
 Speak about incidents /events /memories /dreams /role model
 Interview with famous personalities
 Reading for main ideas and specific details
 Summarizing
 Picture description
 Writing a recipe

153
  Describing a process
 Giving directions using maps
 Surveys
 Filling forms
 e-mail etiquette
 Preparing reports on field visits, experiments, projects

Textbook: English for Polytechnics

(English Textbook for the First-Year Diploma Students)

REFERENCES:
1. Practical English Grammar by A.J Thomson and A.V. Martinet
2. A Course in Phonetics and Spoken English by J. Sethi and P.V Dhamija
3. Word Power Made Easy by Norman Lewis
4. Keep Talking by FriederikeKlippel
5. More Grammar Games by Mario Rinvolucri and Paul Davis
6. Essential English Grammar by Raymond Murphy
7. Spoken English-A Self Learning Guide to Conversation Practice by V Sasi Kumar

e-learning:

1.www.duolingo.com
2. www.bbc.co.uk
3. www.babbel.com
4. www.merriam-webster.com
5. www.ello.org
6. www.lang-8.com
7. youtube.com

8. Hello English(app)
9. mooc.org
10. https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in

154
 MID SEM-I EXAM
S.No Unit Name R U A Remarks
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-I 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)

6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-II 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)
Total Questions 4 4 4
MID SEM –II EXAM
S.No Unit Name R U A Remarks
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-III 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-IV 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)
Total Questions 4 4 4

Semester End Examination

Questions to be set for SEE Remarks

Sl No Unit No.
R U A  
1 I
1 9(a) 13(a)  
2 II  
3 III
2 10(a) 14(a)  
4 IV  
4 9(b) 13(b)

5 V 5, 6 11(a) 15(a)  
 
3 11(b) 15(b)  
10(b) 14(b)  
6 VI 7,8  
12(a) 16(a)  

155
 12(b) 16(b)
Total Questions 8 8 8  

Remembering (R) 1 Mark

Legend: Understanding (U) 3 Marks

Application (A) 5 Marks

18EE-201F
BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATION (C-18)
DEEE SECOND SEMESTER 18EE-201F
ADVANCED ENGLISH
MID SEM - I
Time : 1 Hour Total Marks: 20 Marks
PART-A 4X1=4
Instructions: Answer all the questions. Each question carries one mark.

1. I strongly recommend you to read this novel. (Rewrite the sentence using suitable words of
obligation).
2. Invite your friend to attend a seminar on Yoga.
3. Fill in the blanks using suitable prepositions.
a. I usually go to polytechnic _______ foot.
b. Suman has been suffering ___________ malaria.

4. Fill in the blanks using suitable preposition.

a. She is jealous ______________ her best friend.
b. Madhu jumped __________ the well.
PART-B 2X3=6
Instructions: Answer the followingquestions. Each question carries three marks.

5. a) Extend an invitation to your friend to attend your brother’s marriage and write

expressions showing his / her acceptance or inability.

Or
b) Give directions to your sister on how to reach the nearest branch office of State Bank of India
from your house.

156
6. a) Give directions to your house from polytechnic using at least three prepositions.

Or
b) Complete the paragraph using suitable prepositions.
We went _____the zoo ____ Sunday. We saw a python ____ a branch of a tree. There were
several parrots _______ the cages. In the zoo, we boarded a train that passed __________
a tunnel. There we saw a lion going ______ its cave.

PART-C 2 X 5 = 10
Instructions: Answer the following questions. Each question carries five marks.
7. a) Write on how to send an image from your mobile to another mobile number using WhatsApp.

Or
b) Write a dialogue to fix an appointment with an orthopedic surgeon on 5 th January at
10.00 a.m.
8. a) Use the following words or phrases in your own sentences.
i) across ii) against iii) in front of iv) since v) along
Or
b) Correct the words in italics.
i. I’ve got the key on my pocket.
ii. She was sitting among her two friends.
iii. There is a tree besides the house.
iv. I was born in Monday.
v. He came in the room.

157
 18EE-201F
BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATION (C-18)
DEEE SECOND SEMESTER 18EE-201F
ADVANCED ENGLISH
MID SEM - II
Time : 1 Hour Total Marks: 20 Marks

PART - A 4X1=4

Instructions: Answer all the questions. Each question carries one mark.

5. Write the synonym and antonym of lazy.

6. Write any two different forms of the word, ‘beauty’.
7. Rewrite the following making necessary corrections.
a) She travelled to her village every week.
b) Raghu returned the money back.
8. Change as directed.
a) Sita said, “She is a teacher.” (Change it into indirect speech)
b) He told me that she was going to market. (Change it into direct speech.)

PART - B2 X 3 = 6

Instructions: Answer the following questions. Each question carries three marks

9. a. Write down the one word substitutes of the following.

a) A person who does not believe in God.
b) The study of planets.
c) A person who loves reading books.

(Or)

158
 b. Write antonyms for the words in italics.
My friend Rani is young and attractive. She is very sharp and loves to eat fresh food.

10. a. Rewrite the following making necessary corrections.

I go to college everyday by walk. I am getting up late every morning. I work very hardly.
(Or)
b. Change the following as directed.

i. He said to her, “I will teach you Chemistry today.” (Change it into Reported
speech)
ii. She said to him, “Take me to Central Library now.” (Change it into reported
speech)
iii. Gopal said to Mamatha, “ Please lend me your calculator.”

PART-C 2 X 5 = 10
Instructions: Answer the following questions. Each question carries five marks.
11. a) What are the five aspects you learn when you learn a new word?

(Or)

b) Suggest any five ways to improve your vocabulary.

12. a) Rewrite the following making necessary changes.
a. My luggage were in the store room.
b. The teacher stressed on the importance of team work.
c. My friend and I gone for a movie.
d. The team is loving the food.
e. I have three son –in –laws.
(Or)
b) Rewrite the following sentences as directed.
i. He said that he was not feeling well. (Change to direct speech).
ii. Amala said that she would visit us the next day. (Change to direct speech).
iii. She said that their team had won the match. (Change to direct speech).
iv. The teacher said, “Australia is an island.” (Change to reported speech).
v. She says, “They will help us.” (Change to reported speech).

159
 18EE-201F
BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATION (C-18)
DEEE SECOND SEMESTER 18EE-201F
ADVANCED ENGLISH
SEMESTER END EXAM
Time : 2 Hours Total Marks: 40 Marks

PART-A 8X1=8
Instructions: Answer all questions.

Each question carries one mark.

1. Fill in the blanks with appropriate prepositions.

a) They went___ a walk.

b) He went to college____bus.

2. Write one word substitutes for the given meanings.

a) Study of planets.

b) Something that cannot be heard.

3. What will you write under achievements secton in your resume?

2. Fill in the blanks with words of obligation.

a) I ____wear a helmet when I drive a two wheeler.

160
 b) We ____- respect our elders.

5. Answer the questions given in 5 and 6 after reading the passage,

Mammals are among the most successful animals to have lived. Because they are warm blooded, they
can survive in almost any environment. To take advantage of different environments mammals have
evolved different body shapes.
a) Why do mammals have different body shapes?
6. How can mammals survive in any environment?

3. Make notes for the given passage.

About 40 million years ago new kinds of primates — monkeys and apes—- began to take over
lemurs. Today, there are two groups of monkeys: the old world monkeys which live in Africa and
Asia and the New world monkeys which live only in Central America.

1. Write a short paragraph based on

the flowchart given.

Finding a lost Item

Part -B 3 X4 = 12
Instructions: Answer the following questions. Each question carries three marks.

161
9.(a) Invite a celebrity to your college sports day. The celebrity accepts your invitation. Write a
conversation.

(Or)

(b) Answer the questions after reading the passage

There are almost 2,400 species of snake. From the 20 cm long thread snake to the gaint anaconda,
which can reach 36 feet. Snakes have many colours, patterns and ways of killing their prey. They eat
everything from ants, eggs , snails to animals as big as goats.

1. What is the largest snake?

2. What do snakes eat?

3. Are all snakes similar?

10 (a). Write three things you learn when you learn a new word?

OR

10 (b) Write a paragraph based on the tree diagram

11. (a). Read the following passage and answer the questions given in 11 a or 11 b

Humans communicate with each other everyday using sounds and body movements .Most commonly ,
we share information about the world around us through spoken languages. These are in special sounds
we make to represent objects, actions, numbers, colours and other features. We use our brains to
remember words, put them in the correct order and make the larynx, or voice ,box,produce the correct

162
sounds. If a person is unable to speak they can communicate by using sign language. We also have
written and pictorial languages.

1. How do human beings communicate?

2. What is the larynx?

3. When do we use sign language?

(Or)

(b) 1. What do we use to remember words?

2. How do we share information?

3. What are some forms of communication mentioned in the passage ?

12 (a). Make notes for the given passage

Sleep is as important to healthy life style as eating and exercising. On an average healthy adult requires
just over eight hours of sleep at night. Yet polls show that the increasing numbers of people are suffering
from sleep disorder or significant sleep loss. A study shows that 29% of Indians sleep only after midnight
and 61% slept for seven hours or less. Sleep is crucial to maintain one’s health. Without it, you increase
your susceptibility to a wide range of health problems .including heart disease, stroke, diabetes, obesity
and depression. Not sleeping enough can affect the immune system. The immune system works when you
are asleep. That is when natural killer cells are generated in the bone marrow. These killer cells help in
protecting the body against the viruses, bacteria and even cancer.

(Or)

12 (b) Write a paragraph based on the table given

Apes Country Habitat

Orangutan Sumatra live in trees

Gorilla Africa live on ground

Chimpanzee Africa live on ground

Part-C 5X4=20M

Instructions: Answer the following questions. Each question carries 5 marks.

163
13(a) Take an appointment with a doctor for your grandmother.

(Or)

(b) Read the passage and answer the questions.

Reading skills are considered the most important tools for academic success. Printed materials serve
as a source of information and entertainment. Reading is an important activity in life with which one can
update one’s knowledge . Speech precedes reading and reading is the input for writing. Reading is an
active process which involves recognition and comprehension. A reader can understand a text only when
he or she uses his or her mental faculties. A reader should have the knowledge of the writing system, the
knowledge of the language , the ability to interpret , the knowledge of the world, a reason for reading and
a reading style.

1. What are the advantages of reading?

2. What comes before reading?

3. What does the process of reading involve?

4. What are the inputs required by a reader to read something?

5. What is the purpose of printed information?

14 (a). Correct the following sentences.

1. My friend like me very much.

2. This is the best if the two.

3. He sat among the two girls.

4. He is running daily.

5. This is the boy which won the race.

OR
(b) Write a cover letter applying for the post of a software engineer at an MNC.

15 ( a). Read the given passage and answer questions given in 15 a or 15 b

The first elephants were pig-sized creatures without tusks or trunks that lived in Northern Africa
about 150 million years ago. Today there are only two species of elephant: the Indian Elephant and the
African elephant - the largest mammal living on land. Both species live in family groups, which
sometimes join to from herds of hundreds of animals. Elephants spend upto twenty on hours a day eating
as much as 320kgs of leaves ,bark , fruit and grass. An adult elephant needs to drink 90 litres of water a
day. Elephants travel through forests on traditional paths called elephants’ roads .These intelligent
animals have good memories and can live for more than 60 years. Both Indian and African elephants are
endangered because humans take over their habitats for farming and poachers kill them for their tusks.

164
 1. What is the largest mammal on land?

2. What is an elephant road?

3. Which word in the passage means home?

4. Do elephants live alone?

5. Why are elephants killed?

(Or)
(b)

1. What do elephants eat?

2. How long does an elephant live?

3. Who is putting elephants in danger?

4. What was the size of the first elephants?

5. Elephants have tusks and_______.

16 (a). Write your resume for the post of an Assistant Engineer at TESCO Company.

(Or)

(b) Write a report about an industry you visited.

165
 ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS
Course Title : Engineering Mathematics Course Code : 18EE-202F
Semester : II Course Group : Foundation
Teaching Scheme ( L : T : P ) : 45 :15 : 0
Credits : 3
In Periods
Methodology : Lecture + Tutorial Total Contact Periods : 60
CIE : 60 Marks SEE : 40 Marks
(Continuous Internal Evaluation) (Semester End Examination)

This Course is Common to all Programs of Diploma in Engineering

Pre requisites

This course requires the basic knowledge of Algebra, Trigonometry in Mathematics at Secondary school
level and Basic Engineering Mathematics at Diploma 1st Semester level

Course Outcomes: COs

At the end of the course, the student will have the ability to:

CO 1 Formulate the equations of Straight Line, Circle and Conic Sections

CO 2 Evaluate the Limits of different Functions

CO 3 Determine the Derivatives of Various Functions

166
 CO 4 Find the Successive Derivatives and Partial Derivatives of Functions

CO 5 Use Differentiation in Geometrical and Physical Applications

CO 6 Use Differentiation for finding Maxima and Minima.

Course Contents:

Co-ordinate geometry

Unit – I Duration: 10 Periods (L: 6.0 – T:4.0)

1. Straight lines: Write the different forms of a straight line – point slope form, two point form,
intercept form, normal form and general form - Find distance of a point from a line, acute angle
between two lines, intersection of two non-parallel lines and distance between two parallel lines -
perpendicular distance from a point to a line - Solve simple problems on the above forms
2. Circle: Define locus of a point, circle and its equation. Find equation of the Circle given (i) Centre and
radius, (ii) two ends of a diameter (iii) Centre and a point on the circumference (iv) three non
collinear points and (v) Centre and tangent equation - general equation of a circle - finding Centre,
radius - tangent, normal to circle at a point on it - simple problems.

Unit – II Duration: 8 Periods (L: 4.8 – T:3.2)

3. Conic Sections: Define a conic section, focus, directrix, eccentricity, axes and latus rectum – Find
equation of a conic when focus directrix and eccentricity are given. Properties of parabola, ellipse
and hyperbola - standard forms with Vertex (Centre) at the Origin and Axis (Axes) along Co –
Ordinate Axes only – Simple Problems.

Differential Calculus

167
Unit-III Duration: 12 Periods (L: 7.2 – T:4.8)

4. Functions & Limits : Concept of Limit- Definition- Properties of Limits and Standard Limits

1
xn  an sin x tan x a x 1 ex 1
, lim
lim , lim , lim , lim , lim (1  x) x ,
xa x  a x 0 x x 0 x x 0 x x0 x x 0
( without proof ) -

x
 1 a x2  b x  c
lim 1   lim
x   x  - Simple Problems . Evaluate the limits of the type x  l  x 2   x   and

f ( x)
lim
x  g ( x)

f ( x  h)  f ( x)
lim
5. Differentiation – I : Concept of derivative - definition from first principle as h  0 h
n x x
- different notations - derivatives of elementary functions like x , a , e , log x, sin x, cos x, tanx, Secx,
Cosecx and Cotx. Derivatives of sum, product, quotient, scalar multiplication of functions - problems.
Derivative of function of a function (Chain rule) with illustrative examples such as
2 x
t2  2 log  sin(cos x) 
(i) t (ii) x sin 2 x (iii) x2  1 (iv) .

Unit – IV Duration: 12 Periods (L: 7.2 – T:4.8)

6. Differentiation – II: Derivatives of inverse trigonometric functions, derivative of a function with

respect to another function, derivative of parametric functions, derivative of hyperbolic, implicit
functions, logarithmic differentiation – problems in each case. Higher order derivatives - examples –
functions of several variables – partial differentiation, Euler’s theorem-simple problems.

Applications of Derivatives:

Unit – V Duration: 8 Periods (L: 4.8 – T:3.2)

7. Geometrical Applications: Geometrical meaning of the derivative, equations of Tangent and normal
to a curve at any point on the curve.Lengths of tangent, normal, sub tangent and subnormal to the
curve at any point on it. Angle between two intersecting curves - problems.

168
Unit – VI Duration: 10 Periods (L: 6 – T:4)

8. Physical Applications: Physical applications of the derivative – Explain the derivative as a rate of
change in distance-time relations to find the velocity and acceleration of a moving particle with
examples. Explain the derivative as a rate measure in the problems where the quantities like
volumes, areas vary with respect to time- illustrative examples– Simple Problems.

9. Maxima & Minima: Applications of the derivative to find the extreme values – Increasing and
decreasing functions, finding the maxima and minima of simple functions - problems leading to
applications of maxima and minima.

Recommended Books

1. Co - Ordinate Geometry – by S.L. Loney

2. Thomas Calculus, Pearson Addison – Wesley Publications

3. Calculus – I by Shanti Narayan and Manicavachagam Pillai, S.V Publications.

4. NCERT Mathematics Text Books Of ClassXI,XII.

5. Intermediate Mathematics Text Books (Telugu Academy)

Suggested E-Learning references

1. www.freebookcentre.net/mathematics/introductory-mathematics-books.html
2.E-books:www.mathebook.net

Suggested Learning Outcomes

Coordinate Geometry
Unit – I
1.0 Solve the problems on Straight lines
1.1 Write the different forms of a straight line – point slope form, two point form, intercept form,
normal form and general form
1.2 Solve simple problems on the above forms
1.3 Find distance of a point from a line, acute angle between two lines, intersection of two non-

parallel lines and distance between two parallel lines.

169
2.0 Solve the problems on Circles
2.1 Define locus of a point, circle and its equation.
2.2 Find the equation of a circle given
(i) Centre and radius
(ii) Two ends of a diameter
(iii) Centre and a point on the circumference
(iv) Three non collinear points
(v) Centre and tangent
2.3 Write the general equation of a circle and find the centre and radius.
2.4 Write the equation of tangent and normal at a point on the circle.
2.5 Solve the problems to find the equations of tangent and normal.
Unit – II
3.0 Appreciate the properties of Conics in engineering applications
3.1 Define a conic section.
3.2 Understand the terms focus, directrix, eccentricity, axes and latus rectum of a conic with
illustrations.
3.3 Find the equation of a conic when focus, directrix and eccentricity are given
3.4 Describe the properties of Parabola, Ellipse and Hyperbola
3.5 Solve problems in simple cases of Parabola, Ellipse and Hyperbola.

Differential Calculus
UNIT - III

4.0 Use the concept of Limit for solving the problems

lim f ( x)  l
xa
4.1 Understand the concept of limit and meaning of and state the properties of
limits.

xn  an sin x tan x a x 1 ex 1
lim , lim , lim , lim , lim ,
4.2 Mention the Standard limits x  a x  a x  0 x x 0 x x 0 x x0 x

1 x
 1
lim (1  x) x , lim 1  
x 0 x  x  (All without proof).
4.3 Solve the problems using the above standard limits

170
 a x2  b x  c f ( x)
lim 2 lim
xl  x   x  
4.4 Evaluate the limits of the type and x   g ( x )

5.0 Appreciate Differentiation and its meaning in engineering situations

5.1 State the concept of derivative of a function y = f(x) – definition, first principle as
f ( x  h)  f ( x )
lim
h0 h and also provide standard notations to denote the derivative of a function.
5.2 State the significance of derivative in scientific and engineering applications.
5.3 Find the derivatives of elementary functions like x n , ax, ex, log x, sin x, cos x, tanx, Secx,
Cosecx and Cot x using the first principles.
5.4 Find the derivatives of simple functions from the first principle.
5.5 State the rules of differentiation of sum, difference, scalar multiplication, product and quotient
of functions with illustrative and simple examples.
5.6 Understand the method of differentiation of a function of a function (Chain rule) with
illustrative examples such as
2 x
t2  2 log  sin(cos x) 
(i) t (ii) x sin 2 x (iii) x2  1 (iv) .

Unit – IV
6.0 Appreciate Differentiation and its meaning in engineering situations
6.1 Find the derivatives of Inverse Trigonometric functions and examples.

6.2 Understand the method of differentiation of a function with respect to another function and

also differentiation of parametric functions with examples.

6.3 Find the derivatives of hyperbolic functions.

6.4 Explain the procedures for finding the derivatives of implicit function with examples.
6.5 Explain the need of taking logarithms for differentiating some functions with examples like
[f(x)]g(x).
6.6 Explain the concept of finding the higher order derivatives of second and third order with
examples.
6.7 Explain the concept of functions of several variables, partial derivatives and difference
between the ordinary and partial derivatives with simple examples.
6.8 Explain the definition of Homogenous function of degree n
6.9 Explain Euler’s theorem for homogeneous functions with applications to simple problems.

171
Applications of Differentiation
UNIT - V

7.0 Understand the Geometrical Applications of Derivatives

7.1 State the geometrical meaning of the derivative as the slope of the tangent to the curve y=f(x)
at any point on the curve.
7.2 Explain the concept of derivative to find the slope of tangent and to find the equation of
tangent and normal to the curve y=f(x) at any point on it.
7.3 Find the lengths of tangent, normal, sub-tangent and sub normal at any point on the curve
y=f(x) .
7.4 Explain the concept of angle between two curves and procedure for finding the angle between
two given curves with illustrative examples.

Unit – VI

8.0 Understand the Physical Applications of Derivatives

8.1 Explain the derivative as a rate of change in distance-time relations to find the velocity and
acceleration of a moving particle with examples.
8.2 Explain the derivative as a rate measurer in the problems where the quantities like volumes,
areas vary with respect to time- illustrative examples.
9.0 Use Derivatives to find extreme values of functions
9.1 Define the concept of increasing and decreasing functions.
9.2 Explain the conditions to find points where the given function is increasing or decreasing with
illustrative examples.
9.3 Explain the procedure to find the extreme values (maxima or minima) of a function of single
variable - simple problems yielding maxima and minima.

9.4 Solve problems on maxima and minima in applications like finding areas, volumes, etc.

Suggested Student Activities

1. Student visits Library to refer Standard Books on Mathematics and collect related material.
2. Quiz
3. Group discussion
4. Surprise tests
5. Seminars
6. Home assignments.

CO / PO - MAPPING

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 Mapped

172
 POs

CO1 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10

CO2 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10

CO3 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10

CO4 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10

CO5 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10

CO6 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10

@@@

173
 MID SEM-I EXAM
S.No Unit Name R U A Remarks
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-I 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)

6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-II 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)
Total Questions 4 4 4
MID SEM –II EXAM
S.No Unit Name R U A Remarks
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-III 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-IV 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)
Total Questions 4 4 4

Semester End Examination

Questions to be set for SEE Remarks

Sl No Unit No.
R U A  
1 I
1 9(a) 13(a)  
2 II  
3 III
2 10(a) 14(a)  
4 IV  
9(b) 13(b)
4
5 V 5, 6 11(a) 15(a)  
 
11(b) 15(b)  
3
10(b) 14(b)

6 VI 7,8 12(a) 16(a)  

 
12(b) 16(b)  
Total Questions 8 8 8  

174
 Remembering (R) 1 Mark
Legend: Understanding (U) 3 Marks

Application (A) 5 Marks

Code: 18EE-202F

STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION & TRAINING, TELANGANA

BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATIONS

MID SEM –I, MODEL PAPER, II SEMESTER

ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS

TIME: 1: 00 Hour Max. Marks: 20

PART-A

Instructions: 1. Answer ALL questions 04 X 01 = 04

2 Each question carries ONE mark

1. Find the slope of the straight line 3x + 4y + 9 = 0

2. Write the equation of circle whose centre (h,k) and radius r given.
3. Define conic section.
x2 y2
4. Find the Length of major and minor axes of the Ellipse + =1
16 9
PART-B

Instructions: 1. Answer any TWO questions 02 X 03 = 06

2. Each question carries THREE marks

. 5 a) Find the distance between parallel lines 2x + 3y + 5 =0 and 2x + 3y + 9 = 0

Or
5 b) Find the centre and radius of the circle x2 + y2 – 6x + 4y – 12 = 0.
6 a) Find the vertex , focus ,equation of directrix and length of latus-rectum of the parabola
y2 = 20x
Or

175
 x2 y2
6 b) Find the centre, vertices and foci of Ellipse + =1
25 16
PART C

Instructions: 1. Answer any TWO questions 02 X 05 = 10

2. Each question carries FIVE marks

7 a) Find the angle between the lines 2x – y + 3 = 0 and x + y – 2 = 0

Or

7b) Find the equation of the Circle passing through the points (0, 0), (1,0) and (0,2)

8 a) Find the equation of the Parabola with focus at (2 , -3 ) and whose directrix is

3x – 4y + 16 = 0

Or

8 b) Find the Centre,Vertices, Eccentricity, Foci, Lengths of axes, Length of Latus Rectum,

x2 y2
and equations of directrices of the Hyperbola − =1
16 9

@@@

176
 Code: 18EE-202F

STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION & TRAINING, TELANGANA

BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATIONS

MID SEM –II, MODEL PAPER, II SEMESTER

ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS

TIME: 1: 00 Hour Max. Marks: 20

PART-A

Instructions: 1. Answer ALL questions 04 X 01 = 04

2 Each question carries ONE mark

3 2
Lt 2 x −3 x +1
9 x 2 +8 x +7
1. Evaluate x →0
3
2. Differentiate x + Tanx w.r.t. x
3. Differentiate log(sinx) w.r.t x
∂u
4. Find ifU =x 3+ y 3
∂x
PART-B

Instructions: 1. Answer any TWO questions 02 X 03 = 06

2. Each question carries THREE marks

1+2+3+… .+ n
5 a). Evaluate ; lim
n→∞ ( n2 )
Or

177
 dy
5 b). If y = ex.cotx, find dx

dy
6 a). Find ifx=at 2 , y =2 at .
dx

Or

dy
6 b) If x2 + y2 + 3xy = 7, then find dx

PART C

Instructions: 1. Answer any TWO questions 02 X 05 = 10

2. Each question carries FIVE marks

dy 1+ x 2
log
7 a). Find dx , If y = 1−x 2

Or

7 b) Differentiate log[log(logx)] w. r. t. x

8 a). If y=sin ( logx ) , provet h at x 2 y 2 + x y1 + y =0.

Or

x 2 + y2 ∂u ∂u
8 b) If U =sin−1 ( x+ y ) t h enprovet h atx
∂x
+y
∂y
=tanu

@@@

178
 SUB.CODE: 18EE-202F

BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATION,(C-18)

END SEM MODEL PAPER

DEEE II - SEMESTER EXAMINATION

ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS

Time: 2 hours [Total Marks: 40]

PART-A

Instructions: 1. Answer ALL questions 08 X 01 = 08

2 Each question carries ONE mark

9. Write the intercept form of a straight line ax +by +c=0

x 3−8
10. Evaluate lim
x →2 x−2
11. Write the conditions for an increasing function and a decreasing function of f (x) in the interval
[a,b]
12. Write the equation of a circle whose centre is ( h , k ) and radius is r .
13. Write the slope of a curve y=f ( x ) at the point ( x 1 , y 1 ) .
14. Define Orthogonal curves.
15. Write the conditions for a point to be a maximum point on the curve y=f ( x ) .
16. Write the quantities to denote the rate of change of volume and area with respect to t.

179
 PART-B

Instructions: 1. Answer any FOUR questions 04 X 03 = 12

2. Each question carries THREE marks

9(a). Find the perpendicular distance of the point (2, 4) from the line 4 x−3 y−6=0.

OR

9(b). Find the length of the tangent to the curve y=x 2 +2 x+1 at (1,4).

10(a). Differentiate log ⁡(tanx) with respect to x.

OR

1 3 2
10 (b). A particle is moving along a line such that s= t −3t +8 t +5. Find its velocity and
3
acceleration at t=2 sec .

11 (a). Find the equation of the normal to the curve y 2=16 x at (2,4).

OR

11 (b). Find the equation of the tangent to the curve y=x 3−2 x +5 at (1,4).

12 (a). Find the rate of change of Area of the circle with respect to the radius when r =6 cm.

OR

12 (b). Find the maximum value of 2 x3 −9 x 2+12 x+ 5.

PART C

Instructions: 1. Answer any FOUR questions 04 X 05 = 20

2. Each question carries FIVE marks

13(a). Find the equation of the parabola whose focus is the point (3, -4) and directrix is the

line x− y +5=0.

OR

13 (b). Find the angle between the curves y 2=2 x , x + y = 8 at their point of intersection

(2, 2)

180
 dy
14 (a). Find , ifx=a ( θ−sinθ ) , y=a ( 1−cosθ ) .
dx

OR

14 (b). The sum of two numbers is 24. Find them if their product is maximum

15(a). Find the lengths of the normal, subtangent and subnormal to the curve

y=x 3−3 x +2 at ( 0,2 ) .

OR

2 k
15 (b). show that the curves y =xandy = cut at right angles if 8 k 2−1=0.
x

16 (a). A circular metal plate expands by heat so that its radius is increasing at the rate of 0.02 cm/sec.
At what rate its area is increasing when the radius is 10 cms.

OR

16 (b). A wire of length 40 cm is bent so that to has to form a rectangle. Find the maximum area that
can be enclosed by the wire.

APPLIED PHYSICS

Course Title : Applied Physics Course Code : 18EE-203F

Semester : II Course Group : Foundation
Teaching Scheme in periods ( L : T : : 45:15:00 Credits :3
P)
Methodology : Lecture+Tutorial Total Contact : 60
Periods
CIE : 60 Marks SEE : 40 Marks

This Course is Common to all Programs of Diploma in Engineering

Pre requisites: Basic High School Science, Basic Mathematics

Course Objectives: After studying this course, the student will be able to understand and appreciate the role of
Physics in different areas of engineering and technology.

Course outcomes: On successful completion of the course, the student will have the ability to attain
below Course outcomes (CO):

181
 Course Outcomes Linked POs Teaching
Periods

Apply knowledge of waves and sound in engineering

CO 1 problems. PO1,PO2 10

Apply knowledge of Simple Harmonic Motion to solve

CO 2 PO1, PO2 10
engineering problems
PO1,
CO 3 Use modern instruments in engineering PO2,PO3, 10
PO4
PO1,
CO 4 Use various magnetic materials in engineering equipments 10
PO2,PO3
PO1,
Use various electrical measuring instruments as tools in
CO 5 PO2,PO3,P 10
engineering
O4
PO1,
CO 6 Apply Electronics principles in engineering problems PO2,PO3,P 10
O4

APPLIED PHYSICS
Course Contents

1. UNIT – 1 WAVES AND SOUND Duration: 10 periods (L:7.5 – T: 2.5)

Wave motion – definition and characteristics – audible range – infrasonic and ultrasonic –
longitudinal and transverse waves – examples – Relation between wavelength, frequency and
velocity of a wave – derivation –stationary waves- beats - applications of beats - Doppler effect
– list the applications – ultrasound and radar in medicine and engineering as special emphasis-
echo –definition - applications - relation between time of echo and distance of obstacle –
derivation- Reverberation and time of reverberation - Sabine’s formula - Free and forced
vibrations - Resonance - Conditions of good auditorium - noise pollution – definition – causes,
effects and methods to minimize noise pollution - problems

2. UNIT – 2 SIMPLE HARMONIC MOTION Duration: 10 periods (L:7.5 – T: 2.5)

Periodic motion - Simple Harmonic Motion (SHM)– definition - examples - Conditions for SHM
–Projection of circular motion on any diameter of a circle is SHM - Expressions for
Displacement, Velocity and Acceleration of a particle executing SHM – derivations - Time
period, frequency, amplitude and phase of a particle in SHM - Ideal simple pendulum – time
period of simple pendulum –derivation - laws of simple pendulum-Seconds pendulum- problems.

3. UNIT – 3 MODERN PHYSICS Duration: 10 periods (L:7.5 – T: 2.5)

182
 Photo electric effect - Einstein’s photo electric equation – Work function and threshold frequency
- laws of photo electric effect - applications of photo electric effect – photo cell - concept of
Refraction of light - critical angle and total internal reflection - principle of Optical fiber -
Applications of optical fiber – LASER – definition and characteristics – principle of LASER -
spontaneous emission and stimulated emission - population inversion - examples of LASER –
Uses.

4. UNIT-4 MAGNETISM Duration: 10 periods (L:7.5 – T: 2.5)

Magnetic field - magnetic lines of force -properties - Uniform and Non-uniform magnetic field –
Magnetic length, pole strength – magnetic induction field strength- definition - Coulomb’s
inverse square law of magnetism - expression for moment of couple on a bar magnet placed in a
uniform magnetic field – derivation - expression for magnetic induction field strength at a point
on the axial line of a bar magnet –derivation - Dia, Para and Ferro magnetic materials – examples
- related problems.

5. UNIT-5 ELECTRICITY AND MEASURING INSTRUMENTS

Duration: 10 periods (L:7.5 – T: 2.5)

Ohm’s law – Ohmic and non ohmic conductors – examples - Temperature dependence of
resistance – coefficients of resistance with examples - Specific resistance – units – conductance-
series and parallel combination of resistors - moving coil galvanometer - conversion of
galvanometer into ammeter and voltmeter with diagram (qualitatively) – Kirchhoff’s current and
voltage laws in electricity – Expression for balancing condition of Wheatstone’s bridge –
derivation – Meter bridge –working with neat diagram –Superconductivity-definition-
superconductors - definition and examples – applications - related problems.

6. UNIT – 6 ELECTRONICS Duration: 10 periods (L:7.5 – T: 2.5)

Solids – definition – energy bands in solids- valence band, conduction band and forbidden band –
Energy band diagram of conductors, insulators and semiconductors – concept of Fermi level -
Intrinsic semiconductors - examples - Concept of holes in semiconductors - Doping - Extrinsic
semiconductor - P-type and N-type semiconductors - PN Junction diode – Forward Bias and
Reverse Bias - Applications of PN diode - Diode as rectifier – principle – principle of Light
Emitting Diode and solar cell.

References:

5. Engineering Physics by R.K. Gaur, S.L. Gupta, Dhanpatrai Publications, New Delhi.
6. ISC Physics, Book I&II, P. Vivekanandan, DK Banerjee, S Chand, New Delhi.
7. Intermediate Physics, Vol. I&II, Telugu Academy, TS, Hyderabad.
8. Fundamentals of Physics by Halliday and Resnick.

183
Suggested learning outcomes:

Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to

1. know the concept of Waves and Sound

1.1 Define wave. Explain the characteristics of a wave (frequency, wavelength, amplitude, time
period).
1.2 Explain audibility range of sound.
1.3 Define infrasonic and ultrasonic sounds.
1.4 Define longitudinal and transverse wave motion. Write examples for each. Distinguish between
them.
1.5 Derive the relation between wavelength, frequency and velocity of a wave (v ꞊ nλ)
1.6 Define stationary waves.
1.7 Explain the phenomenon of beats. List the applications of beats.
1.8 Explain Doppler Effect. List the applications of Doppler Effect.
1.9 Application of Doppler Effect in medicine and engineering - ultrasound and radar.
1.10 Define echo. List the applications of echo.
1.11 Derive the relation between time of echo and distance of obstacle.
1.12 Explain Reverberation and time of reverberation.
1.13 Write Sabine’s formula and explain the terms.
1.14 Define free and forced vibrations.
1.15 Define resonance with examples.
1.16 State the conditions of a good auditorium.
1.17 Define noise pollution.
1.18 List the causes, effects and methods to minimize noise pollution.
1.19 Solve related numerical problems.

2. know the concept of Simple Harmonic Motion

2.1 Define periodic motion.

2.2 Define Simple Harmonic Motion (SHM).
2.3 List the examples of SHM.
2.4 State the conditions of simple harmonic motion.
2.5 Projection of circular motion on any diameter of a circle is SHM.
2.6 Define the terms time period, frequency, amplitude and phase of particle in SHM.
2.7 Derive the expressions for Displacement, Velocity and Acceleration of a particle executing in
SHM.
2.8 Define Ideal simple pendulum and derive the expression for time period of simple pendulum.
2.9 State the laws of simple pendulum.
2.10 Define seconds pendulum.
2.11 Solve related numerical problems.

3. know the concept of Modern Physics

3.1 Explain Photo electric effect.

3.2 Define the terms work function and threshold frequency.

184
3.3 State Einstein’s photo electric equation and explain the terms.
3.4 State laws of photo electric effect.
3.5 List the applications of photo electric effect.
3.6 Explain working of photocell.
3.7 Explain the concept of refraction of light.
3.8 Define critical angle.
3.9 Define Total internal reflection.
3.10 State conditions for Total internal reflection.
3.11 Explain principle and working of optical fiber.
3.12 List the applications of optical fiber.
3.13 Define LASER. State the characteristics of LASER.
3.14 Explain the principle of LASER.
3.15 Define spontaneous emission and stimulated emission.
3.16 Define population inversion.
3.17 List the examples of LASER.
3.18 List the uses of LASER.

4 know the concept of Magnetism

4.1 Define magnetic field.

4.2 Define magnetic lines of force.
4.3 State the properties of magnetic lines of force.
4.4 Define Uniform and Non-uniform magnetic field.
4.5 Define the terms magnetic length and pole strength of a bar magnet.
4.6 Define magnetic induction field strength.
4.7 State and explain Coulomb’s inverse square law of magnetism.
4.8 Derive the expression for moment of couple on a bar magnet placed in a uniform
magnetic field.
4.9 Derive the formula for magnetic induction field strength at a point on the axial line of a bar
magnet.
4.10 Define Dia, Para and Ferro magnetic materials with examples.
4.11 Solve related numerical problems.

5 know the concept of Electricity and measuring instruments

5.1 State Ohm’s law – Define ohmic and non ohmic conductors with examples
5.2 Explain temperature dependence of resistance – types of temperature coefficients with examples
5.3 Define specific resistance. Write its units.
5.4 Define conductance.
5.5 Write the formulae for effective resistance in series and parallel combination of resistors with
diagram.
5.6 Explain moving coil galvanometer.
5.7 Conversion of a galvanometer into ammeter and voltmeter. Explain with diagram.
5.8 State and explain Kirchhoff’s current and voltage laws in electricity.
5.9 Derive an expression for balancing condition of Wheatstone’s bridge with legible sketch.
5.10 Explain briefly Meter Bridge with neat diagram.
5.11 Define superconductivity.
5.12 Define superconductor. Give examples.
5.13 List the applications of superconductors.
5.14 Solve related numerical problems.

185
6 know the concepts of Electronics and applications

6.1 Define solid.

6.2 Define valence band, conduction band and forbidden band in solids.
6.3 Explain conductors, insulators and semiconductors on the basis of energy band diagram.
6.4 Explain the concept of Fermi level.
6.5 Define intrinsic semiconductors.
6.6 List the examples for intrinsic semiconductors.
6.7 Explain the concept of hole in semiconductors.
6.8 Define doping.
6.9 Define extrinsic semiconductors.
6.10 Explain P-type and N-type semiconductors.
6.11 Explain PN Junction Diode (formation only).
6.12 Explain forward and reverse bias of PN diode (biasing and flow of majority and minority
carriers with diagram only)
6.13 List the applications of PN Diode.
6.14 Explain the principle of diode as a rectifier.
6.15 Explain working principle of Light Emitting Diode (LED)
6.16 Explain the working principle of solar cell.

MID SEM-I EXAM

S.No Unit Name R U A Remarks
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-I 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)

6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-II 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)
Total Questions 4 4 4
MID SEM –II EXAM
S.No Unit Name R U A Remarks
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-III 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-IV 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)
Total Questions 4 4 4

Semester End Examination

Sl No Unit No. Questions to be set for SEE Remarks

186
 R U A  
1 I
1 9(a) 13(a)  
2 II  
3 III
2 10(a) 14(a)  
4 IV  
9(b) 13(b)
4
5 V 5, 6 11(a) 15(a)  
 
11(b) 15(b)  
3
10(b) 14(b)

6 VI 7,8 12(a) 16(a)  

 
12(b) 16(b)  
Total Questions 8 8 8  

Remembering (R) 1 Mark

Legend: Understanding (U) 3 Marks

Application (A) 5 Marks

18EE-203F

BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATION, (C-18)

MIDSEM – I
SECOND SEMESTER EXAMINATION
APPLIED PHYSICS
TIME: 1 Hour TOTAL MARKS: 20

Important Note: Wherever any question has choice, marks will be allotted only to first
attempted question. No marks will be allotted for extra questions answered

PART - A (4x1 = 4M)

Note: Answer ALL the questions. Each question carries 1 mark.

The length of the answer shall not exceed 1/4 of page

5. Write the Sabine’s formula.

6. Define longitudinal wave.

187
 7. Define Second’s pendulum.
8. Define SHM.

PART- B (2 x 3 = 6M)

Note: Answer the following questions. Each question carries 3 marks.

The length of the answer shall not exceed 1 page

5 (a). Write any three applications of Beats.

(OR)
(b). Write any three effects of noise pollution.

6 (a). Write the conditions for SHM.

(OR)
(b). The displacement of a particle executing SHM is given by
Y=8Sin( πt + π /4 ) m. Find i) Amplitude ii) Angular velocity
and iii) Time period
PART-C (2×5=10M)

Note: Answer the following questions. Each question carries 5 marks

The length of the answer shall not exceed 2 pages

7 (a). Derive relation between time of echo and distance of obstacle.

(OR)
(b). State five conditions of a good auditorium.

8 (a). Derive the expression for time period of a simple pendulum.

(OR)
(b). Derive the expressions for velocity and acceleration of a particle in SHM.
*** ** ***
18EE-203F
BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATION, (C-18)
MIDSEM – II
SECOND SEMESTER EXAMINATION
APPLIED PHYSICS
TIME: 1 Hour TOTAL MARKS: 20

Important Note: Wherever any question has choice, marks will be allotted only to first attempted
question. No marks will be allotted for extra questions answered

PART - A (4x1 = 4M)

Note: Answer ALL the questions. Each question carries 1 mark.

The length of the answer shall not exceed 1/4 of page

5. Define photoelectric effect.

6. Define total internal reflection.
7. Define magnetic field.
8. Write the formula for magnetic moment of a bar magnet.

188
 PART- B (2 x 3 = 6M)

Note: Answer the following questions. Each question carries 3 marks.

The length of the answer shall not exceed 1 page

5 (a). State three laws of photo electric effect.

(OR)
(b). Distinguish between spontaneous and stimulated emission.

6 (a). Write three properties of magnetic lines of force.

(OR)
(b). Explain Coulomb’s inverse square law of magnetism.
PART-C (2×5=10M)

Note: Answer the following questions. Each question carries 5 marks

The length of the answer shall not exceed 2 pages

7 (a). Explain the principle of LASER.

(OR)
(b). Explain working principle of optical fiber.

8 (a). Derive the formula for moment of couple acting on a bar magnet placed in uniform
magnetic field.
(OR)
(b). Derive the expression for magnetic induction field strength at a point on the axial line
of a bar magnet.
** *** **
.

18EE-203F

BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATION, (C-18)

MODEL PAPER
II SEMESTER EXAMINATION

APPLIED PHYSICS

Time: 2 Hours] [Total Marks: 40

PART – A

Instructions: 1. Answer ALL questions. 8X1=08

2. Each question carries ONE mark.

1. Define an echo.
2. Write any two uses of optical fiber.
3. State Ohm’s law.

189
 4. Write any two laws of Reflection.
5. Write SI unit of specific resistance
6. Define non ohmic conductors and give one example.
7. Define Fermi level.
8. Write any two advantages of LED’s.

PART – B

Instructions: 1. Answer any FOUR questions. 4X3=12

2. Each question carries THREE marks.

9(a). Derive V= nλ.

(or)
9(b). Explain the temperature dependence of resistance on conductor.

10(a). Explain photo cell with neat diagram.

(or)
10(b). Define magnetic induction field strength, write its formula and SI unit.

11(a). State and explain Kirchhoff’s voltage law.

(or)
11(b). Write any three applications of Superconductors.

12(a). Explain principle of diode as a rectifier.

(or)
12(b). Write any three applications of p-n diode.

PART – C 4X5 = 20

Instructions: 1. Answer any FOUR questions.

2. Each question carries FIVE marks.

13(a). Derive the relation between time of an echo and distance obstacle
(or)
13(b). Derive the expression for balancing condition of Wheatstone’s bridge.

14(a). Explain working principle of optical fiber with neat diagram.

(or)
14(b). Explain forward and reverse bias of PN diode.

15(a). Explain briefly with neat diagram .

(or)
15(b). Explain moving coil galvanometer.

16(a). Explain the working principle of LED with neat diagram.

(or)

190
16(b). Explain the working principle of solar cell.

*** ** ***

ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY AND ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES

Course Title : Engineering Chemistry and Course Code : 18EE-204F

Environmental Studies

Semester : II
Course Group : Foundation
Teaching Scheme in hours (L:T:P) : 45:15:00
Credits :3
Methodology : Lecture + Tutorial
Total Contact Periods : 60
CIE : 60 Marks
SEE : 40 Marks

This Course is Common to all Programs of Diploma in Engineering

Prerequisite:

191
Basic knowledge of chemistry in secondary education.

Course Objectives: After studying this course the student will be able to understand and appreciate the
role of Chemistry and environmental studies in different spheres of industries.

Course Outcome:
On successful completion of the course, the students will have ability to attain below Course Outcomes
(CO):
CO Course outcome CL Linked Teaching
PO periods

CO1 Understand and explain the different metallurgical R/U/A 1,2,9,10 10

processes, alloys and applications of alloys
CO2 Understand and explain corrosion and preventive methods R/U/A 1,2,9,10 10
of corrosion
CO3 List out the different methods of preparation and industrial R/U/A 1,2,5,6,7, 12
uses of plastics, rubber and fibers. vulcanization of rubber 10
and its applications
CO4 Classify the fuels and explain basic terms of fuel, outline R/U/A 1,2,10 8
the composition and industrial use of gaseous fuels
CO5 Understand and Explain Galvanic cell, emf of cell -electro R/U/A 1,2,5 12
chemical series-Applications of Galvanic cells, batteries
and cells and distinguish the Galvanic and electrolytic cell
CO6 Explain the causes, effects and controlling methods of air R/U/A 1,2,5,7 8
and water pollutions.
Total Periods 60
Legends: R = Remember, U= Understand, A = Apply

ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY AND ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES

COURSE CONTENTS

UNIT - I: Metallurgy: 10Periods (L:7.5 – T: 2.5)

Characteristics of Metals - distinguish between Metals and Non Metals- Ore, Gangue, Flux, Slag -
Concentration of Ore -Froth floatation - Methods of Extraction of crude Metal - Roasting, Calcination,
Smelting – Alloys-purpose of making alloys - Composition of Brass, German silver, Nichrome, Stainless
steel and Duralumin

UNIT – II: Corrosion: 10Periods (L:7.5 – T: 2.5)

Introduction - factors influencing the rate of corrosion - electrochemical theory of corrosion -

composition, stress and concentration cells- rusting of iron and its mechanism - prevention of corrosion -
coating methods, Paints-constituents and characteristics of paints-cathodic protection.

192
UNIT – III: Polymers: 12Periods (L : 9.0 - T : 3.0)

Introduction - polymerization - types of polymerization - addition, condensation with examples - plastics -

types of plastics - advantages of plastics over traditional materials - Disadvantages of using plastics -
preparation and uses of the following plastics: 1. Polythene 2. PVC 3.Teflon 4.
Polystyrene 5.Urea formaldehyde 6. Bakelite - Rubber - Elastomers –Preparartionof Butyl rubber, Buna-
s, Neoprene rubber and their uses-Fibres-Preparation and uses of fibres-Nylon 6,6-Polyester.

UNIT – IV: Fuels: 8Periods (L : 6.0 - T : 2.0)

Definition and classification of fuels- characteristics of good fuel - Calorific value-HCV and LCV-
Calculation of oxygen required for combustion of methane and ethane - composition and uses of gaseous
fuels- a) water gas b) producer gas, c) natural gas, d) coal gas, e) Bio gas
and f) acetylene.

UNIT – V: Electro Motive Force: 12Periods (L : 9.0 - T : 3.0)

Galvanic cell – standard electrode potential –electro chemical series -emf of cell-Batteries-Types of
batteries-Fuel cells.

UNIT – VI: ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES-II : 8Periods (L : 6.0 - T : 2.0)

Introduction- classification of air pollutants based on origin and states of matter-Air pollution - causes-
Effects - control methods - Water pollution - causes - effects - control measures.

Reference Books:
1. Engineering chemistry – Jain & Jain – DhanpatRai Publishing Company.
2. A Text book of Engineering Chemistry – S.S.Dara – S.Chand Publications.
3. Environmental Studies – A.K.De.
4. Environmental Studies, R. Rajagopalan, 2nd Edition, 2011, Oxford University Press
5. Intermediate Chemistry I and II – Telugu Academy TS

Upon completion of the course, the student will have ability to

UNIT – I: METALLURGY
1.1. List the Characteristics of Metals.
1.2. Distinguish between Metals and Non Metals
1.3. Define the terms 1.Mineral, 2.Ore, 3. Gangue, 4. Flux and 5.Slag
1.4. Describe Froth Floatation method of concentration of ore.
1.5. Describe the methods involved in extraction of crude metal- Roasting, Calcination and
Smelting.
1.6. Define an Alloy
1.7. Explain the purpose of making of alloys
1.8. Write the Composition of the following alloys:1.Brass, 2.German silver, 3.Nichrome

193
 4. Stainless steel, 5. Duralumin
1.9. List the uses of following Alloys: Brass, German silver, Nichrome, Stainless steel,
Duralumin

UNIT – II: CORROSION

2.1. Define the term corrosion
2.2. Explain the Factors influencing the rate of corrosion
2.3. Explain the concept of electrochemical theory of corrosion
2.4. Describe the formation of a) composition cell, b) stress cell c) concentration cell
2.5. Define rust and explain the mechanism of rusting of iron with chemical reactions.
2.6. Explain the methods of prevention of corrosion:
a) Protective Coatings i) Metallic coatings (Anodic and cathodic coatings) ii) Inorganic
coatings iii) Organic coatings, paint,constituent of paint and characteristics of good paint.
b) Cathodic protection (Sacrificial anode process and Impressed - voltage process).

UNIT – III: POLYMERS

3.1. Explain the concept of polymerization
3.2. Describe the methods of polymerization a) addition polymerization
b) condensation polymerization with examples.
3.3. Define the term plastic
3.4. List the Characteristics of plastics.
3.5. State the advantages of plastics over traditional materials
3.6. State the disadvantages of using plastics.
3.7. Types of plastics with examples.
3.8. Distinguish between thermoplastics and thermosetting plastics
3.9. Explain the methods of preparation and uses of the following plastics:
1. Polythene, 2. PVC, 3.Teflon, 4.Polystyrene 5.Urea formaldehyde 6. Bakelite
(only flow chart for Bakelite i.e. without chemical equations).
3.10. Define the term natural rubber
3.11. Explain preparation of natural rubber
3.12. State the structural formula of Natural rubber
3.13. List the Characteristics of natural rubber
3.14. Explain the process of Vulcanization
3.15. List the Characteristics of Vulcanized rubber
3.16. Define the term Elastomer
3.17. Describe the preparation and uses of the following synthetic rubbers a) Butyl rubber,
b) Buna-s and c) Neoprene rubber.
3.18. Define fibre.
3.19. Explain the preparation and uses of fibres –Nylon 6,6 and Polyester
UNIT – IV: FUELS
4.1. Define the term fuel
4.2. Classify the fuels based on physical state - solid, liquid and gaseous fuels with examples.
4.3. Classify the fuels based on occurrence- primary and secondary fuels with examples.
4.4. List the characteristics of a good fuel
4.5. Advantages of gaseous fuels
4.6. Define Calorific value- HCV and LCV.
4.7. Calculate the oxygen required for the combustion of Methane and Ethane fuel gases.
4.8. State the composition and uses of the following gaseous fuels:
a) water gas, b) producer gas, c) natural gas, d) coal gas, e) Bio gas and f) acetylene

UNIT – V: Electro Motive Force

194
5.1. Define Galvanic cell
5.2. Explain the construction and working of Galvanic cell
5.3. Distinguish between electrolytic cell and galvanic cell
5.4. Explain standard electrode potential
5.5. Explain standard hydrogen electrode
5.6. Define electrochemical series and explain its significance.
5.7. Define and explain emf of a cell.
5.8. Solve the numerical problems on emf of cell
5.9. Explain Batteries (Cells) and types of batteries with examples –working and applications of
Dry cell (Leclanche cell), Lead storage battery, Ni-Cd cell
5.10. Explain working and advantages of Fuel cell (Hydrogen - Oxygen Fuel Cell)

UNIT – VI: ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES-II

6.1. Define air pollution
6.2. Classify the air pollutants- based on origin and states of matter
6.3. Explain the causes of air pollution
6.4. Explain the effects of air pollution on human beings, plants and animals
6.5. Explain the green house effect - ozone layer depletion and acid rain
6.6. Explain the methods of control of air pollution
6.7. Define water pollution
6.8. Explain the causes of water pollution
6.9. Explain the effects of water pollution on living and non living things
6.10. Explain the methods of control of water pollution.

Suggested Student Activities for Induction Program:

Forenoon Afternoon
Day1 Registration Class work as per Time table
Day2 Rules and Regulations Chemistry Lab practice classes may be
Day3 Getting acquainted with Head and faculty conducted
Day4 Familiarization with Institutional facilities
Day5 Interaction with Class teacher and Seniors
Day6 Introducing the mentor
Day7 Parent –Teacher meeting

Suggested Student Activities

1. Student visits Library to refer to Text books, reference books and manuals to find their specifications
2. Student inspects the available equipment in the Chemistry Lab to familiarize with them.
3. Quiz
4. Group discussion
5. Seminar

195
 6. Surprise test

E learning links:

https://iupac.org/
https://www.youtube.com
https://www.khanacademy.org/
www.nptel.ac.in

Blue Print
MID SEM-I EXAM
S.No Unit Name R U A Remarks
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-I 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)

6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-II 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)
Total Questions 4 4 4
MID SEM –II EXAM
S.No Unit Name R U A Remarks
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-III 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-IV 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)
Total Questions 4 4 4

196
 Semester End Examination
Questions to be set for SEE Remarks
Sl No Unit No.
R U A  
1 I
1 9(a) 13(a)  
2 II  
3 III
2 10(a) 14(a)  
4 IV  
9(b) 13(b)
4
5 V 5, 6 11(a) 15(a)  
 
11(b) 15(b)  
3
10(b) 14(b)

6 VI 7,8 12(a) 16(a)  

 
12(b) 16(b)  
Total Questions 8 8 8  

Remembering (R) 1 Mark

Legend: Understanding (U) 3 Marks

Application (A) 5 Marks

18EE-204F

Model Question Papers

DEEE II SEMESTER, MIDSEM – I

ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY AND ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES

Sub. Code: 18EE-204F

Time: 1 Hour Max. Marks: 20

PART – A

197
Instructions: Answer all questions. Each question carries one mark. 4X1=4
marks

9. Define the terms mineral and ore.

10. Define an alloy.
11. Define corrosion.
12. What is paint?

PART – B
Instructions: Answer all questions. Each question carries three marks 2 x 3 =6 Marks

13. a. List any six characteristics of metals.

or
b. Explain the process of roasting of ore with an example.
14. a. List any six factors influencing the rate of corrosion.

or
b. Explain the formation of stress cell with an example.
PART – C
Instructions: Answer all questions. Each question carries five marks 2 x 5 =10 Marks

15. a. Explain the froth floatation process of concentration of ore .

or
b. Write the composition and uses of Brass, German silver .
16. a. Explain the mechanism of rusting of iron with chemical equations.

or
b. Explain sacrificial anode method of prevention of corrosion with a neat diagram.

18EE-204F

DEEE II - SEMESTER, MIDSEM – II

ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY AND ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES

Sub. Code: 18EE-204F

198
Time: 1 Hour Max.Marks : 20

PART – A

Instructions: Answer all questions. Each question carries one mark. 4 X 1 = 4 marks

9. What is the chemical name of natural rubber?

10. Define polymerization.
11. What are fuels?
12. Mention any two characteristics of good fuel.

PART – B
Instructions: Answer the following questions. Each question carries three marks 2 x 3 =6 Marks

13. a. Write any three advantages of plastics over traditional materials.

or
b. Write a method of preparation and uses of Nylon-6,6 .
14. a. Define colorific value and differentiate lower and higher calorific values.

or
b. Classify the fuels based on their physical state.
PART – C
Instructions: Answer the following questions. Each question carries five marks 2 x 5 =10 Marks

15. a. What is vulcanization of rubber and explain with chemical equations.

or
b. Distinguish thermoplastics and thermosetting plastics.
16. a. Write the composition and uses of water gas and producer gas.

or
b. Calculate the mass and volume of the oxygen required for the complete combustion of 8
grams of CH4.

18EE-204F

BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATION, (C-18)

199
 DEEE II- SEMESTER EXAMINATION

ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY AND ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES

Time: 2 Hours Max. Marks : 40

PART – A

Instructions: Answer all questions. Each question carries one mark. 8 X 1 = 8 marks

17. Define gangue.

18. What are the different types of plastics?
19. Define Galvanic cell.
20. What is the chemical formula of rust?
21. What is electrochemical series?
22. What are the different types of batteries?
23. Define air pollution.
24. Define water pollution.

PART – B
Instructions: Answer the following questions. Each question carries three marks 4 x 3 =12 Marks

25. a. Write any three differences between metals and non-metals.

or
b. Write any three significances of electrochemical series.
26. a. Write a method of preparation and two uses of polystyrene.

or
b. Classify the pollutants based on origin and give examples.
27. a. Write any three differences between electrolytic cell and galvanic cell.

or
b. Write the electrode reaction of lead storage battery during discharging.
28. a. Write a short note on Green house effect.

or
b. Write a note on Ozone layer depletion.

PART – C
Instructions: Answer the following questions. Each question carries five marks 4 x 5 =20 Marks

29. a. Explain the formation of composition cell and stress cell.

or
b. Describe the construction and working principle of Leclanche cell.
30. a. Calculate the mass and volume of oxygen required for the complete combustion of 15 gm of
ethane( C2H6).

200
 or
b. Explain the causes of water pollution.
31. a. Explain the construction and functioning of Galvanic cell.

or
b. Explain working principle of H2-O2 fuel cell.
32. a. Explain the control methods of water pollution.

Or
b. Explain the causes of air pollution.

201
 ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING AND ELECTRONIC DEVICES

Course Title : Electrical Engineering Course Code : 18EE-205C

and Electronic Devices
Semester : II Course Group : Core
Teaching Scheme in Periods (L:T:P) : 45:15:0 Credits :3
Methodology : Lecture + Tutorial Total Contact Periods :60
CIE : 60 Marks SEE : 40 Marks

Pre requisites

This course requires the knowledge of basic principles of electricity.

Course Outcomes

CO1 Describe the effects of magnetic fields due to electric currents in current carrying conductors.

CO2 State the significance of force acting on a current carrying conductor placed in a magnetic field
and relate the similarities of magnetic circuits to electric circuits.
CO3 Apply the principles of electromagnetic induction to electrical engineering and solve the
problems on energy stored inan inductor.
CO4 Apply the concept of electrostatic field due to static charges and solve the problems on
capacitance.
CO5 Classify different types of inductors used in electronic circuits and state their applications
CO6 Describe the basic principles, characteristics of semi conductor devices and their applications.

202
 BLUE PRINT OF MARKS FOR SEE

Unit
No
Unit Name Periods Questions to be set for SEE

R U A

I Magnetic effects of
10
electric current. Q1 Q9(a) Q13(a)
II Magnetic Circuits 10

III Electromagnetic
12
Induction. Q2 Q10(a) Q14(a)
Q
IV Inductors. 08
4
V Electrostatics and Q5,Q Q9(b),Q11(a), Q13(b),Q15(a),
10
Capacitance 6 Q11(b) Q15(b)

VI Semiconductor devices Q3 Q10(b),Q12(a),

Q7,Q Q12(b) Q14(b),Q16(a),
10
8 Q16(b)

Total 60 8 8 8

Course Contents
UNIT 1 - Magnetic effects of electric current Duration: 10 Periods (L:7.5 - T: 2.5)
Magnetic lines of force Field pattern due to long straight current carrying conductor Right hand thumb
rule – Field pattern of solenoid and toroid Work law and its applications Biot Savart’s Law (Laplace’s
Law) Field strength at centre and any point on the axis of a circular current carrying conductor Field
Strength around a straight current carrying conductor Field strength on the axis of a solenoid – Simple
problems on Work law and field strength.
UNIT 2 - Magnetic circuits Duration: 10 Periods (L:7.5 - T: 2.5)
Mechanical force on a current carrying conductor in magnetic field Direction of force Fleming's left hand
rule Force between two parallel current carrying conductors – Ampere Simple problems on force -
Magnetic circuit Comparison of magnetic circuit with electric circuit simple problems on magnetic
circuit-Magnetic leakage coefficient.
UNIT 3– Electromagnetic induction Duration: 12 Periods (L:9 - T: 3)

203
 Faraday's laws of electromagnetic induction dynamically and statically induced E.M.F Lenz's law &
Fleming's right hand rule self and mutual inductance coefficient of coupling inductance in series
Energy stored in a magnetic field - energy stored per unit volume simple problems

UNIT 4– Inductors Duration: 08 ( L:6-T:2)

Inductors: Classify inductors- symbols - Specifications - Important parameters of Air cored inductors-
-List various core materials used constructional features - Applications of A.F. and R.F chokes

UNIT 5 :Electrostatics and capacitance Duration: 10 Periods (L:7.5 – T:2.5)

Coulomb’s law permittivity electrostatic field comparison of electrostatic and magnetic lines of force
electric potential potential difference – dielectric strength dielectric constant - capacitance types of
capacitors - uses capacitors in series and parallel – energy stored in capacitor - simple problems.

UNIT 6 : Semiconducter devices Duration: 10 Periods (L:7.5 – T:2.5)

PN Junction, forward and reverse bias Zener diode, Zener diode characteristics –formation and working
of PNP and NPN transistors Transistor as a switch and amplifier- Transistor configurations CB, CE and
CC input and output characteristics of CB,CE and CC comparison of CB,CE and CC configurations.

Recommended Books

1. Introduction to Engineering materials – B.K.Agarwal.

2. Materials science for Electrical and Electronic Engineers – Ian P.Jones (Oxford Publications)
3. Electrical Engineering Materials and Semiconductors J.B.Guptha and Rena
Guptha,SKKotaria&Sons Publishers
4. B.L.Theraja Electrical Technology Vol.I S.Chand&co
5. T.K.Nagsarkar&M.S.Sukhija Basic Electrical Engineering– Oxford
6. Principles of Electrical Engg.& Electronics V.K.Mehtha, RohithMehthaS.Chand Publishers
7. Theory and Problems of Basic Electrical Engineering D.P.Kothari&I.J.Nagarath – PHI

Suggested E-Learning references

204
1.http://electrical4u.com/
2. www.nptel.ac.in
3. https://ocw.mit.edu/courses/electrical-engineering-and-computer-science/

Suggested Learning Outcomes

1.1 Draw the lines of force around a magnet.

1.2 Explain the concept of field lines around current carrying conductors.
1.3 State Right hand thumb rule.
1.4 Plot the field pattern due to i) Straight current carrying conductor ii) Solenoid iii) Toroid.
1.5 Explain Work law and its applications.
1.6 State Laplace law (Biot-Savart's Law)
1.7 Give expressions for field strength (No derivation)
i) At centre of a circular conductor
ii) At any point on the axis of a circular conductor
iii) Around a straight conductor
iv) On the axis of a solenoid
1.8 Simple problems on Work law and field strength

2.1 Explain the mechanical force on a current carrying conductor in a magnetic field.
2.2 Derive an expression for magnitude of the force on a conductor in a magnetic field.
2.3 State the Fleming's left hand rule.
2.4 Derive an expression for the force between two parallel current carrying conductors.
2.5 State the nature of the force with different directions of the currents.
2.6 Define ampere
2.7 Solve problems on the above.
2.8 Explain the concept of the magnetic circuits
2.9 Compare magnetic circuit with electric circuit
2.10. Solve simple problems on magnetic circuits
2.11 State magnetic leakage coefficient.

3.1 State Faraday's laws of electromagnetic induction.

3.2 Explain dynamically and statically induced E.M.F.

205
3.3 State Lenz's law
3.4 Explain Fleming's right hand rule.
3.5 Explain the concept of self and mutual inductance.
3.6 Derive expressions for self and mutual inductance.
3.7 State coefficient of coupling.
3.8 Explain the total inductance with series connections with reference to direction of flux.
3.9 Develop an expression for energy stored in a magnetic field.
3.10 Develop an expression for energy stored per unit volume.
3.11 Solve problems on the above.

4.1 Classify inductors

4.2 Draw the symbols of different types of inductors
4.3 List the specifications of inductors
4.4 List and explain the important parameters of air cored inductors
4.5 Explain the various terms stray inductance and stray capacitance
4.6 List various core materials used in the construction of inductors
4.7 List the applications of A.F and R.F chokes
4.8 4.8 List the common faults in inductors.

5.1 State Coulomb's law of electrostatics and define unit charge

5.2 Define absolute and relative permittivity.
5.3 Solve problems on Coulomb’s law.
5.4 Define electrostatic field.
5.5 Plot electrostatic field due to
i) Isolated positive charges
ii) Isolated negative charge
iii) Unlike charges side by side
iv) Like charges side by side
5.6 State electric flux, electric flux density and field intensity
5.7 Compare electrostatic and magnetic circuits.
5.8 State Gauss theorem
5.9 Explain electric potential and potential difference.
5.10 Explain dielectric strength and dielectric constant
5.11 Define capacitance and state its unit.

206
5.12 Derive the formula for capacitance of a capacitor.
5.13 State different types of capacitors
5.14 Give uses of different capacitors
5.15 Derive the expression for equivalent capacitance of
i) Capacitors connected in series
ii) Capacitors connected in parallel
5.16 Derive the expression for energy stored in a capacitor
5.17 Solve problems on the above.

6.1 Explain the working of PN junction diode with no bias, forward bias and reverse bias
6.2 Draw the static VI characteristics of PN junction diode.
6.3 Mention the applications of diode
6.4 Explain the operation of zener diode.
6.5 Draw the characteristics of zener diode.
6.6 Mention the applications of Zener diode
6.7 Explain formation and working of PNP transistors.
6.8 Explain formation and working of NPN transistors.
6.9 Describe operation of transistor as a switch.
6.10 Describe operation of transistor as an amplifier.
6.11 Mention the applications of a transistor
6.12 State the different transistor configurations.
6.13 Plot the performance characteristics of a transistor in CB, CE and CC configurations.
6.14 Compare the performance characteristics of transistor in CB, CE and CC Configurations.

Suggested Student Activities

1.Student visits Library to refer to Electrical Manuals

2.Student visits the Lab to identify the available electrical equipment
3.Visit nearby Industry to familiarize with electrical and electronics devices and components
4.Quiz
5.Group discussion
6.Surprise test

CO-PO Mapping Matrix

207
 Communication

Lifelong learning
Basic knowledge

Discipline Knowledge

Engineering Tools

Ethics
Engineer and society

sustainability Environment &

work Individual and Team

practice Experiments and

Linked PO
CO PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO
10

CO1 2 2 2 1,2,10

CO2 2 2 2 2 1,2,3,10

CO3 2 2 2 2 1,2,6,10

CO4 2 2 2,10

CO5 2 2 2,10

CO6 2 2 2,10

Internal Evaluation

Test Units Marks

Mid Sem 1 1 and 2 20

Mid Sem 2 3 and 4 20

Slip Test 1 1 and 2 5

Slip Test 2 3 and 4 5

Assignments - 5

Seminars - 5

Total 60

QUESTION PAPER PATTERN FOR MID SEMESTER EXAMS

Sl.No Description Level No of Marks for Choice Total Marks

Questions each question

01 Part-A Remembering(R) 4 1 Nil 4 Marks

02 Part-B Understanding(U) 4 3 2 6 Marks

208
 03 Part-C Application(A) 4 5 2 10 Marks

Total Marks 20 Marks

MID SEM-I EXAM

S.No Unit Name R U A Remarks
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-I 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)

6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-II 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)
Total Questions 4 4 4
MID SEM –II EXAM
S.No Unit Name R U A Remarks
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-III 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-IV 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)
Total Questions 4 4 4

The length of answer for each question framed in respect of Part-A, B&C shall not exceed ¼ of a
page,1 page and 2 pages respectively
QUESTION PAPER PATTERN FOR SEMESTER END EXAM

Sl.No Description Level No of Marks for Choice Total Marks

Questions each question

01 Part-A Remembering(R) 8 1 Nil 8 Marks

02 Part-B Understanding(U) 8 3 4 12 Marks

03 Part-C Application(A) 8 5 4 20 Marks

Total Marks 40 Marks

18EE-205C
STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION AND TRAINING, TELANGANA
MODEL QUESTION PAPER
DEEE II SEMESTER
MID SEMESTER-I EXAMINATION

Corse Code: 18EE-205C Duration: 1 Hour

Course Name: Electrical Engineering& Electronic Devices Max.Marks: 20

209
 PART-A

Answer all questions, Each Question carries one mark 4x1 = 4 Marks

9) State Right hand thumb rule.

10) Write expression for magnetic field strength around a straight current carrying conductor..
11) State the nature of force around two straight conductors carrying current in same direction.
12) Define Ampere.
PART-B

Answer the following questions. Each question carries three marks 2x 3 = 6 Marks

13) a) State work law and write its applications.

(OR)
b) Calculate the magnetic field strength produced by the solenoid of length 70 cm, number of turns
in the coil is 320 and current passing through on it is 12 A.
14) a) Two infinite parallel conductors carry parallel currents of 10 amp. each. Find the magnitude and
direction of the force between the conductors per metre length if the distance between them is 20 cm
(OR)
b) State Fleming’s Left Hand rule.

PART-C

Answer the following questions. Each question carries five marks 2x5 = 10Marks

15) a) Plot the magnetic field pattern due to i) Straight current carrying conductor ii) Solenoid

(OR)
b) Calculate the magnetizing force and flux density at a distance of 5 cm from a long straight
circular conductor carrying a current of 250A placed in air.

16) a) Compare Electric and magnetic circuits.

(OR)
b) Derive an expression for magnitude of force on a current carrying conductor in a magnetic field.

18EE-205C

STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION AND TRAINING, TELANGANA

MODEL QUESTION PAPER
DEEE II SEMESTER
MID SEMESTER-II EXAMINATION

Corse Code: 18EE-205C Duration: 1 Hour

210
Course Name: Electrical Engineering& Electronic Devices Max.Marks: 20

PART-A

Answer all questions, Each Question carries one mark 4x1 = 4 Marks

1) State Lenz’s law.

2) Define Self inductance.
3) Draw the symbol of an iron cored inductor.
4) List any two common faults occurring in an inductor.
PART-B

Answer the following questions. Each question carries three marks 2x 3 = 6 Marks

5) a) State Faraday’s Law of Electro-Magnetic induction.

(OR)
b) If a coil of 150 turns is linked with a flux of 0.01 Wb when carrying current of 10 A, calculate the
inductance of the coil. If this current is uniformly reversed in 0.01 second, calculating the induced
electromotive force.
6) a) Classify Inductors.
(OR)
b) List different core materials used in construction of Inductors.

PART-C

Answer the following questions. Each question carries five marks 2x5 = 10Marks

7) a) Derive an expression for energy stored in an inductor.

(OR)
b) The combined inductance of two coils connected in series is 0.6 H or 0.1 H depending on the
relative directions of the currents in the coils. If one of the coils when isolated has a self-inductance of 0.2
H, calculate (a) mutual inductance and (b) coupling coefficient.

8) a) List important parameters of air cored inductors and explain any two parameters .
(OR)
9) b) Explain Stray Inductance and Stray Capacitance.

18EE-205C

STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION AND TRAINING, TELANGANA

MODEL QUESTION PAPER
DEEE II SEMESTER
SEMESTER END EXAMINATION

Corse Code: 18EE-205C Duration: 2 Hours

211
Course Name: Electrical Engineering& Electronic Devices Maximum .Marks: 40

PART-A

Answer all questions 8x1 = 8 Marks

1) Write an expression for magnetic field strength at any point on he axis of a circular conductor.
2) Define an inductor.
3) Define Electrostatic field.
4) State Fleming’s Right hand rule.
5) Plot electro-static field due to Isolated Positive charge.
6) Define Electric flux density.
7) List any two applications of Diode.
8) Draw the symbol of Zener diode.

PART-B
Answer the following questions 4x3= 12 Marks
9)
a) Two infinite parallel conductors carry current of 10A and 15A in opposite direction . Find the
magnitude and direction of the force between the conductors per metre length if the distance
between them is 50 cm
(OR)

b) A parallel plate capacitor has 3 dielectrics with relative permittivities of 5.5, 2.2 and 1.5
respectively. The area of each plate is 100 cm2 and thickness of each dielectric 1 mm. Calculate
the stored charge in the capacitor when a potential difference of 5,000 V is applied across the
composite capacitor so formed

10)
a) Classify Induced Emf.
(OR)
b) Plot input and output characteristics of a transistor in CE configuration.
11)
a) State Coulomb’s Laws of electrostatics .
(OR)
b) Four capacitors having equal capacitance of ‘C’ Farads are connected in series. Find equivalent
capacitance across the series combination.
12)
a) Draw the V-I characteristics of P-N junction diode.
(OR)
b) List the applications of Zener Diode.

PART-C

212
 Answer the following questions 4x 5=20 Marks
13)
a) A mild steel ring of 30 cm mean circumference has a cross-sectional area of 6 cm2 and has a
winding of 500 turns on it. The ring is cut through at a point so as to provide an air-gap of 1 mm
in the magnetic circuit. It is found that a current of 4 A in the winding, produces a flux density of
1 T in the air-gap. Find (i) the relative permeability of the mild steel and (ii) inductance of the
winding

(OR)
b) Derive an expression for energy stored in a Capacitor.

14)
a) Two coils with a coefficient of coupling of 0.5 between them, are connected in series so as to
magnetise (a) in the same direction (b) in the opposite direction. The corresponding values of
total inductances are for (a) 1.9 H and for (b) 0.7 H. Find the self-inductances of the two coils and
the mutual inductance between them.
(OR)
b) Explain the operation of Zener Diode.
15)
a) Determine resultant force on 3 μC charge due to 4μC and 10 nC charges. All these three point
charges are placed on the vertices of equilateral triangle ABC of side 50 cm.
(OR)
b) Three capacitors A, B, C have capacitances 10, 50 and 25 μF respectively. Calculate (i) charge on
each when connected in parallel to a 250 V supply (ii) total capacitance and (iii) p.d. across each
when connected in series.
16)
a) Explain the formation and working of NPN transistor.
(OR)
b) Describe the working of CE configuration transistor as an amplifier.

ADVANCED ENGINEERING DRAWING

: Advanced
Course Title Engineering Course Code : 18EE-206P
Drawing
Semester : II Course Group : Practical
Teaching Scheme in Periods
: 15:0:30 Credits : 1.5
(L:T:P)
Methodology : Lecture + practical Total Contact : 45

213
 Periods
SEE : 40 Marks
CIE : 60 Marks
(Semester End Examination)
(Continuous Internal Evaluation)
This Course is Common to all Programs of Diploma in Engineering

Prerequisites: Knowledge of Basic Engineering Drawing and Clear visualization and sound pictorial
intelligence to learn this course.

This Course is aimed at developing basic graphic skills so as to enable them to use these skills in
preparation of engineering drawings, their reading and interpretation.

Questions to be set for SEE

R U A
Unit
Name of the Unit
No Periods PART-B (6
PART-A (2 Marks
Marks
Questions)
Questions)
1 Projection of Solids 10 Q1 Q9(a)
2 Sectional Views 08 Q2 Q9(b)
3 Auxiliary views 08 Q3 Q10(a)

4 Pictorial drawing 08 Q4 Q10(b)

Q11(a), Q11(b),
5 Development of surfaces 11 Q5, Q6, Q7, Q8
Q12(a), Q12(b)

Total Periods / Total Questions 45 8 4

[ R: Remembering, U: Understanding – 2 Marks Questions ] [A: Application – 6 Marks

Questions]
Note: Question Paper consists PART – A and PART-B, Total Marks: 40, Time: 2 Hours
PART – A consists 8 (Eight questions) and student have to answer ALL questions, each question
carries 2 marks. (8*2 = 16)
PART – B consists 4 questions (either or / (a) or (b)), student have to attempt FOUR questions,
each question carries 6 marks (4*6=24)

Course Outcomes (CO)

Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to attain the following Course

214
Outcomes (CO):
Course Outcome
CO1 Apply the principles of Projection of solids also draw the projections of solids.
Appreciate the need of Sectional views also draw the sectional views and true sections
CO2
of the engineering components.
Escalate the need of auxiliary views and draw the auxiliary views of the given
CO3
engineering components.
Gainthe knowledge of Isometric views of engineering components also draw the
CO4
isometric views of given components.
Grasp the knowledge and draw the development of surfaces of different engineering
CO5
components

Course Contents

1.0 Projection of solids (10 Hours)

Projection of regular solids
(a) Axis perpendicular to one of the planes
(b) Axis parallel to VP and inclined to HP and vice versa.
2.0 Sectional views (08 Hours)
Need for drawing sectional views – what is a sectional view - Location of cutting plane – Purpose
of cutting plane line – Selection of cutting plane to give maximum information (vertical and
offset planes) - Hatching – Section of regular solids inclined to one plane and parallel to other
plane
3.0 Auxiliary views (08 Hours)
Need for drawing auxiliary views -Explanation of the basic principles of drawing an auxiliary
views - explanation of reference plane and auxiliary plane -Partial auxiliary view.
4.0 Pictorial Drawings (08 Hours)
Brief description of different types of pictorial drawing viz., Isometric, oblique, and perspective
and their use - Isometric drawings: Iso axis, angle between them, meaning of visual distortion in
dimensions - Need for an isometric scale, difference between Isometric scale and ordinary scale
difference between Isometric view and Isometric projection - Isometric and non-Isometric lines
-Isometric drawing of common features like rectangles, circular shapes, non-isometric lines - Use
of box and offset methods.
5.0 Development of Surfaces (11 Hours)
Need for preparing development of surface with reference to sheet metal work -Concept of true
length of a line with reference to its orthographic projection when the line is (i) parallel to the
plane of projection (ii) inclined to one principal and parallel to the other -Development of simple
solids like cubes, prisms, cylinders, cones, pyramid (sketches only) -Types of development:
Parallel line and radial line development -Procedure of drawing development, drawings of trays,
funnels, elbow pipes and rectangular ducts.

215
Recommended Books

Engineering Drawing by Kapil dev – (Asian Publisher)

Engineering Drawing by Basant Agarwal& C.M Agarwal - ( McGraw-hill)
Engineering Drawing by N.D.Bhatt. (Charotar Publishing House Pvt. Ltd.)
A Textbook on Engineering Drawing by P. Kannaiah, K. L. Narayana, K. Venkata Reddy

Suggested Learning Outcomes

1.0 Apply Principles of Projection of solids
1.1. Draw the projections of solids to axis of solids parallel to one plane.
1.2. Draw the projections of solids to axis of solid inclined to other plane.

2.0 Appreciate the need of Sectional Views

2.1 Explain the need to draw sectional views.
2.2 Select the section plane for a given component to reveal maximum information.
2.3 Explain the positions of section plane with reference planes
2.4 Differentiate between true shape and apparent shape of section
2.5 Draw sectional views and true sections of regular solids discussed in 6.0
2.6 Apply principles of hatching.
3.0 Understand the need of auxiliary views
3.1 State the need of Auxiliary views for a given engineering drawing.
3.2 Draw the auxiliary views of a given engineering component
3.3 Differentiate between auxiliary view and apparent view
4.0 Prepare pictorial drawings
4.1 State the need of pictorial drawings.
4.2 Differentiate between isometric scale and true scale.
4.3 Prepare Isometric views for the given orthographic drawings.
5.0 Interpret Development of surfaces of different solids
5.1 State the need for preparing development drawing.
5.2 Prepare development of simple engineering objects (cubes, prisms, cylinders, cones,
pyramid) using parallel line and radial line method.
5.3 Prepare development of surface of engineering components like trays,funnel, 90 0 elbow
& rectangular duct.

Course-PO Attainment Matrix

Program Outcomes (PO)

Course Name
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Advanced 3 3 3 2 -- -- -- -- 3 3

216
 Engineering
Drawing
Level 3- Highly Addressed, Level 2-Moderately Addressed, Level 1-Low Addressed

CIE Question Paper Pattern and Syllabus

Questions to be set for SEE

Unit
Unit Name R U A
No
2 Marks Questions 6 Marks Questions
Mid Semester - I Examination
1 Projection Solids Q1, Q2 Q5 (a), Q5(b),

2 Sectional Views Q3, Q4 Q6(a), Q6(b)

Total 4 2
Mid Semester - II Examination
3 Auxiliary views Q1, Q2 Q5 (a), Q5(b),
4 Pictorial drawing Q3, Q4 Q6(a), Q6(b)

Total 4 2

[R: Remembering, U: Understanding – 2 Marks Questions ] [A: Applying – 6 Marks Questions]

CIE Question Paper Pattern: Total Marks : 20, Time: 1 Hour

Maximum Marks: 20, Time: 1 Hour
Part A: Consists 4 Short questions, students have to attempt 4 questions and each question carries 2
Marks.(4 X 2 = 08 Marks)
Part B: Consists 2 (Either or type) Essay type questions, students have to attempt 2 questions and each question carries
Marks)

MODEL PAPER MID SEMESTER – I

18EE-206P
BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATION, (C-18)
DEEE – II SEMESTER
MID SEMESTER - I EXAMINATION

217
 ADVANCED ENGINEERING DRAWING
Time: 1 Hours] [Total Marks: 20
___________________________________________________________________________

PART-A
04X02=08
Instructions : 1. Answer ALL questions.
2. Each question carries TWO mark.
1. Draw the projections of a cube 0f 35mm side, resting on one of its faces (bases) on H.P such that
one of its face is parallel to and 15 mm in front of V.P.
2. Draw the projections of the cylinder base resting on HP with diameter 30mm and height 60mm.
3. A cone of base 50 mm diameter and axis 70 mm long lies on its base on H.P. A sectional plane
parallel to H.P passes through the axis at a 40 mm from the base. Draw the top view of the
reaming Cone.
4. Draw the top view of the pyramid base resting on HP with side 20mm and height 60mm, the
same pyramid was cut by a section plane horizontally at 30mm from the HP.

PART-B
02X06=12
Instructions : 1. Answer any TWO questions.
2. Each question carries SIX marks.
5. (a) A hexagonal prism with side of base 30 mm and axis 70 mm long, is lying one of its
rectangular faces on H.P. Draw the projections of the prism, when its axis is parallel to both H.P
and V.P
or
5. (b) A cylinder with base 40 mm diameter and 60 mm long rests on a point of its base on H.P such
that the axis makes an angle of 30 degrees with H.P. Draw the projections of the cylinder.
6. (a) A cylinder of diameter 50 mm and axis 70 long rests with its base on H.P. It is cut by a section
plane parallel to V.P and passing through the solid at a distance 10 mm from the axis. Draw the
projections.

or

6. (b) A cube of edge 40 mm rests on H.P one of its edges and a face is parallel to V.P. One of the
face containing the resting edge is inclined at 30 degrees to H.P. It is cut by horizontal section
plane at 10 mm away from the axis. Draw the projections of the cube.

MODEL PAPER MID SEMESTER – II

18EE-206P
BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATION, (C-18)
DEEE – II SEMESTER
MID SEMESTER - II EXAMINATION

218
 ADVANCED ENGINEERING DRAWING
Time: 1 Hours] [Total Marks: 20
___________________________________________________________________________
PART-A
04X02=08
Instructions : 1. Answer ALL questions.
2. Each question carries TWO mark.
1. What is the importance of auxiliary view?
2. A cube of side 30mm placed on HP and sectioned diagonally, draw the auxiliary view of the
inclined surface.
3. Draw the isometric view of a circular plane of diameter 60mm whose surface is vertical.
4. Draw the isometric view of a pentagonal plane of 30mm side when one of its sides is parallel
to H.P, when it is horizontal.

PART-B
02X06=12
Instructions : 1. Answer any TWO questions.
2. Each question carries SIX marks.
5. (a) Draw the isometric drawing of a cone of base diameter 30mm and axis 50mmlong.
or
5. (b) Draw the auxiliary view of the slopping surface of the cast iron block as shown in the
Figure. 1

Figure. (1) Figure. (2)

6. (a) Draw the auxiliary view of the slopping surface of the cast iron block as shown in the
Figure. 2
or
6. (b) Draw the isometric drawing of a cylinder of base diameter 20mm and axis 35mm long.

MODEL PAPER SEMESTER END EXAM

18EE-206P
BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATION, (C–18) MARCH/APRIL—2019
II SEMESTER EXAMINATION

219
 ADVANCED ENGINEERING DRAWING

Time: 2hours] [Total Marks:40

Important Note: Wherever any question has choice, marks will be allotted only to first attempted
question. No marks will be allotted for extra questions answered.

PART-A
08X02=16
Instructions : 1. Answer ALL questions.
2. Each question carries TWO marks.
3. All the dimensions are in mm.
1. Draw the projections of the cylinder with 30mm height and 10mm radius, whose axis is parallel
to VP?
2. A cylinder with base radius 30mm height 60mm and based resting on the ground, a section plane
cuts the cylinder at 30mm from the ground. Draw the sectional top view of the cylinder.
3. Draw the auxiliary view of sloping surface of the object whose isometric view is givenin Figure
(1).
4. Draw the isometric view of a block whose orthographic views are shown in Figure (2)

Figure (1) Figure (2)

5. Draw the development of a cylinder with diameter 40mm and length 50mm.
6. Draw the development of a pyramid of side 20mm and height 50mm.
7. Draw the development of a cube of side 30 mm.
8. Draw the development of cone 25 mm base diameter and 40 mm height.

PART-B
04X06=24
Instructions : 1. Answer any FOUR questions.
2. Each question carries SIX marks.
3. All the dimensions are in mm.
9. a) Draw the projection of a cylinder of a diameter of base 50 mm and height 80 mm when its axis
is making an angle of 300 to the H.P and parallel to the V.P.

220
 or

9. b) A cylinder of 50 mm diameter and 60 mm long is resting on its base on the ground and the
axis 30 mm in front of V.P It is cut by a section plane perpendicular to the V.P the vertical trace
of which cuts the axis at a point 40 mm from the base and makes an angle of 45 0 with H.P. Draw
its front view, sectional top view.
10. a)Draw the auxiliary view of sloping surface of the guide object shown infigure (3).

Figure (3) Figure (4)

or

10. b) Draw the isometric view of the block, whose orthographic views are shown in figure(4).

11. a) Draw the development of the truncated cylinder as shown in figure (5).

Figure (5) Figure (6) Figure (7)

or

11. b) Draw the development of truncated cone shown in below figure (6)

12. a) A right circular cylinder of 55 mm diameter and 66 mm long is cut by a section plane
perpendicular to VP and inclined at an angle of 60 0 to the HP. It is passing through a point on the
axis at a height of 45 mm from its base. Draw the development of bottom position of the
truncated cylinder.

221
 Or

12. b) Draw the development of the right circular cylinder shown in below figure (7).

*****

ADVANCED COMPUTER AIDED DRAFTING

222
 Advanced Computer Aided
Course Title Course Code 18EE-207P
Drafting

Semester II Course Group Practical

Teaching Scheme in
15:0:30 Credits 1.5
periods(L:T:P)

Methodology Lecture + Practical Total Contact Periods 45

CIE 60 Marks SEE 40 Marks

This Course is Common to all Programs of Diploma in Engineering

Pre requisites

This course requires the Basic CAD Skills and concepts of engineering drawing

Course Outcomes
CO1 Significance of Layers. Create and assign properties to layers and modify layers
CO2 Importance and advantages of blocks. Use of standard blocks and user defined blocks
CO3 Need of solid modeling and various methods of solid modeling with different surfaces
CO4 Create and modify 3D drawings

Course Contents

UNIT -1 Duration: 15 periods (T:5 + P:10)

1.1 Organize the information on layers

Setting a current layer, layers color, line type, line weight, print style locking and unlocking of layers, the
layer visibility and layer printing. Setting of current line type.The loading of additional line types,
creating and naming of line type, editing of line type.

1.2 Use the Blocks, Attributes and External references to manage the drawing blocks

The purpose of a block, creating a block, inserting a block, redefining a block, exploding a block

1.3 Attribute

Editing attribute definitions, attaching attribute to blocks. Editing attributes attached to blocks, Extracting
attributes information.

223
UNIT -2 Duration: 15 periods (T:5 + P:10)

2.0 Viewing entities in three dimensions

Setting a new viewing direction

Dynamically setting a view direction

2.1 Creation of three-dimensional entities using different methods

Drawing of two dimensional entities in three dimensional space.

Converting two dimensional planar entities into three dimensional entities by applying elevation
and thickness.
Converting two dimensional planar entities into three dimensional entities by revolving or
extruding.

Creation of three-dimensional faces, rectangular meshes, ruled surface meshes, extruded surface
meshes, revolved surface meshes, three dimensional entities such as boxes, Cylinders, Cones,
Spheres, wedges, torus, Regions, extruded solids, revolved solids, composite solids, intersect
solids
Boolean operations like union, subtract and interfere.
2.2 Editing in three dimensions
Rotating in three dimensions, Array in three dimensions (Rectangular and polar).
Mirroring in three dimensions, aligning in three dimensions.
2.3 Editing of three dimensional solids
Sectioning and Slicing of solids, hiding, shading and rendering.
2.4 Selection of material from library
Enable the material library, editing materials and material library.
UNIT- 3
Application of above three units

Recommended Books

1. Auto cad by George Omura

2. 4MCAD User Guide- IntelliCAD Technology Consortium

Specific learning outcomes:

1.0 Organize the information on layers

1.1 Explain the need and importance of Layers.
1.2 Practice creating new layer, naming the layer and assigning properties like Layer colour,
Line type and line weight and setting the current layer
1.3 Practice the locking and unlocking of layers
1.4 Practice the Freezing and thawing of layers
1.5 Practice the layer visibility and layer printing

224
 1.6 Practice the loading of additional line types

2.0 Use the Blocks, Attributes and External references to manage the Drawing
2.1 Define a block
2.2 Explain the purpose of a block
2.3 Practice the creating a block
2.4 Practice the inserting a block
2.5 Practice the redefining a block
2.6 Practice the exploding a block
2.7 Define an Attribute
2.8 Practice the editing attribute definitions
2.9 Practice the attaching attribute to blocks
2.10 Edit attributes attached to blocks
2.11 Extract attributes information
2.12 Define external reference
2.13 Practice the Attaching, Removing, and Reloading of external references
2.14 Practice the Binding, Clipping and changing the path of external references
3.0 Understand the concepts of 3D
View entities in three dimensions
3.1.1 To set a new viewing direction
3.1.2 To dynamically set a view direction
3.2 Create three-dimensional entities using different methods
3.2.1 Draw two dimensional entities in three dimensional space.
3.2.2 Convert two dimensional planar entities into three dimensional entities by applying
elevation and thickness.
3.2.3 Convert two dimensional planar entities into three dimensional entities by revolving or
extruding.
3.2.4 Create three-dimensional faces.
3.2.5 Create rectangular meshes.
3.2.6 Create ruled surface meshes.
3.2.7 Create extruded surface meshes.
3.2.8 Create revolved surface meshes.
3.2.9 Create three dimensional entities such as boxes, Cylinders, Cones, Spheres, wedges,
torus, Regions.
3.2.10 Create extruded solids.
3.2.11 Create revolved solids.
3.2.12 Create composite solids.
3.2.13 Create intersect solids.
3.3 Editing in three dimensions
3.3.1 Rotate in three dimensions
3.3.2 Array in three dimensions (Rectangular and polar)
3.3.3 Mirror in three dimensions
3.3.4 Align in three dimensions
3.4 Edit three dimensional solids
3.4.1 Practice Sectioning and Slicing solids
3.4.2 Practice hiding, shading and rendering

225
4 Practice applications on above units

Exercise Key components

 Importance of layers
Layers  Creation of new layers and controlling properties of
layers
 Create, insert and explode a block
Working with blocks  Attach attribute to blocks
 Edit and extract attributes attached to blocks
 Set a new viewing direction
View entities in three dimensions
 Set dynamically view direction
 Create three-dimensional faces
 Create rectangular meshes, ruled surface meshes,
Create three-dimensional entities extruded surface meshes, revolved surface meshes
 Create three dimensional entities such as boxes,
Cylinders.
 Rotate in three dimensions
 Array in three dimensions (Rectangular and polar)
Edit in three dimensions
 Mirror in three dimensions
 Align in three dimensions
 Practice Sectioning and Slicing solids
Edit three dimensional solids
 Practice hiding, shading and rendering
Practice the selection of material  Enable material library
from library  Edit materials and material library

Course Outcome Cognizant Linked PO Teaching

Level Hours

Significance of Layers. Create and assign

CO1 U/A 1,2,3,9,10 15
properties to layers and modify layers

226
 Importance and advantages of blocks. Use of
CO2 U/A 1,2,3,9,10 9
standard blocks and user defined blocks

Need of solid modeling and various methods of

CO3 U/A 1,2,3,9,10 6
solid modeling with different surfaces

CO4 Create and modify 3D drawings A 1,2,3,10 15

227
MID SEM-I EXAM

SN Unit name R,U (Q No’s) A (Q No’s) Remarks

1 Unit-1 1,2,3,4 5,6

MID SEM-2 EXAM

SN Unit name R,U (Q No’s) A (Q No’s) Remarks

1 Unit-2 1,2,3,4 5,6

SEE

Questions to be set for SEE Remarks

SN Unit name
R,U (Q No’s) A (Q No’s)

1 Unit-1 1,2

Unit-2 3,4

Unit-3 5,6

18EE-207P

228
 ADVANCED COMPUTER AIDED DRAFTING
MODEL PAPER FOR MID -1 (CIE)
TIME: 1Hr Marks: 20M

PART-A
NOTE: Answer all questions 4 X 2 = 8marks
7. Create four layers, name the layers and assign different properties like line color, line type, line weight
to different layers.
8. Write the procedure to create a block.
9. What is meant by attribute..
10. What do you mean by layer and what are the advantages of it.
PART-B
NOTE: Answer any one questions 1 X 12 =
12marks

11. Draw the following using Layers. Use different layers to different line types, text, dimension and
main figure.

229
12. Draw the following using Layers. Use different layers to different line types, text, dimension and
main figure.

230
 18EE-207P
ADVANCED COMPUTER AIDED DRAFTING
MODEL PAPER FOR MID -2 (CIE)
TIME: 1hr Marks: 20M

PART-A
NOTE: Answer all questions 4 X 2 = 8marks
7. Draw rectangle of 100x60 and extrude to a depth of 25mm.
8. Draw a cylinder of dia 50mm and height 100mm.
9. List various Boolean operations
10. Draw a cube of 100mm side and make a hole of 25mm.
PART-B
NOTE: Answer any one questions 1 X 2 = 12marks

11. Draw the following using any CAD software and add dimensioning.

231
12. Draw the following using any CAD software and add dimensioning.

232
 18EE-207P
ADVANCED COMPUTER AIDED DRAFTING
MODEL PAPER FOR SEE
TIME: 2Hr Marks: 40M

PART-A
NOTE: Answer all questions 4 X 4 = 16marks.
1. Write the procedure to create and insert a block.
2. Create four layers, name the layers and assign different properties like line color, line type, line
weight to different layers.
3. Draw a 3D cone of base 30mm and height 50mm
4. Draw to 2 boxes of 50x30x20 and 30x50x20 mm and union them

.
PART-B
NOTE: Answer any one questions 1 X 24 = 24marks

5 (a) Draw the following 3D object CAD software. 20+4 marks

(b) List the commands in sequence and also write the procedure

233
6 (a) Draw the following 3D object CAD software. 20+4 marks
(b) List the commands in sequence and also write the procedure

234
 ADVANCED ELECTRICAL WORKSHOP PRACTICE

Course Title : Advanced Electrical Workshop Course Code : 18EE-208P

Practice

Semester : II Course Group : Practical

Teaching Scheme in : 15:0:30 Credits : 1.5

Periods(L:T:P)

Methodology : Lecture + Practical Total Contact

Periods : 45

CIE : 60 Marks SEE : 40 Marks

Pre requisites

This course requires the skills of handling electrical tools, accessories and performing wiring connections

Course Outcomes

Course Outcome CL Linked PO Teaching

Hours
CO1 Identify, select necessary materials and perform electrical R/U/ 2,3,4,5,7,8,9,10 6
wiring of special lamp circuits A
CO2 Identify the resistors, capacitors, compute and measure R/U/ 1,2,3,4,8,9,10 9
their values A
CO3 Identify, select necessary materials and perform electrical U/A 2,3,4,5,7,8,9,10 15
wiring for power circuits
CO4 Identify the terminals, parts of a battery, measure the U/A 2,3,4,5,7,8,9,10 15
battery voltage, perform earthing and measure earth
resistance

235
Course Contents

1.0 Special lamp connections

1.1 Control and practice the wiring for Fluorescent Lamp/LED Lamp
1.2 Control and practice the wiring for Mercury Vapour Lamp/ Sodium Vapour Lamp/Halogen Lamp

2.0 Resistance measurement & Capacitor measurement

2.1 Identify different types of resistors.
2.2 Calculate resistance by its colour code.
2.3 Measure the resistance using multimeter
2.4 Connect resistors in series and parallel and measuring the resistance using multimeter.
2.5 Connect a rheostat in a given circuit and vary its resistance from minimum to maximum resistance
position.
2.6 Identify different types of capacitors.
2.7 Find the value/specifications of capacitor from value printed and color code.

3.0 Wiring power loads

3.1 Control two sub-circuits through Energy meter, MCB's and two 1way switches.
3.2 Control 1.5 ton capacity A/C equipment by MCB and stabilizer.
3.3 Connect the Inverter to power supply through 3 pin socket and 1way switch (Back up)
3.4 Connect Computer by main switch board with a Miniature Circuit Breaker (MCB)
3.5 Connect and test the given Public Address System

4.0 Battery voltage measurement &earthing

4.1 Measure of battery voltage using voltmeter and multimeter.
4.2 Connect batteries in series and parallel and observing the output voltage using voltmeter and DMM.
4.3 Measure of current supplied by battery using ammeter and multimeter with rheostat as load
4.4 Demonstrate Pipe Earthing and measure the value of earth resistance
4.5 Demonstrate Plate Earthing and measure the value of earth resistance

236
 State Board of Technical Education and Training, Telangana
Model Question paper
DEEE II Semester
Mid Semester-I Examination

Course Code: 18EE-208P Duration: 1 Hour

Course Name: Advanced Electrical Workshop Practice Max.Marks: 20

Note: Answer allotted Question.

Instructions to the Candidate:

(i)Record the results on a graph sheet if required, and conclude your observation of the experiment

(ii) Draw the circuit diagram for illustration; choose appropriate values when not mentioned in the
question

1. Control and practice the wiring for Fluorescent Lamp/LED Lamp

2. Control and practice the wiring for Mercury Vapour Lamp/ Sodium Vapour Lamp/Halogen Lamp
3. Identify different types of resistors.
4. Calculate resistance by its colour code.
5. Measure the resistance using multimeter
6. Connect resistors in series and parallel and measuring the resistance using multimeter.

237
 State Board of Technical Education and Training, Telangana
Model Question paper
DEEE II Semester
Mid Semester-II Examination

Course Code: 18EE-208P Duration: 1 Hour

Course Name: Advanced Electrical Workshop Practice Max.Marks: 20

Note: Answer allotted Question.

Instructions to the Candidate:

(i)Record the results on a graph sheet if required, and conclude your observation of the experiment

(ii) Draw the circuit diagram for illustration; choose appropriate values when not mentioned in the
question

1. Connect a rheostat in a given circuit and vary its resistance from minimum to maximum
resistance position.
2. Identify different types of capacitors.
3. Find the value/specifications of capacitor from value printed and color code.
4. Control two sub-circuits through Energy meter, MCB's and two 1way switches.
5. Control 1.5 ton capacity A/C equipment by MCB and stabilizer.
6. Connect the Inverter to power supply through 3 pin socket and 1way switch (Back up)

238
 State Board of Technical Education and Training, Telangana
Semester End Exam Model Question paper
DEEE II Semester
Semester End Examination

Course Code: 18EE-208P Duration: 2 Hour

Course Name: Advanced Electrical Workshop Practice Max.Marks: 40

Note: Answer allotted Question.

Instructions to the Candidate:

(i)Record the results on a graph sheet if required, and conclude your observation of the experiment

(ii) Draw the circuit diagram for illustration; choose appropriate values when not mentioned in the
question

1. Control and practice the wiring for Fluorescent Lamp/LED Lamp

2. Control and practice the wiring for Mercury Vapour Lamp/ Sodium Vapour Lamp/Halogen Lamp
3. Identify different types of resistors.
4. Calculate resistance by its colour code.
5. Measure the resistance of a given resistor using multimeter
6. Connect resistors in series and parallel and measuring the resistance using multimeter.
7. Connect a rheostat in a given circuit and vary its resistance from minimum to maximum
resistance position.
8. Identify different types of capacitors.
9. Find the value/specifications of capacitor from value printed and color code.
10. Control two sub-circuits through Energy meter, MCB's and two 1way switches.
11. Control 1.5 ton capacity A/C equipment by MCB and stabilizer.
12. Connect the Inverter to power supply through 3 pin socket and 1way switch (Back up)
13. Connect Computer by main switch board with a Miniature Circuit Breaker (MCB)
14. Connect and test the given Public Address System
15. Measure of battery voltage using voltmeter and multimeter.
16. Connect batteries in series and parallel and observing the output voltage using voltmeter and
DMM.
17. Measure of current supplied by battery using ammeter and multimeter with rheostat as load
18. Demonstrate Pipe Earthing and measure the value of earth resistance
19. Demonstrate Plate Earthing and measure the value of earth resistance

239
 APPLIED SCIENCE LAB PRACTICE (PHYSICS LAB + CHEMISTRY LAB)
Course Title Applied Science Lab Course Code 18EE-209P
Practice (Physics Lab +
Chemistry Lab)
Semester II Course Group Practical
Teaching Scheme in 15:0:30 Credits 1.5
Periods(L:T:P)
Methodology Lecture + practical Total Contact 45
Periods
CIE 30 Marks SEE 20 Marks
This Course is Common to all Programs of Diploma in Engineering

Physics Lab – 209P(A)

Pre requisites: Knowledge of basic concepts of High School Science, Basic Mathematics

Course objectives: To provide practical knowledge about the basics of Physics instrumentation
and calculations/measurements.

Lecture and Demonstration: 1 Period

8. Introduction to Physics practical and its importance, safety precautions in maintenance of

equipment in the laboratory.
9. Maintenance of apparatus and equipment.
10. Follow of Do’s and Don’ts.
11. Maintenance of data in manual and record book.
12. Write the procedure of the experiment before the commencement of each experiment.
13. Strictly following of instructions given from time to time by the lecturer-in-charge.
14. Demonstration of each experiment by the lecturer in charge.

Conduct of an experiment: 2 Periods

Course outcomes:

On successful completion of the course, the student will have ability to:

1: Determine the Focal length and focal power of convex lenses using U-V and
graphical method.

2: Determine the value of acceleration due to gravity using Simple Pendulum and verify
with L-T2graph.

3: Determine the velocity of sound in air at room temperature.

240
4: Determine the refractive index of a solid using travelling microscope.

5: Practice the mapping of magnetic lines of force-locating neutral points.

References:

3. Basic Applied Physics – R.K. Gaur

4. Laboratory manual for class XI and XII - NCERT

PHYSICS PRACTICALS

List of experiments

Semester II
1. Convex lens-Determination of Focal length and focal power using U-V and graphical method.
2: Simple Pendulum-Determination of the value of acceleration due to gravity and verify
with L-T2graph.
3: Resonance apparatus-Determination of velocity of sound in air at room temperature .
4: Travelling microscope-Determination of refractive index of a solid.
5: Practice the mapping of magnetic lines of force-location of neutral points

Course Delivery:

The course will be delivered through lectures, class room interaction, group discussions, graded exercises,
demonstration and practice.

Conduction of experiments: 2 periods/Experiment.

Student must perform experiment individually under the supervision of the lecturer-in charge.

On successful completion of the course, the student will have the ability to attain below Course outcomes
(CO):

CL Linked Teaching
Course Outcomes
POs Periods

CO 1 Focal length and Focal power of convex lens U/A 1,2,3,8,9

(Separate & Combination) L:P::1:2

CO 2 Acceleration due to gravity using simple U/A 1,2,3,8,9

pendulum L:P::1:2

241
 CO 3 Velocity of sound in air – (Resonance U/A 1,2,3,8,9
method) L:P::1:2

CO 4 Refractive index of solid using traveling U/A 1,2,3,8,9

microscope L:P::1:2

CO 5 Mapping of magnet lines of force-locating U/A 1,2,3,8,9

neutral points L:P::1:2

CO 6 Related the answers to the oral questions

Cognitive levels (CL): U=Understand, A=Application

Specific learning outcomes:

Name of the Experiment Competencies Key competencies

1. Focal length and Focal power of  Fix the object distance  Calculate the focal length
 Find the Image distance and power of convex
convex lens (Separate & lens
 Calculate the focal length and
Combination) power of convex lens and  Draw u-v and 1/u – 1/v
2. Simple pendulum – acceleration due to  combination
Fix the simpleofpendulum
convex lenses
to  graph
Find the time for number
gravity – length of seconds pendulum the stand of oscillations
 Adjust the length of pendulum  Find the time period
 Find the time for number of  Calculate the acceleration
oscillations due to gravity
 Find the time period  Draw l-T and l-T2 graph
 Calculate the acceleration due
to gravity
 Draw l-T and l-T2 graph

3. Velocity of sound in air  Adjust the reservoir level

 Arrange the resonance
 Find the first and second
–Resonance method apparatus
resonanting lengths
 Adjust the reservoir level for
 Calculate velocity of
booming sound
sound
 Find the first and second
 Calculate velocity of
resonanting lengths
sound at 00 C
 Calculate velocity of sound

242
4. Refractive index of solid using  Find the least count of vernier  Read the scale
on microscope  Calculate the refractive
traveling microscope
 Place the graph paper below index of glass slab
microscope
 Read the scale
 Calculate the refractive index
of glass slab

5. Mapping of magnet lines of  Draw magnetic meridian

 Place the bar magnet in
Force – neutral points NN(North pole of bar  Draw magnetic lines
magnet pointing North) of
and NS (South pole of bar force
magnet pointing North)
directions  Locate the neutral
 Draw magnetic lines of points
force along equatorial and
 Locate the neutral points
along equatorial and axial axial lines
lines

EXAMINATION & EXPERIMENTS

S.NO EXAMINATION EXPERIMENTS

1 MIDSEM-I EXPERIMENT NO 1 & 2
2 MIDSEM-II
Scheme of Valuation of SEEEXPERIMENT NO 3 & 4
3 S.No SEMESTER END EXAMINATION
Particulars EXPERIMENT NO 1,2,3,4 and 5
Marks
1. Objective/Aim 01
2. Apparatus/Equipment 02
3. Observations 02
4. Principle including formula 02
5. Experiment (Tabular form, readings, etc) 05
6. Calculation and Result 05
7. Viva Voce 03
Total 20

243
 Chemistry Lab – 209P(B)

Prerequisite:
Knowledge of basic concepts of chemistry of secondary education.

Course Objectives:
To provide practical knowledge about the basics of volumetric analysis of chemical compounds.

Course Outcomes:

On successful completion of the course, the student will have ability to attain CO:

Course Outcome CL Linked PO Teaching

Periods
CO1 Estimate the amount of the U/A 1,2,3,8 L:P ::1:2
mohr’s salt in the given
solution
CO2 Determination of acidity , U/A 1,2,3,8 L:P ::1:2
alkalinity and pH of given
water samples/
solutions.
CO3 Estimate the amount of the U/A 1,2,3,8 L:P ::1:2
chlorides in the given
solution.
CO4 Relate the answers to the U/A
oral questions

U = Understand, A = Application
Course Delivery:

The course will be delivered through lectures, classroom interaction, group discussion,
demonstration and practicals.
Conduction of experiments: Lecture 1 period + Experiment 2 periods..

Student must conduct experiment individually under the supervision of the staff-in-charge.

Lecture and Demonstration: 1 Period

8. Introduction of chemistry practical and its importance, safety precautions in maintenance of

cleanliness and orderliness of chemicals in the laboratory.
9. Maintenance of apparatus and equipment.
10. Follow of DO’s and Don’ts.
11. Maintenance of data in record book.
12. Write the procedure of the experiment before the commencement of each experiment.
13. Strict following of instructions given from time to time by the staff-in- charge.
14. Demonstration of each experiment by the staff in charge.

244
Course content

Volumetric Analysis: (22.5 Periods)

Volumetric analysis by Titrimetric Method:-

Volumetric Analysis -Titration – Standard Solutions- Concentration of solutions-

Indicators- acid base indicators- selection of indicators-endpoint of titration-Neutralization.
List of experiments:
1. Estimation of Mohr’s salt by using 0.02M potassium permanganate
solution.
2. Determination of acidity of water sample by using 0.02N NaOH solution.
3. Determination of alkalinity of water sample by using 0.02N H2SO4 solution.
4. Estimate the chloride content present in water sample by using 0.0141N
AgNO3 solution.
5. Find out the pH of the given solution by using pH meter.

Specific Learning Outcomes

Upon completion of the course, the student will have ability to
1. Estimate Mohr’s salt by using standard potassium permanganate solution.
2. Determine the partial and total acidity of water sample by using 0.02N
NaOH solution.
3. Determine the partial and total alkalinity of water sample by using 0.02N
H2SO4 solution.
4. Estimate the chloride content present in water sample by using 0.0141N
AgNO3 solution.
5. Find out the pH of the given solution by using pH meter.

Reference Books:

4. Vogel’s Inorganic Qualitative and Quantitative Analysis.

5. Practical chemistry by O.P.Pande& others.
6. Qualitative and quantitative analysis by Alex.

Scheme of Valuation for MID I & II and SEE

Sl. No. Particulars Marks
1 Identification of apparatus/equipment/chemical 2
compounds/tools/etc.
2 Writing Procedure 5
3 Conducting of experiment 4
4 Observation and Results 6
5 Viva-voice 3
Total 20

18EE-209P

245
 BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATION, (C-18)
MIDSEM – I
SECOND SEMESTER EXAMINATION
APPLIED SCIENCE LAB PRACTICE
TIME: 1 Hour TOTAL MARKS: 20

Instructions: (1) Answer both PART-A AND PART-B on separate answer sheets.
(2) Each question carries TEN marks.

PART-A (PHYSICS LAB)

Perform ONE experiment allotted by the examiner. 1 x 10 = 10

8. Determine the Focal length and focal power of given convex lense using U-V method.
9. Determine the Focal length and focal power of given convex lense by U-V graph method.
10. Determine the value of acceleration due to gravity at your place sing Simple Pendulum.
11. Determine the value of acceleration due to gravity at your place sing Simple Pendulum by L-T 2
graph.

PART-B (CHEMISTRY LAB)

Perform ONE experiment allotted by the examiner. 1 x 10 = 10

12. Estimate the amount of Mohr’s salt present in the given 500 ml of solution
by using 0.02M potassium permanganate solution.
13. Determine the partial acidity of water sample by using 0.02N NaOH solution.
14. Determine the total acidity of water sample by using 0.02N NaOH solution

246
 18EE-209P

BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATION, (C-18)

MIDSEM – II
SECOND SEMESTER EXAMINATION
APPLIED SCIENCE LAB PRACTICE
TIME: 1 Hour TOTAL MARKS: 20

Instructions: (1) Answer both PART-A AND PART-B on separate answer sheets.
(2) Each question carries TEN marks.

PART-A (PHYSICS LAB)

Perform ONE experiment allotted by the examiner. 1 x 10 = 10

5. Determine the velocity of sound in air at room temperature by resonance method.

6. Determine the refractive index of a solid using travelling microscope.

PART-B (CHEMISTRY LAB)

Perform ONE experiment allotted by the examiner. 1 x 10 = 10

7. Determine the partial alkalinity of water sample by using 0.02N H 2SO4 solution.
8. Determine the total alkalinity of water sample by using 0.02N H 2SO4 solution
9. Estimate the chloride content present in water sample by using 0.0141N
AgNO3 solution

247
 18 EE-209P

BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATION, (C-18)

MODEL PAPER
II SEMESTER END EXAMINATION

APPLIED SCIENCE LAB PRACTICE

Time: 2 Hours] [Total Marks: 40

Instructions: (1) Answer both PART-A AND PART-B on separate answer sheets.
(2) Each question carries TWENTY marks.

PART-A (PHYSICS LAB)

Perform ONE experiment allotted by the examiner. 1 x 20 = 20

14. Determine the Focal length and focal power of given convex lens using U-V method.
15. Determine the Focal length and focal power of given convex lens by U-V graph method.
16. Determine the value of acceleration due to gravity at your place sing Simple Pendulum.
17. Determine the value of acceleration due to gravity at your place sing Simple Pendulum by L-T 2
graph.
18. Determine the velocity of sound in air at room temperature by resonance method.
19. Determine the refractive index of a solid using travelling microscope.
20. Draw magnetic lines of force around a bar magnet placed in NN position of earth’s magnetic field
and locate neutral points.
21. Draw magnetic lines of force around a bar magnet placed in NS position of earth’s magnetic field
and locate neutral points.

PART-B (CHEMISTRY LAB)

Perform ONE experiment allotted by the examiner. 1 x 20 = 20

22. Estimate the amount of Mohr’s salt present in the given one litre of solution
by using 0.02M KMnO4 solution.
23. Determine the partial acidity of water sample by using 0.02N NaOH solution.
24. Determine the total acidity of water sample by using 0.02N NaOH solution
25. Determine the partial alkalinity of water sample by using 0.02N H 2SO4 solution.
26. Determine the total alkalinity of water sample by using 0.02N H 2SO4 solution
27. Estimate the chloride content present in water sample by using 0.0141N
AgNO3 solution
28. Find out the pH of the given solution by using pH meter.

248
 INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY LAB PRACTICE
Course Title : Information Technology Course Code : 18EE-210P
Lab Practice
Course Group : Practical
Semester : II
Credits : 1.5
Teaching Scheme (L:T:P): 15:0:30
Total Contact Periods : 45
Methodology : Lecture + Practical
SEE : 40 Marks
CIE : 60 Marks
(Semester End Examination)
(Continuous Internal Evaluation)

This Course is Common to all Programs of Diploma in Engineering

Prerequisites
Knowledge of Computer basics and DOS

Course Outcome
On successful completion of the course, the students will be able to attain below Course Outcome
(CO):

Course Outcome CL Linked PO Practical hrs

CO1 Demonstrate skills using spreadsheet software A 1,2,3,4,8,9,10 15

CO2 Demonstrate skills using presentation software A 1,2,3,4,8,9,10 15

CO3 Demonstrate skills using database software A 1,2,3,4,8,9,10 15

Total Sessions 45

Legends: R = Remember U= Understand; A= Apply and above levels (Bloom’s revised taxonomy)

Course Content

Spread Sheet
1. Open MS-Excel and identify the components on the screen
2. Create a Worksheet in MS-Excel and save it in .xls or .xlsx format
3. Inserting column and row in Excel
4. Creation of new worksheet in the existing Excel Book file
5. Generate a Chart using the data in Excel-worksheet
6. Automate calculations in a worksheet using formula
7. Sort and filter data in a worksheet
8. Protecting a worksheet, working with multiple sheets
9.
Presentation Software

249
 10. Create a simple Power point presentation for a small topic and saving in .ppt or pptx format
11. Inserting a new slide in the existing PowerPoint file
12. Inserting chart or image in a PowerPoint slide
13. Exercise with animation and sound features in PowerPoint
14. Exercise with Rehearse Timings feature in PowerPoint
15. Exercise in printing the PowerPoint file in (a) Slides (b) Handouts

Database Management System

16. Create a table for given data and save in .mdb or .accdb format
17. Add, Delete and rename fields
18. Use the Primary key field
19. Enter and edit data
20. Use Relationships option
21. Create forms
22. Modify and save forms
23. Create and use queries
24. Sort data
25. Display data
26. Create and print reports

Resources:
1. Computer Fundamentals Concepts, Systems, Application, D.P.Nagapal, S.Chand
Publication, RP-2014, ISBN: 81-219-2388-3
2. http://www.tutorialsforopenoffice.org/
3. http://www.libreoffice.org/get-help/documentation/

Composition of Educational Components:

Questions for CIE and SEE will be designed to evaluate the various educational components
(Bloom’s taxonomy) such as:

Sl. Bloom’s Category %

No.

1 Remembrance 20

2 Understanding 20

3 Application 60

Mapping Course Outcomes with Program Outcomes:

(Course Outcome linkage to Cognitive Level)

Course Outcome Experiment Linked Linked PO CL Practical

250
 Sessions

CO Demonstrate skills using 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8 1,2,3,4,8,9,10 A 15

1 spreadsheet software

CO Demonstrate skills using 9,10,11,12,13,14 1,2,3,4,8,9,10 A 15

2 presentation software

CO Demonstrate skills using 15,16,17,18,19,20,21, 1,2,3,4,8,9,10 A 15

3 database software
22,23,24,25

U-Understanding; A-application/ Analysis; App-Application

Course-PO Attainment Matrix
Level 3- Highly Addressed, Level 2-Moderately Addressed, Level 1-Low Addressed.

Course Delivery
The course will be delivered through tutorial of one hour and one & half hours of hands on practice per
week.

Suggested Student Activities:

1. Create a spreadsheet for the class
2. Create power point presentation for a course
3. Create a database for the class

Format for Student Activity Assessment

Internal Assessment

Activity Marks

Writing the experiment, record evaluation 30

Execution of the given experiment 20

Viva-voce 10

Total 60

Model Question Bank

Course Title: INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY LAB PRACTICE Course Code: 18EE-

210P

251
1. Using Spreadsheet Application, create a worksheet with five columns. Enter ten records and find the
sum of all columns using auto sum feature.
2. You have a monthly income of Rs.10000. Your monthly expenditures are Rent- Rs 3000, Food- Rs.
1500, Electricity- Rs.100, Phone- Rs. 150, and Cable TV-Rs. 200.
3. Prepare a worksheet with the Monthly Income, the Monthly Expenditures listed and summed, monthly
savings amount (what’s left over each month) calculated, and the amount saved per day (assuming 30
days in a month). Use Spreadsheet Application.
4. Using Spreadsheet Application, create a worksheet containing the pay details (containing Basic pay,
DA, HRA ,Other Allowance , Deductions- PF, PT, Insurance, Gross and Net salary) of the employees
using formulas.
5. Using Spreadsheet Application, create a Simple Bar Chart to highlight the results of your institute for
three years.
6. Using Spreadsheet Application, create a Pie Chart for a sample data and give legends.
7. Using presentation tool, Create a simple Presentation consisting of 4-5 slides about Input and Output
Devices.
8. Create a presentation about a book containing Title, Author, Publisher and Contents.
9. Create an automated (timings & animation) Presentation with five slides about different Models of
Computers. Use Presentation tool

DEEE SKILL UPGRADATION ACTIVITY SHEET

252
Course Title : Skill Upgradation Credits :2.5
Semester : II Total Contact Periods : 105
Methodology : Activities

Suggested Course Outcomes

CO.1 Address the identified needs of the community collaboratively to facilitate positive
social change.
a. Prepare a chart related to the topics covered in the present semester.
b. Listen to expert talk, guest lecture, youtube video and write a summary.
c. Participate in Haritha Haram and submit a small report about the activities.
d. Prepare a report / PPT / poster on waste water recycling or any eco-friendly practices.
e. Seminar on problems with possible solutions in the campus or nearby places
f. Group discussions or enacting a play on topics creating awareness about socio-economic
problems
g. Take up a case study on identification of latest technologies to tackle day to day problems
such as pollution control or traffic management and submit a report / PPT/ poster
h. Participate in NCC

(PO5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10)

CO.2 Listen attentively to others and respond appropriately

a. Listen to expert talk, guest lecture, youtube video and write a summary.
b. Participating in Group discussions or enacting a play on topics creating awareness about
socio-economic problems that can be mitigated by technologies.
c. Participate in quiz on technical aspects or current affairs
d. Participate in Mock Interview

(PO5, 7, 8, 9, 10)

CO.3 Adapt your style to the occasion, task, and audience

a. Group discussions or enacting a play on topics creating awareness about socio-economic
problems that can be mitigated by technologies.
b. Seminar on problems with possible solutions in the campus or nearby places
c. Participate in Mock Interview

(PO5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10)

CO.4 Articulate ideas in various formats including oral, written, nonverbal, visual, and
electronic devices.

253
 a. Prepare a chart related to the topics covered in the present semester.
b. Refer to an e-journal and submit a summary report on upcoming technologies.
c. Visit factory / industry and submit a report/PPT on the observations made.
d. Prepare a mini project and submit report.
e. Prepare a report / PPT / poster on waste water recycling or any eco-friendly practices.
f. Take up a case study on identification of latest technologies to tackle day to day problems
such as pollution control or traffic management and submit a report / PPT/ poster
g. Seminar on problems with possible solutions in the campus or nearby places
h. Participate in Mock Interview

(PO5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10)

CO.5 Demonstrate ability to recognize and effectively manage ambiguous ideas,

experiences and situations
a. Take up a case study on identification of latest technologies to tackle day to day problems
such as pollution control or traffic management and submit a report / PPT/ poster
b. Seminar on problems with possible solutions in the campus or nearby places

(PO5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10)

CO.6 Analyze the interconnections between individuals and society as well as how
individual actions have an impact on others.
a. Participate in Haritha Haram and submit a small report about the activities.
b. Participate in Swatch Bharath and write an essay on the importance of the program
c. Participate in NCC

(PO5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10)

CO.7 Utilize others’ ideas, strengths, knowledge, and abilities to foster an inclusive
environment & Develop and sustain healthy and meaningful relationships with others
a. Prepare a mini project and submit report.
b. Participate in Haritha Haram and submit a small report about the activities.
c. Participate in Swatch Bharath and write an essay on the importance of the program
d. Participate in NCC

(PO5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10)

CO.8 Ability to recognize their strengths and those of others to work towards a shared
vision.
a. Prepare a mini project and submit report.
b. Participate in Haritha Haram and submit a small report about the activities.
c. Participate in Swatch Bharath and write an essay on the importance of the program
d. Participate in NCC

(PO5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10)

254
 CO.9 Act in alignment with one’s own values to contribute to one’s life-long growth and
learning.
a. Physical activities such as sports, yoga, meditation and other relaxation techniques

(PO5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10)

CO.10 Gain, process, and act upon knowledge regarding the effects of individual,
community, national, and international level choices on ecosystems and people.
a. Prepare a report / PPT / poster on waste water recycling or any eco-friendly practices.
b. Take up a case study on identification of latest technologies to tackle day to day problems
such as pollution control or traffic management and submit a report / PPT/ poster
c. Take up a case study on identification of latest technologies to tackle day to day problems
such as pollution control or traffic management and submit a report / PPT/ poster
d. Seminar on problems with possible solutions in the campus or nearby places

(PO5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10)

CO Outcome CO/PO
Mapping

CO1 Address the identified needs of the community collaboratively to 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10

facilitate positive social change.
CO2 Listen attentively to others and respond appropriately 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10

CO3 Adapt your style to the occasion, task, and audience 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10

CO4 Articulate ideas in various formats including oral, written, nonverbal, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10

visual, and electronic devices.
CO5 Demonstrate ability to recognize and effectively manage ambiguous 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10
ideas, experiences and situations
CO6 Analyze the interconnections between individuals and society as well 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10
as how individual actions have an impact on others.
CO7 Utilize others’ ideas, strengths, knowledge, and abilities to foster an 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10
inclusive environment & Develop and sustain healthy and
meaningful relationships with others
CO8 Ability to recognize their strengths and those of others to work 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10
towards a shared vision
CO9 Act in alignment with one’s own values to contribute to one’s life- 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10
long growth and learning.
CO10 Gain, process, and act upon knowledge regarding the effects of 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10
individual, community, national, and international level choices on
ecosystems and people.

Note: The above COs may be mapped to other POs from 1 to 4 apart from PO’s 5 to 10
depending on the topic

Suggested Student Activities

255
 1. Prepare a chart related to the topics covered in the present semester.
2. Refer to an e-journal and submit a summary report on upcoming technologies.
3. Visit factory / industry and submit a report/PPT on the observations made.
4. Prepare a mini project and submit report.
5. Listen to expert talk, guest lecture, youtube video and write a summary.
6. Participate in Haritha Haram and submit a small report about the activities.
7. Prepare a report / PPT / poster on waste water recycling or any eco-friendly practices.
8. Take up a case study on identification of latest technologies to tackle day to day problems such as
pollution control or traffic management and submit a report / PPT/ poster
9. Participate in Swatch Bharath and write an essay on the importance of the program
10. Group discussions or enacting a play on topics creating awareness about socio-economic
problems
11. Physical activities such as sports, games, yoga, meditation and other relaxation techniques
12. Participate in quiz on technical aspects or current affairs
13. Seminar on problems with possible solutions in the campus or nearby places
14. Participate in NCC
15. Participate in Mock interviews

Note: The above student activities will be assessed using rubrics. A sample rubrics template is given
below. The subject teacher can assess students using rubrics with atleast four relevant aspects.

RUBRICS MODEL (For assessing Presentation skills)

Aspects Needs improvement Satisfactory Good Exemplary

Collection Collects very Collect much Collects Collects a

256
 Information with some basic
limited great deal of
very information with
of data information information with
limited relevance little bit of
relevance
to the topic irrelevance
Presents data well;
Presents data well Presents data in an
Presentation Clumsy but presentation
but need to improve understandable yet
of data presentation of data needs to be more
clarity concise manner
meaningful
Performs all
Fulfill Performs very Performs very Performs
duties of
team’s roles little duties but little duties and is nearly all
assigned
& duties Unreliable. inactive duties
team roles
Rarely does Usually does Always does
Normally
Shares the assigned the assigned the assigned
does the
work work; often work; rarely work without
assigned
equally needs needs having to be
work
reminding reminding reminded
Usually does Talks good;
Listens, but
Interaction with most of the but never Listens and
sometimes
other team talking; rarely show interest speaks a fair
talks too
mates allows others in listening to amount
much
to speak others
Audibility and Very little
Hardly audible and Audible most of the
clarity in audibility and Audible and clear
unclear time with clarity
speech clarity
Some depth of
Lacks content Insight and depth
Little depth of content
Understanding understanding and of content
content understanding is
content is clearly a work in understanding are
understanding evident but needs
progress evident
improvement
Content is Content is accurate
Content is accurate
inaccurate and but some Content is
and information is
information is not information is not accurate and
Content not presented in a
presented in a presented in a information is
Presentation logical order
logical order logical order but is presented in a
making it difficult
making it difficult still generally easy logical order
to follow
to follow to follow

Suggested additional aspects for assessing Leadership Qualities:

1. Carrying self
2. Punctuality
3. Team work abilities
4. Moral values
5. Communication skills
6. Ensures the work is done in time

Suggested additional aspects for assessing “Participation in social task”

1 Interested to know the current situation of society.

257
 2 Shows interest to participate in given social task.
3 Reliable
4 Helping nature
5 Inter personal skills
6 Ensures task is completed

Suggested additional aspects for assessing “Participation in Technical task”

1. Updated to new technologies

2. Identifies problems in society that can be solved using technology
3. Interested to participate in finding possible technical solutions to identified project
4. Reliable
5. Interpersonal skills

Suggested additional aspects for Carrying Self:

1 Stand or sit straight.

2 Keep your head level.
3 Relax your shoulders.
4 Spread your weight evenly on both legs.
5 If sitting, keep your elbows on the arms of your chair, rather than tightly against your sides.
6 Make appropriate eye contact while communicating.
7 Lower the pitch of your voice.
8 Speak more clearly.

RUBRICS FOR GENERAL SUBJECTS

ENGLISH

258
Method of evaluation of the student activities ( Rubrics)

Model Rubrics

S.No Sub Performance

activity excellent Good Satisfactory Need
improvement
1 Step-1 Data was collected Data was collected Data was Data was
from more than from three to four collected from collected only
four sources. sources two sources. one source.
2 Step-2 All materials and Almost all The materials The materials
data required for materials and data and data and data
the activity were required for the required for the required for the
accurately activity were activity were activity were
prepared based on accurately accurately inaccurately
the data collected prepared based on prepared based prepared
independently. the data collected on the data
independently. collected with
the help of
teacher.
3 Step-3 Procedures were Procedures were Procedures that Procedures that
outlined in a step- outlined in a step- outlined were outlined were
by-step fashion by-step fashion, complete with 1 not sequential,
that could be require or 2 gaps and & performed
followed by explanation & require the activity in a
anyone & performed the explanation & poor way
performed the activity performed the
activity effectively. activity normally
effectively.
4 Step-4 Presented/ Presented/ Presented/ Presented/
explained the explained the explained the explained the
information about information about information information
the activity in the activity in about the about the
logical, interesting logical sequence activity in activity
sequence with with visuals or logical sequence without
attractive visuals diagrams. with less visuals sequence and
or diagrams. or diagrams. visuals or
diagrams.
5 Conclusio Provided a Provided a Student provided Conclusions
n/ detailed conclusion / a conclusion/ /summary was
summary conclusion/ summary clearly summary less not relevant.
summary clearly based on the data effectively
based on the data and activity
and activity

Note: Separate rubrics may be prepared according to the activity

II SEMESTER

SKILL UPGRADATION IN - ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS

259
ACTIVITY ASSESSMENT Steps

1. Mathematical concepts
2. Procedure
3. Explanation
4. Working with others
5. Mathematical errors

ACTIVITIES

1 Prepare a presentation to describe various types of Straight lines.

2 Identify the geometrical shapes in and around your locality and give the details about them.

3. Prepare a comparative study of conic sections and their uses in engineering applications.

3. Prepare a detailed study report on differentiation using different methods.

4. List out and explain the applications of Differentiation.

5. Apply the differentiation in geometrical problems.

6. Apply the differentiation in rate measure problems.

7. Apply the differentiation to problem solving in finding maxima minima.

CO / PO - MAPPING OF ACTIVITIES

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10
CO1 3 2 2 1 1 2 2 3

CO2 3 2 2 1 1 2 2 3

CO3 3 2 2 1 1 2 2 3

CO4 3 2 2 1 1 2 2 3

CO5 3 2 2 1 1 2 2 3

CO6 3 2 2 1 1 2 2 3

CO7 3 2 2 1 1 2 2 3

Rubrics for Activity assessment

CATEGORY 4 3 2 1
Mathematical Explanation shows Explanation shows Explanation shows Explanation shows
Concepts complete substantial some very limited

260
 understanding of understanding of understanding of understanding of
the mathematical the mathematical the mathematical the underlying
concepts used to concepts used to concepts needed to concepts needed to
solve the solve the solve the solve the
problem(s). problem(s). problem(s). problem(s) OR is
not written.
Procedures Typically, uses an Typically, uses an Sometimes uses an Rarely uses an
efficient and effective procedure effective procedure effective procedure
effective procedure to solve the to solve problems, to solve problems.
to solve the problem(s). but does not do it
problem(s). consistently.

Explanation Explanation is Explanation is Explanation is a Explanation is

detailed and clear. clear. little difficult to difficult to
understand, but understand and is
includes critical missing several
components. components OR
was not included.
Working with Student was an Student was an Student cooperated Student did not
Others engaged partner, engaged partner with others, but work effectively
listening to but had trouble needed prompting with others.
suggestions of listening to others to stay on-task.
others and working and/or working
cooperatively cooperatively.
throughout lesson.
Mathematical 90-100% of the Almost all (85- Most (75-84%) of More than 75% of
Errors steps and solutions 89%) of the steps the steps and the steps and
have no and solutions have solutions have no solutions have
mathematical no mathematical mathematical mathematical
errors. errors. errors. errors.

PASS SCORE: 2.5

STUDENT ASSESSMENT by RUBRICS

CO AVERAGE
S.NO PIN CO1 CO2 CO3 CO4 CO5 CO6
7

261
 SEMESTER – II

SKILL UPGRATION – APPLIED PHYSICS

TASK

LEVEL 1: Concept, Ethical Data, Materials, Source (Library/internet/others)

LEVEL 2: Methodology/procedure

LEVEL 3: Analysis/experiment

LEVEL 4: Interpretation/ inference/ evaluation.

Bridge activity: - Visiting your college Library:

(A) Prepare a list of available reference books in Physics with details such as author, publisher,
edition etc.
(B) Prepare a list of Physics/Science journals, magazines, monographs with details.
(C) Prepare a log book of your visits to college library with brief description.

Activities:-

1. Construct a blowing pipe to detect dangerous gases in mines.

2. Construct model stethoscope with known materials.

3. Conduct awareness program on noise pollution in your college, colony. Prepare a video report.

4. Hypothesize seconds’ pendulum timer.

5. Prepare a power point presentation on photosensitive materials with detailed specifications.

6. Prepare a report on Lasers where they are practically used.

7. Prepare a power point presentation on application of optical fibers in medical and engineering
field.

8. How can you produce electricity with a magnet? – (a) Develop a working model/ prepare a power
point presentation with animation/ prepare drawings on a chart.

9. Construct an electric calling bell.

10. Setup a circuit on breadboard to verify Kirchhoff’s voltage law.

11. Prepare a power point presentation on Superconductors and their practical applications with
motion pictures embedded.

12. Collect various resistors, diodes and LEDs with specifications and compile on a card board.

262
NOTE:The above activities are indicative. The teacher may assign any other activity relevant
to the course based on resources available.

Course Outcomes (CO) Linked Pos Activity

Hours
CO1 Construction of a blowing pipe to detect PO1, PO2, PO3,
3
dangerous gases in mines PO4, PO5, PO6
CO2 Construction of model stethoscope with known PO1, PO2, PO5,
3
materials PO7
CO3 Conduct of awareness program on noise pollution PO1, PO2, PO5,
in the college, colony and preparation of a video PO6, PO7, PO8, 3
report. PO9
CO4 Construction of a seconds’ pendulum timer PO1, PO2, PO3,
3
PO4
CO5 Preparation of PPT on photosensitive materials
PO1, PO2 3
with detailed specifications
CO6 Preparation of report on lasers practically used PO1, PO2, PO4,
3
PO5, PO10
CO7 Preparation of PPT on application of optical PO1, PO2,PO4,
fibers in medical and engineering field PO5, PO6, PO9, 3
PO10
CO8 Production of electricity with a magnet –working
model, PPT with animation and drawings on a PO1, PO2, PO3,PO4 3
chart.
CO9 Construction of an electric calling bell PO1, PO2, PO3,
3
PO4
CO10 Construction of a circuit on breadboard to verify PO1, PO2, PO3,
3
Kirchhoff’s voltage law PO4
CO11 Preparation of PPT on Superconductors and their PO1, PO2, PO3,
3
practical applications with motion pictures. PO4, PO9, PO10
CO12 Collection of various resistors, diodes and LEDs
with specifications and installation on a card PO1, PO2 3
board

263
 Rubrics for Task Assessments

General Scale for scoring student performance in Skill Upgradation

Type of
4 3 2 1
Skill/Score
All Data/Material All Data/Material All All Data/Material
was collected one was collected more Data/Material was collected
Data/Material
time independently. than one time was collected several times
Collection
independently. several times with assistance.
independently.
Procedures were Procedures were Procedures were Procedures that
outlined in a step- outlined in a step-by- outlined in a were outlined
by-step fashion thatstep fashion that step-by-step were incomplete
could be followed could be followed by fashion, but had or not sequential,
Methodology/
by anyone without anyone without 1 or 2 gaps that even after Expert
Procedure
additional additional require feedback had
explanations. explanations. Expert explanation been given.
help was needed to even after expert
accomplish this. feedback.
Quality of Skill is Skill is mastered to Skill is present Skill needs
Activity/
high. the level of but with errors improvement.
Development
expectation. and omissions.
Student provided a Student provided a Student No conclusion
Interpretation/ detailed conclusion somewhat detailed provided a was apparent.
summary clearly. conclusion clearly. conclusion with
some reference.

NOTE: The above types of skills are indicative. The teacher may change the skills
depending on type of activity.

PASS SCORE: 2.5

STUDENT ASSESSMENT (RUBRICS)

AVE
S. Course Outcomes (Skill Activities) RAG
N PIN E
O CO CO CO
CO1 CO2 CO3 CO4 CO5 CO6 CO7 CO8 CO9
10 11 12

264
 Engineering Chemistry and Environmental Studies
Suggested Skill Upgradation Activities

Activity – 1

Oral/Power point presentation on the different methods of concentration of ore :

Step-1: Data collection on the ores and different methods of concentration of ore.
Step -2: Prepare for oral/a power point presentation on different methods of concentration of ore.
Step-3: Explain the methods of concentration of ore with oral presentation/ power point
presentation
Step-4: Submit the report along with ppt.

Activity – 2

Corrosion of a metal under different conditions:

Step-1: Collection of data related to the factors effecting the corrosion.

Step-2: Summarization of data/ literature collected.
Step -3: Setting and Execution of experiment under different conditions such as
i. Metal exposed to air only
ii. Metal exposed to dry air
iii. Metal partially dipped in salt water
iv. Metal completely dipped in water
v. Metal partially dipped in pure water

Note: This experiment may be conducted in other conditions also.

Step-4: Recording of observations and comparison of extent of corrosion under different conditions
after one week with explanation
Step-5: overall presentation of the activity

Activity – 3

Comparison of Corrosion of different metals /alloys exposed to the same environmental conditions:
Step-1: Data collection.
Step-2: Summarization of data/ literature collected.
Step -3: Setting and Execution of experiment with different metals/alloys such as Iron, stainless steel,
aluminum, copper etc. under the same conditions
Step-4: Recording of observations and comparison of extent of corrosion on different metals after one
week with explanation

265
Step-5: Overall presentation of the activity

Activity – 4

Comparison of Corrosion of metal with different shapes and surfaces under same environmental
conditions:
Step-1: Data collection.
Step-2: Summarization of data/ literature collected.
Step -3: Setting and Execution of experiment with a metal having different shapes and surfaces under
the same conditions.
Step-4: Recording of observations and comparison of extent of corrosion on different metals after one
week with explanation
Step-5: Overall presentation of the activity

Activity – 5

Study of Prevention of Corrosion of a metal by using different coating materials

Step-1: Data collection.

Step-2: Summarization of data/ literature collected.
Step -3: Setting and Execution of experiment with a metal coated with different materials like oil, paint,
plastic, rubber etc
Step-4: Recording of observations and comparison of extent of corrosion on the metals after one week
with explanation
Step-5: Overall presentation of the activity

Activity – 6

Study of plastics, recycling of plastics and their advantages and disadvantages

Step-1: Data collection.

Step-2: Summarization of data/ literature collected.
Step -3: Preparation of power point presentation on recycling, advantages and disadvantages of platsics
Step-4: Explain about the recycling, advantages and disadvantages of plastics and suggest the measures
to protect the environment
Step-5: Submission of the report along with the ppt.

Activity – 7

Study on natural rubber and its uses

Step-1: Data collection.

Step-2: Summarization of data/ literature collected.
Step -3: Preparation of power point presentation on processing of natural rubber from natural source

266
 and vulcanization..
Step-4: Explain about the properties and uses of natural and vulcanized rubber.
Step-5: Submission of the report along with the ppt.

Activity – 8

Power point presentation on fossil fuels

Step-1: Data collection.

Step-2: Summarization of data/ literature collected.
Step -3: Preparation of power point presentation on fossil fuels.
Step-4: Explain about the advantages and disadvantages of solid , liquid and gaseous fuels.
Step-5: Submission of the report along with the ppt.
Activity – 9

Study and analysis of environment related air pollution

Step-1: Data collection.

Step-2: Summarization of data/ literature collected.
Step -3: Identify the factors that affecting the quality of air.
Step-4: Explain about the quality of air and suggest the remedial measures through ppt.
Step-5: Submission of the report along with the ppt.
Activity – 10

Study and analysis of environment related water pollution

Step-1: Data collection.
Step-2: Summarization of data/ literature collected.
Step -3: Identify the factors that affecting the quality of water body.
Step-4: Explain about the quality of water body and suggest the remedial measures through ppt.
Step-5: Submission of the report along with the ppt.
Activity – 11

Study and analysis of college environment

Step-1: Data collection.

Step-2: Summarization of data/ literature collected.
Step -3: Identify the factors that affecting the environment of the institution.
Step-4: Explain about the existing environment and suggest the measures to improve it through ppt.
Step-5: Submission of the report along with the ppt.
Activity – 12

Construction of Galvanic cell

Step-1: Data collection.
Step-2: Summarization of data/ literature collected.

267
Step -3: Construction of any galvanic cell.
Step-4: Explain about the construction and functioning of Galvanic cell through ppt.
Step-5: Submission of the report along with the ppt.

Note: Any other skill upgradation activity related to the course may be taken up.

Mapping of POs to Student activities

S. Name of the activity Linked POs

No
1 Power point presentation on the different methods of concentration of 1,2,4,8,9
ore
2 Corrosion of a metal under different conditions 1,2,3,4, 5,6,8,9,10
3 Comparison of Corrosion of different metals /alloys exposed to the 1,2,3,4, 5,6,8,9,10
same environmental conditions
4 Comparison of Corrosion of metal with different shapes and surfaces 1,2,3,4,5,6,8,9,10
under same environmental conditions
5 1,2,3,4,5,6,8,9,10
Study of Prevention of Corrosion of a metal by using different coating
materials

6 1,2,4,5,6,7,8,9,10
Study of plastics, recycling of plastics and their advantages and
disadvantages

7 1,2,4,5,6,7,8,9,10
Study on natural rubber and its uses

8 1,2,4,5,7,8,9,10
Power point presentation on fossil fuels

9 1,2,4,5,6,7,8,9,10
Study and analysis of environment related air pollution

10 Study and analysis of environment related water pollution 1,2,4,5,6,7,8,9,10

11 1,2,4,5,6,7,8,9,10
Study and analysis of college environment

12 1,2,3,4,5,8,9
Construction of Galvanic cell

268
Method of evaluation of the student activities ( Rubrics)

Model Rubrics

S Sub Performance
. activ excellent Good Satisfactory Need improvement
N ity
o
1 Step- Data was collected from Data was collected Data was collected from Data was collected
1 more than four sources. from three to four two sources. only one source.
sources
2 Step- All materials and data Almost all materials The materials and data The materials and
2 required for the activity and data required for required for the activity data required for the
were accurately prepared the activity were were accurately prepared activity were
based on the data collected accurately prepared based on the data inaccurately prepared
independently. based on the data collected with the help of
collected teacher.
independently.
3 Step- Procedures were outlined Procedures were Procedures that outlined Procedures that
3 in a step-by-step fashion outlined in a step-by- were complete with 1 or outlined were not
that could be followed by step fashion, require 2 gaps and require sequential, &
anyone & performed the explanation & explanation & performed performed the
activity effectively. performed the the activity normally activity in a poor way
activity effectively.
4 Step- Presented/ explained the Presented/ explained Presented/ explained the Presented/ explained
4 information about the the information information about the the information about
activity in logical, about the activity activity in logical the activity without
interesting sequence with in logical sequence sequence with less sequence and visuals
attractive visuals or with visuals or visuals or diagrams. or diagrams.
diagrams. diagrams.
5 Conc Provided a detailed Provided a Student provided a Conclusions
lusio conclusion/ summary conclusion / conclusion/ summary /summary was not
n/ clearly based on the data summary clearly less effectively relevant.
sum and activity based on the data and
mary activity

Note: Separate rubrics may be prepared according to the activity

269
DIPLOMA IN ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING
III SEMESTER

270
 III SEMESTER

TEACHING AND EXAMINATION SCHEME

Sl Course Course Name Teaching Scheme Examination Scheme

N Code Instruction Total Credits Continuous internal Semester end examination
o
Periods per Periods evaluation
week per
semester
L T P Mid Mid Internal Max Marks Total Min
sem sem evaluati Min Marks marks marks for
1 2 on passing
including
internal
1 18EE- Applied Engineering
301F Mathematics 3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35
2 18EE- Electrical Circuits 14 35
302C 3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 100
3 18EE DC Machines and 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35
3 1 0
-303C Batteries
4 18EE Electrical and
-304C Electronic 14 35
Measuring 3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 100
Instruments
5 18EE Electronic Circuits
3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35
-305C

6 18EE Circuits Lab Practice 20 50

-306P 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 100
7 18EE DC Machines Lab 1 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
0 2
-307P Practice
8 18EE Electrical
-308P Measurements Lab 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
Practice
9 18EE Electronics Lab 45 1.5 20 50
-309P Practice 1 0 2 20 20 20 40 100
1018EE Communication
-310P Skills and Life Skills 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
lab practice
11 Skill Upgradation 0 0 7 105 2.5 0 0 Rubrics -- -

20 5 17 630 25 200 200 200 400 170 1000 425

Activities: student performance is to be assessed through Rubrics

271
 APPLIED ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS
Course Title : Applied Engineering Course Code : 18EE-301F
Mathematics
Semester : III Course Group : Foundation
Teaching Scheme in periods ( L : T : : 45:15: 0 Credits : 3
Methodology
P) : Lecture + Tutorial Total Contact : 60
CIE : 60 Marks SEE
Periods : 40 Marks
(Continuous Internal Evaluation) (Semester End Examination)
Programmes : Common to all Engineering Diploma Programmes
Pre requisites

This course requires the knowledge of Basic Engineering Mathematics and Engineering Mathematics at
Diploma 1st and 2nd Semester level.

Course Outcomes: COs

At the end of the course, the student will have the ability to:

CO 1 Integrate different kinds of functions

CO 2 Integrate functions using different methods
CO 3 Find the values of definite integrals.
CO 4 Solve simple problems of Areas, Volumes.
CO 5 Find the Mean and RMS values of various functions and Approximate values of Definite integrals
using Trapezoidal and Simpson’s 1/3rd rule
CO 6 Form the Differential Equation and Solve Simple DEs of 1st order and 1stdegree.

Course Content:

Unit-I Duration: 10Periods (L: 7.5 – T:2.5)

Indefinite Integration-I

Integration regarded as anti-derivative – Indefinite integral of standard functions. Properties

of indefinite integral. Integration by substitution or change of variable. Integrals of the form

sinmq. cosnq. where m and n are positive integers. Integrals of tan x, cot x, sec x, cosec x

andpowers of tan x, sec x by substitution.

Evaluation of integrals which are reducible to the following forms:

272
 1 1 1
i) 2 2
, 2 2, 2 2
a +x a −x x −a
1 1 1
ii) , ,
√ a2+ x2 √a 2−x 2 √ x 2−a2
iii ) √ x 2 + a2 , √ a2 −x 2 , √ x 2 −a2

Unit – II Duration: 08 Periods (L: 6.0 – T:2.0)

Indefinite Integration-II

Integration by decomposition of the integrand into simple rational algebraic functions.Integration by

parts, Bernoulli’s rule.

Unit-III Duration: 06 Periods (L: 4.5 – T:1.5)

Definite Integral and its Properties:

Definite integral-fundamental theorem of integral calculus, properties of definite integrals, evaluation of

simple definite integrals.Definite integral as the limit of a sum.

Unit – IV Duration: 10 Periods (L: 7.5 – T:2.5)

Applications of Definite Integrals:

Areas under plane curves – Sign of the Area – Area enclosed between two curves. Solid of revolution
– Volumes of solids of revolution.

Unit – V Duration: 08 Periods (L: 6.0 – T:2.0)

Mean, RMS values and Numerical Integration:

Mean values and Root Mean Square values of a function on a given interval.

Trapezoidal rule, Simpson’s 1/3 rule to evaluate an approximate value of a definite integral.

273
Unit – VI Duration: 18 Periods (L: 13.5 – T:4.5)

Differential Equations of First Order:

Definition of a differential equation– order and degree of a differential equation– formation of

differential equations– solution of differential equation of first order, first degree: variables -separable,
homogeneous, exact, linear differential equation, Bernoulli’s equation.

Reference Books:

1. Integral Calculus Vol.I, by M.Pillai and Shanti Narayan

2. Thomas’ Calculus, Pearson Addison –Wesley Publishers

Suggested E-Learning references

1. www.freebookcentre.net/mathematics/introductory-mathematics-books.html

2.E-books:www.mathebook.net

Suggested Learning Outcomes

Unit-I

1.0 Use Indefinite Integration to solve engineering problems

1.1 Explain the concept of Indefinite integral as an anti-derivative.

1.2 State the indefinite integral of standard functions and properties of Integrals ò (u + v) dx

And òkudxwhere k isconstant andu, v are functions of x.

1.3 Solve integration problems involving standard functions using the above rules.

1.4 Evaluate integrals involving simple functions of the following type by the method of

substitution.

i) òf(ax + b) dx where f(x) dx is in standard form.

ii) ò [f(x)]n f ¢(x) dx

iii) òf¢(x)/[f(x)] dx

iv) òf {g(x)} g ¢(x) dx

274
1.5 Find the Integrals of tan x, cot x, sec x and cosec x usingthe above.

1.6 Evaluate the integrals of the formò SinmqCosnq. dq where m and n are positive integers.

1.7 Evaluate integrals of powers of tan x and sec x.

1.8 Evaluate the Standard Integrals of the functions of the type

1 1 1
i) , ,
a2 +x 2 a 2−x 2 x 2 −a2
1 1 1
ii) , ,
√ a2+ x2 √a 2−x 2 √ x 2−a2
iii ) √ x 2 + a2 , √ a2 −x 2 , √ x 2 −a2

1.9 Evaluate the integrals of the type

1 1 1
 a  bSin d ,  a  b cos  d and  a cos  b sin   c d .

Unit-II

2.0Use Indefinite Integration to solve engineering problems

2.1 Evaluate integrals using decomposition method.

2.2 Evaluate integrals using integration by parts with examples.

2.3 State the Bernoulli’s rule for evaluating the integrals of the form ∫ u.vdx .

2.4 Evaluate the integrals of the formò ex [f(x) + f ¢(x)] dx.

Unit-III

3.0 Understand definite integral and use it in engineering applications

3.1 State the fundamental theorem of integral calculus

3.2 Explain the concept of definite integral.

3.3 Calculate the definite integral over an interval.

3.4 State various properties of definite integrals.

3.5 Evaluate simple problems on definite integrals using the above properties.

275
3.6 Explain definite integral as a limit of sum by considering an area.

Unit –IV

4.0 Understand definite integral and use it in engineering applications

4.1 Find the Areas under plane curves and area enclosed between two curves using

integration.

4.2 Obtain the Volumes of solids of revolution.

Unit –V

5.0 Understand Mean, RMS values and Numerical Methods

5.1 Obtain the Mean value and Root Mean Square (RMS) value of the functions in any given

Interval.

5.2 Explain the Trapezoidal rule, Simpson’s 1/3 rules for approximation of definite integrals

andprovide some examples.

Unit –VI

6.0 Solve Differential Equations in engineering problems.

6.1 Define a Differential equation, its order and degree

6.2 Form a differential equation by eliminating arbitrary constants.

6.3 Solve the first order first degree differential equations by the following methods:

i. Variables Separable.

ii. Homogeneous Equations.

iii. Exact Differential Equations

iv. Linear differential equation of the formdy/dx + Py = Q,

where P and Q are functions of x or constants.

v. Bernoulli’s Equation (Reducible to linear form.)

6.4 Solve simple problems leading to engineering applications by using above methods.

276
Suggested Student Activities

1. Student visits Library to refer Standard Books on Mathematics and collect related material

2.Quiz

3.Group discussion

4.Surprise tests

5. Seminars

6. Home Assignments

CO / PO - MAPPING

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 Mapped
POs
CO1 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
CO2 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
CO3 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
CO4 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
CO5 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
CO6 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10

277
 MID SEM-I EXAM
S.No Unit Name R U A Remarks
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-I 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)

6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-II 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)
Total Questions 4 4 4
MID SEM –II EXAM
S.No Unit Name R U A Remarks
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-III 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-IV 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)
Total Questions 4 4 4

Semester End Examination

Questions to be set for SEE Remarks
Sl No Unit No.
R U A  
1 I
1 9(a) 13(a)  
2 II  
3 III
2 10(a) 14(a)  
4 IV  
9(b) 13(b)
4
5 V 5, 6 11(a) 15(a)  
 
11(b) 15(b)  
3
10(b) 14(b)

6 VI 7,8 12(a) 16(a)  

 
12(b) 16(b)  
Total Questions 8 8 8  

278
 Remembering (R) 1 Mark
Legend: Understanding (U) 3 Marks

Application (A) 5 Marks

Code: 18EE-301F
STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION & TRAINING, TELANGANA
BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATIONS
MID SEM –I, MODEL PAPER,
DEEE III - SEMESTER
APPLIED ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS
TIME: 1: 00 Hours Max. Marks: 20
PART-A
Instructions: 1. Answer ALL questions 04 X 01 = 04
2 Each question carries ONE mark

5. Integrate( ex– sinx + x4) with respect to x

dx
6. Find ∫ 5 x+7 dx
7. Write Bernoulli’s rule of integration
8. Find ∫ xlogx dx
PART-B
Instructions: 1. Answer any TWO questions 02 X 03 = 06
2. Each question carries THREE marks

x5
5 a). Evaluate∫ dx .
1+ x 12
Or

5 b) Evaluate
dx
∫ ¿¿ ¿
6 a) Evaluate∫ xsinxdx

Or

3 x +2
6 b) Evaluate∫ dx .
( x−1 ) (2 x +3)

PART C
Instructions: 1. Answer any TWO questions 02 X 05 = 10
2. Each question carries FIVE marks

279
 7 a) Evaluate ∫ √ x 2+ 2 x +5dx
Or

7 b)Evaluate: ∫ cosxcos2 xdx .

8 a) Find ∫ x tan−1 xdx .
Or

8 b) Find ∫ x 4 cos 2 xdx .

@@@

Code: 18EE-301F
STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION & TRAINING, TELANGANA
BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATIONS
MID SEM –II, MODEL PAPER,
DEEE III -SEMESTER
APPLIED ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS
TIME: 1: 00 Hours Max. Marks: 20
PART-A
Instructions: 1. Answer ALL questions 04 X 01 = 04
2 Each question carries ONE mark
1
1. Find ∫ (x ¿¿ 4+1)dx ¿
0

π
2. Evaluate : ∫ sin 3 xdx
0

1
3. Evaluate : ∫ 1+1x 2 dx
0

4. Write the formula to find area bounded by the curve y= f(x) , x-axis, between the limits x=a and
x =b
PART-B
Instructions: 1. Answer any TWO questions 02 X 03 = 06
2. Each question carries THREE marks
π
2
5 a) Evaluate:
∫ √1−sin2 x dx
0
Or
π
2
5 b) Evaluate:
∫ sin 2 xdx
0

280
 6 a)Find the area bounded by the line 2x + y =8, x-axis and the lines x = 2 and x = 4.
Or
6 b) Find the Volume of the Solid generated by revolving the part of the Circle x 2+ y 2=36

From x = 0 to x = 4 about x – axis.

PART C
Instructions: 1. Answer any TWO questions 02 X 05 = 10
2. Each question carries FIVE marks
π
2
7 a) Evaluate: √ Sinx dx
∫ √ Sinx+ √ Cosx
0
Or
π
2
7 b) Evaluate:
∫ logsin xdx
0

8 a) Find the area enclosed between the Parabolas y=3 x−x 2 andy=x 2−x .
Or
8 b) Find the Volume of the Solid generated by the revolution of the area bounded by the
x2 y2
Ellipse + =1, about x- axis.
25 16
@@@

SUB.CODE:18EE-301F
BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATION,(C-18)
MODEL PAPER
DEEE III - SEMESTER EXAMINATION
APPLIED ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS
Time: 2 hours [Total Marks: 40]

PART-A
Instructions: 1. Answer ALL questions 08 X 01 = 08
2 Each question carries ONE mark
1. Find ∫ x 7 – 3/ x dx
1
2
2.Evaluate∫ ( x +1 )dx
0

3. Write the formula to find mean value of y = f(x), in the interval (a, b)

2
dy dy
4. Find the Order and Degree of the Differential Equation x
dx √
= 1+( ).
dx

281
 b
5 Write Trapezoidal Rule to find the approximate value of∫ f ( x ) dx .
a

6. Write the formula to find RMS value of y = f(x) over the range x=a and x = b.

dy
7. Solve =e 2 x+ y
dx

8. Write the condition for exactness of the differential equation M(x,y)dx + N(x,y)dy =0

PART-B

Instructions: 1. Answer any FOUR questions 04 X 03 = 12

2. Each question carries THREE marks

π
2
9 a) Evaluate:
∫ √1−sin2 x dx
0

Or
6
dx
9 b) Find the approximate value of ∫ by taking n = 6 using Trapezoidal rule.
0 1+ x

10 a) Find the area bounded by the Parabola y = x2 – 2x + 1 and x-axis.

Or

10 b) Form the Differential Equation from y= A e x + B e 3 x where A, B are arbitrary constants

11 a) Find the RMS value of √ log x over the range x= 1 and x= e

Or
4
dx
11 b) Calculate approximate value of ∫ by taking n= 4 using Simpson’s 1/3 rule
0 1+ x

dy
12 a) Solve: x +2 y =logx .
dx

Or

12 b) Solve: x ( 1− y 2 ) dx+ y ( 1−x2 ) dy =0

282
 PART C
Instructions: 1. Answer any FOUR questions 04 X 05 = 20
2. Each question carries FIVE marks
1
13 a) Evaluate:∫ 2 dx
x + 2 x +2
Or

13 b) Find the RMS value of y = √ 8−4 x 2 between x = 0 and x = 2

x2 y 2
14 a) Find the volume of solid generated by revolving the Ellipse + =1 about Major axis
a2 b 2

Or

dy
14 b) Solve: =sin( x + y )
dx

15 a) A curve is drawn to passing through the points given by the following table:

x 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4

y 3 3.4 3.7 3.8 2.7 2.6 2.1
Calculate the approximate area bounded by the curve, x-axis and the lines x= 1 and x= 4

using Simpson’s 1/3 rule

Or
1
15 b) Evaluate: ∫ √( 1−x2 ) dx approximately by taking n = 4 using
0

Simpson’s1/3 rd Rule.

16 a) Solve: ( y 2−xy ) dx =x2 dy .

Or

dy
16 b) Solve: + yCosx= y 3Sin2x.
dx

@@@

ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS

Course Title : Electrical Circuits Course Code : 18EE-302C

Semester : III Course Group : Core
Teaching Scheme in periods ( L : T : : 45 : 15 : 0 Credits : 3
P)

283
Methodology : Lecture + Tutorial Total Contact : 60
Periods
CIE : 60 Marks SEE : 40 Marks
(Continuous Internal Evaluation) (Semester End Examination)

Pre requisites
This course requires the knowledge of basic electrical engineering.

Course Outcomes
At the end of the course, the student will have the ability to:

CO 1 Apply Kirchhoff’s laws and star delta transformations to complex circuits

CO 2 Apply network theorems to solve DC circuits

CO 3 Familiarize the fundamentals of alternating quantities

CO 4 Solve problems on single phase A.C. series circuits

CO 5 Solve problems on single phase A.C. parallel circuits

CO 6 Solve problems on poly phase balanced circuits

Blue Print of Marks for SEE

Unit Unit Name Periods Questions to be set for SEE

No
R U A

1 Kirchhoff’s Laws and 4 1 9(a) 13(a)

Star - Delta 8
Transformation

2 Network Theorems 12

284
 3 Fundamentals of A.C 8

4 Single phase A.C. Series 2 10(a) 14(a)

12
Circuits

5 Single phase A.C. 9(b), 13(b),

10 5,6
Parallel Circuits 11(a), 11(b) 15(a), 15(b)
3
6 Poly Phase Circuits 10(b), 14(b),
10 7,8
12(a), 12(b) 16(a), 16(b)

Total 60 8 8 8

Course Contents

UNIT 1 - Kirchhoff’s Laws and Star - Delta Transformation Duration: 8 Periods (L: 6 - T:
2)
Active and Passive circuits - Junction, branch and loop in circuits -Insufficiency of Ohm’s law to solve
complex circuits, Kirchhoff’s laws – Mesh analysis – Nodal analysis - Star - Delta configurations, star-
delta transformations.

UNIT 2– Network Theorems Duration: 12 Periods (L: 9 – T: 3)

Ideal Voltage source, Ideal current source- Source transformation technique-Superposition theorem-
Thevenin’s Theorem -Norton’s Theorem- Maximum power transfer theorem with reference to D.C.-
Problems on the above.

UNIT 3 – Fundamentals of A.C Duration: 8 Periods (L: 6 – T: 2)

Definition of Alternating quantity, cycle, time period, frequency, amplitude, instantaneous value and
angular velocity - Average value - effective value/R.M.S value – form factor – peak factor - definitions
and derivations - calculations of these values for sine wave, half wave rectified sine wave, full wave
rectified sine wave, triangular and square wave forms - Representation of alternating quantities by
equation, graphs and phasor diagrams - Phase and phase difference–Understanding of `j’ notation for
alternating quantities ,transformation from polar to rectangular notations and vice-versa.

UNIT 4 - Single phase A.C. Series Circuits Duration: 12 Period (L: 9 – T: 3)

Resistance, inductance and capacitance as circuit elements - concept of reactance, Derive the expression
forvoltage, current, impedance, power including waveforms and phasor diagrams in pure resistive,
inductive and capacitive circuits - Derive the impedance, current, phase angle, power and power factor in
R-L, R-C, L-C &R-L-C series circuits including phasor diagrams. Impedance triangle, phase angle, power
factor, active and reactive components of power in above circuits – Definition of Resonance in series

285
circuits and expression for resonant frequency-Q-factor-Importance of Q- factor- Problems on series
circuits and series resonance.
UNIT 5 - Single phase A.C. Parallel Circuits Duration: 10 Periods (L:7.5 – T: 2.5)
Derive the impedance, current, phase angle, power and power factor in R-L, R-C, LC&R-L-C parallel
circuits including phasor diagrams. Impedance triangle, phase angle, power factor, active and reactive
components of current and power in above circuits – Solve simple problems on parallel circuits by vector
method and by `j’ notation –Parallel RLC resonance circuit –Condition for resonance in parallel circuit-
Q-factor and resonance frequency-problems

UNIT 6 - Poly phase circuits Duration: 10 Periods (L:7.5 – T: 2.5)

Definition of Poly phase - Generation of 2 phase and 3 phase EMF’s - Representation of 2 phase and 3
phase EMF’s by equations, waveforms and phasors - phase sequence - Current in neutral in 2 phase and 3
phase system - phasor diagram showing relation between phase and line quantities, Relation between
phase and Line values of voltages and currents – 3 phase power equation - Problems on 3 phase balanced
circuits –Advantages of poly-phase systems over single-phase systems.

Recommended Books
1. Electrical Technology - Vol - I by B.L. Theraja- S.Chand&co.
2. Introduction to Electrical Engg. by V.K.Mehta
3. Electrical Technology by Hughes.
4. Problems in Electrical Engg. by Parker Smith
5. Engineering Circuit analysis by William Hayt and Jack E,kemmerly-TMH
6. Electrical Circuits by A.Chakraborthy- Dhanapat Rai and Sons
7. Network and Systems by D. Roy Chowdary- New age international publishers
8. Electric Circuit Theory by K. Rajeshwaran-Pearson educations,2004
9. Network Analysis by Van Valkenburg, PHI.
10. Electrical Circuits by Joseph Edminister- Schaum series
11. Fundamentals of Electric circuits – Alexander Sadiku- TMH
12. Electric circuits by Mahmood Nahvi, Joseph A Edminister-TMH.

Suggested E-learning references

1. http://electrical4u.com/
2. www.nptel.ac.in
3. https://ocw.mit.edu/courses/electrical-engineering-and-computer-science/
4. Fundamentals Handbook of Electrical Science, Module 1, Basic Electrical Theory, Department of
Energy, U. S. Department of Energy, June 1992.
5.http://www.freeengineeringbooks.com/electrical-books-download/Electrical-Engineering-basics.php
6. https://electrical-engineering-portal.com/theorems-network-reductions#circuit-theorems
7. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108102042/
8. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108108076/

Suggested Learning Outcomes

After completion of the subject, the student shall be able to

286
1.1 Differentiate between active and passive circuits.
1.2 Define junction in circuits
1.3 Define loop in circuits
1.4 Define branch in circuits
1.5 State the limitations of Ohm’s law.
1.6 State Kirchhoff’s current law
1.7 State Kirchoff’s voltage law.
1.8 Solve problems by applying KVL and KCL
1.9 Explain mesh analysis
1.10 Explain nodal analysis
1.11 Solve simple problems on mesh analysis and nodal analysis
1.12 Explain star and delta circuits
1.13 Explain the concept of circuit transformation and equivalent circuits
1.14 Develop transformation formulae for star- delta transformations
1.15 Solve problems on star delta transformation

2.1 Define ideal voltage source

2.2 Define ideal current source
2.3 Explain source transformation technique
2.4 Solve simple problems on source transformation
2.5 State Superposition theorem.
2.6 State Thevenin’s theorem.
2.7 State Norton’s theorem
2.8 State maximum power transfer theorem.
(All the theorems with reference to D.C only)
2.9 Derive the condition for maximum power transfer
2.10 Solve simple problems on network theorems

3.1 Define alternating quantity

3.2 Define cycle of an alternating quantity
3.3 Define frequency of an alternating quantity
3.4 Define time period of an alternating quantity
3.5 Define amplitude of an alternating quantity
3.6 Define angular velocity of an alternating quantity
3.7 Define the instantaneous value of an alternating quantity
3.8 Define maximum value of an alternating quantity
3.9 Define average value of an alternating quantity
3.10 Define R.M.S value of an alternating quantity
3.11 Define form factor of an alternating quantity
3.12 Define peak factor of an alternating quantity
3.13 Calculate the maximum value, average value, R.M.S value, form factor and peak factor of sine
wave
3.14 Calculate the maximum value, average value, R.M.S value, form factor and peak factor of half
wave rectified sine wave
3.15 Calculate the maximum value, average value, R.M.S value, form factor and peak factor of full
wave rectified sine wave
3.16 Calculate the maximum value, average value, R.M.S value, form factor and peak factor of
triangular wave

287
3.17 Calculate the maximum value, average value, R.M.S value, form factor and peak factor of square
wave
3.18 Define the terms phase and phase difference (No problems).
3.19 Define j operator.
3.20 Convert polar quantities to rectangular quantities and vice-versa.

4.1 Define the terms resistance, inductance and capacitance

4.2 Define reactance
4.3 Define active power, reactive power and apparent power
4.4 Mention the units of active power, reactive power and apparent power
4.5 Draw current, voltage waveforms, phasor diagram of pure resistive circuit
4.6 Derive the expression for voltage, current, impedance, power in pure resistive circuit
4.7 Draw current, voltage waveforms, phasor diagram of pure inductive circuit
4.8 Derive the expression for voltage, current, impedance, power in pure inductive circuit
4.9 Draw current, voltage waveforms, phasor diagram of pure capacitive circuit
4.10 Derive the expression for voltage, current, impedance, power in pure capacitive circuit
4.11 Draw current, voltage waveforms, phasor diagram, power triangle, impedance triangle of R-L
series circuit
4.12 Derive the expression for voltage, current, impedance, power and power factor in R-L series
circuit
4.13 Draw current, voltage waveforms, phasor diagram, power triangle, impedance triangle of R-C
series circuit
4.14 Derive the expression for voltage, current, impedance, power and power factor in R-C series
circuit
4.15 Draw current, voltage waveforms, phasor diagram, power triangle, impedance triangle of L-C
series circuit
4.16 Derive the expression for voltage, current, impedance, power and power factor in L-C series
circuit
4.17 Draw current, voltage waveforms, phasor diagram, power triangle, impedance triangle of R-L-C
series circuit
4.18 Derive the expression for voltage, current, impedance, power and power factor in R-L-C series
circuit
4.19 Compute apparent power, active power and reactive of series circuits
4.20 Solve simple problems on R-L, R-C, L-C, R-L-C series circuits
4.21 Define resonance in series circuits
4.22 State the condition for resonance in series circuit
4.23 Derive resonant frequency of single phase series RLC circuit.
4.24 Solve simple problems on series resonance
4.25 Define Q- factor of single phase series RLC circuit
4.26 State the importance of Q-factor.
4.27 Derive the expression for Q-factor of single phase series RLC circuit
4.28 Solve simple problems on Q-factor

5.1 Draw current, voltage waveforms, phasor diagram, power triangle, impedance triangle of R-L
parallel circuit
5.2 Derive the expression for voltage, current, impedance, power and power factor in R-L parallel
circuit
5.3 Draw current, voltage waveforms, phasor diagram, power triangle, impedance triangle of R-C
parallel circuit

288
5.4 Derive the expression for voltage, current, impedance, power and power factor in R-C parallel
circuit
5.5 Draw current, voltage waveforms, phasor diagram, power triangle, impedance triangle of L-C
parallel circuit
5.6 Derive the expression for voltage, current, impedance, power and power factor in L-C parallel
circuit
5.7 Draw current, voltage waveforms, phasor diagram, power triangle, impedance triangle of R-L-C
parallel circuit
5.8 Derive the expression for voltage, current, impedance, power and power factor in R-L-C parallel
circuit
5.9 Compute apparent power, active power and reactive of parallel circuits
5.10 Solve simple problems on R-L, R-C, L-C, R-L-C parallel circuits
5.11 Solve simple problems on parallel circuits by vector method
5.12 Solve simple problems on parallel circuits by j- notation method
5.13 Define resonance in parallel circuits
5.14 State the condition for resonance in parallel circuit
5.15 Derive resonant frequency of single phase parallel RLC circuit.
5.16 Solve simple problems on parallel resonance
5.17 Define Q- factor of single phase parallel RLC circuit
5.18 Derive the expression for Q-factor of single phase parallel RLC circuit
5.19 Solve simple problems on Q-factor

6.1 Define the term `Poly Phase’.

6.2 Explain the method of generation of 2 phase emfs
6.3 Explain the method of generation of 3 phase emfs.
6.4 Write the expressions for Poly phase emfs
6.5 Represent poly phase emfs by phasor diagram
6.6 Represent poly phase emfs by waveforms
6.7 Define phase sequence
6.8 Compute the current flowing neutral conductor in 2-phase system
6.9 Compute the current flowing neutral conductor in 3-phase system
6.10 Derive the relation between line and phase values of current and voltage in 3 phase star circuit
6.11 Derive the relation between line and phase values of current and voltage in 3 phase delta circuits.
6.12 Derive the equation for power in 3 phase circuit.
6.13 Solve simple problems in three-phase system with balanced loads.
6.14 List the advantages of 3 phase system over single phase system.

Suggested Student Activities

16. Prepare a chart on various electrical circuit theorems and their practical applications.
17. Write a report on practical applications of Single phase AC circuits and Three phase AC circuits
with their operating voltages and other electrical parameters.
3. Visit nearby Industry to familiarize with single phase and poly phase circuits
4. Quiz

289
 5. Group discussion
6. Surprise test

CO-PO Mapping Matrix

Engineer and society

Communication

Lifelong learning
Basic knowledge

Discipline Knowledge

Engineering Tools

Ethics
Linked

practice Experiments and

sustainability Environment &

work Individual and Team

PO

CO PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO
10

CO1 3 3 1 3 1,2,4,10

CO2 3 3 1 3 1, 2,4,10

CO3 3 3 1 3 1,2,4,10

CO4 3 3 1 3 1,2,4,10

CO5 3 3 1 3 1,2,4,10

CO6 3 3 1 3 1,2,4,10

Internal Evaluation

Test Units Marks

Mid Sem 1 1 and 2 20

Mid Sem 2 3 and 4 20

Slip Test 1 1 and 2 5

Slip Test 2 3 and 4 5

Assignments - 5

Seminars - 5

Total 60

QUESTION PAPER PATTERN FOR MID SEMESTER EXAMS

290
 Sl.No Description Level No of Marks for Choice Total Marks
Questions each question

01 Part-A Remembering(R) 4 1 Nil 4 Marks

02 Part-B Understanding(U) 4 3 2 6 Marks

03 Part-C Application(A) 4 5 2 10 Marks

Total Marks 20 Marks

MID SEM-I EXAM

S.No Unit No R U A Remarks

1 Unit-I 1,2 5(a) 7(a)

5(b) 7(b)

2 Unit-II 3,4 6(a) 8(a)

6(b) 8(b)

Total Questions 4 4 4

MID SEM-II EXAM

S.No Unit No R U A Remarks

1 Unit-III 1,2 5(a) 7(a)

5(b) 7(b)

2 Unit-IV 3,4 6(a) 8(a)

6(b) 8(b)

Total Questions 4 4 4

The length of answer for each question framed in respect of Part-A, B&C shall not exceed ¼ of a
page,1 page and 2 pages respectively

QUESTION PAPER PATTERN FOR SEMESTER END EXAM

Sl.No Description Level No of Marks for Choice Total Marks

Questions each question

01 Part-A Remembering(R) 8 1 Nil 8 Marks

02 Part-B Understanding(U) 8 3 4 12 Marks

03 Part-C Application(A) 8 5 4 20 Marks

Total Marks 40 Marks

291
 Questions to be set for SEE
Unit No
R U A

I
1 9(a) 13(a)
II

III
2 10(a) 14(a)
IV 4

9(b), 13(b),
V 5,6
11(a), 11(b) 15(a), 15(b)
3
10(b), 14(b),
VI 7,8
12(a), 12(b) 16(a), 16(b)

Total Questions 8 8 8

STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION AND TRAINING,TELANGANA

MODEL QUESTION PAPER
DEEE III SEMESTER MID SEMESTER-I EXAMINATION

Corse Code:18EE-302C Duration:1 Hour

Course Name: Electrical Circuits Max.Marks:20

PART-A
Answer all questions, Each Question carries one mark 4x1 = 4 Marks

1) State Kirchhoff’s current law.

2) Define junction of an electrical network
3) What is an ideal voltage source?
4) StateThevenin’s theorem.

PART-B
Answer two questions. Each question carries three marks 2x 3 = 6 Marks

5) a) Find the magnitude and direction of the unknown currents in below circuit. Given i1 = 10A, i2 =
6A and i5 = 4A.

292
 OR

b) Convert the below star network to an equivalent delta network if R 1=R2=R3=2Ω .

6) a) State how to convert a voltage source to current source with an example.

OR

b) State superposition theorem.

PART-C
Answer two questions. Each question carries five marks 2x 5 = 10 Marks

7) a) Find the equivalent resistance between X and Y for the circuit shown below

OR

293
 b) Find the current through 8Ω resistor for the network shown below by using Kirchhoff’s law.

8) a) Determine the current through 10Ω resistor of the network shown below by using Norton
theorem.

OR

b) Find the value of RL for the given network below so that the power drawn by RL is maximum.

294
 STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION AND TRAINING,TELANGANA
MODEL QUESTION PAPER
DEEE III SEMESTER MID SEMESTER-II EXAMINATION

Corse Code:18EE-302C Duration:1 Hour

Course Name: Electrical Circuits Max.Marks:20

PART-A
Answer all questions, Each Question carries one mark4x1 = 4 Marks
1) Define form factor
2) Convert 3+j4 to polar quantity.
3) Draw the power triangle of single phase series RC circuit .
4) Draw the phasor diagram of pure inductor.

PART-B
Answer two questions. Each question carries three marks 2x 3 = 6 Marks

5) a) Give the expression of rms value and average value of half wave rectified sine wave.

OR

b) Define the phase and phase difference of alternating quantities.

6) a) Give the expressions of impedance and power factor of single phase series RL circuit.

OR

b) Give the expressions of Q-factor and resonant frequency of single phase series circuit.
PART-C
Answer two questions. Each question carries five marks 2x 5 = 10 Marks

7) a) Derive the expression for RMS value and average value of full wave rectified sine wave.

295
 OR

b) Derive the expression for peak factor and form factor of a square wave.

8) a) Derive the expression for resonant frequency of a series RLC circuit.

OR

b) A coil having resistance of 7Ω and inductance of 30 mH is connected to 230V, 50 Hz single

phase supply. Calculate the circuit current and power factor.

State Board of Technical Education and Training,Telangana

Model Question paper
DEEE III Semester
Semester End Examination

Corse Code:18EE-302C Duration:2 hours

Course Name: Electrical Circuits Max.Marks:40Marks

PART-A
Answer all questions 8x1 =8 Marks

1) Find the current I2 in the below circuit given I1= 10 A and I3 = 7A.

2) Define a) Average value and b) RMS value.

3) Write the voltage and current relationships in a three phase circuits for a star connected balanced
load.
4) What is the current through a capacitor C= 10nF connected to a single phase 50V, 50Hz voltage
source?
5) Define Q-factor.
6) State the condition for resonance in parallel circuits.
7) Define the term polyphase.
8) State any two advantages of 3 phase system over single phase system.

PART-B
Answer four questions 4 x 3 = 12 Marks

9) a) Transform the given delta network to star.

296
 OR

b) Find the impedance between A and B in the below circuit when it is energized by v(t) =
100sin314t Volts.

10 a) Determine the average value, RMS value and form factor of single phase AC 230 V, 50Hz full
wave rectified sine wave.

OR

b) Write the expressions for Poly phase emfs and represent them by phasor diagram.

11. a) Derive the resonant frequency of single phase parallel RLC circuit.

OR

b) Give the expression for impedance and current of single phase parallel RLC circuit.

12. a) Calculate the power in 3 phase balanced resistive circuit connected to 3 phase 440V, 50Hz
carrying line current of 0.5A.

OR

b) Write the expression for power in balanced three phase star circuit and delta circuit.

PART - C

Instructions: (1) Answer the following questions

(2) Each question carries five marks. Marks: 4 X 5 = 20

297
13. a) Find the Thevenins equivalent of the circuit shown below:

OR

b) Derive an expression for resonant frequency of a parallel RLC circuit.

14. a) A current of 10A flows through a non-inductive resistance in series with a coil when supplied at
250V, 50Hz. If the voltage across the resistance is 250V and across the coil is 400V, calculate a)
impedance of the coil and b) total power consumed by the circuit.

OR

b) Explain how to generate the 3 phase emf’s with neat figures.

15. a) A parallel RLC circuit with a 16 Ω resistance, 8 Ω inductive reactance, and 20 Ω capacitive
reactance is supplied by a 120-V power supply. What are the values of currents through R, L and C,
total line current and active power?

OR

b)  A parallel RC circuit has a power supply of 100 V, 60 Hz. A current of 10A flows through the
resistor and a current of 10A flows through the capacitor. Calculate the values of line current, true
power, reactive power, apparent power and power factor?

16. a) Three identical impedances are connected in delta to a 3-phase 400 V, 50Hz supply. The line
current is 34.65 A and the total power taken from the supply is 14.4 kW. Calculate the resistance
and reactance values of each impedance.

OR

b) Three coils each having a resistance of 20Ω and inductive reactance of 15Ω are connected in star
to a 3-phase, 400V, 50Hz supply. Calculate a) line current, and b) power consumed.

298
 DC MACHINES & BATTERIES

Course Title : DC Machines & Batteries Course Code : 18EE-303C

Semester : III Course Group : Core
Teaching Scheme in periods ( L : T : P) : 45 : 15 : 0 Credits : 3
Methodology : Lecture + Tutorial Total Contact : 60
Periods
CIE : 60 Marks SEE : 40 Marks
(Continuous Internal Evaluation) (Semester End Examination)

Pre requisites

This course requires the knowledge of basic principles of electricity and magnetism.

Course Outcomes
At the end of the course, the student will have the ability to:

CO 1 Describe the construction and working of D.C Generator

CO 2 Compare the performance characteristics of D.C Generators

CO 3 Explain the principle and performance of D.C Motors

CO 4 Compare the performance characteristics of D.C Motors

CO 5 Apply different methods to control the speed of D.C Motor

CO 6 Compare different types of batteries

299
 Blue Print of Marks for SEE

Unit Unit Name Periods Questions to be set for SEE

No
R U A

1 Fundamentals of D.C
12
Generators

2 Armature Reaction and Q1 Q9(a) Q13(a)

Characteristics of D.C 08
Generator

3 Fundamentals of D.C
12
Motors
Q4
4 Starters, Characteristics Q2 Q10(a) Q14(a)
and Applications of D.C 08
Motors

5 Speed control and Q9(b), Q13(b),

08 Q5,Q6
Testing of D.C Motors Q11(a), Q11(b) Q15(a), Q15(b)
Q3
6 Batteries Q10(b), Q14(b),
12 Q7,Q8
Q12(a), Q12(b) Q16(a), Q16(b)

Total 60 8 8 8

Course Contents

UNIT 1- Fundamentals of D.C Generators Duration: 12 Periods (L: 9 - T: 3)

Dynamically induced E.M.F- Fleming’s right hand rule - electromechanical energy conversion - simple
loop generator -working principle of D.C generator - construction- functions of each part of D.C
generator with neat sketches- windings - (i) Lap (ii) Wave – Compare Lap and wave windings-
Classification of generators based on excitation- Voltage and Current equations for different types of
D.C Generators with schematic diagrams- E.M.F equation – power stage diagram of DC generator -
losses incurred in the D.C machines-efficiency –condition for maximum efficiency - simple problems

300
 UNIT 2 - Armature Reaction and Characteristics of D.C Generator Duration : 08 Periods (L:6 -
T: 2)
Armature reaction, Demagnetization & Cross magnetization-Derive for ATd, ATc / Pole- simple
problems-commutation –methods of improving commutation- O.C.C, internal, external characteristics of
Separately excited, Shunt, Series and Compound generators- Conditions for (i) Building up (ii) Non
building up of E.M.F.- Critical field resistance and critical speed from O.C.C - parallel operation of
generators - Applications of D.C generators – Welding Generator.

UNIT 3– Fundamentals of D.C Motors Duration: 12 Periods (L:9 - T:3)

Fleming’s left hand rule - working of D.C motors – classification of DC motors- significance of back
E.M.F. Write the formulas for back E.M.F for different D.C motors-Problems on E.M.F equation-
Torque equation-Armature torque (Ta) , shaft torque (Tsh) and loss torque(TL )–Problems on Torque-
Different losses-power stages-efficiency-Problems on losses and efficiency.
UNIT4 : Starters, Characteristics and Applications of D.C Motors
Duration: 08 Periods (L:6– T: 2)
Necessity of starter- 3-point starter, 4-point starter. Electrical and mechanical characteristics of D.C
Shunt, Series and compound motors-Applications of D.C motors
UNIT 5 :Speed control and Testing of D.C Motors Duration: 08Periods (L:6 – T:2)
Necessity of speed control- different methods (Flux, Armature and Voltage) of speed controls for D.C
shunt motors-State the advantages and disadvantages of above methods-different methods of speed
control for series motors- problems. Performance curves- Brake test on different types of D.C. Motors-
Swinburne’s Test-advantages and disadvantages- problems.
UNIT 6 : Batteries Duration: 12 Periods (L:9 T:3)
Classification of cells - primary cells and secondary cells - construction of Lead acid cell - chemical
reaction during charging and discharging of lead acid cell - applications - charging of Batteries –
precautions during charging and discharging - trickle charging - indications of full charged battery -
capacity of a battery - factors affecting the capacity of the battery - Ampere-Hour efficiency - Watt- Hour
efficiency - problems - flat plate battery - tubular battery - applications - construction of Lithium-ion cell-
chemical reaction during charging and discharging - applications - super capacitor - applications - metal
air electrochemical cell - refuelable battery - applications - maintenance free battery – applications -
methods of disposing batteries.

301
 Recommended Books
1. Electrical Technology –Vol –I by B.L.Theraja.
2. Electrical Technology –Vol –II by B.L.Theraja.
3. Electrical Machines by P.S.Bhimbhra
4. Electrical Machines by M.V.Deshpande
5. Electrical Machines by JB Gupta

Suggested E-learning references

1. http://electrical4u.com/
2. https://nptel.ac.in/syllabus/108106070/
3. https://ocw.mit.edu/courses/electrical-engineering-and-computer-science/
4. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108108076/
5. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108105053/

Suggested Learning Outcomes

After completion of the subject, the student shall be able to

1.1 Define dynamically induced E.M.F.

1.2 State Fleming’s right hand rule.
1.3 Define Electromechanical energy conversion.
1.4 Explain the working of simple loop generator.
1.5 State principle of working of D.C generator.
1.6 Describe the construction of DC generator
1.7 State the functions of each part of D.C generator with neat sketches.
1.8 Describe the working of D.C Generator.
1.9 List the types of windings of D.C Machine — (i) Lap (ii) Wave.
1.10 Compare lap winding and wave winding
1.11 Classify generators based on excitation.
1.12 Write voltage and current equations for different types of D.C Generators with schematic diagrams.
1.13 Derive the E.M.F equation of D.C generator.
1.14 Solve simple problems on E.M.F equation.

302
1.15 Explain power stages in D.C. machine
1.16 List the losses incurred in the D.C machines.
1.17 Define efficiency of DC Generator
1.18 Derive the condition for maximum efficiency.
1.19 Solve problems on losses and efficiency .

2.1 Define armature reaction.

2.2 Describe the armature reaction with sketches.
2.3 Describe the phenomenon of demagnetization &cross magnetization.
2.4 Derive the formula for ATd , ATc / Pole.
2.5 Solve simple problems on ATd , ATc / Pole .
2.6 Define Commutation.
2.7 List the methods to improve commutation.
2.8 Draw and explain O.C.C, internal and external characteristics of Separately excited generator
2.9 Draw and explain O.C.C, internal and external characteristics of Shunt generator.
2.10 Draw and explain O.C.C, internal and external characteristics of Series generator
2.11 Draw and explain O.C.C, internal and external characteristics of Compound generators.
2.12 List the conditions for (i) Building up (ii) Non building up of E.M.F in DC generators.
2.13 Define critical field resistance and critical speed from O.C.C
2.14 Explain the necessity of parallel operation of DC generators.
2.15 List the conditions for parallel operation of generators. ( No - Problems)
2.16 State the use of equalizer ring in parallel operation.
2.17 List the applications of D.C generators.
2.18 Describe the working of welding generator with a sketch.

3.1 State Fleming’s left hand rule.

3.2 Describe the working of D.C motors
3.3 Classify D.C motors.
3.4 Write the significance of back E.M.F and its formula.
3.5 Write the formulas for back E.M.F for different D.C motors.
3.6 Solve problems on E.M.F equation.
3.7 Derive torque equation of D.C motor.
3.8 Develop the formulas for armature torque (Ta), shaft torque (Tsh) and loss torque(TL).
3.9 Solve problems on torque.

303
3.10 Explain power stages in D.C. motor.
3.11 List the different losses in D.C motor.
3.12 Define efficiency of D.C motor
3.13 Solve problems on losses and efficiency.

4.1 State the necessity of starter.

4.2 Describe the construction and working of 3-point starter with neat sketch.
4.3 Describe the construction and working of 4-point starter with neat sketch.
4.4 Draw and explain the electrical characteristics of D.C Shunt motor.
4.5 Draw and explain the mechanical characteristics of D.C Shunt motor
4.6 Draw and explain the electrical characteristics of D.C Series motor.
4.7 Draw and explain the mechanical characteristics of D.C Series motor
4.8 Draw and explain the electrical characteristics of D.C compound motor.
4.9 Draw and explain the mechanical characteristics of D.C compound motor
4.10 List the applications of D.C motors

5.1 State the need of speed control of DC Motors.

5.2 List the different methods of speed controls for D.C shunt motors.
5.3 Describe the speed control of D.C shunt motor by flux control method
5.4 Describe the speed control of D.C shunt motor by armature control method
5.5 Describe the speed control of D.C shunt motor by voltage control method
5.6 List the advantages and disadvantages of various speed control methods of D.C Shunt
Motor.
5.7 Solve problems on speed control of DC shunt motor
5.8 List the different methods of speed control for D.C series motors.
5.9 Describe the speed control methods of D.C series motor.
5.10 List the advantages and disadvantages of speed control methods of D.C series motor.
5.11 Solve problems on speed control of DC series motor
5.12 State and explain the different performance curves.
5.13 Describe the method of conducting brake test on D.C shunt motor with neat sketch
5.14 Describe the method of conducting brake test on D.C series motor with neat sketch
5.15 Describe the method of conducting brake test on D.C compound motor with neat sketch
5.16 List the advantages and disadvantages of brake test on different types of D.C Motors.
5.17 Solve problems on brake test on different types of D.C Motors.

304
5.18 Describe the method of conducting Swinburne’s test.
5.19 Solve problems on Swinburne’s test
5.20 List the advantages and disadvantages of Swinburne’s test.

6.1 Classify cells

6.2 Define primary cells and secondary cells
6.3 Compare primary and secondary cells
6.4 Name types of storage cells
6.5 Describe the construction of Lead acid cell.
6.6 Write chemical reaction during charging and discharging of lead acid cell
6.7 List the applications of Lead acid cell
6.8 Describe charging of Batteries by a) Constant current method b) Constant voltage method
6.9 List the precautions during charging and discharging.
6.10 Define trickle charging
6.11 List the indications of full charged battery.
6.12 Define capacity of a battery
6.13 List the factors affecting the capacity of the battery
6.14 Define efficiency of a battery : a) Ampere-Hour efficiency b) Watt- Hour efficiency
6.15 Solve problems on the Ampere-Hour efficiency and Watt-Hour efficiency
6.16 Compare flat plate and tubular battery
6.17 List the applications of flat plate battery
6.18 List the applications of tubular battery
6.19 Describe the construction of Lithium-ion cell.
6.20 Write chemical reaction during charging and discharging of Lithium-ion battery
6.21 Give the applications of Lithium-ion cell
6.22 State the importance of super capacitor
6.23 List the applications of super capacitor
6.24 Describe the working of metal air electrochemical cell
6.25 List the applications of metal air battery
6.26 State the importance of refuelable battery
6.27 List the applications of refuelable battery
6.28 Define maintenance free battery
6.29 List the applications of maintenance free batteries
6.30 List different methods of disposing batteries.

305
Suggested Student Activities
1. Prepare charts on types of starters used for various DC motors clearly labeling the parts.
2. Visit nearby shop or show room which sells batteries and inverters (UPS) and prepare a report on
the observations made during visit.
3. Identify a faulty battery and service the same using standard tools.
4. Prepare a report of the conditions of batteries available in the Institute.
5. For given voltage, current, Ah ratings of individual cell, and required voltage and current rating
of battery, prepare a report of calculations for number of cells and their method of connections.
6. Visit any industry and write a report on the DC machines used in that industry
7. Prepare a chart on DC motor speed control techniques
8. Make charts of various types of DC motors and generators electrical equivalent circuit diagrams
clearly indicating voltages and currents flowing in the machine. Also write the formulae of
armature current, field current, line or load current, terminal voltage and back emf or induced emf
9. Quiz
10. Group discussion
11. Surprise test.

CO-PO Mapping Matrix

Engineer and society

Communication

Lifelong learning
Basic knowledge

Discipline Knowledge

Engineering Tools

Ethics

Linked PO
sustainability Environment &

work Individual and Team

practice Experiments and

CO PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO
10
CO1 3 3 1 3 1,2,4,10
CO2 3 3 1 3 1, 2,4,10
CO3 3 3 1 3 1,2,4,10
CO4 3 3 3 1,2,10
CO5 3 3 1 3 1, 2,4,10
CO6 3 3 1 2 2 3 1,2,4,6,7,10

Internal Evaluation

Test Units Marks

Mid Sem 1 1 and 2 20

306
 Mid Sem 2 3 and 4 20

Slip Test 1 1 and 2 5

Slip Test 2 3 and 4 5

Assignments - 5

Seminars - 5

Total 60

QUESTION PAPER PATTERN FOR MID SEMESTER EXAMS

Sl.No Description Level No of Marks for Choice Total Marks

Questions each question

01 Part-A Remembering(R) 4 1 Nil 4 Marks

02 Part-B Understanding(U) 4 3 2 6 Marks

03 Part-C Application(A) 4 5 2 10 Marks

Total Marks 20 Marks

MID SEM-I EXAM

S.No Unit No R U A Remarks

1 Unit-I 1,2 5(a) 7(a)

5(b) 7(b)

2 Unit-II 3,4 6(a) 8(a)

6(b) 8(b)

Total Questions 4 4 4

MID SEM-II EXAM

S.No Unit No R U A Remarks

1 Unit-III 1,2 5(a) 7(a)

5(b) 7(b)

2 Unit-IV 3,4 6(a) 8(a)

307
 6(b) 8(b)

Total Questions 4 4 4

The length of answer for each question framed in respect of Part-A, B&C shall not exceed ¼ of a
page,1 page and 2 pages respectively

QUESTION PAPER PATTERN FOR SEMESTER END EXAM

Sl.No Description Level No of Marks for Choice Total Marks

Questions each question

01 Part-A Remembering(R) 8 1 Nil 8 Marks

02 Part-B Understanding(U) 8 3 4 12 Marks

03 Part-C Application(A) 8 5 4 20 Marks

Total Marks 40 Marks

Questions to be set for SEE

Unit No
R U A

I
1 9(a) 13(a)
II

III
2 10(a) 14(a)
IV 4

9(b), 13(b),
V 5, 6
11(a), 11(b) 15(a), 15(b)
3
10(b), 14(b),
VI 7, 8
12(a), 12(b) 16(a), 16(b)

Total Questions 8 8 8

STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION AND TRAINING, TELANGANA

MODEL QUESTION PAPER
DEEE III SEMESTER
MID SEMESTER-I EXAMINATION

Corse Code:18EE-303C Duration:1Hour

Course Name: DC Machines & Batteries Max.Marks:20

PART-A

308
 Instructions: Answer all questions, Each Question carries one mark 4x1 = 4 Marks

1. Write the condition for maximum efficiency.

2. State the function of yoke in a DC generator
3. List the different effects of armature reaction in a DC machine?
4. Draw the O.C.C of a self excited DC generator.

PART-B
Instructions: Answer two questions. Each question carries three marks 2x 3 = 6 Marks

5 a) Draw the power flow diagram of a DC generator.

OR

b) Compare lap winding and wave winding in any three aspects.

6.a) List the conditions to be satisfied for parallel operation of dc generators?

OR

b) Define commutation and list the methods to improve it.

PART-C
Instructions: Answer two questions. Each question carries five marks 2x 5 = 10 Marks

7. a) A long shunt compound generator delivers a load current of 400A at a terminal voltage of
250V. The armature resistance, series field and shunt field resistances are 0.04 ohm, 0.01 ohm
and 125 ohms respectively. Calculate the generated emf and armature current. Allow 1 V per
brush contact drop.

OR
b) Derive the EMF equation of a DC Generator.

8. a) Derive the equation for demagnetizing ampere turns per pole

OR
b) Describe the working of welding generator.

STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION AND TRAINING, TELANGANA

MODEL QUESTION PAPER
DEEE III SEMESTER
MID SEMESTER-II EXAMINATION

Corse Code:18EE-303C Duration:1 Hour

309
Course Name: DC Machines & Batteries Max.Marks:20

PART-A
Instructions: Answer all questions, Each Question carries one mark 4x1 = 4 Marks

1) Draw the connection diagram of a D.C shunt motor

2) Define armature torque
3) Draw the torque Vs armature current characteristics for a D.C shunt motor.
4) List any two application of D.C shunt motor

PART-B
Instructions: Answer two questions. Each question carries three marks 2x 3 = 6 Marks

5. a) Write the significance of back E.M.F and its formula

OR
b) State Fleming’s Left hand rule

6 a) Why starter is required for starting a D.C Motor

OR
b) State the function of Hold on coil and over load release of a 3 point starter.

PART-C
Instructions: Answer two questions. Each question carries five marks 2x 5 = 10 Marks

7 a) Derive the torque equation of a D.C Motor

OR
b) A 440 V shunt motor has armature resistance of 0.8 ohm and field resistance of 200 ohms.
Determine the back e.m.f when giving an output of 7.46 KW at 85% efficiency.
8. a) Draw 3 point starter and label the parts.
OR
b) Draw and explain the mechanical characteristics of D.C series motor.

310
 STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION AND TRAINING,TELANGANA
MODEL QUESTION PAPER
DEEE III SEMESTER
SEMESTER END EXAMINATION

Corse Code:18EE-303C Duration:2 hours

Course Name: DC Machines & Batteries Max.Marks:40Marks

PART-A
Instructions: Answer all questions 8x1 =8 Marks

1) Define armature reaction.

2) Draw the electrical characteristics of a DC series motor.
3) Mention the speed control method of a DC shunt motor which gives speed above normal speed
4) Write the voltage equation of a Dc shunt generator.
5) List the factors on which the speed of DC motor depends.
6) List any one advantage of speed control of DC motor by flux control method.
7) List any two applications of lead acid battery.
8) List the methods of battery charging.

PART-B
Instructions: Answer four questions 4 x 3 = 12 Marks

9. a) Classify d.c generators based on excitation.

OR

b) Draw the performance curves of DC series motor.

10.a) Why starter is required for starting a Dc motor.

OR

b) Define trickle charging

11. a) List the speed control methods of DC shunt motor.

OR

b) Mention any three advantages of Brake test on DC shunt motor.

12. a) Compare Primary cells and secondary cells in any three aspects.

OR

b) List the indications of fully charged battery.

311
 PART-C

Instructions: Answer four questions 4 x 5 = 20 Marks

13. a) A 10KW, 250 V Dc shunt generator has total iron and friction losses of 600W. Its armature
and shunt field resistances are 0.5Ω and 125Ω respectively. Calculate efficiency at rated load.

OR
b) Explain the speed control of Dc series motor by field diverter.

14. a) Describe the working of D.C motor

OR
b) List any five applications of Lithium ion battery.

15. a) Describe Brake test on a Dc shunt motor with a neat sketch.

OR

b) A 500 V Dc shunt motor runs at its normal speed of 250 rpm when the armature current is
200A. The resistance of armature is 0.12Ω. Calculate the speed when a resistance is inserted
in the field reducing the shunt field to 80% of normal value and the armature current is 100A.

16.a) Explain the charging of a battery by constant voltage method.

OR

b) A lead acid cell is discharged of steady current of 5A for 11 hours. The average terminal
voltage being 1.8 V. To restore it to its original state of charge a current of 3A for 30 hours is
required, the average terminal voltage being 2.2V. Calculate the ampere hour efficiency(AH)
and watt hour efficiency(WH).

312
 ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONIC MEASURING INSTRUMENTS

Course Title : Electrical and Electronic Course Code : 18EE-304C

Measuring Instruments
Semester : III Course Group : Core
Teaching Scheme in periods ( L : T : P) : 45 : 15 : 0 Credits : 3
Methodology : Lecture + Tutorial Total Contact : 60
Periods
CIE : 60 Marks SEE : 40 Marks
(Continuous Internal Evaluation) (Semester End Examination)

Pre requisites
This course requires the knowledge of basic principles of electricity and simple mechanical terms.

Course Outcomes
At the end of the course, the student will have the ability to:

CO 1 Classify measuring instruments

CO 2 Select suitable meter depending on the type of application

CO 3 Measure various electrical parameters using electromechanical measuring instruments

CO 4 Measure R, L, C parameters

CO 5 Describe various transducers and sensors

CO 6 Compare various electronic and digital instruments

BLUE PRINT OF MARKS FOR SEE

Unit Unit Name Periods Questions to be set for SEE

No
R U A

1 Basics of Measuring 8 4 1 9(a) 13(a)

313
 Instruments

2 Voltage and Current

12
Measuring Instruments

3 Power and Energy

12
Measuring Instruments
2 10(a) 14(a)
4 Measurement of Basic
08
Circuit Elements

5 Transducers and 9(b), 13(b),

10 5,6
Sensors 11(a), 11(b) 15(a), 15(b)
3
6 Electronic & Digital 10(b), 14(b),
10 7,8
Instruments 12(a), 12(b) 16(a), 16(b)

Total 60 8 8 8

Course Contents

UNIT 1 - Basics of Measuring Instruments Duration: 8 Periods (L:6 - T: 2)

Definitions of accuracy, precision, error, resolution and sensitivity - important electrical quantities to be
measured - their units -names of instruments to measure them classification of instruments different
types of torques (deflection, controlling and damping torques) in the indicating instruments types of
errors.

UNIT 2 – Voltage and Current Measuring Instruments Duration: 12 Periods (L:9 – T:3)
M.C. and M.I types of ammeters and voltmeters their construction and working – errors – remedies –
comparison shunts and multipliers for M.C instruments – problems on shunts and multipliers for M.C
instruments Dynamometer type ammeter, voltmeter and wattmeter–construction, working, and errors in
them.

UNIT 3 – Power and Energy Measuring Instruments Duration: 12 Periods (L:9 – T:3)
Need for instrument transformers applications of instrument transformers - measurement of power
measurement of energy – single phase induction type energy meter construction and working, error and
adjustments –construction and connections of a three phase energy meter construction and working of
Weston synchroscope.
UNIT 4 – Measurement of Basic Circuit Elements Duration: 8 Periods (L: 6 – T:2)

314
Classification of resistance methods of resistance measurement -basic Ohmmeter circuit– difference in
series and shunt type ohmmeters construction and working of megger– measuring earth resistance using
Megger – working principle, construction and applications of potentiometer - measurement of inductance
– measurement of capacitance.
UNIT 5 – Transducers and Sensors Duration: 10 Periods (L: 7.5 – T:2.5)
Definition of transducer need of transducer classification of transducers factors influencing selection of
transducer applications of transducers– thermocouple thermister working principle and use of strain
gauge construction, working and use of LVDT basic concept of sensors and its applications–
semiconductor sensors.
UNIT 6 – Electronic & Digital Instruments Duration: 10 Periods (L:7.5 – T:2.5)
Basic components of analog electronic instruments working of rectifier type voltmeter and ammeter -
basic components of digital (digital electronic) instruments advantages of digital instruments over analog
instruments types of digital voltmeters specifications of digital voltmeter working of digital multimeter
and its specifications working of single phase digital energy meter with block diagram working of three
phase digital energy meter with block diagram working of digital frequency meter with block diagram –
phasor measurement unit use of tongtester (clamp meter) – comparison between digital and
electromechanical measuring instruments.

Recommended Books
1. A.K.Sawhney Electrical and Electronic measuring instruments –Dhanpat Rai & Sons.
2. E.W.Golding and F.C.Widdis – Electrical Measurements and measuring instruments–Wheeler
publishers.
3. David A Bell Electronic Instrumentation and Measurements–Oxford.
4. B.L.Theraja Electrical Technology - S.Chand& Co.
5. Khandpur Modern Electronic Equipment
6. J.B.Gupta Electrical and Electronic measuring instruments.
7. Harris Electrical measurements
8. K.B.Bhatia Study of Electrical Appliances and Devices– Khanna Publishers

Suggested E-learning references

1. http://electrical4u.com/
2. www.nptel.ac.in
3. https://ocw.mit.edu/courses/electrical-engineering-and-computer-science/
4. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108105053/

315
 Suggested Learning Outcomes
After completion of the subject, the student shall be able to

1.1 Define the following terms related to measuring instruments

i) accuracy ii)precision iii)error iv)resolution v) sensitivity
1.2 List any six important electrical quantities to be measured by giving their units
1.3 Mention the names of instruments to measure the various electrical quantities.
1.4 Classify instruments on the basis of construction and output as analog and digital instruments.
1.5 Classify the electro mechanical instruments according to principle of working.
1.6 Classify the instruments on basis of method of measuring thevalue as absolute and secondary
instruments.
1.7 Distinguish between absolute and secondary instruments
1.8 State the types of secondary instruments (indicating, integrating and recording) by giving suitable
examples.
1.9 State the purpose of obtaining deflecting, controlling and damping torques in indicating instruments.
1.10 Explain the methods of obtaining i) deflecting torque ii) controlling torque and iii) damping torque
in indicating instruments.
1.11 Classify the errors according to its source (gross, systematic and random)

2.1 Describe the construction of permanent magnet moving coil instrument.

2.2 Explain the working of permanent magnet moving coil instrument (voltmeter/ammeter).
2.3 Solve simple problems on deflecting torque Td=NBIA
2.4 List the three types of errors commonly occurring in moving coil (M.C.) instruments.
2.5 Mention the remedies for the commonly occurring errors in M.C instruments.
2.6 State advantages and disadvantages of M.C instruments.
2.7 List the applications of M.C instruments.
2.8 Describe the construction and working of moving iron (M.I) i) Attraction type Instrument ii)
Repulsion type Instrument.
2.9 List the errors commonly occurring in M.I. Instruments.
2.10 State the advantages and disadvantages of M.I. instruments.
2.11 Compare M.C. and M.I instruments.
2.12Describe the method of extending the range of moving coil ammeter with the help of
shunt.
2.13 Describe the method of extending the range of moving coil voltmeter with the help of

316
 multiplier.
2.14 Solve the problems on shunts and multipliers used for moving coil instruments.
2.15 Describe the construction of dynamometer type instruments
2.16 Explain the working of dynamometer type instruments
2.17 List the common errors in the dynamometer instruments.
2.18 List the advantages and disadvantages of dynamometer instruments.

3.1 State the need for instrument transformers (current transformer–CT and potential transformers PT).
3.2 List the applications of CT and PT.
3.3 State the precautions when using CT.
3.4 Draw the circuit diagram for measuring power with wattmeter in single– phase circuit in conjunction
with instrument transformers.
3.5 Draw the circuit diagram and explain the methods of measuring power and power factor in 3– phase
circuit using single, two and three watt meters
3.6 Describe the construction of a 1phase induction type energy meter.
3.7 Explain the working of a 1phase induction type energy meter.
3.8 Define meter constant.
3.9 State the common errors and their remedies in 1phase energy meter.
3.10 Describe construction and connections of a 3phase energy meter.
3.11 Describe the construction of Weston synchroscope.
3.12 Explain the working of Weston synchroscope.

4.1 Classify the resistance into low, medium and high values giving examples for each.
4.2 List the methods of measurement of i) low resistance ii) medium resistance and iii) high resistance
4.3 Draw the circuit diagram of basic ohmmeter.
4.4 Explain the working of basic ohmmeter.
4.5 Describe series type ohmmeter.
4.6 Describe shunt type ohmmeter.
4.7 Distinguish between shunt and series ohmmeters.
4.8 Describe the construction of megger.
4.9 Explain the working of megger.
4.10 Explain the method of measurement of earth resistance using earth megger. (construction and
working of earth megger is not required).
4.11 Describe the construction of basic potentiometer with a legible sketch.

317
4.12 Explain the working of basic potentiometer with a legible sketch.
4.13 Explain the measurement of unknown resistance using potentiometer.
4.14 List the applications of potentiometer.
4.15 List various bridges used to measure inductance.
4.16 List various bridges used to measure capacitance.

5.1 Define transducer.

5.2 State the need of transducers in measurement systems.
5.3 Classify transducers
i) based on the principle of transduction ii) as primary and secondary iii) as passive and active iv)
as analog and digital v) as transducers and inverse transducers
5.4 Explain the factors influencing the choice of transducer.
5.5 State the applications of transducers.
5.6 Explain the use of thermocouple for the measurement of temperature.
5.7 Explain the measurement of temperature using thermister in a bridge circuit.
5.8 State the working principle of strain gauge.
5.9 Describe the construction of Linear Variable Differential Transformer(LVDT).
5.10 Explain the working of LVDT.
5.11 State the advantages and disadvantages of LVDT.
5.12 Explain the concept of sensor.
5.13 List the applications of sensors.
5.14 Explain semiconductor sensors.

6.1 List the basic components of analog electronic instruments.

6.2 List various analog electronic instruments.
6.3 Explain the working of rectifier type voltmeter and ammeter.
6.4 List the basic components of digital (digital electronic) instruments.
6.5 List the advantages of digital instruments over analog instruments.
6.6 List the types of digital voltmeters.
6.7 Mention the specifications of digital voltmeter.
6.8 Explain the working of digital multimeter by giving its specifications.
6.9 Explain the working of single phase digital energy meter with block diagram.
6.10 Explain the working of three phase digital energy meter with block diagram.
6.11 Explain the working of digital frequency meter with block diagram.

318
6.12 Describe the working principle of phasor measurement unit with block diagram
6.13 List the applications of phasor measurement units
6.14 State the uses of t ong tester (clamp meter).
6.15 Compare digital and electromechanical measuring instruments.

Suggested Student Activities

1. Prepare a report on the methods adopted for calibration of digital energy meters in
TSSPDCL/TSNPDCL.
2. Prepare a report on various meters used in nearby industries or substations.
3. Visit any nearby factory / industry and prepare a report on applications of various transducers in
that industry clearly mentioning the purpose.
4. Using megger, determine the earth resistance of the earth pit at your college and prescribe
suitable measures to maintain the earth resistance at optimum value
5. Prepare posters indicating usage of suitable meters/ instruments with circuits to measure current,
voltage, power and energy in DC and AC (Single phase) circuits
6. Mini project on measurement methods of Resistance, Inductance and Capacitance
7. Student visits lab to identify the available electrical measuring instruments
8. Visit MRT division Electricity Department to understand the testing and repair of various
measuring instruments. Write a report on observations.
9. Visit any Electrical / Electronic Measuring Instrument manufacturing industry to observe and
understand the construction and working of various meters. Write a Report on observation.
10. Quiz
11. Group discussion
12. Surprise test
13. Assignment
14. Seminar

CO-PO Mapping Matrix

Engineer and society

Communication

Lifelong learning
Basic knowledge

Discipline Knowledge

Engineering Tools

Ethics

Linked
practice Experiments and

sustainability Environment &

work Individual and Team

PO

CO PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO
10

CO1 3 1 2, 10

319
CO2 1 3 1 1, 2, 10

CO3 1 3 1 1, 2, 10

CO4 2 3 1 1, 2, 10

CO5 1 3 1 1,2,10

CO6 1 3 1 1,2,10

Internal Evaluation

Test Units Marks

Mid Sem 1 1 and 2 20

Mid Sem 2 3 and 4 20

Slip Test 1 1 and 2 5

Slip Test 2 3 and 4 5

Assignments - 5

Seminars - 5

Total 60

320
 QUESTION PAPER PATTERN FOR MID SEMESTER EXAMS

Sl.No Description Level No of Marks for Choice Total Marks

Questions each question

01 Part-A Remembering(R) 4 1 Nil 4 Marks

02 Part-B Understanding(U) 4 3 2 6 Marks

03 Part-C Application(A) 4 5 2 10 Marks

Total Marks 20 Marks

MID SEM-I EXAM

S.No Unit No R U A Remarks

1 Unit-I 1,2 5(a) 7(a)

5(b) 7(b)

2 Unit-II 3,4 6(a) 8(a)

6(b) 8(b)

Total Questions 4 4 4

MID SEM-II EXAM

S.No Unit No R U A Remarks

1 Unit-III 1,2 5(a) 7(a)

5(b) 7(b)

2 Unit-IV 3,4 6(a) 8(a)

6(b) 8(b)

Total Questions 4 4 4

The length of answer for each question framed in respect of Part-A, B&C shall not exceed ¼ of a
page,1 page and 2 pages respectively

QUESTION PAPER PATTERN FOR SEMESTER END EXAM

321
Sl.No Description Level No of Marks for Choice Total Marks
Questions each question

01 Part-A Remembering(R) 8 1 Nil 8 Marks

02 Part-B Understanding(U) 8 3 4 12 Marks

03 Part-C Application(A) 8 5 4 20 Marks

Total Marks 40 Marks

Questions to be set for SEE

Unit No
R U A

I
1 9(a) 13(a)
II

III
2 10(a) 14(a)
IV 4

9(b), 13(b),
V 5,6
11(a), 11(b) 15(a), 15(b)
3
10(b), 14(b),
VI 7,8
12(a), 12(b) 16(a), 16(b)

Total Questions 8 8 8

STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION AND TRAINING,TELANGANA

MODEL QUESTION PAPER
DEEE III SEMESTER MID SEMESTER-I EXAMINATION
322
Corse Code:18EE-304C Duration:1 Hour
Course Name: Electrical and Electronic Measuring Instruments Max.Marks:20

PART-A
Instructions: Answer all questions, Each Question carries one mark 4x1 = 4 Marks

1. Define accuracy related to measuring instruments.

2. Classify errors according to its source.
3. List the three types of errors commonly occurring in moving coil instruments.
4. List the advantages of dynamometer instruments.

PART-B
Answer two questions. Each question carries three marks 2x 3 = 6 Marks

5. a) List any six important electrical quantities to be measured by giving the irunits.
OR

b) State the purpose of obtaining damping torque in indicating instruments.

6. a) List the applications of moving coil instruments.

OR

b) Compare moving coil and moving iron instruments in any three aspects.

PART-C
Instructions: Answer two questions. Each question carries five marks 2x 5 = 10 Marks

7. a) Explain the methods of obtaining controlling torque in indicating instruments.

OR

b) Distinguish between absolute and secondary instruments.

8. a) Explain the working of permanent magnet moving coil instrument.

OR

b) Describe the method of extending the range of moving coil ammeter with the help of shunt.

323
 STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION AND TRAINING,TELANGANA
MODEL QUESTION PAPER
DEEE III SEMESTER MID SEMESTER-II EXAMINATION

Corse Code:18EE-304C Duration:1 Hour

Course Name: Electrical and Electronic Measuring Instruments Max.Marks:20

PART-A
Instructions: Answer all questions, Each Question carries one mark 4x1 = 4 Marks

1) List the applications of current transformer

2) State the need for instrument transformers
3) List the applications of potentiometer
4) List various bridges used to measure capacitance

PART-B
Instructions: Answer two questions. Each question carries three marks 2x 3 = 6 Marks

5) a) State the precautions when using CT.

OR

b) State the common errors in 1phase energy meter.

6) a) Draw the circuit diagram of basic ohmmeter.

OR

c) Write various methods of measuring high resistance.

PART-C
Instructions: Answer two questions. Each question carries five marks 2x 5 = 10 Marks

7) a) Describe the construction of Weston synchroscope.

OR

b) Draw the circuit diagram for measuring power with wattmeter in single– phase circuit in
conjunction with instrument transformers.

8) a) Explain the working of basic potentiometer with a legible sketch.

OR

c) Distinguish between shunt and series ohmmeters in any five aspects.

324
 STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION AND TRAINING,TELANGANA
MODEL QUESTION PAPER
DEEE III SEMESTER
SEMESTER END EXAMINATION

Corse Code:18EE-304C Duration:2 hours

Course Name: Electrical and Electronic Measuring Instruments Max.Marks:40Marks

PART-A
Answer all questions 8x1 =8 Marks

1) Define resolution of a measuring instrument.

2) State the need for instrument transformers.
3) Define transducer.
4) List various bridges used to measure inductance.
5) List the applications of sensors.
6) Classify transducers based on the principle of transduction.
7) State the uses of t ongtester.
8) List the types of digital voltmeters.

PART-B
Answer four questions 4 x 3 = 12 Marks

9) a) State the types of secondary instruments.

OR

b) State the applications of transducers.

10 a) State the precautions while using current transformer.

OR

b) List the advantages of digital instruments over analog instruments.

11. a) State the disadvantages of Linear Variable Differential Transformer.

OR

b) State the working principle of strain gauge.

12. a)List the basic components of analog electronic instruments.

OR

b) Mention the specifications of digital voltmeter.

325
 PART-C

Answer four questions 4 x 5 = 20 Marks

13. a) Describe the method of extending the range of moving coil voltmeter with the help of
multiplier.

OR

b) Explain the use of the rmo couple for the measurement of temperature.

14. a) Explain the working of basic ohmmeter.

OR

b) Explain the working of rectifier type voltmeter.

15. a) Describe the construction of Linear Variable Differential Transformer.

OR

b)  Explain the factors influencing the choice of transducer.

16. a) Explain the working of digital multimeter.

OR

b) Explain the working of digital frequency meter with block diagram.

326
 ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS
Course Title : Electronic Circuits Course Code : 18EE-305C
Semester : III Course Group : Core
Teaching Scheme in periods ( L : T : P) : 45 : 15 : 0 Credits : 3
Methodology : Lecture + Tutorial Total Contact : 60
Periods
CIE : 60 Marks SEE : 40 Marks
(Continuous Internal Evaluation) (Semester End Examination)

Pre requisites
Basic knowledge of semiconductor devices and basic electrical and electronics principles.

Course Outcomes
At the end of the course, the student will have the ability to:

CO 1 Realize rectifier and regulated power using diode, zener diode

CO 2 Describe the construction and applications of FET

CO 3 Apply biasing to stabilize operating point of a transistor

CO 4 Develop various amplifier applications of BJT

CO 5 Construct various op-amp circuits

CO 6 Apply feedback to construct oscillators circuits using BJT

Blue Print of Marks for SEE

Unit Unit Name Periods Questions to be set for SEE

No
R U A

327
 1 Diode Applications 8
1 9(a) 13(a)
2 Field Effect Transistors 12

3 Transistor Biasing 8
2 10(a) 14(a)
4 Transistor Amplifiers 12 4

5 Op-amp and applications 9(b), 13(b),

12 5, 6
11(a), 11(b) 15(a), 15(b)
3
6 Oscillators 10(b), 14(b),
8 7, 8
12(a), 12(b) 16(a), 16(b)

Total 60 8 8 8

Course Contents

UNIT 1 – Diode Applications Duration: 08 Periods (L: 6 - T: 2)

Diode: Ideal and Practical Model, Concept of Diode as Switch, Series and Shunt Clippers (Unbiased).
Rectifiers: Definition – Ripple Factor, Ripple Frequency, Efficiency, PIV. Half-wave rectifier: Realization
using Ideal diodes, Operation and wave forms for R-Load. Full-wave Rectifier: Realization using Ideal
Diodes, Operation and waveforms of Centre-tapped and Bridge Configuration for R-Load. Filters: Need,
Types of Filter. Voltage regulated power supply using Zener Diode-problems

UNIT 2 - Field Effect Transistors Duration: 12 Periods (L:9 - T: 3)

Classification of FET, JFET –N-channel JFET- construction, working and characteristics, Specifications –
Drain Saturation current, Amplification Factor, Dynamic drain resistance, Trans-conductance and relation
among them Application of JFET-variable voltage resistor- Comparison between FET And BJT MOSFETS:
Symbol of N-channel and P- channel Enhancement Type MOSFETs, N-Channel Enhancement Type
MOSFET- construction, working- drain and transfer characteristics. N-Channel Depletion Type -
construction, working- drain and transfer characteristics -Applications of MOSFETS-Handling precautions of
MOSFET

UNIT 3 - Transistor Biasing Duration: 08 Periods (L: 6 - T: 2)

Need for transistor biasing, Dc load line, operating point, Stability factor, Expression for Stability factor for
Collector to Base bias and potential divider bias methods for transistor

UNIT 4 - Transistor Amplifiers Duration: 12 Periods (L: 9 - T: 3)

328
Amplifier: definition, faithful amplification, Classification of Amplifiers, Transistor CE amplifier with
biasing. Multistage amplifiers: Need, Definition-Gain, Frequency response, decibel Gain, Bandwidth,
expression for voltage gain-Problems- Coupling methods, Working and Frequency Response of two-stage
R.C coupled, transformer coupled and Direct coupled Amplifiers and their applications, Comparison among
different types of coupling. Power amplifier: Need, Comparison between voltage and power amplifier,
classification of power amplifiers, Class B- Push pull amplifier and complementary-symmetry push-pull
amplifier

UNIT 5 - Op-amp and applications Duration: 12 Periods (L: 9 - T: 3)

Basic differential amplifier: Working principle. Op-amp: Block diagram, pin diagram of IC741, ideal and
practical characteristics. Op-amp parameters: Input offset voltage, input offset current, CMRR, input and
output impedance, gain, gain-bandwidth product, slew-rate. Open-loop configuration: -limitation-use as
comparator. Closed-loop configuration: Concept of virtual ground, applications - inverting, non-inverting,
voltage follower, scale-changer, summing amplifiers, differentiator, integrator-Simple problems.

UNIT 6 - Oscillators Duration: 08 Periods (L:6 - T: 2)

Concept of feedback and types- open and closed loop gains - Barkhausen criteria- LC Tank circuit and
stability. Working of Hartley, Colpitts and RC phase-shift oscillator; Working of UJT relaxation oscillators.
Mention on applications and features of these oscillators.

Recommended Books
1. Electronic Devices and circuits by David. A. Bell, 4th ed., PHI
2. Electronic Device and circuits –T. F. Bogart Jr., J. S. Beasley and G. Rico., Pearson Education,
6th edition, 2004
3. Electronics Principles - Albert Malvino, J. Bates, 7 th ed., Tata Mc Graw Hill Education (TMH)
publishers
4. Electronic Device and Circuits, 2nd ed. , S. Salivahanan, N. Suresh Kumar, A Vallavaraj, Tata
Mc Graw Hill Education (TMH) publishers, 2008

Suggested E-learning references

1. https://www.explainthatstuff.com/electronics.html
2. https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc17_ee02/preview
3. https://www.electronicshub.org/diy-projects/
4. https://www.tutorialspoint.com/amplifiers/index.htm

Suggested Learning Outcomes

329
After completion of the subject, the student shall be able to

1.1 Define ideal diode.

1.2 Define practical diode.
1.3 Explain the use of diode as a switch.
1.4 What is meant by clipper
1.5 List the various types of clipper circuits
1.6 Describe the operation of series and shunt clippers with help of circuit diagrams and waveforms
1.7 Define rectifier and list the different types of rectifiers.
1.8 Define the terms a) Ripple factor b)Ripple frequency c)Efficiency d) Peak Inverse Voltage of diode for a
rectifier.
1.9 Explain the operation of half-wave rectifier circuit with waveforms and circuit for a R-load.
1.10 Explain the operation of full-wave center-tapped rectifier circuit with waveforms and circuit for a R-
load.
1.11 Explain the operation of full-wave bridge rectifier circuit with waveforms and circuit for a R-load.
1.12 Define filter and state its need in DC power supplies
1.13 List various types of filter used in power supplies
1.14 Explain the operation of Zener diode voltage regulator.
1.15 Design a voltage regulated power supply using Zener diode-Problems

2.1. Classify FET based on construction.

2.2. Explain the operation and characteristics of N- channel JFET with a sketch.
2.3. Define Pinch-off voltage of JFET.
2.4. List the important specifications of JFET
2.5. Define important parameters of JFET and obtain relation among them.
2.6. Compare JFET and BJT
2.7. Explain why BJTs are called bipolar devices while FETs are called unipolar devices
2.8. Briefly describe some applications of JFET.
2.9. Explain how FET is used as a voltage variable resistor
2.10. Define a MOSFET.
2.11. List the types of MOSFET and give their symbols
2.12. Explain the construction and principle of operation about Enhancement type N-channel MOSFET
2.13. Explain the construction and principle of operation about Depletion type N-channel MOSFET
2.14. List few applications of MOSFET.
2.15. List the handling precautions of MOSFET

3.1 Explain the operation of transistor as an amplifier.  
3.2 Explain the concept of DC load line.  
3.3 Determine the Q point (operating point) on the DC load line.
3.4 State the necessity of proper biasing for a transistor amplifier.  
3.5 List the causes for instability of biasing in a transistor amplifier.  
3.6 Explain the need for stabilization and define the stability  factor
3.7 Explain collector to base biasing method.  
3.8 Explain potential divider biasing method.

4.1 Define an Amplifier and faithful amplification.

4.2 Classify amplifiers on the basis of frequency, function, type of load, period of Conduction and Number of 
stages.  
4.3 Draw the practical transistor CE amplifier and explain the function of each component  

330
4.4 Explain the need for multistage amplifier.  
4.5 Define the terms gain, decibel gain, frequency response and band width of an amplifier.
4.6 Solve simple problems related to gain and decibel gain of multi-stage amplifiers.
4.7 Explain the principle of operation and frequency response of two stage RC coupled amplifier with circuit
diagram
4.8 Explain the principle of operation and frequency response of two stage transformer coupled amplifier
with circuit diagram
4.9 Explain  the  principle  of  operation  of  direct  coupled  amplifier with circuit diagram
4.10 Compare different types of couplings.
4.11 List applications of RC coupled, Transformer coupled and direct coupled amplifiers.  
4.12 State the need for a power amplifier.
4.13 Distinguish  between  voltage  amplifiers  and  power  amplifiers
4.14 Explain the working of class-B push-pull power amplifier.
4.15 Explain the working principle of complementary push pull power amplifier

5.1 Define and explain the working of differential amplifier.

5.2 Explain the block diagram of operational amplifier.
5.3 Define differential and common mode gain.
5.4 Draw the symbol of op-amp and mark terminals.
5.5 Draw the pin configuration of IC 741
5.6 State the important ideal and practical characteristics of an op-amp.
5.7 Explain the working of op-amp as comparator.
5.8 What are the limitations of open-loop configuration
5.9 Explain the working of inverting amplifier configuration of op-amp and derive the voltage gain equation.
5.10 Explain the concept of virtual ground.
5.11 Explain the working of non-inverting amplifier configuration of op-amp and derive the voltage gain
equation.
5.12 Explain the use of op-amp as a)Voltage follower, b) Scale changer, c)Summing amplifier,
d)Differentiator and e) Integrator.
5.13 Solve simple problems on above circuits

6.1 Define feedback and feedback factor.

6.2 Explain negative and positive feedback.
6.3 Draw the block diagram of feed-back amplifier and explain.
6.4 Derive the expression for gain of a feed-back amplifier.
6.5 State the effect of negative feedback on gain, band-width, noise and distortion, input and output
impedance.
6.6 List the advantages of negative feed-back.
6.7 List the application of negative and positive feedback.
6.8 Define Oscillator.
6.9 Classify different types of oscillators.
6.10 State Barkhausen criteria for oscillator.
6.11 Explain the working of Hartley Oscillator.
6.12 Explain the working of Colpitts Oscillator.
6.13 Explain the working of RC phase shift Oscillator.
6.14 Explain the working of UJT relaxation Oscillator.
6.15 List the applications of oscillators.

331
Suggested Student Activities
1. Student visits library to refer to Electronic Journals
2. Student visits the Lab to construct the circuits on a bread board
3. Ask the students to purchase different electronic devices from a shop
4. Making use of online simulation laboratories
5. Group discussion
6. Surprise test

CO-PO Mapping Matrix

332
 Engineer and society

Communication

Lifelong learning
Basic knowledge

Discipline Knowledge

Engineering Tools

Ethics
Linked

sustainability Environment &

work Individual and Team

practice Experiments and
PO

CO PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO
10

CO1 2 2 1 1 2 1, 2, 4, 10

CO2 2 2 3 1, 2,10

CO3 1 2 1 1, 2, 4

CO4 1 2 1 3 1, 2, 4, 10

CO5 1 2 1 3 1, 2, 4, 10

CO6 1 2 1 3 1, 2, 4,10

Internal Evaluation

Test Units Marks

Mid Sem 1 1 and 2 20
Mid Sem 2 3 and 4 20
Slip Test 1 1 and 2 5
Slip Test 2 3 and 4 5
Assignments - 5
Seminars - 5
Total 60

333
 QUESTION PAPER PATTERN FOR MID SEMESTER EXAMS

Sl.No Description Level No of Marks for Choice Total Marks

Questions each question

01 Part-A Remembering(R) 4 1 Nil 4 Marks

02 Part-B Understanding(U) 4 3 2 6 Marks

03 Part-C Application(A) 4 5 2 10 Marks

Total Marks 20 Marks

MID SEM-I EXAM

S.No Unit No R U A Remarks

1 Unit-I 1,2 5(a) 7(a)

5(b) 7(b)

2 Unit-II 3,4 6(a) 8(a)

6(b) 8(b)

Total Questions 4 4 4

MID SEM-II EXAM

S.No Unit No R U A Remarks

1 Unit-III 1,2 5(a) 7(a)

5(b) 7(b)

2 Unit-IV 3,4 6(a) 8(a)

6(b) 8(b)

Total Questions 4 4 4

The length of answer for each question framed in respect of Part-A, B&C shall not exceed ¼ of a
page,1 page and 2 pages respectively

334
 QUESTION PAPER PATTERN FOR SEMESTER END EXAM

Sl.No Description Level No of Marks for Choice Total Marks

Questions each question

01 Part-A Remembering(R) 8 1 Nil 8 Marks

02 Part-B Understanding(U) 8 3 4 12 Marks

03 Part-C Application(A) 8 5 4 20 Marks

Total Marks 40 Marks

Questions to be set for SEE

Unit No
R U A

I
1 9(a) 13(a)
II

III
2 10(a) 14(a)
IV 4

9(b), 13(b),
V 5, 6
11(a), 11(b) 15(a), 15(b)
3
10(b), 14(b),
VI 7, 8
12(a), 12(b) 16(a), 16(b)

Total Questions 8 8 8

STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION AND TRAINING, TELANGANA

MODEL QUESTION PAPER
DEEE III SEMESTER

335
 MID SEMESTER-I EXAMINATION

Corse Code: 18EE-305C Duration: 1 Hour

Course Name: Electronic Circuits Max.Marks: 20

PART-A

Instructions: Answer all questions, Each Question carries one mark 4x1 = 4
Marks

1) Define an Ideal Diode.

2) Define Rectifier.
3) Draw the symbol of N-channel Depletion type Mosfet.
4) List any two applications of MOSFET.

PART-B

Instructions: Answer the following questions. Each question carries three marks 2x 3 = 6
Marks

5 a) State the need for filter in a rectifier based Dc power supply.

(OR)
b)Draw the circuit and state in brief working of series positive clipper.

6 a) Compare BJT and JFET

(OR)
b) FET is an unipolar device, Justify.

PART-C

Answer the following questions. Each question carries five marks 2x5 = 10Marks

7a) Explain the operation of Half-wave rectifier circuit with waveforms for a resistive load.

(OR)
b) Explain the operation of Zener diode voltage regulator.

8 a) Explain how a JFET is used as a voltage variable resistor.

(OR)
b) Explain the construction and principle of operation of Enhancement type N-channel MOSFET

State Board of Technical Education and Training, Telangana

Model Question paper
DEEE III Semester

336
 Mid Semester-II Examination

Corse Code: 18EE-305C Duration: 1 Hour

Course Name: Electronic Circuits Max.Marks: 20

PART-A

Instructions: Answer all questions, Each Question carries one mark 4x1 = 4 Marks

1) Define transistor biasing.

2) In which region the operating point of a transistor must be located for it to work as an amplifier?
3) Define an amplifier.
4) Define amplifier gain.
PART-B

Instructions: Answer the following questions. Each question carries three marks 2x 3 = 6
Marks

5) a) Briefly state the concept of DC load line.

(OR)
b) State the necessity of proper biasing for a transistor amplifier.

6) a) State the need for multi-stage amplifiers.

(OR)
b) List the applications of R-C coupled amplifiers.

PART-C

Instructions: Answer the following questions. Each question carries five marks 2x5 =
10Marks

7) a) Explain the need for stabilization and define the stability  factor.
(OR)
b) Explain collector to base biasing method for a transistor.

8) a) Explain the principle of operation and frequency response of two stage RC coupled amplifier with

circuit diagram.

(OR)
b) Explain the working of class-B push-pull power amplifier.

337
 State Board of Technical Education and Training, Telangana
Model Question paper
DEEE III Semester
Semester End Examination

Corse Code: 18EE-305C Duration: 2 Hours

Course Name: Electronic Circuits Maximum .Marks: 40

PART-A

Instructions: Answer all questions 8x1 = 8 Marks

1) Draw the symbol of n-channel JFET.

2) Define the term frequency response for an amplifier.
3) Define feed-back factor.
4) Define Peak Inverse voltage of a diode.
5) Draw the symbol of OP-Amp.
6) Define CMRR of an OP-Amp.
7) Define an oscillator.
8) State Barkhausen criteria for oscillator.
PART-B
Instructions: Answer the following questions 4x3= 12 Marks

9)
a) List different types of MOSFETs and draw their symbols.
(OR)
b) Draw the pin configuration of IC 741.
10)
a) State the necessity of proper biasing for a transistor amplifier.
(OR)
b) Derive the expression for gain of a Negative feed-back amplifier
11)
a) State the important ideal characteristics of an op-amp.
(OR)
b) Briefly state the concept of virtual ground.
12)
a) Classify different types of oscillators.
(OR)
b) State the role of RC network in RC phase-shift oscillator and write the expression for frequency
of oscillation.

338
 PART-C
Instructions: Answer the following questions 4x 5=20 Marks
13)
a) Explain the operation of full-wave center-tapped rectifier circuit with waveforms and circuit for a
R-load.

(OR)
b) Explain the use of OP-Amp as Summing amplifier.
14)
a) Explain  the  principle  of  operation  of  direct  coupled  amplifier with circuit diagram.
(OR)
b) State the effect of negative feedback on gain, band-width, noise and distortion, input and output
impedance.
15)
a) Explain the working of non-inverting amplifier configuration of op-amp and derive the voltage
gain equation.
(OR)
b) Explain the use of op-amp as a Differentiator.

16)
a) Explain the working of Hartley Oscillator.
(OR)
b) Explain the working of UJT relaxation Oscillator.

339
 CIRCUITS LAB PRACTICE

Course Title : : Circuits Lab Practice Course Code : 18EE-306P

Semester : III Course Group : Practical

Teaching Scheme in Periods(L:T:P) : 15:0:30 Credits : 1.5

Methodology : Lecture + Practical

Total Contact Periods : 45

CIE : 60 Marks SEE : 40 Marks

(Continuous Internal Evaluation) (Semester End Examination)

Pre requisites:

This course requires

 Data handling through graphs:

o Select proper X & Y parameters
o Choose proper scale
o Analyse the trend of the graph
o Correlate trend of the graph with the relation between the parameters
 Use of Voltmeter, Ammeter, Wattmeter & CRO
 The knowledge of electrical circuits

Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course the students will have the ability to:

Course Outcomes

CO Verify Ohms law

1
CO Apply Kirchhoff’s laws to solve electric circuits
2
CO Apply network theorems to solve electric circuits
3
CO Verify the voltage, current phasor relationship in 1-Φ AC circuits with R, RL and RC loads
4

Suggested Learning Outcomes

1.0 Verify Ohms law

1.1 Verify Ohm’s law

1.2 Verify limitations of Ohm’s law

340
2.0 Apply Kirchhoff’s laws to solve electric circuits

2.1 Verify Kirchhoff’s current law in a DC circuit

2.2 Verify Kirchhoff’s voltage law in a DC circuit

3.0 Apply network theorems to solve electric circuits

3.1 Verify Thevenin’s theorem in a DC circuit

3.2 Verify Norton’s theorem in a DC circuit
3.3 Verify Maximum power transfer theorem in a DC circuit
3.4 Verify Super position theorem in a DC circuit with two sources

4.0 Verify the voltage, current phasor relationship in 1-Φ AC circuits with R, RL and RC loads
4.1 Verify that the voltage and current for 1-Φ AC circuit with pure R- load are in-phase using
CRO and draw the phasor diagram.
4.2 Verify that the current in 1-Φ AC circuit with pure RL - load lags the voltage using CRO and
draw the phasor diagram.
4.3 Verify that the current in 1-Φ AC circuit with pure RC - load leads the voltage using CRO
and draw the phasor diagram.

CO-PO Mapping Matrix

Basic knowledge

Engineer and society

Communication

Lifelong learning
Discipline Knowledge

Engineering Tools

Ethics
Experiments and

Environment &

Individual and Team

Linked PO
practice

sustainability

CO\P PO
work

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9
O 10
CO1 1 3 3 3 3 2 1,2,3,4,8,9

CO2 1 3 3 3 3 2 1,2,3,4,8,9

CO3 1 3 3 3 3 2 1,2,3,4,8,9

CO4 1 3 3 3 3 2 3 1,2,3,4,8,9

STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION AND TRAINING, TELANGANA

341
 MODEL QUESTION PAPER
DEEE III SEMESTER
MID SEMESTER-I EXAMINATION

Corse Code: 18EE-306P Duration: 1 Hour

Course Name: Circuits Lab Practice Max. Marks: 20

Note: Answer allotted Question.

Instructions to the Candidate:

(i)Record the results on a graph sheet if required, and conclude your observation of the experiment

(ii) Draw the circuit diagram for illustration; choose appropriate values when not mentioned in the
question

1.Verify Ohm’s law

2.Verify limitations of Ohm’s law
3.Verify Kirchhoff’s current law in a DC circuit
4.Verify Kirchhoff’s voltage law in a DC circuit

STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION AND TRAINING, TELANGANA

MODEL QUESTION PAPER
DEEE III SEMESTER
MID SEMESTER-II EXAMINATION

Corse Code: 18EE-306P Duration: 1 Hour

Course Name: Circuits Lab Practice Max. Marks: 20

Note: Answer allotted Question.

Instructions to the Candidate:

(i)Record the results on a graph sheet if required, and conclude your observation of the experiment

(ii) Draw the circuit diagram for illustration; choose appropriate values when not mentioned in the
question

1.Verify Thevenin’s theorem in a DC circuit

2.Verify Norton’s theorem in a DC circuit
3.Verify Maximum power transfer theorem in a DC circuit
4.Verify Super position theorem in a DC circuit with two sources

STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION AND TRAINING, TELANGANA

342
 MODEL QUESTION PAPER
DEEE III SEMESTER
SEMESTER END EXAMINATION

Corse Code: 18EE-306P Duration: 2 Hour

Course Name: Circuits Lab Practice Max. Marks: 40

Note: Answer allotted Question.

Instructions to the Candidate:

(i)Record the results on a graph sheet if required, and conclude your observation of the experiment

(ii) Draw the circuit diagram for illustration; choose appropriate values when not mentioned in the
question

1. Verify Ohm’s law

2. Verify limitations of Ohm’s law
3. Verify Kirchhoff’s current law in a DC circuit
4. Verify Kirchhoff’s voltage law in a DC circuit
5. Verify Thevenin’s theorem in a DC circuit
6. Verify Norton’s theorem in a DC circuit
7. Verify Maximum power transfer theorem in a DC circuit
8. Verify Super position theorem in a DC circuit with two sources
9. Verify that the voltage and current for 1-Φ AC circuit with pure R- load are in-
phase using CRO and draw the phasor diagram.
10. Verify that the current in 1-Φ AC circuit with pure RL - load lags the voltage
using CRO and draw the phasor diagram.
11. Verify that the current in 1-Φ AC circuit with pure RC - load leads the voltage
using CRO and draw the phasor diagram.

343
 DC MACHINES LAB PRACTICE
Course Title : : DC Machines Lab Course Code 18EE-307P
Practice

Semester : III Course Group Practical

Teaching Scheme in Periods : 15:0:30 Credits 1.5

(L:T:P)

Methodology : Lecture + Practical Total Contact

Periods 45

CIE : 60 Marks SEE 40 Marks

(Continuous Internal Evaluation) (Semester End Examination)

Pre requisites

This course requires the skills of handling electrical tools, accessories and performing wiring connections

Course Outcomes
At the end of the course the students will have the ability to:
Course Outcomes

CO1 Identify the terminals of DC Motors and parts of Starters

CO2 Sketch the performance characteristics of DC Motors by conducting suitable Tests.

CO3 Apply various speed control methods on DC motors

CO4 Draw and interpret the performance characteristics of DC Generators by Conducting suitable
experiments.

Suggested Learning Outcomes

344
1.0 Identify the terminals of DC Motors and parts of Starters.
1.1 Identify the terminals of DC Shunt Motors
1.2 Identify the terminals of DC Series Motors
1.3 Identify the terminals of DC Compound Motors
1.4 Identify the parts of DC 3 point starter
1.5 Identify the parts of DC 4 point starter

2.0 Sketch the performance characteristics of DC Motors by conducting suitable Tests.

2.1. Obtain performance characteristics by conducting Brake Test on DC Shunt Motor

2.2. Obtain performance characteristics by conducting Brake Test on DC Series Motor.
2.3. Obtain performance characteristics by conducting Brake Test on DC Compound Motor.
2.4 Obtain performance of DC Shunt Motor by conducting Swinburne’s Test.

3.0 Apply various speed control methods on DC motors

3.1 Speed control of DC Shunt Motor by Armature control method
3.2 Speed control of DC Shunt Motor by Field control method

4.0 Draw and interpret the performance characteristics of DC Generators by Conducting suitable
experiments.
4.1 Obtain OCC of a DC shunt Generator at rated speeds
4.2 Obtain Internal and External characteristics of DC Shunt Generator
4.3 Obtain Internal and External characteristics of DC Series Generator.
4.4 Obtain Internal and External characteristics of DC Compound Generator

CO-PO Mapping Matrix

Communication

Lifelong learning
Basic knowledge

Discipline Knowledge

Engineering Tools

Ethics
Engineer and society
Experiments and

Environment &

Individual and Team

Linked PO
practice

sustainability

CO\P PO
work

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9
O 10
CO1 3 3 1 3 2 2,3,4,8,9
CO2 2 3 3 3 3 2 1,2,3,4,8,9
CO3 2 3 3 3 3 2 1,2,3,4,8,9
CO4 2 3 3 3 3 2 1,2,3,4,8,9

STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION AND TRAINING, TELANGANA

MODEL QUESTION PAPER

345
 DEEE III SEMESTER
MID SEMESTER-I EXAMINATION

Course Code: 18EE-307P Duration: 1 Hour

Course Name: DC Machines Lab Practice Max. Marks: 20

Note: Answer allotted Question.

Instructions to the Candidate:

(i)Record the results on a graph sheet if required, and conclude your observation of the experiment

(ii) Draw the circuit diagram for illustration; choose appropriate values when not mentioned in the
question

1. Identify the terminals of DC Shunt motor

2. Identify the terminals of DC Series motor
3. Identify the terminals of DC Compound motor
4. Identify the parts of a 3 point starter
5. Identify the parts of a 4 point starter
6. Obtain performance characteristics by conducting Brake Test on DC Shunt Motor
7. Obtain performance characteristics by conducting Brake Test on DC Series Motor.

346
 8. STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION AND TRAINING, TELANGANA

MODEL QUESTION PAPER

DEEE III SEMESTER
MID SEMESTER-II EXAMINATION

Course Code: 18EE-307P Duration: 1 Hour

Course Name: DC Machines Lab Practice Max.Marks: 20

Note: Answer allotted Question.

Instructions to the Candidate:

(i)Record the results on a graph sheet if required, and conclude your observation of the experiment

(ii) Draw the circuit diagram for illustration; choose appropriate values when not mentioned in the
question

1. Obtain performance characteristics by conducting Brake Test on DC Compound Motor.

2. Obtain performance of DC Shunt Motor by conducting Swinburne’s Test.

3. Speed control of DC Shunt Motor by Armature control method

4. Speed control of DC Shunt Motor by Field control method

347
 STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION AND TRAINING, TELANGANA
MODEL QUESTION PAPER
DEEE III SEMESTER
SEMESTER END EXAMINATION

Course Code: 18EE-307P Duration: 2 Hour

Course Name: DC Machines Lab Practice Max.Marks: 40

Note: Answer allotted Question.

Instructions to the Candidate:

(i)Record the results on a graph sheet if required, and conclude your observation of the experiment

(ii) Draw the circuit diagram for illustration; choose appropriate values when not mentioned in the
question

1. Identify the terminals of DC Shunt motor

2. Identify the terminals of DC Series motor
3. Identify the terminals of DC Compound motor
4. Identify the parts of a 3 point starter
5. Identify the parts of a 4 point starter
6. Obtain performance characteristics by conducting Brake Test on DC Shunt Motor
7. Obtain performance characteristics by conducting Brake Test on DC Series Motor.
8. Obtain performance characteristics by conducting Brake Test on DC Compound Motor.
9. Obtain performance of DC Shunt Motor by conducting Swinburne’s Test.
10. Speed control of DC Shunt Motor by Armature control method
11. Speed control of DC Shunt Motor by Field control method
12. Obtain OCC of a DC shunt Generator at rated speeds
13. Obtain Internal and External characteristics of DC Shunt Generator
14. Obtain Internal and External characteristics of DC Series Generator.
15. Obtain Internal and External characteristics of DC Compound Generator

348
 ELECTRICAL MEASUREMENTS LAB PRACTICE
Course Title : : Electrical Measurements Lab Course Code : 18EE-308P
Practice
Semester : III Course Group : Practical
Teaching Scheme in : 15:0:30 Credits : 1.5
Periods(L:T:P)
Methodology : Lecture + Practical Total Contact
Periods : 45
CIE : 60 Marks SEE 40 Marks
(Continuous Internal Evaluation) (Semester End Examination)

Pre requisites
This course requires the knowledge of basic electricity and fundamentals of various measuring
instruments

Course Outcomes
At the end of the course the students will have the ability to:
Course Outcome

CO Compare calibrated meter readings with standard meters

1
CO Illustrate the methods of range extension in A.C. & D.C. meters
2
CO Interpret the various methods to measure unknown resistance
3
CO Demonstrate various methods of measuring power in three phase circuit
4

Suggested Learning Outcomes

1.0 Compare calibrated meter readings with standard meters
1.1 Calibration and testing of single phase energy meter
1.2 Calibration of dynamometer wattmeter
1.3 Calibration of PMMC Ammeter and PMMC voltmeter
1.4 Calibration of LPF wattmeter

2.0 Illustrate the methods of range extension in A.C. & D.C. meters

349
2.1 Extend the range of D.C. ammeter by using shunt resistances (low range to high range)
2.2 Extend the range of D.C. voltmeter by using series multiplier(low range to high range)
2.3 Extend the range of A.C. ammeter by using C.T.(high range to low range)
2.4 Extend the range of A.C. voltmeter by using P.T.(high range to low range)

3.0 Interpret the various methods to measure unknown resistance

3.1 Measurement of low and medium resistance by volt-ampere method
3.2 Measurement of resistance by Kelvin’s double Bridge.
3.3 Measurement of earth resistance using digital earth tester
3.4 Measurement of insulation resistance using digital insulation tester

4.0 Demonstrate various methods of measuring power in AC circuits

4.1 Measurement of power in a three-phase balanced circuit with two watt meter method
4.2 Measurement of single phase power by 3-voltmeter and 3-Ammeter methods
Note:
1. Every student has to bring insulated tool kit and follow the general safety precautions throughout the
lab sessions
2. Whenever handling/using a meter check for 'zero' position of the pointer and adjust for 'zero' position if
there is any deviation.

CO-PO Mapping Matrix

Communication

Lifelong learning
Basic knowledge

Discipline Knowledge

Engineering Tools

Ethics
Engineer and society
practiceExperiments and

sustainabilityEnvironment &

workIndividual and Team

Linked PO

CO\P PO
PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9
O 10
CO1 1 3 3 3 3 2 1, 2, 3, 4, 8, 9
CO2 1 3 3 3 3 2 1, 2, 3, 4, 8, 9
CO3 1 3 3 3 3 2 1,2, 3, 4, 8, 9
CO4 1 3 3 3 3 2 1,2, 3, 4, 8, 9

STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION AND TRAINING, TELANGANA

350
 MODEL QUESTION PAPER
DEEE III SEMESTER
MID SEMESTER-I EXAMINATION

Course Code: 18EE-308P Duration: 1 Hour

Course Name: Electrical Measurements Lab Practice Max.Marks: 20

Note: Answer allotted Question.

Instructions to the Candidate:

(i)Record the results on a graph sheet if required, and conclude your observation of the experiment

(ii) Draw the circuit diagram for illustration; choose appropriate values when not mentioned in the
question

1. Calibration and testing of single phase energy meter

2. Calibration of dynamometer wattmeter
3. Calibration of PMMC Ammeter and PMMC voltmeter
4. Calibration of LPF wattmeter
5. Extend the range of D.C. ammeter by using shunt resistances (low range to high range)
6. Extend the range of D.C. voltmeter by using series multiplier(low range to high range)

351
 STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION AND TRAINING, TELANGANA
MODEL QUESTION PAPER
DEEE III SEMESTER
MID SEMESTER-II EXAMINATION

Course Code: 18EE-308P Duration: 1 Hour

Course Name: Electrical Measurements Lab Practice Max.Marks: 20

Note: Answer allotted Question.

Instructions to the Candidate:

(i)Record the results on a graph sheet if required, and conclude your observation of the experiment

(ii) Draw the circuit diagram for illustration; choose appropriate values when not mentioned in the
question

1. Extend the range of A.C. ammeter by using C.T.(high range to low range)
2. Extend the range of A.C. voltmeter by using P.T.(high range to low range)
3. Measurement of low and medium resistance by volt-ampere method
4. Measurement of resistance by Kelvin’s double Bridge.
5. Measurement of earth resistance using digital earth tester
6. Measurement of insulation resistance using digital insulation tester

352
 STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION AND TRAINING, TELANGANA
MODEL QUESTION PAPER
DEEE III SEMESTER
SEMESTER END EXAMINATION

Course Code: 18EE-308P Duration: 2 Hour

Course Name: Electrical Measurements Lab Practice Max.Marks: 40

Note: Answer allotted Question.

Instructions to the Candidate:

(i)Record the results on a graph sheet if required, and conclude your observation of the experiment

(ii) Draw the circuit diagram for illustration; choose appropriate values when not mentioned in the
question

1. Calibration and testing of single phase energy meter

2. Calibration of dynamometer wattmeter
3. Calibration of PMMC Ammeter and PMMC voltmeter
4. Calibration of LPF wattmeter
5. Extend the range of D.C. ammeter by using shunt resistances (low range to high range)
6. Extend the range of D.C. voltmeter by using series multiplier(low range to high range)
7. Extend the range of A.C. ammeter by using C.T.(high range to low range)
8. Extend the range of A.C. voltmeter by using P.T.(high range to low range)
9. Measurement of low and medium resistance by volt-ampere method
10. Measurement of resistance by Kelvin’s double Bridge.
11. Measurement of earth resistance using digital earth tester
12. Measurement of insulation resistance using digital insulation tester
13. Measurement of power in a three-phase balanced circuit with two watt meter method
14. Measurement of single phase power by 3-voltmeter and 3-Ammeter methods

353
 ELECTRONICS LAB PRACTICE

Course Title :Electronics Lab Practice Course Code :18EE-309P

Semester :III Course Group :Practical

Teaching Scheme in Periods

:15:0:30 Credits :1.5
(L:T:P)

Total Contact
Methodology :Lecture + Practical :45
Periods

CIE :60 marks SEE :40 Marks

(Continuous Internal Evaluation) (Semester End Examination)

Pre requisites

Basic knowledge of semiconductor devices and basic electrical and electronics principles.

Course Outcomes
At the end of the course the students will have the ability to:

Course Outcome
CO Measure voltage, frequency and phase of any waveform using CRO and function generator
1CO Analyze rectifier circuits and regulated power supplies.
2
CO Obtain the characteristics of FET
3CO Analyze the effect to varying feed-back circuit values on frequency of an oscillator circuit.
4CO Design various Op-Amp circuits
5

354
Suggested Learning Outcomes

1.0 Measure voltage, frequency and phase of any waveform using CRO and function generator

1.1 Familiarize with CRO front panel controls and observe the effect of different settings to set intensity,
Astigmatism and Focus controls to display
i) Medium ii) Low frequency iii) High frequency
frequency

1.2 Set the controls of function generator and CRO to observe flicker free waveforms.
1.3 Measure amplitude, frequency, and time period of a signal from function generator by using CRO.
2.0 Analyze rectifier circuits and regulated power supplies.
2.1 Construct and test a switching circuit with diode as switching element.
2.2 Construct and test an unbiased i) Serial ii) Parallel clipper circuit.
2.3 Implement half wave rectifier with and without filter.
2.4 Implement Full-wave centre-tapped and Bridge rectifier with and without filter.
2.5 Build a regulated power supply and draw regulation characteristics using
i) Zener Diode ii) Positive 3 terminal regulator.

2.6 Implement a negative 3 Terminal Regulator and draw the regulation characteristics.

3.0 Obtain the characteristics of FET
3.1 Draw input and output characteristics of JFET and determine Pinch-Off voltage and Trans-
conductance.
3.2 Show that a FET can be used as a constant current source with appropriate bias.
3.3 Apply -2 V to the gate circuit through resistors of value 10K, 100K and 1M separately
and measure the output current and analyze.
4.0 Analyze the effect to varying feed-back circuit values on frequency of an oscillator circuit.
4.1 Construct RC coupled amplifier and draw its frequency response
4.2 Implement Hartley’s and Colpitts oscillator and verify the effect of varying Tank circuit component
values and observe wave form on CRO.
4.3 Construct RC phase shift oscillator and observe frequency by varying either R or C values
5.0 Design various Op-Amp circuits
5.1 Obtain the specifications of Operational amplifier 741 and Quad Op-amp LM 324 and comparator
LM 339 ICs from data sheets
5.2 Construct and verify Inverting, non inverting amplifier and Buffer using Op-amp.
5.3 Construct and verify summing and difference amplifier using Op-amp.
5.4 Construct and verify differentiator or integrator using Op-amp.

355
CO-PO Mapping Matrix

Engineer and society

Communication

Lifelong learning
Basic knowledge

Discipline Knowledge

Engineering Tools

Ethics
Environment &

Individual and Team

Experiments and
practice
Linked PO

sustainability
CO\P PO PO

work
PO 1 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9
O 2 10
CO1 3 3 3 3 2 2, 3, 4, 8, 9
CO2 1 3 3 3 3 2 1, 2, 3, 4, 8, 9
CO3 1 3 3 3 3 2 1,2, 3, 4, 8, 9
CO4 1 3 3 3 3 2 1,2, 3, 4, 8, 9

STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION AND TRAINING, TELANGANA

MODEL QUESTION PAPER

356
 DEEE III SEMESTER
MID SEMESTER-I EXAMINATION

Course Code: 18EE-309P Duration: 1 Hour

Course Name: Electronics Lab Practice Max.Marks: 20

Note: Answer allotted Question.

Instructions to the Candidate:

(i)Record the results on a graph sheet if required, and conclude your observation of the experiment

(ii) Draw the circuit diagram for illustration; choose appropriate values when not mentioned in the
question

1. To familiarize with CRO front panel controls and observe the effect of different settings to set
intensity, Astigmatism and Focus controls to display i) Medium frequency
2. To set the controls of function generator and CRO to observe flicker free waveforms.
3. Measure amplitude, frequency, and time period of a signal from function generator by using
CRO.
4. To construct and test a switching circuit with diode as switching element.
5. Construct and test an unbiased Serial clipper circuit.
6. Construct and test an unbiased Parallel clipper circuit.
7. Implement half wave rectifier with and without filter.

357
 STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION AND TRAINING, TELANGANA
MODEL QUESTION PAPER
DEEE III SEMESTER
MID SEMESTER-II EXAMINATION

Course Code: 18EE-309P Duration: 1 Hour

Course Name: Electronics Lab Practice Max. Marks: 20

Note: Answer allotted Question.

Instructions to the Candidate:

(i)Record the results on a graph sheet if required, and conclude your observation of the experiment

(ii) Draw the circuit diagram for illustration; choose appropriate values when not mentioned in the
question

1. Implement Full-wave centre-tapped and Bridge rectifier with and without filter.
2. To build a regulated power supply and draw regulation characteristics using zener diode
3. To build a regulated power supply and draw regulation characteristics using positive three
terminal regulator
4. Implement a negative 3 Terminal Regulator and draw the regulation characteristics.
5. Draw input and output characteristics of JFET and determine Pinch-Off voltage and Trans-
conductance.
6. Show that a FET can be used as a constant current source with appropriate bias.
7. Apply 2 V to the gate circuit through resistors of value 10K, 100K and 1M separately and
measure the output current and analyze

358
 STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION AND TRAINING, TELANGANA
MODEL QUESTION PAPER
DEEE III SEMESTER
SEMESTER END EXAMINATION

Course Code: 18EE-309P Duration: 2 Hour

Course Name: Electronics Lab Practice Max.Marks: 40

Note: Answer allotted Question.

Instructions to the Candidate:

(i)Record the results on a graph sheet if required, and conclude your observation of the experiment

(ii) Draw the circuit diagram for illustration; choose appropriate values when not mentioned in the
question

1. To familiarize with CRO front panel controls and observe the effect of different settings to set
intensity, Astigmatism and Focus controls to display i) Medium frequency
2. To set the controls of function generator and CRO to observe flicker free waveforms.
3. Measure amplitude, frequency, and time period of a signal from function generator by using
CRO.
4. To construct and test a switching circuit with diode as switching element.
5. Construct and test an unbiased Serial clipper circuit.
6. Construct and test an unbiased Parallel clipper circuit.
7. Implement half wave rectifier with and without filter.
8. Implement Full-wave centre-tapped and Bridge rectifier with and without filter.
9. To build a regulated power supply and draw regulation characteristics using zener diode
10. To build a regulated power supply and draw regulation characteristics using positive three
terminal regulator
11. Implement a negative 3 Terminal Regulator and draw the regulation characteristics.
12. Draw input and output characteristics of JFET and determine Pinch-Off voltage and Trans-
conductance.
13. Show that a FET can be used as a constant current source with appropriate bias.
14. Apply 2 V to the gate circuit through resistors of value 10K, 100K and 1M separately and
measure the output current and analyse
15. Construct RC coupled amplifier and draw its frequency response
16. To implement Hartley’s and Colpitts oscillator and verify the effect of varying Tank circuit
component values and observe wave form on CRO.

359
17. Construct RC phase shift oscillator and observe frequency by varying either R or C values
18. Obtain the specifications of Operational amplifier 741 and Quad Op-amp LM 324 and
comparator LM 339 ICs from data sheets
19. Construct and verify Inverting, non inverting amplifier and Buffer using Op-amp.
20. Construct and verify summing and difference amplifier using Op-amp.
21. Construct and verify differentiator or integrator using Op-amp.

360
 COMMUNICATION SKILLS AND LIFE SKILLS
Course Title : Communication Skills and Life Course Code : 18EE-310P
Skills lab practice
Semester : III Course Group : Practical
Teaching Scheme in : 15:0:30 Credits : 1.5
Periods(L:T:P)
Methodology : Lecture + Practical Total Contact
Periods : 45
CIE : 60 Marks SEE 40 Marks
(Continuous Internal Evaluation) (Semester End Examination)
Rationale:

This course is designed to impart communication skills and life skills to the students of diploma which
will help them a great deal in personal and professional fronts.

Prerequisites:

This course requires the basic knowledge of vocabulary, grammar, and four language learning skills, viz.
Listening, Speaking, Reading and Writing.

Course Outcomes:

At the end of the course the students will have the ability to:

Identify the main or the central idea.

Listening Skills Listen for specific details.
Learn the pronunciation.
Learn relevant vocabulary to make introductions.
Communication Skills – I Learn to introduceoneselfin formal and informal situations.
Learn vocabulary and expressions useful for describing objects
Describe objects

Learn vocabulary to talk about the past

Describe the incidents that happened in the past
Learn the techniques of organising the matter/content for one-
Communication Skills – II minute speech.
Speak fluently and accurately using appropriate body language.

361
 Think positively.
Develop positive attitude.
Life Skills – I Overcome negative attitude.
Know the importance of setting goals.
Set goals using SMART features.

Know the reasons for a problem.

Learn to overcome problems.
Learn the various techniques to solve the problems.
Life Skills – II Learn to make proper decisions on time.
Think ‘out of the box’.
Learn to be creative.
Think innovatively.
Think critically.

Know how to be a leader.

Learn the qualities of a good leader.
Life Skills – III Learn the qualities of a good team.
Learn the advantages and disadvantages of a team.
Manage time effectively.
Learn various time management techniques.
Learn the importance of prioritisation.

CO-PO Matrix

Course Outcome Linked PO

CO 1 Listening for main idea and specific details R/U/A 1, 2, 3, 4, 5,7,8,
9,10
CO 2 Introduce oneself and Describe Objects R/U/A 1,2,3,8,9,10
CO 3 Talk about the past and speak fluently for one R/U/A 1,2,3,7,8.9,10
minute
CO 4 Develop positive attitude and set short term and R/U/A 1,2,3,7,8,9,10
long term goals
CO 5 Learn to solve a problem, make decisions and R/U/A 1,2,3,7,8,9,10
think innovatively
CO6 Learn to become a good team member and leader R/U/A 1,2,3,7,8,9,10

Course Contents:

I. Listening Skills Duration: 9

1. Listening – I
 Digital Camera
 A Dialogue
 Wild Animal / Human conflict

362
 2. Listening – II
 A Recipe
 A Telephone conversation
 An Interview
II. Communication Skills – I Duration:6
3. Introducing Oneself
4. Describing Objects
III. Communication Skills – II Duration:6
5. Talking About the Past
6. Just AMinute
IV. Life Skills – I Duration:6
7. Attitude
8. Goal Setting
V. Life Skills – II Duration:9
9. Problem Solving and Decision-Making Skills
10.Critical Thinking & Creativity
VI. Life Skills – III Duration:9
11.Leadership and Teamwork
12.Time Management
Suggested Student Activities:

 Listening Comprehension
 Seminars
 Paper Presentations
 Lineups for introducing oneself
 Describing persons/places/things
 Picture description
 Role Plays
 Dumb charades
 What is in the bag? (Identifythe objects)
 Games using Online Dictionaries
 Sharing the information using emails, chats and groups
 Just AMinute
 Writing diary events
 Find a solution to the problem
 Making innovative things through recycling
 Creating advertisements
 Five-minute activities on Life Skills
 Watching videos on life skills and making presentations
 Case studies

Evaluation Pattern:

I. Continuous Internal Examination: 60 Marks

363
 a. MidSem- I 20 marks
Syllabus:
i. Listening Skills
ii. Communication Skills - I

b. Mid Sem – II 20 Marks

Syllabus:
i. Communication Skills - II
ii. Life Skills - I

c. Internal assessment: 20 marks

i. Seminars: 10 marks
ii. Assignments: 5 marks
iii. Lab record submission: 5 marks

II. Semester End Examination : 40 Marks

a. Listening: 10 Marks
b. JAMor Role plays: 15 Marks
c. Viva Voceon any life skills topic : 15 Marks

References:

Flint, Chrisand Jamie FlockhartListening: A2 (Collins English for Life: Skills)Collins. 2013

Brown, Stephen E. English in Everyday Life. McGraw-Hill Education.2008

Mohanraj, Jayashree. Let Us Hear Them Speak: Developing Speaking-Listening Skills in English.Sage.
2015
Susan Earle – Carlin. Q Skills for Success: Listening and Speaking 5: Student Book with Online Practice.
Oxford University Press. 2013
Kumar, Sanjay and PushpaLatha.Communication Skills: A Work Book.Oxford University Press. 2018
Carnegie, Dale.The Leader in You. Simon & Schuster: 1995
Carnegie, Dale.The Art of Public Speaking. PrabhatPrakashan. NewDelhi.2013
Kaye, Martin. Goal Setting (Workbook Included): Goals & Motivation: Introduction To A Complete &
Proven Step-By-Step Blueprint For Reaching Your Goals (Goal Setting Master Plan 1). Kindle Edition.
MK Coaching.2016.
West, Steven. Critical Thinking Skills: Practical Strategies for Better Decision making, Problem-Solving
and Goal Setting. Kindle Edition.2018
Tracy, Brain. Goals.Berret-Koehler PublishersInc. San Francisco. 2017

Tracy, Brain. Master your Time Master your Life.Penguin Random House Inc. New York. 2017

Sean Covey .The 7 Habits of Highly Effective Teens.Simon and Schuster,2011

E-Learning Resources:

364
http://www.bbc.co.uk/worldservice/learningenglish/youmeus/learnit/learnitv39.shtml

https://www.examenglish.com/leveltest/listening_level_test.htm

https://www.oxfordonlineenglish.com/listening?utm_referrer=https%3A%2F%2Fwww.google.co.in%2F

https://takeielts.britishcouncil.org/prepare-test/free-ielts-practice-tests/listening-practice-test-1

https://learnenglish.britishcouncil.org/en/listening

https://www.cambridgeenglish.org/learning-english/activities-for-learners/?skill=listening

https://www.businessenglishsite.com/business-english-listening.html

365
 BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATION (C-18)
THIRD SEMESTER18EE-310P
COMMUNICATION SKILLS AND LIFE SKILLS
MID SEM - I
Time : 1 Hour Total Marks: 20 Marks

Part – A 10 marks

1. Listening Comprehension: 5 X 2 = 10
(Teacher should give the questions before reading the passage given below)

Florence Nightingale was an English social reformer and a statistician, and the founder of
modern nursing. She was born in Florence, Italy, on May 12, 1820.Part of a wealthy family, Nightingale
defied the expectations of the time and pursued what she saw as her God-given calling of nursing during
the Crimean War. She and a team of nurses improved the unsanitary conditions at a British base hospital,
greatly reducing the death count. Her writings sparked worldwide health care reform, and in 1860 she
established St. Thomas' Hospital and the Nightingale Training School for Nurses. A revered hero of her
time, she died on August 13, 1910, in London. Nightingale came to prominence while serving as a
manager and trainer of nurses during the Crimean War, in which she organized care for wounded
soldiers.She gave nursing a favourable reputation and became an icon of Victorian culture, especially in
the persona of "The Lady with the Lamp" making rounds of wounded soldiers at night.
Questions:
1. Who was Florence Nightingale?
2. When and where was she born?
3. What does the passage convey?
4. When did she pass away?
5. Where did she establish nursing school?

PART- B 10 Marks

Instruction: Answer any one of the questions in 150 words.

2. How do you introduce yourself formally in an interview?

3. Describe your polytechnic.

366
 BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATION (C-18)
THIRD SEMESTER 18EE-310P
COMMUNICATION SKILLS AND LIFE SKILLS
MID SEM - II
Time : 1 Hour Total Marks: 20 Marks

Part – A 10 marks
Instruction: Answer any one of the following questions in 150 words.
1. Describe how you have spent your summer vacation.
2. What are the features of good JAM presentation? What precautions do you take before speaking for
one minute on the given topic?
Part – B 10 marks
Instruction: Answer any one of the following questions in 150 words.
3. What is positive attitude? Give examples of positive attitude from your life.
4. Mention your long term goal with SMART features. How do you achieve it?

367
 BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATION (C-18)
THIRD SEMESTER 18EE-310P
COMMUNICATION SKILLS AND LIFE SKILLS
SEMESTER END EXAM
Time : 2 Hours Total Marks: 40 Marks

Part – A 10 marks

1. Listen to the following passage and answer the questions give below it. 5 X 2 = 10

(Teacher should give the questions before reading the passage)

Answer the following questions after teacher reads the following paragraph.

Prof. Jayashankar was born to Mahalaxmi and LaxmiKantha Rao on 6 th August 1934 in
Akkampet village, Warangal District. He was a Doctorate in Economics. He worked as a Vice-
Chancellor of Kakatiya University. He worked in many capacities. He was popularly known as
“Pedda Sir.” He inspired many a people to fight for the cause of Telangana Statehood.

At the age of twelve, Jayashankar refused to sing songs in praise of the Nizam and insisted on
singing VandeMataram instead. As an intermediate student, in 1952, he protested against State
Reorganization Committee plan to merge with the Andhra Rashtra. He took an active part in the
agitations of “Non – Mulki go back“ and “ Idli Sambar go back.” He took an active part in Telangana
separate statehood agitation in 1969 too. In 1999, Prof. Jayashankar started the Telangana
Development Forum in the USA which helped to propagate the injustice, discrimination and
exploitation meted out to Telangana region and people in the aspects of employment, funds and water
resources. He relentlessly put his efforts to end the struggle of Telangana people. He passed away on
June 21, 2011. He was 76 years old at the time of his death.

Questions:

1. Where was Prof.Jayashankar born?

2. Why didn’t he sing songs in praise of the Nizam?
3. Why did Jayashankar start the Telangana Development Forum in USA?
4. What are the two agitations in which he took an active part?
5. What is the meaning of ‘relentlessly’?
Part – B 15 marks
2. JAM / Role Plays
Part – C 15 marks
3. Viva Voce on Life Skills topics

368
 DEEE SKILL UPGRADATION ACTIVITY SHEET

Course Title : Skill Upgradation Credits :2.5

Semester : III Total Contact Periods : 105
Methodology : Activities

Suggested Course Outcomes

CO.1 Address the identified needs of the community collaboratively to facilitate positive
social change.
a. Prepare a chart related to the topics covered in the present semester.
b. Listen to expert talk, guest lecture, youtube video and write a summary.
c. Participate in Haritha Haram and submit a small report about the activities.
d. Prepare a report / PPT / poster on waste water recycling or any eco-friendly practices.
e. Seminar on problems with possible solutions in the campus or nearby places
f. Group discussions or enacting a play on topics creating awareness about socio-economic
problems
g. Take up a case study on identification of latest technologies to tackle day to day problems
such as pollution control or traffic management and submit a report / PPT/ poster
h. Participate in NCC

(PO5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10)

CO.2 Listen attentively to others and respond appropriately

a. Listen to expert talk, guest lecture, youtube video and write a summary.
b. Participating in Group discussions or enacting a play on topics creating awareness about
socio-economic problems that can be mitigated by technologies.
c. Participate in quiz on technical aspects or current affairs
d. Participate in Mock Interview

(PO5, 7, 8, 9, 10)

CO.3 Adapt your style to the occasion, task, and audience

a. Group discussions or enacting a play on topics creating awareness about socio-economic
problems that can be mitigated by technologies.
b. Seminar on problems with possible solutions in the campus or nearby places
c. Participate in Mock Interview

(PO5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10)

369
CO.4 Articulate ideas in various formats including oral, written, nonverbal, visual, and
electronic devices.
a. Prepare a chart related to the topics covered in the present semester.
b. Refer to an e-journal and submit a summary report on upcoming technologies.
c. Visit factory / industry and submit a report/PPT on the observations made.
d. Prepare a mini project and submit report.
e. Prepare a report / PPT / poster on waste water recycling or any eco-friendly practices.
f. Take up a case study on identification of latest technologies to tackle day to day problems
such as pollution control or traffic management and submit a report / PPT/ poster
g. Seminar on problems with possible solutions in the campus or nearby places
h. Participate in Mock Interview

(PO5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10)

CO.5 Demonstrate ability to recognize and effectively manage ambiguous ideas,

experiences and situations
a. Take up a case study on identification of latest technologies to tackle day to day problems
such as pollution control or traffic management and submit a report / PPT/ poster
b. Seminar on problems with possible solutions in the campus or nearby places

(PO5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10)

CO.6 Analyze the interconnections between individuals and society as well as how
individual actions have an impact on others.
a. Participate in Haritha Haram and submit a small report about the activities.
b. Participate in Swatch Bharath and write an essay on the importance of the program
c. Participate in NCC

(PO5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10)

CO.7 Utilize others’ ideas, strengths, knowledge, and abilities to foster an inclusive
environment & Develop and sustain healthy and meaningful relationships with others
a. Prepare a mini project and submit report.
b. Participate in Haritha Haram and submit a small report about the activities.
c. Participate in Swatch Bharath and write an essay on the importance of the program
d. Participate in NCC

(PO5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10)

CO.8 Ability to recognize their strengths and those of others to work towards a shared
vision.
a. Prepare a mini project and submit report.
b. Participate in Haritha Haram and submit a small report about the activities.
c. Participate in Swatch Bharath and write an essay on the importance of the program
d. Participate in NCC

370
 (PO5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10)

CO.9 Act in alignment with one’s own values to contribute to one’s life-long growth and
learning.
a. Physical activities such as sports, yoga, meditation and other relaxation techniques

(PO5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10)

CO.10 Gain, process, and act upon knowledge regarding the effects of individual,
community, national, and international level choices on ecosystems and people.
a. Prepare a report / PPT / poster on waste water recycling or any eco-friendly practices.
b. Take up a case study on identification of latest technologies to tackle day to day problems
such as pollution control or traffic management and submit a report / PPT/ poster
c. Take up a case study on identification of latest technologies to tackle day to day problems
such as pollution control or traffic management and submit a report / PPT/ poster
d. Seminar on problems with possible solutions in the campus or nearby places

(PO5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10)

CO Outcome CO/PO
Mapping

CO1 Address the identified needs of the community collaboratively to 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10

facilitate positive social change.
CO2 Listen attentively to others and respond appropriately 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10

CO3 Adapt your style to the occasion, task, and audience 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10

CO4 Articulate ideas in various formats including oral, written, nonverbal, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10

visual, and electronic devices.
CO5 Demonstrate ability to recognize and effectively manage ambiguous 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10
ideas, experiences and situations
CO6 Analyze the interconnections between individuals and society as well 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10
as how individual actions have an impact on others.
CO7 Utilize others’ ideas, strengths, knowledge, and abilities to foster an 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10
inclusive environment & Develop and sustain healthy and
meaningful relationships with others
CO8 Ability to recognize their strengths and those of others to work 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10
towards a shared vision
CO9 Act in alignment with one’s own values to contribute to one’s life- 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10
long growth and learning.
CO10 Gain, process, and act upon knowledge regarding the effects of 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10
individual, community, national, and international level choices on
ecosystems and people.

Note: The above COs may be mapped to other POs from 1 to 4 apart from PO’s 5 to 10
depending on the topic

371
 Suggested Student Activities

1. Prepare a chart related to the topics covered in the present semester.

2. Refer to an e-journal and submit a summary report on upcoming technologies.
3. Visit factory / industry and submit a report/PPT on the observations made.
4. Prepare a mini project and submit report.
5. Listen to expert talk, guest lecture, youtube video and write a summary.
6. Participate in Haritha Haram and submit a small report about the activities.
7. Prepare a report / PPT / poster on waste water recycling or any eco-friendly practices.
8. Take up a case study on identification of latest technologies to tackle day to day problems such as
pollution control or traffic management and submit a report / PPT/ poster
9. Participate in Swatch Bharath and write an essay on the importance of the program
10. Group discussions or enacting a play on topics creating awareness about socio-economic
problems
11. Physical activities such as sports, games, yoga, meditation and other relaxation techniques
12. Participate in quiz on technical aspects or current affairs
13. Seminar on problems with possible solutions in the campus or nearby places
14. Participate in NCC
15. Participate in Mock interviews

Note: The above student activities will be assessed using rubrics. A sample rubrics template is given
below. The subject teacher can assess students using rubrics with atleast four relevant aspects.

RUBRICS MODEL (For assessing Presentation skills)

372
 Aspects Needs improvement Satisfactory Good Exemplary
Collect much Collects
Collects very Collects a
Information with some basic
Collection limited great deal of
very information with
of data information information with
limited relevance little bit of
relevance
to the topic irrelevance
Presents data well;
Presents data well Presents data in an
Presentation Clumsy but presentation
but need to improve understandable yet
of data presentation of data needs to be more
clarity concise manner
meaningful
Performs all
Fulfill Performs very Performs very Performs
duties of
team’s roles little duties but little duties and is nearly all
assigned
& duties Unreliable. inactive duties
team roles
Rarely does Usually does Always does
Normally
Shares the assigned the assigned the assigned
does the
work work; often work; rarely work without
assigned
equally needs needs having to be
work
reminding reminding reminded
Usually does Talks good;
Listens, but
Interaction with most of the but never Listens and
sometimes
other team talking; rarely show interest speaks a fair
talks too
mates allows others in listening to amount
much
to speak others
Audibility and Very little
Hardly audible and Audible most of the
clarity in audibility and Audible and clear
unclear time with clarity
speech clarity
Some depth of
Lacks content Insight and depth
Little depth of content
Understanding understanding and of content
content understanding is
content is clearly a work in understanding are
understanding evident but needs
progress evident
improvement
Content is Content is accurate
Content is accurate
inaccurate and but some Content is
and information is
information is not information is not accurate and
Content not presented in a
presented in a presented in a information is
Presentation logical order
logical order logical order but is presented in a
making it difficult
making it difficult still generally easy logical order
to follow
to follow to follow

Suggested additional aspects for assessing Leadership Qualities:

1. Carrying self
2. Punctuality
3. Team work abilities
4. Moral values
5. Communication skills
6. Ensures the work is done in time

373
Suggested additional aspects for assessing “Participation in social task”

1 Interested to know the current situation of society.

2 Shows interest to participate in given social task.
3 Reliable
4 Helping nature
5 Inter personal skills
6 Ensures task is completed

Suggested additional aspects for assessing “Participation in Technical task”

1. Updated to new technologies

2. Identifies problems in society that can be solved using technology
3. Interested to participate in finding possible technical solutions to identified project
4. Reliable
5. Interpersonal skills

Suggested additional aspects for Carrying Self:

1 Stand or sit straight.

2 Keep your head level.
3 Relax your shoulders.
4 Spread your weight evenly on both legs.
5 If sitting, keep your elbows on the arms of your chair, rather than tightly against your sides.
6 Make appropriate eye contact while communicating.
7 Lower the pitch of your voice.
8 Speak more clearly

374
DIPLOMA IN ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING
IV SEMESTER

375
 IV SEMESTER

TEACHING AND EXAMINATION SCHEME

Sl Course Course Name Teaching Scheme Examination Scheme

No Code Instruction Total Credits Continuous internal Semester end examination
Periods per Periods evaluation
week per
semester
L T P Mid Mid Internal Max Min Total Min
sem sem evaluati Mark Mar marks marks for
1 2 on s ks passing
including
internals

1 18EE- Advanced
401F Engineering 3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35
Mathematics
2 18EE- Electrical Power 14 35
402C Systems 3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 100

3 18EE- AC Machines 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35

3 1 0
403C
4 18EE- General Mechanical 14 35
404C Engineering 3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 100
18EE- Digital Electronics 14 35
5 405C 3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 100
6 18EE- Electrical
406P Engineering 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
Drawing Practice
7 18EE- AC Machines Lab 1 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
0 2
407P Practice
8 18EE- Electrical CAD Lab 45 20 50
408P Practice 1 0 2 1.5 20 20 20 40 100
9 18EE- Digital Electronics 45 1.5 20 50
409P Lab Practice 1 0 2 20 20 20 40 100
10 18EE— Advanced
410P Communication 45 1.5 20 50
1 0 2 20 20 20 40 100
Skills and Life Skills

11 Skill Upgradation 0 0 7 105 2.5 0 0 Rubrics -- -

20 5 17 630 25 200 200 200 400 170 1000 425

Activities: student performance is to be assessed through Rubrics

376
 ADVANCED ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS

Course Title : Advanced Engineering Course Code : 18EE-401F

Mathematics
Semester : IV Course Group : Foundation
Teaching Scheme in periods ( L : T :P) : : 45 : 15 : 0 Credits : 3
Methodology : Lecture + Tutorial Total Contact : 60
Periods
CIE : 60 Marks SEE : 40 Marks

(Continuous Internal Evaluation) (Semester End Examination)

Pre requisites:

This course requires the knowledge of Engineering Mathematics at Diploma first year level and Applied
Engineering Mathematics at Diploma 3rd Semester level.

Course Outcomes:

At the end of the course, the student will have the ability to:

CO 1 Solve simple Homogeneous Linear Differential Equations

CO 2 Solve simple Non-Homogeneous Linear Differential Equations
CO 3 Express f(x) as a Fourier series in the given interval
CO 4 Express f(x) as a Fourier Half-Range Cosine series and Sine series
CO 5 Find Laplace transforms of simple functions
CO 6 Find Inverse Laplace transforms of simple functions and solve Linear Differential Equations
using Laplace Transformations.
Course Contents:

Unit – I Duration: 05 Periods (L:3.75 – T:1.25)

Homogeneous Linear Differential equations with constant coefficients

Homogenous linear differential equations with constant coefficients of order two and higher with
emphasis on second order.

Unit – II Duration: 15 Periods (L:11.25 – T:3.75)

Non-Homogeneous Linear Differential equations with constant coefficients

Non-homogenous linear differential equations with constant coefficients of the form f(D)y = X, where
X is in the form k(a constant ) ,e ax, sin ax, cos ax, x n, (n= 1,2,3) Complimentary Function (CF), Particular
Integral (PI) and General Solution (GS).

377
Unit-III Duration: 10 Periods (L: 7.5 – T: 2.5)

Fourier series

Orthogonality of trigonometric functions, Representation of a function in Fourier series over the interval
c , c  2 
, Euler’s formulae, sufficient conditions for existence of Fourier series for a function. Even,
Odd functions and Fourier series over the Interval (0,2 π ) and (- π , π )

Unit – IV Duration: 05 Periods (L:3.75 – T:1.25)

Fourier Half-range series

Representation of a function as Fourier Half-range Sine series and Cosine series over the interval (0, π)
Unit – V Duration: 10Periods (L: 7.5 – T:2.5)

Laplace Transformations:

Definition, sufficient conditions for existence of Laplace Transform, Laplace Transform of elementary
functions, linearity property, Change of scale property, First shifting theorem , multiplication by t n,
division by t, Laplace Transform of derivatives and integrals, unit step function, Laplace Transform of
second shifting theorem

Unit – VI Duration: 15 Periods (L:11.25 – T:3.75)

Inverse Laplace transforms:

Inverse Laplace transforms- shifting theorems and change of scale property, multiplication by s n and
division by s –Inverse Laplace Transform using partial fractions – convolution theorem (no proof) –
application of Laplace Transformations to solve ordinary differential equations of second order with
initial conditions.

Recommended Books:

1. Higher Engineering Mathematics, B.S.Grewal .

2. Laplace Transforms - Murray R. Spigel .

3. Ordinary Differential Equations – R. S. Aggarwal.

4. Fourier Series – A.R. Vasishtha and Gupta.

378
Suggested E-Learning references:

1. www.freebookcentre.net/mathematics/introductory-mathematics-books.html

2. E-books:www.mathebook.net

Suggested Learning Outcomes

Unit-I

1.0 Solve Homogeneous linear differential equations with constant coefficients in engineering
situations

1.1 Solve Differential equations of the type (aD 2 +bD + c)y = 0 when the roots of the auxiliary
equation are real and different, real and repeated, complex.

1.2 Solve the higher order homogeneous Lineardifferential equations with constant coefficients.

Unit-II

2.0 Solve Non Homogeneous linear differential equations with constant coefficients in
engineering situations

2.1 Explain the concept of complementary function, particular Integral and general solution
of a differential equation.

2.2 Solve nth order differential equation of the type f(D) y = X where f(D) is a polynomial of second
order and X is a function of the form k, eax ,Sinax, Cosax, xn.

2.3 Solve simple problems on the above types of 2.2

Unit-III

3.0 Understand the Fourier series expansion of functions

3.1 Define the orthogonality of functions in an interval.

3.2 Define Fourier series of a function in the interval (C, C+2 π ¿ and write the Euler’s formulae for
determining the Fourier coefficients.

3.3 Write sufficient conditions for the existence of Fourier series for a function.

3.4 Write Fourier series of simple functions in the range (0, 2 π ¿ and (- π , π ¿.

3.5 Write Fourier series for even and odd functions in the interval (- π , π ¿

3.6 Solve simple problems on even and odd functions in the interval. (0,2 π ¿∧¿ (- π , π ¿

379
Unit- IV

4.0 Understand the Half – Range Fourier series expansion of functions

4.1 Write Half – Range Cosine series of a function in the range (0 , π) .

4.2 Write Half – Range Sine series of a function in the range (0 , π) .

4.3 Solve simple problems on Half – Range Cosine and Sine series over the interval (0 , π)

Unit-V

5.0 Understand Laplace transforms

5.1 Write the definition of Laplace Transform and Laplace transform of standard functions.

5.2 Explain the sufficient conditions of existence of Laplace Transform.

5.3 Write the properties of Laplace Transform – Linearity property, First shifting theorem,

Change of Scale property.

5.4 Solve simple problems using the above properties.

t
n f (t ) n
5.5 Write formulae for Laplace transform oft f (t) , , f ( t ) ,∫ f ( u ) du in terms of Laplace transform
t 0
of. f (t)

5.6 Solve simple problems using the above formulae.

5.7 Define unit step function and write the Laplace Transform of unit step function.

5.8 Write Second shifting theorem.

Unit-VI

6.0 Use Laplace transforms and Inverse Laplace transforms to solve differential

equation in engineering problems

6.1Define inverse Laplace Transform and write inverse Laplace Transforms of standard functions.

6.2 Solve simple problems on Inverse Laplace Transforms.

6.2 Write Shifting theorems and Change of scale property of inverse Laplace Transform.

6.3 Solve simple problems on 6.2

380
6.4Write inverse Laplace Transforms corresponding to Laplace Transform of the functions
t
f (t ) n
t n f (t), , f ( t ) ,∫ f ( u ) du
t 0

6.5 Solve simple problems on 6.4

6.6Define convolution of two functions and state convolution theorem.

6.7Solve simple problems on Convolution theorem.

6.8Use Laplace and inverse Laplace Transforms to solve simple differential equations of

Second order.

Suggested Student Activities:

1. Student visits Library to refer Standard Books on Mathematics and collect related material.

2.Quiz

3. Group discussion

4. Surprise tests

5. Seminars

6. Home Assignments.

381
CO-PO Mapping Matrix

Communication

Lifelong learning
Basic knowledge

Discipline Knowledge

Engineering Tools

Ethics
Engineer and society
Linked PO

sustainability Environment &

work Individual and Team

practice Experiments and

CO PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO
10

CO1 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10

CO2 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10

CO3 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10

CO4 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10

CO5 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10

CO6 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10

Internal Evaluation

Sl.No Description Level No of Marks for Choice Total Marks

Questions each question

01 Part-A Remembering(R) 4 1 Nil 4 Marks

02 Part-B Understanding(U) 4 3 2 6 Marks

03 Part-C Application(A) 4 5 2 10 Marks

Total Marks 20 Marks

Test Units Marks

Mid Sem 1 1 and 2 20

Mid Sem 2 3 and 4 20

382
 Slip Test 1 1 and 2 5

Slip Test 2 3 and 4 5

Assignments - 5

Seminars - 5

Total 60

QUESTION PAPER PATTERN FOR MID SEMESTER EXAMS

MID SEM-I EXAM

S.No Unit No R U A Remarks

1 Unit-I 1,2 5(a) 7(a)

5(b) 7(b)

2 Unit-II 3,4 6(a) 8(a)

6(b) 8(b)

Total Questions 4 4 4

MID SEM-II EXAM

S.No Unit No R U A Remarks

1 Unit-III 1,2 5(a) 7(a)

5(b) 7(b)

2 Unit-IV 3,4 6(a) 8(a)

6(b) 8(b)

Total Questions 4 4 4

The length of answer for each question framed in respect of Part-A, B&C shall not exceed ¼ of a
page,1page and 2 pages respectively

QUESTION PAPER PATTERN FOR SEMESTER END EXAM

Sl.No Description Level No of Marks for Choice Total Marks

383
 Questions each question

01 Part-A Remembering(R) 8 1 Nil 8 Marks

02 Part-B Understanding(U) 8 3 4 12 Marks

03 Part-C Application(A) 8 5 4 20 Marks

Total Marks 40 Marks

Questions to be set for SEE

Unit No
R U A

I
Q1 Q9(a) Q13(a)
II

III
Q2 Q10(a) Q14(a)
IV Q4

Q5,Q Q9(b), Q13(b),

V
6 Q11(a), Q11(b) Q15(a), Q15(b)
Q3
Q7,Q Q10(b), Q14(b),
VI
8 Q12(a), Q12(b) Q16(a), Q16(b)

Total Questions 8 8 8

Code: 18EE-401F

STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION & TRAINING, TELANGANA

BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATIONS

384
 MID SEM –I, MODEL PAPER, IV SEMESTER
ADVANCED ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS
TIME: 1: 00 Hour Max. Marks: 20

PART-A

Instructions: 1. Answer ALL questions 04 X 01 = 04

2. Each question carries ONE mark
1. Write the General solution of (aD2+bD+c)y = 0, whose roots of auxiliary equation are real and
distinct.

2. Find the roots of auxiliary equation of the differential equation ( D 2 +2 D+ 1¿ y=0

3. Find the Particular Integral of( D 2−4 D+1 ) y=e3 x

4. Find the P.I of ( D 2−16 ) y=sin 4 x

PART-B
Instructions: 1. Answer any TWO questions 02 X 03 = 06
2. Each question carries THREE marks
5 a) Solve (D2 + 3D – 54)y = 0
Or

5 b) Solve (D2 +16)y = 0

6 a) Solve( D 2 +4 D+ 4) y =e 2 x

Or

6 b) Find P.I of ( D 3 + D) y = sin2x

PART C

Instructions: 1. Answer ALL questions 02 X 05 = 10

2. Each question carries FIVE marks

7 a) Solve (D3 – 2D2 – 4D + 8) y = 0

Or

7 b) Solve (D3 – D2 – D +1)y = 0

8 a) Solve ( D 2 +36) y =sin 2 x

Or

8 b) Solve :( D 2+3 D+2) y = x 2

Code: 18EE-401F

STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION & TRAINING, TELANGANA

385
 BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATIONS
MID SEM –II, MODEL PAPER, IV SEMESTER
ADVANCED ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS
TIME: 1: 00 Hours Max. Marks: 20
PART-A
Instructions: 1. Answer ALL questions 04 X 01 = 04
2. Each question carries ONE mark
1. Define periodic function and give one example
2. Define Fourier series of the function f(x) in the interval (0, 2 π )
3. Write Half-range sine series of f(x) in the interval (0, π ¿
4. Find a 0for f(x) =e x in 0¿ x <π

PART-B

Instructions: 1. Answer any TWO questions 02 X 03 = 06

2. Each question carries THREE marks
5 a) If f(x) = x 2 in (0, 2 π ¿, then find the value of an in Fourier series of f(x)

Or

5 b) If f(x) =|x| in (- π , π ¿, then find the value of a1 in Fourier series of f(x)

6 a).Find the value of an in half-range Cosine series for the function f(x) = ex  in (0, π ¿

Or

6 b) Obtain the Fourier Half – Range Sine series for f(x) =( π−x ¿∫ h einterval(0 , π)

PART C

Instructions: 1. Answer any TWO questions 02 X 05 = 10

2. Each question carries FIVE marks
7 a) Obtain the Fourier series for f(x) = x in the interval 0 ¿ x <2 π

Or

7 b) Find the Fourier series for f(x) =( x−x 2 ¿ in the interval (- π , π ¿. Hence show that

1 1 1 1 π2
2 - 2 + 2 - 2 + ……….+ =
1 2 3 4 12

8 a) Express f(x) = πx – x2 as a half-range Sine series in (0, π ¿

Or

8 b) Find the half –range cosine series for the function f(x) = x 2 in the interval (0, π ¿

386
 18EE-401F

BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATION, (C-18)

SEMESTER END EXAM MODEL PAPER
IV SEMESTER EXAMINATION
ADVANCED ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS
Time: 2 hours [Total Marks: 40]

PART-A

Instructions: 1. Answer ALL questions 08 X 01 = 08

2. Each question carries ONE mark

1. Find the roots of auxiliary equation of the differential equation( D 2 + 4 D ) y=0 .

2. Define Fourier Series for the function f(x) in the interval ( c, c+2 π ¿
3. Find the Particular Integral of( D 2−4 D+1 ) y=e x
4. Find L ( e 2t + cos 3 t )
5. Find L ( t+5 cos h t )
6. State the First Shifting theorem of Laplace Transforms.

7. Find L
−1
( s−31 + s +s 4 )
2

8. Find L
−1
( 2 s+1 5 )
PART-B

Instructions: 1. Answer any FOUR questions 04 X 03 = 12

2. Each question carries THREE marks

9a) Solve (D2+D + 1) y = 4e3x

Or

9 b) Find L ( tCos 3 t )

10 a) Find Half Range Sine Series of f(x) = x in ( 0 , π )

Or

387
10 b) Find L
−1
( s +6s +1s−7 )
2

20−4 s
11 a) If L{f(t)} = 2 , find L{f(3t)}
s −4 s +20

Or
∞
11 b) Find ∫ t . e−2 t sin 3 tdt using Laplace Transform Technique
0

1−cos at
12 a) Show that L−1 ¿ =
a2
or

12 b) Find L
−1
( (s+ 2)s +4 )
2

PART C

Instructions: 1. Answer any FOUR questions 04 X 05 = 20

2. Each question carries FIVE marks

13 a) Solve:(D2 + D -2) y = x + sinx

Or

13 b) Find L[ t et sin 3 t ]

2
as a Fourier series in the interval (−π , π )
14 a) Expand f(x) = x

Or
s
14 b) Find L
−1
(( s +1 ) (s 2 +1)
2
)
15 a) Find L ( sin 3 tt.Cost )
Or
t

15 b) Evaluate
L
{ ∫
0
sin t
t
dt
}

388
 −1
16 a) Find L ( ( s +1)1( s+2) ) using Convolution theorem .

Or

16 b) Solve the differential equation y’’– 2y’– 8y = Sint , when y (0) = 3, y’ (0) = 6 by

Laplace Transform method.

ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS

Course Title : Electrical Power Systems Course Code : 18EE-402C

Semester : IV Course Group : Core
Teaching Scheme in Periods : 45:15:0 Credits :3
(L:T:P)
Methodology : Lecture + Tutorial Total Contact Periods :60
CIE : 60 Marks SEE : 40 Marks
(Continuous Internal Evaluation) (Semester End Examination)

Pre requisites

This course requires the knowledge of

(i) Basic principle and working of generator, transformers
(ii) Voltage and current calculations in the circuits using KCL,KVL
Course Outcomes

CO1 : Differentiate various Energy sources & thermal power station

CO2 : Describe the construction and working of Hydroelectric power station and Nuclear Power
station
CO3 : Describe various types of Transmission Systems.
CO4 : Evaluate the performance of transmission lines
CO5 : Describe Electrical and Mechanical aspects of Transmission and Distribution lines
CO6 : Evaluate various aspects in Distribution systems.

Unit Unit Name Periods Questions to be set for SEE

No
R U A

389
1 Sources of Energy
10
&Thermal Power Station
2 Hydro Electric Q1 Q9(a) Q13(a)
Power Station &Nuclear 10
Power Station
3 AC & DC Transmission
10
systems
Q4 Q2 Q10(a) Q14(a)
4 Performance of the
10
transmission lines
5 Line structures for
Q9(b), Q13(b),
Transmission and 10 Q5,Q6
Q11(a), Q11(b) Q15(a), Q15(b)
Distribution Q3
6 Distribution systems Q10(b), Q14(b),
10 Q7,Q8
Q12(a), Q12(b) Q16(a), Q16(b)
Total 60 8 8 8

Course Content
UNIT 1 - Sources of Energy &Thermal Power Station Duration: 10 Periods (L:7.5– T:2.5)
Different sources of energy - Need for Non-Conventional Energy based power generation – Methods of
generation of energy from different sources of power- Merits and Limitations of Conventional and Non-
conventional sources - Thermal Power Station - pulverization, Condensation – Types of cooling towers.

UNIT 2– Hydro Electric Power Station &Nuclear PowerStation

Duration:10 Periods (L:7.5– T:2.5)
Hydro Electric Power Station - Factors for site selection and limitations in location –Hydrograph -
Classification of hydroelectric power - Layout diagram of various Hydro Power Stations –Nuclear
energy, fission and fusion reactions - Merits in using nuclear energy. Nuclear fuels - Working of
moderator type nuclear power station with a block diagram - Materials used for coolant, reflector and
control rods.

UNIT 3 –AC and DC Transmission systems Duration: 10 Periods(L:7.5 – T:2.5)

Transmission Lines- classification of Transmission systems - Relative advantages of AC & DC
Transmission - Basic Concept of High voltage DC Transmission - Types of HVDC transmission-
Advantages and disadvantages of HVDC transmission - Types of conductors – Current distortion effects.

UNIT 4 - Performance of the transmission lines Duration: 10Periods (L:7.5 – T:2.5)

390
Transmission line parameters – Expressions for Inductance of transmission system –Problems on
computing Inductance - Expression for capacitance of a transmission system-Problems on computing
capacitance –Classify transmission lines - Regulation of short transmission lines – Percentage regulation
– Problems on computing Percentage regulation – Ferranti Effect – Corona.

UNIT 5 - Line structures for Transmission and Distribution Duration: 10Periods (L:7.5 – T:2.5)
Components of Overhead lines – factors affecting conductors spacing and ground clearance - Sag-
derivation- Factors affecting sag, Problems on calculating sag - Disadvantages of loose span – Insulators -
Requirements of insulators - Types of Insulators – Advantages of Polymer insulators - Voltage
distribution across string of suspension Insulators- string efficiency- Problems on string efficiency -
Methods of improving string efficiency.

UNIT 6 – Distribution Systems Duration:10Periods (L:7.5 – T:2.5)

Definition of substation-need of substation- classification of sub-stations - Relative merits of indoor and
outdoor sub-stations –Purpose of various equipment in sub-stations - Classification of Distribution
systems - Steps in voltage drop calculation – problems – Micro Grid - Concept of smart GRID

Recommended Books

1. S.L.Uppal-Electrical Power
2. Soni,Guptha,Bhatnagar-Electrical Power Systems - DhanpatRai& Sons
3. A.T.Starr -Generation, Transmission and Utilisation
4. C.L.Wadhwa -Electrical Power Systems - New age international(P) limited
5. NEDCAP -Non Conventional Energy Guide Lines
6. J B Guptha -Electrical power plants
7. G.D. Roy Non conventional energy sources
8. CL Wadhwa -Electrical power Systems - New Age International(P) limited.
9. KR Padiyar - HVDC Power Transmission system Technology
10. S.N. Singh -Electrical Power generation, transmission and distribution.

Suggested E-Learning references

1. http://electrical4u.com/
2. www.nptel.ac.in

391
3. https://ocw.mit.edu/courses/electrical-engineering-and-computer-science/

Suggested Learning Outcomes

After completion of the subject, the student shall be able to

1.1 List different sources of energy

1.2 Classify the sources of energy into conventional and non-conventional types.
1.3 State the necessity of developing non-conventional methods of power generation.
1.4 State the relative merits and limitations of Conventional and Non-Conventional types
of sources.
1.5 State the method of generating electrical energy from Solar Power
1.6 State the method of generating electrical energy from Tidal Power
1.7 State the method of generating electrical energy from Wind power
1.8 State the method of generating electrical energy from Biomass
1.9 State the method of generating electrical energy from Geo Thermal Power
1.10 State the working principle of thermal power stations.
1.11 List the requirements for setting up of Thermal Power Station.
1.12 Draw the detailed line diagram of a condensing type thermal power station.
1.13 Explain the principle of working of each component of thermal power station.
1.14 Define Pulverization.
1.15 Mention the advantages of Pulverization
1.16 Define Condensation.
1.17 Mention the advantages of Condensation
1.18 State the necessity of cooling towers in thermal power plant
1.19 List the types of cooling towers used in thermal power plants.

2.1 State the principle of working of Hydro power station.

2.2 Mention the requirement and factors for site selection of Hydro Electric Power station.
2.3 Define Hydrograph.
2.4 Classify the Hydro Electric Power stations based upon head.
2.5 Classify the Hydro Electric Power stations based upon duty
2.6 Classify the Hydro Electric Power stations based upon location
2.7 Classify the Hydro Electric Power stations based upon hydraulic considerations.
2.8 Explain the working of High Head Power Station with layout diagram.
2.9 Explain the working of Medium Head Power Station with layout diagram.
2.10 Explain the working of low Head Power Station with layout diagram.
2.11 State the need of Surge Tank.
2.12 State the need of Forebay.
2.13 State the need of Spill gates.
2.14 State the importance of nuclear energy.
2.15 Explain fission reaction.
2.16 Explain fusion reaction.
2.17 State the merits of using nuclear energy
2.18 Mention the various nuclear fuels used in nuclear power station.
2.19 Explain the working of a Nuclear power station with a block diagram.
2.20 State the materials used for coolant.
2.21 State the materials used for Reflector.

392
2.22 State the materials used for control rods.

3.1 State the need of transmission lines.

3.2 State the need of distribution lines.
3.3 Classify transmission systems.
3.4 State the advantages of D.C transmission systems.
3.5 State the advantages of A.C transmission systems.
3.6 State the advantages of Extra high voltage transmission systems.
3.7 Explain the effects of Supply frequency on Transmission lines.
3.8 Explain the effects of Supply voltage on Transmission lines.
3.9 State the effect of voltage on Line efficiency
3.10 State the effect of voltage on Voltage drop.
3.11 State the effect of voltage on Line loss.
3.12 State the effect of voltage on Active & reactive Power.
3.13 State the effect of voltage on Volume of conductor material.
3.14 Explain the concept of HVDC transmission.
3.15 List the types of HVDC transmission.
3.16 List the advantages of HVDC transmission.
3.17 List the disadvantages of HVDC transmission.
3.18 Explain the different types of conductors used in transmission line.
3.19 List various Current distortion effects.
3.20 State Skin effect
3.21 State Proximity effect
3.22 State Spirality effect

4.1 List various transmission line parameters.

4.2 State the expression for inductance of 1 phase system (No Derivation)
4.3 Solve problems on inductance of 1 phase system
4.4 State the expression for the inductance of 3 phase symmetrical round conductor.
(No Derivation)
4.5 Solve problems on the inductance of 3 phase symmetrical round conductor.
4.6 State the expression for the inductance of 3 phase asymmetrically spaced round
Conductors (No derivation)
4.7 Solve problems on the inductance of 3 phase asymmetrically spaced round conductors
4.8 State the expression for capacitance of 1 phase system (No Derivation)
4.9 Solve problems on capacitance of 1 phase system
4.10 State the expression for the capacitance of 3 phase symmetrical round conductor.
(No Derivation)
4.11 Solve problems on the capacitance of 3 phase symmetrical round conductor.
4.12 State the expression for the capacitance of 3 phase asymmetrically spaced round
conductors (No derivation)
4.13 Solve problems on the capacitance of 3 phase asymmetrically spaced round conductors
4.14 Define Short transmission line.
4.15 Define Medium transmission line.
4.16 Define Long transmission line.
4.17 Define Regulation.
4.18 Define Percentage Regulation.
4.19 State the approximate formula for percentage regulation.(no derivation)
4.20 Compute the Sending end voltage for short transmission line

393
4.21 Compute the Sending end Power factor for short transmission line
4.22 Compute the Percentage Regulation for short transmission line
4.23 Draw the phasor diagram
4.24 State `Ferranti' effect
4.25 Define Corona

5.1 State the main components of overhead lines

5.2 State the factors on which the conductor spacing and ground clearance depend
5.3 Define `Sag'
5.4 State the factors affecting the sag
5.5 Derive an equation for the approximate method of calculating sag when the supports
are at the same level in still air.
5.6 Derive an equation for the approximate method of calculating sag when the supports
are at the same level with the effect of wind.
5.7 Derive an equation for the approximate method of calculating sag when the supports
are at the same level with the effect of ice.
5.8 Solve the problems on calculating sag.
5.9 State the disadvantages of loose spans(sag more than prescribed value)
5.10 State the purpose of insulators in transmission and distribution lines
5.11 State the requirements of insulators.
5.12 List various types of Insulators.
5.13 State applications of the Pin type insulators.
5.14 State applications of the Strain type insulators.
5.15 State applications of the Suspension type insulators.
5.16 State applications of the Shackle type insulators.
5.17 Define a Polymer insulator.
5.18 State the advantages of Polymer insulators.
5.19 Derive the voltage across individual disc of a string insulator (upto 3 discs).
5.20 Solve problems on distribution of voltage across string
5.21 Define Flashover.
5.22 Define Puncture.
5.23 Define String-efficiency.
5.24 State the methods of improving string efficiency

6.1 State the need for substations.

6.2 State the relative merits of indoor substation, outdoor substation and Gas insulated
Substations over others.
6.3 List the equipment used in substation.
6.4 State the purpose of the Bus bars.
6.5 State the purpose of the Transformers.
6.6 State the purpose of the Switch gear.
6.7 State the purpose of the Indicating and Metering equipment
6.8 State the purpose of the Protective relays
6.9 State the purpose of the Lightning arrestors
6.10 State the purpose of the Wavetrap.
6.11 Distinguish between primary distribution and secondary distribution.
6.12 State the purpose of Feeder.
6.13 State the purpose of Distributors.
6.14 State the purpose of Service mains.

394
 6.15 Classify the type of distribution systems according to Type of current.
6.16 Classify the type of distribution systems according to Construction.
6.17 Classify the type of distribution systems according to Service.
6.18 Classify the type of distribution systems according to Number of wires.
6.19 Classify the type of distribution systems according to Scheme of connections.
6.20 List the type of distribution systems.
6.21 State the advantages and disadvantages of Radial system
6.22 State the advantages and disadvantages of Ring main system.
6.23 List the steps to calculate the voltage drop in 1-phase A.C. distributors
6.24 Solve problems on voltage drop calculations in A.C. Distributors.
6.25 Solve problems on voltage drop calculations in D.C Distributors.
6.26 Define Micro Grid.
6.27 Explain the concept of smart grid

Suggested Student Activities

1 Student visits Library to refer to Electrical Manuals.

2 Student prepares the models of the power plants
3 Student visits Power generating stations familiarize with the equipment.
4 Visit Power nearby substations and gets familiar with the components.
5 Students may be asked to prepare model project of the power system.
6 Prepare charts on different Generating stations in our state mentioning their locations.
7 Gather information of HVDC transmission projects in India and prepare a report
8 Identify different insulators in your surroundings and prepare a report
9 Watch Youtube videos on SMART GRID and MICRO GRID and prepare a summary report
10 Group discussion.
11 Surprise tests and Quiz.

395
CO-PO Mapping Matrix
Basic knowledge

Engineer and society

Communication

Lifelong learning
Discipline Knowledge

Engineering Tools

Ethics
Environment &
Experiments and

Individual and Team

Linked PO
practice

sustainability

CO\P
work

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO 10
O
CO1 - 3 - - 3 2 2 - - 3 2,5,6,7,10

CO2 - 3 - - 3 2 2 - - 3 2,5,6,7,10

CO3 - 3 - - 3 - - - - 3 2,5,10

CO4 3 3 - - 3 - - - - 3 1,2,5,10

CO5 3 3 - - 3 - 1 - - 3 1,2,5,7,10

CO6 3 3 - - 3 1 2 - - 3 1,2,56,7,10

Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE)

396
Test Units Marks
Mid Sem 1 1 and 2 20
Mid Sem 2 3 and 4 20
Slip Test 1 1 and 2 5
Slip Test 2 3 and 4 5
Assignments - 5
Seminars - 5
Total 60

QUESTION PAPER PATTERN FOR MID SEMESTER EXAMS

Sl.N Descriptio Level No of Marks Choice Total Marks

o n Question for each
s questio
n
01 Part-A Remembering(R) 4 1 Nil 4 Marks
02 Part-B Understanding(U 4 3 2 6 Marks
)
03 Part-C Application(A) 4 5 2 10 Marks
Total Marks 20 Marks

MID SEM-I EXAM

S.No Unit No R U A

5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-I 1,2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-II 3,4
6(b) 8(b)

Total Questions 4 4 4

MID SEM-II EXAM

S.No Unit R U A
No
1 Unit-III 1,2 5(a) 7(a)
5(b) 7(b)
2 Unit-IV 3,4 6(a) 8(a)
6(b) 8(b)
Total Questions 4 4 4

397
 The length of answer for each question framed in respect of Part-A, B&C shall not exceed
¼ of a page side, 1 page side and 2page sides respectively.

QUESTION PAPER PATTERN FOR SEMESTER END EXAM

Marks
No of Total
Sl.N Descriptio for each Choic
Level Question Mark
o n questio e
s s
n
01 Part-A Remembering(R) 8 1 Nil 8 Marks
02 Part-B Understanding(U 8 3 4 12 Marks
)
03 Part-C Application(A) 8 5 4 20 Marks
Total Marks 40 Marks

Questions to be set for SEE

Unit No
R U A
I
Q1 Q9(a) Q13(a)
II
III
Q2 Q10(a) Q14(a)
IV
Q4
Q9(b), Q13(b),
V Q5,Q6
Q11(a), Q11(b) Q15(a), Q15(b)
Q3
Q10(b), Q14(b),
VI Q7,Q8
Q12(a), Q12(b) Q16(a), Q16(b)
Total Questions 8 8 8

398
 STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION & TRAINING, TELANGANA
DIPLOMA IN ELECTRICAL & ELECTRONICS ENGG.
SUB CODE: 18EE-402C
ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS
MID SEM -I EXAM MODEL PAPER
TIME: 1 HOUR TOTAL
MARKS: 20
____________________________________________________________________________
PART – A Marks: 4 X 1=4
Instructions: (1) Answer all questions
(2) Each question carries one mark.

1. List the various sources of Energy .

2. List the types of cooling towers used in Thermal power plant
3. Define Hydrograph
4. State the need of Spill gates

PART - B Marks: 2 x 3 = 6
Instructions: (1) Answer the following questions.
(2) Each question carries three marks.

5a) State the need of Non-conventional Energy Sources 

OR

5b) What is Coal Pulverisation?

6 a) State the importance of nuclear energy

OR
6 b)Write the merits of Nuclear Energy.

PART - C Marks: 2 x 5= 10
Instructions: (1) Answer the following questions.
(2) Each question carries five marks.

7 a) Draw a single line diagram of a Thermal Power station

OR

7 b) State the relative merits and limitations of Conventional and Non-Conventional types of
sources

8 a) Explain the principle of working of Hydro power station.

OR
8 b) Explain the working of High Head Power Station with layout diagram

399
 STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION & TRAINING, TELANGANA
DIPLOMA IN ELECTRICAL & ELECTRONICS ENGG.
SUB CODE: 18EE-402C
ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS
MID SEM –II EXAM MODEL PAPER
TIME: 1 HOUR TOTAL
MARKS: 20
____________________________________________________________________________
PART – A Marks: 4 X 1=4
Instructions: (1) Answer all questions
(2) Each question carries one mark.

1. State the need of transmission lines.

2. List the types of HVDC transmission
3. List various transmission line parameters
4. Define Medium transmission line

PART - B Marks: 2 x 3 = 6
Instructions: (1) Answer the following questions.
(2) Each question carries three marks.

5a) State the advantages of Extra high voltage transmission systems.

OR
5 b) State Skin effect

6 a) State `Ferranti' effect

OR
6 b) Define Percentage Regulation.

PART - C Marks: 2 x 5= 10
Instructions: (1) Answer the following questions.
(2) Each question carries five marks.

7 a) Explain the different types of conductors used in transmission line.

OR
7 b) Explain the concept of HVDC transmission.

8 a) A 3-phase overhead line conductors are arranged in a horizontal plane and are 3 m
apart. The diameter of each conductor is 1cm.Calculate the capacitance per km of each
conductor
OR
8 b) A single phase transmission line has a resistance of 0.20 ohms and an inductive
reactance of 0.40 ohm. Find the voltage at the sending end to give 500KVA at 2kV at
the receiving end at load power factor of 0.707 lagging

400
 18EE-402C
STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION & TRAINING, TELANGANA
DIPLOMA IN ELECTRICAL & ELECTRONICS ENGG.
SUB CODE: 18EE-402C
ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS
SEMESTER END EXAM MODEL PAPER
TIME: 2 HOURS TOTAL
MARKS: 40
_____________________________________________________________________________

PART – A
Instructions: (1) Answer all questions
(2) Each question carries one mark. Marks: 8 X 1 = 8

1. Define Hydrograph.
2. List the types of HVDC transmission.
3 .Define `sag'
4. List the transmission line parameters.
5. Define Flashover.
6. Define a Polymer insulator.
7. State the need for substations.
8. State the purpose of Feeder.
PART - B

Instructions: (1) Answer the following questions

(2) Each question carries three marks. Marks: 4 X 3 = 12

9a) State the relative merits and limitations of Conventional and Non-Conventional types of
sources
OR

9 b) State the requirements of insulators

10a) State the expression for the inductance of 3 phase symmetrical round conductor.

OR

10b) State the purpose of the Lightning arrestors

11a) State the purpose of insulators in transmission and distribution lines

OR

401
11b) State the disadvantages of loose spans.

12 a) State the purpose of the Indicating and Metering equipment

OR

12 b) Distinguish between primary distribution and secondary distribution

PART - C

Instructions: (1) Answer the following questions

(2) Each question carries five marks. Marks: 4 X 5 = 20

13a) Explain the principle of working of each component of thermal power station.
OR

13 (b) State the requirements of insulators and give the list of insulators

14 a) A single phase transmission line has a resistance of 0.20 ohms and an inductive reactance
of 0.40 ohm.Find the voltage at the sending end to give 500KVA at 2kV at the receiving end
at load power factor of 0.707 lagging

OR

14 b) Explain the concept of smart GRID

15a) Derive an equation for the approximate method of calculating sag when the supports
are at the same level with the effect of ice

OR

15 b) An insulator string consists of 3 units each having a safe working voltage of 15kV. The
ratio of self-capacitive to shunt capacitive of each unit is 8 1 : . Find the maximum safe working
voltage of the string and string efficiency

16 a) Explain Feeder, distributors and service mains

OR

16 b) A single phase a.c distributor AB 300 meters long is fed from end A and is loaded as under
(i) 100 Amps at 0.707 p.f lagging 200 meters from point A (ii) 200 amps at 0.8 p.f lagging 300
meters from point A. The total resistance and the reactance of the distributor is 0.2 ohms and 0.1
ohms per km respectively. Calculate the total voltage drop in the distributor. The load power
factors refer to the voltage at the far end

402
 AC MACHINES

Course Title : AC Machines Course Code : 18EE-403C

Semester : IV Course Group : Core
Teaching Scheme in Periods : 45:15:0 Credits :3
(L:T:P)
Methodology : Lecture + Tutorial Total Contact Periods :60
CIE : 60 Marks SEE : 40 Marks
(Continuous Internal Evaluation) (Semester End Examination)

Pre requisites

This course requires the basic knowledge of electromagnetic circuits, and physical forces induced in
conductors.

Course Outcomes
CO1 : Describe the construction and working of single phase transformer

CO2 : Determine the Equivalent circuit parameters of a single phase transformer

CO3 : Evaluate the performance of single phase transformers
CO4 : Describe the construction of three phase transformers and their applications
CO5 : Analyze the behavior of alternators
CO6 : To be familiar with the working of single phase transformer

Blue Print of Marks for SEE

Unit Unit Name Periods Questions to be set for SEE
No R U A
1 Fundamentals of single
8
phase transformers
Q1 Q9(a) Q13(a)
2 Tests on single phase
12
transformers
3 Performance of single
10
phase transformers Q2 Q10(a) Q14(a)
Q4
4 Three phase transformers 10
5 Alternators Q9(b), Q13(b),
12 Q5,Q6
Q11(a), Q11(b) Q15(a), Q15(b)
Q3
6 Operation of alternators Q10(b), Q14(b),
8 Q7,Q8
Q12(a), Q12(b) Q16(a), Q16(b)
Total 60 8 8 8

Course Content

403
UNIT 1 : Fundamentals of single phase Transformer Duration: 8 Periods (L: 6 - T: 2)

Introduction to transformer-Classifications of transformers,-Construction of transformers-Theory of an

ideal transformer –EMF equation derivation –Problems on calculation of EMF-Transformer ratio-
Special transformers- expression for copper saving –applications

UNIT 2 :Tests on single phase transformers Duration: 12 Periods (L:9 - T:3)

Working of Transformer on no load – Vector Diagram –Working of Transformer on load – Vector

Diagram-Equivalent circuit of transformer-Short circuit test-Open circuit test-Determination of Equivalent
circuit parameters-Problems – Sumpner’s test

UNIT 3 Performance of single phase transformers Duration: 10 Periods (L: 7.5 - T: 2.5)

Regulation-Derivation of approximate equation for regulation based on vector diagram for lagging, leading,
unity power factor – Numerical problems on regulation-efficiency- condition for maximum efficiency –
problems on efficiency- Calculation of all day efficiency for a given load cycle- problems on all day
efficiency

UNIT 4 Three Phase Transformers Duration: 10 Periods (L: 7.5 - T:2.5)

Three Phase Transformers-Construction-Different transformer configurations-Applications of different

transformer configurations-parallel operation -Tap changing gear - NO load and ON load tap changing
procedure- Applications of three phase transformers

UNIT 5 Alternators Duration: 12 Periods (L:9 - T: 3)

Alternators –Types of alternators – Brief description of parts with sketches and function of each part,
construction- Specifications-Assembly - Exciter and pilot exciter - Stationary armature type construction -
Advantages, Concentrated and distributed windings - short pitch and full pitch coils - Effect of chording
and distribution factors - EMF equation - Derivation – Problems- phasor diagram for unity, lagging and
leading power factor loads – permanent magnet synchronous generator

UNIT 6 Operation of alternators Duration: 8 Periods (L: 6 – T: 2)

Regulation – Different methods of finding regulation- Calculation of regulation by synchronous impedance

method- Necessity for parallel operation –Condition to be fulfilled for Synchronization,-Synchronisation by
lamp methods – Procedure to connect a Diesel Engine generator to the supply mains –Load sharing –
simple problems-Effect of change in excitation and input of an alternator connected to infinite bus.

Recommended Books

1. B.L. Theraja-Electrical Technology – Vol –II S.Chand& Co.

2. M.G Say –AC machines
3. P.S. Bhimbra–Electrical machines – Khanna Publishers
4. A.E. Fritzgerald, C. Kingsley and S. Umans Electrical machinery-McGraw Hill
5. MV Deshpande-Electric machines – Wheeler publishing.
6. BR Gupta and VandanaSinghal– Fundamentals of Electric machines

Suggested E-Learning references

404
 1. http://electrical4u.com/
2. www.nptel.ac.in
3. https://www.siemens.com/content/dam/internet/siemens-com/global/products-services

Suggested
After Learning
completion Outcomes
of the subject, the student shall be able to

1.1 Define the word ‘Transformer’

1.2 Explain the working principle of single-phase transformer.
1.3 State the reason for not operating transformer on DC Supply
1.4 Classify the transformers based on Number of phases
1.5 Classify the transformers based on Construction
1.6 Classify the transformers based on Function
1.7 Explain the constructional details of transformers.
1.8 State the purpose and function of each part of the transformer with legible sketch.
1.9 Explain about core type transformer
1.10 Explain about the shell type transformer.
1.11 Distinguish between core type and shell type transformers.
1.12 Define an Ideal Transformer
1.13 Derive the E.M.F equation of a single phase transformer.
1.14 Solve problems on EMF equation
1.15 Define Turns Ratio of transformer
1.16 Define Voltage transformation Ratio of transformer
1.17 Define Current transformation Ratio of transformer
1.18 List the special transformers used in industry.
1.19 Define an Auto transformer
1.20 Derive the expression for saving of copper in auto transformer
1.21 State the advantages of autotransformers
1.22 State the disadvantages of autotransformers
1.23 List the applications of transformers

2.1 Explain working of transformer at No-Load with the help of its vector diagram.
2.2 Explain working of transformer at Load with the help of vector diagram for Unity power factor
2.3 Explain working of transformer at Load with the help of vector diagram for Lagging power factor
2.4 Explain working of transformer at Load with the help of vector diagram for leading power factor
2.5 State the losses taking place in a transformer.
2.6 State the effects of resistance and leakage reactance of primary and secondary windings.
2.7 State the significance of air gap
2.8 Draw the equivalent circuit of a transformer by approximation
2.9 Explain the procedure to find equivalent circuit parameters from No-load test on single phase
transformer
2.10 Explain the procedure to find equivalent circuit parameters from short circuit test on single phase
transformer
2.11 Problems on the computing the equivalent circuit parameters of a single phase transformer
2.12 Explain the procedure of conducting polarity test on single-phase transformer.
2.13 Explain the procedure of conducting Sumpner's test on a transformer
2.14 State the necessity of break down voltage test on transformer oil

405
 3.1. Define Regulation
3.2. Derive the approximate equation of regulation for transformer.
3.3. Solve the problems to calculate the regulation of a single phase transformer for loads with unity
power factor
3.4. Solve the problems to calculate the regulation of a single phase transformer for loads with lagging
power factor
3.5. Solve the problems to calculate the regulation of a single phase transformer for loads with leading
power factor
3.6. State the reason for using the unit KVA for the transformer rating
3.7. Derive efficiency of a single phase transformer
3.8. Find the condition for maximum efficiency of a single phase transformer
3.9. Compute numerical problems for calculating the efficiency of the transformer
3.10. Define all day efficiency
3.11. Solve numerical problems for calculating all day efficiency
3.12. Define Distribution transformer
3.13. Define Power Transformer
3.14. Differentiate between distribution transformer and power transformer.
3.15. Mention the reasons for failures of a transformer
3.16. State the reasons for humming noise near a transformer and the methods to reduce the noise level.

4.1. State the advantages of 3 phase transformer over single phase transformer
4.2. List the different types of three phase transformers by giving their symbolic representation and
voltage relationships.
4.3. State the applications of star-star transformer
4.4. Mention the applications of delta-star transformers
4.5. List the applications of star-delta transformers
4.6. State the applications of delta-delta transformers
4.7. State the need for parallel operation of transformer.
4.8. Mention the specifications of a transformer
4.9. State the Benefits for use of amorphous core in a transformer
4.10. Mention the conditions for parallel operation and load sharing of transformers.
4.11. State the necessity of cooling of power transformers.
4.12. Explain the methods of cooling of power transformer.
4.13. Draw a legible sketch of a power transformer
4.14. Explain the function of each part of a power transformer.
4.15. Explain the ‘ON load’ and ‘OFF load’ tap changing.
4.16. Explain the procedure for tap changing on load and no load tap changer
4.17. Mention the purpose of application of a transformer as phase shifter
4.18. State the purpose of application of a transformer as reactor
4.19. Mention the purpose of application of a transformer as HVDC Transformer
4.20. State the purpose of application of a transformer as traction transformer

5.1. Explain the Principle of working of Alternators

5.2. Describe the constructional details of Alternators with legible sketch.
5.3. Classify the alternators based on rotor construction
5.4. Explain the construction and working of Cylindrical rotor alternator
5.5. Explain the construction and working of salient pole rotor alternator
5.6. State the specifications of an alternator
5.7. State the advantage of Stationary Armature.

406
 5.8. List the main parts of alternator
5.9. Mention the materials used for different parts of an alternator
5.10. Derive the expression for Chording factor
5.11. State the effect of chording factor
5.12. Derive the expression for Distribution factor
5.13. State the effect of Distribution factor
5.14. Derive EMF equation of an alternator taking into account distribution factor and pitch factor.
5.15. Solve simple problems on EMF equation
5.16. State the need for an exciter in an Alternator.
5.17. List the various types of exciters
5.18. Explain armature reaction of Alternator at different power factors
5.19. State the reasons for voltage variations on Load.
5.20. Define the term synchronous impedance.
5.21. State the effects of synchronous impedance on the operation of the Alternator
5.22. Draw the equivalent circuit representing armature resistance, leakage reactance and armature
reaction reactance
5.23. Obtain the relation between No load EMF and terminal voltage in Alternator.
5.24. Draw the vector diagram for No load EMF in alternator at different load power factors
5.25. Describe the construction and working of permanent magnet synchronous generator
5.26. List the applications of permanent magnet synchronous generator

6.1. Define regulation of an alternator.

6.2. List the different methods of finding the regulation of alternator.

6.3. Calculate the regulation by synchronous impedance method.

6.4. State the expressions for No load emf of alternator at different powerfactors
6.5. Solve problems on Synchronous impedance method.
6.6. Explain the necessity for parallel operation of three phase alternators
6.7. State the conditions for synchronization for three phase alternator
6.8. Define synchronization of alternators
6.9. List the methods of synchronization of alternators
6.10. Explain the procedure for synchronization of alternators by using Dark and Bright lamp
method
6.11. Explain the procedure for synchronization of alternators by using Synchroscope
6.12. Describe the procedure to connect a Diesel Engine generator to the supply mains
6.13. Explain the method for adjusting the loads shared by two alternators (or one alternator with
Infinite bus bar).
6.14. Explain the effect of change in input and excitation of an alternator connected to infinite bus.
6.15. Solve problems on load sharing.

Suggested Student Activities

1 Prepare charts on types of transformers clearly labeling the parts.

2 Visit nearby transformer in your surroundings and prepare a report on the observations made
during visit along with photos.

407
 3 Visit the transformer manufacturing unit and prepare a report
4 Prepare a report on different transformers available in your Institute.
5 Do the maintenance of 50MVA transformer
6 Make charts of various transformer configurations
7 Quiz
8 Group discussion
9 Surprise test.

CO-PO Mapping Matrix

Basic knowledge

Engineer and society

Communication

Lifelong learning
Discipline Knowledge

Engineering Tools

Ethics
Environment &
Experiments and

Individual and Team

Linked PO
practice

CO\P sustainability

work
PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO 10
O
CO1 2 3 - - 1 - - - - 3 1, 2, 5,10
1,2, 5, 7,
CO2 2 3 - - 1 - 2 - - 3
10
CO3 3 3 - - - - 2 - - 3 1, 2, 7,10
CO4 - 3 - - 1 - - - - 3 2, 5, 10
CO5 3 3 - - 1 - - - - 3 1, 2, 5,10
1,2, 5, 7,
CO6 3 3 - - 2 - 2 - - 3
10

Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE)

Test Units Marks

Mid Sem 1 1 and 2 20
Mid Sem 2 3 and 4 20
Slip Test 1 1 and 2 5
Slip Test 2 3 and 4 5
Assignments - 5
Seminars - 5
Total 60
QUESTION PAPER PATTERN FOR MID SEMESTER EXAMS

Sl.No Description Level No of Marks for Choice Total Marks

Questions each
question

408
 0 Part-A Remembering(R) 4 1 Nil 4 Marks
1
0 Part-B Understanding(U) 4 3 2 6 Marks
2
0 Part-C Application(A) 4 5 2 10
3 Marks
Total Marks 20
Marks

MID SEM-I EXAM

S.No Unit No R U A

5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-I 1,2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-II 3,4
6(b) 8(b)

Total Questions 4 4 4

MID SEM-II EXAM

S.No Unit R U A
No
1 Unit-III 1,2 5(a) 7(a)
5(b) 7(b)
2 Unit-IV 3,4 6(a) 8(a)
6(b) 8(b)
Total Questions 4 4 4

The length of answer for each question framed in respect of Part-A, B&C shall not exceed
¼ of a page side, 1 page side and 2page sides respectively.

QUESTION PAPER PATTERN FOR SEMESTER END EXAM

Marks for Total

Sl.N No of
Description Level each Choice Mark
o Questions
question s

409
 01 Part-A Remembering(R) 8 1 Nil 8 Marks
02 Part-B Understanding(U) 8 3 4 12 Marks
03 Part-C Application(A) 8 5 4 20 Marks
Total Marks 40 Marks

Questions to be set for SEE

Unit No
R U A
I
Q1 Q9(a) Q13(a)
II
III
Q2 Q10(a) Q14(a)
IV
Q4
Q9(b), Q13(b),
V Q5,Q6
Q11(a), Q11(b) Q15(a), Q15(b)
Q3
Q10(b), Q14(b),
VI Q7,Q8
Q12(a), Q12(b) Q16(a), Q16(b)
Total Questions 8 8 8

STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION & TRAINING, TELANGANA

DIPLOMA IN ELECTRICAL & ELECTRONICS ENGG.
SUB CODE: 18EE-403C
AC MACHINES
MID SEM -I EXAM MODEL PAPER
TIME: 1 HOUR TOTAL MARKS: 20
____________________________________________________________________________
PART – A Marks: 4 X 1=4
Instructions: (1) Answer all questions
(2) Each question carries one mark.

1. Define Transformer.
2. Define Turns Ratio in transformer
3. Draw the vector diagram of a transformer on NO load
4. List the losses taking place in a transformer

PART - B Marks: 2 x 3 = 6

410
 Instructions: (1) Answer the following questions.
(2) Each question carries three marks.

5a) A single phase transformer has 400 turns on the primary winding and 1000 turns on the
secondary winding.If it is operating at 50Hz supply with a maximum flux of 0.045wb find (i)
the primary and secondary induced emf
 
OR

5 b) What are the advantages of an Auto transformer

6 a) Draw the equivalent circuit of a transformer by approximation

OR
6 b)State the significance of airgap

PART - C Marks: 2 x 5= 10
Instructions: (1) Answer the following questions.
(2) Each question carries five marks.

7 a) Distinguish between core type and shell type transformers.

OR

7 b) Explain the function of each part of the transformer .

8 a) Explain working of transformer at Load with the help of vector diagram for Unity
power factor

OR
8 b) The resistances and leakage reactance’s of a 30 kVA, 2400 V/240 V distribution
transformer are R1 = 0.68 Ω; R2 = 0.0068 Ω; X l =7.8 Ω ; X l =0.0780 Ω;
1 2

Where subscript 1 denotes the 2400 V winding and subscript 2 denotes the 240 V winding.
Each quantity is referred to its own side of the transformer.Draw the equivalent circuit
referred to High Voltage side
STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION & TRAINING, TELANGANA
DIPLOMA IN ELECTRICAL & ELECTRONICS ENGG.
SUB CODE: 18EE-403C
AC MACHINES
MID SEM –II EXAM MODEL PAPER
TIME: 1 HOUR TOTAL MARKS:
20
____________________________________________________________________________
PART – A Marks: 4 X 1=4
Instructions: (1) Answer all questions
(2) Each question carries one mark.

1. Define Regulation
2. Define All Day Efficiency
3. State the applications of star-star transformer
4. State the necessity of cooling of power transformers

411
 PART - B Marks: 2 x 3 = 6
Instructions: (1) Answer the following questions.
(2) Each question carries three marks.

5a) State the reason for using the unit KVA for the transformer rating

OR
5 b) State the reasons for humming noise near a transformer

6 a) State the advantages of 3 phase transformer over bank of three single phase transformers

OR
6 b) State the need for parallel operation of a transformer
.

PART - C Marks: 2 x 5= 10
Instructions: (1) Answer the following questions.
(2) Each question carries five marks.

7a) Differentiate between distribution transformer and power transformer.

OR
7 b) A 500KVA ,6000/400 V ,1-ϕ transformer has a primary and secondary winding
resistances of 0.4Ω and 0.0015Ω respectively. The Iron losses are 3.2KW ,Calculate the
efficiency of transformer on full load assuming the p.f of the load to be 0.8 lagging

8 a) Explain the OFF load tap changing method on a transformer

OR
8 b) Explain the methods of cooling of power transformer.

18EE-403C
STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION & TRAINING, TELANGANA
DIPLOMA IN ELECTRICAL & ELECTRONICS ENGG.
SUB CODE: 18EE-403C
AC MACHINES
SEMESTER END EXAM MODEL PAPER
TIME: 2 HOURS TOTAL
MARKS: 40
_____________________________________________________________________________

PART – A
Instructions: (1) Answer all questions
(2) Each question carries one mark. Marks: 8 X 1 = 8

412
1. List the applications of transformers
2. Define Regulation

3. List the main parts of alternator

4. State the need for parallel operation of a transformer
5.State the specifications of an alternator
6. List the types of exciters
7. Define regulation of an alternator.
8. List the different methods of finding the regulation of alternator

PART - B

Instructions: (1) Answer the following questions

(2) Each question carries three marks. Marks: 4 X 3 = 12

9a) State the losses taking place in a transformer

OR

9b) Calculate the e.m.f induced per phase in a 3-ϕ ,8-pole ,50 Hz star connected alternator .The
stator has 160 slots and 6 conductors per slot. Assume K p=1 and Kd=0.96.The flux per pole is
0.16 wb

10a) State the advantages of three phase transformers over bank of three single phase
transformers

OR

10b) Explain the effect of change in input and excitation of an alternator connected to infinite
bus

11a) Classify the alternators based on rotor construction

OR

11b) State the advantage of Stationary Armature.

12a) State the conditions for synchronization for three phase alternator

OR

12 b) Explain the necessity for parallel operation of three phase alternators

413
 PART - C

Instructions: (1) Answer the following questions

(2) Each question carries five marks. Marks: 4 X 5 = 20

13a) Derive the E.M.F equation of a single phase transformer.

OR

13 (b) Derive the expression for Chording factor

14 a) Explain the function of each part of a power transformer

OR

14b) Two alternators working in parallel have induced emf’s on open circuit of 230 ∠ 0 ° and
230 ∠ 10 °and having reactances of j2 Ω and j3 Ω respectively. Calculate
a. Terminal voltage
b. Power delivered by each of the alternators to a resistive load of 6 Ω.
Neglect alternator resistances

15a) Obtain the relation between No load EMF and terminal voltage in Alternator at leading
powerfactor.
OR

15 b. Explain armature reaction of Alternator at different power factors

16a) Explain the procedure of synchronising of alternators by using synchroscope method

OR

16 b) A 200 kVA, 415 V, 50 Hz, 3-ø alternator has effective armature resistance of 0.01 Ω and an
armature leakage reactance of 0.05 Ω. Compute the voltage induced in the armature winding
when the alternator is delivering rated current at a load pf of 0.8 lag and 0.8 lead

GENERAL MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Course Title : General Mechanical Engineering Course Code : 18EE-404C
Semester : IV Course Group : Core
Teaching Scheme in Periods : 45:15:0 Credits :3
(L:T:P)
Methodology : Lecture + Tutorial Total Contact Periods :60
CIE : 60 Marks SEE : 40 Marks
(Continuous Internal Evaluation) (Semester End Examination)

Pre requisites
414
This course requires the basic knowledge of basic sciences at secondary school level

Course Outcomes
CO1 Solve simple problems on stresses, strains

CO2 Solve simple problems on torsion in shafts

CO3 Explain the Construction and working of IC Engines.

CO4 Describe the working of Boilers

CO5 Describe the construction and working of Turbines
CO6 Compare various types of Pumps

Blue Print of Marks for SEE

Unit Unit Name Periods Questions to be set for SEE

No R U A

1 Simple Stresses & Strains 10 Q4

Q1 Q9(a) Q13(a)
2 Torsion in Shafts 10

3 I.C Engines 12 Q2 Q10(a) Q14(a)

415
4 Boilers 8

5 Turbines 10 Q9(b), Q13(b),

Q5,Q6
Q11(a), Q11(b) Q15(a), Q15(b)
Q3
6 Pumps & Lubricants 10 Q10(b), Q14(b),
Q7,Q8
Q12(a), Q12(b) Q16(a), Q16(b)

Total 60 8 8 8

Course Content

UNIT-1 Simple Stresses & Strains Duration: Periods 10(L: 8 – T:2)

Stress – strain - Poisson’s ratio - elastic limit - statement of Hooke’s law - stress-strain diagram with
salient features for ductile materials under tensile stress - Elastic moduli - Young’s modulus - Modulus of
rigidity, - Bulk modulus - Working stress - Ultimate stress - Factor of safety. Simple problems

UNIT-2 Torsion in Shafts Duration: Periods 10(L: 8 – T: 2)

Classification of shafts - Function of shafts - Polar moment of inertia of shafts - Torsion equation,
maximum torque - power transmitted by the shaft - design of shaft based on strength and rigidity - Simple
problems on shafts.

UNIT-3 I.C Engines Duration: Periods 12 (L: 9 – T: 3)

I.C Engines - classification of heat engines and I.C engines - Comparison between petrol and diesel engine -
Functions of carburetor, fuel injection pump, governing of I.C engines.

UNIT-4 Boilers Duration: Periods 8 (L:6– T: 2)

Boilers - Classification of boilers - Boiler mountings- Boiler accessories

UNIT-5 Turbines Duration: Periods 10(L: 7.5 – T: 2.5)

Steam turbine - comparison between impulse and reaction turbines - classification of hydraulic turbines

416
UNIT-6 Pumps & Lubricants Duration: Periods 10 (L: 7.5 – T: 2.5)

Hydraulic pumps – classification - comparison between various pumps -lubricants - properties ,types,
examples and their applications

Recommended Books

1. Strength of materials by Ramamrutham

2. Strength of materials by ZakaraiaBaig
2. Strength of materials by Surender Singh
3. Strength of materials by S.B.Junarker
4. General Mechanical Engineering by Lakshminarayana
5. General Mechanical Engineering by GopalaKrishna
6. Hydraulic Machinery by Jagadishalal
7. Strength of Materials by R.S. Kurmi

Suggested E-Learning references

1. www.learn engineering.org
2. www.nptel.ac.in
3. www.onlinestudies.com

Suggested Learning Outcomes

After completion of the subject, the student shall be able to

1.1. Define stress

1.2. Define strain
1.3. Mention the different types of stresses.
1.4. Mention the different types of strains.
1.5. State Hooke’s law
1.6. Define Modulus of elasticity
1.7. Draw typical stress-strain curve for an M S Specimen under tension
1.8. Define factor of safety
1.9. Define Poisson’s ratio
1.10. State the relationship between elastic constants.
1.11. Calculate the dimensional changes in the bodies of uniform circular cross section subjected to
tensile and compressive forces
1.12. Solve simple problems on Stress.
1.13. Solve simple problems on Strain.
1.14. Solve simple problems on Poisson’s ratio.
1.15. Solve simple problems on calculation of the dimensional changes in the bodies of uniform
circular cross section subjected to tensile and compressive forces.

2.1. State the function of shafts.

417
2.2. Classify shafts.
2.3. Specify the standard sizes of shafts.
2.4. Define Polar moment of inertia
2.5. Give the expression for Polar moment of inertia of solid shaft.
2.6. Give the expression for Polar moment of inertia of hollow shaft.
2.7. Explain the terms involved in simple torsion equation.
2.8. Maximum torque transmitted and power transmitted.
2.9. Design the size of solid shaft-Strength point of view and stiffness point of view
2.10. Simple problems.

3.1. Define I.C. Engine.

3.2. Classify heat engine.
3.3. Mention types of I.C engines.
3.4. Explain the construction of I.C. Engines.
3.5. Identify the various parts of Diesel engine and Petrol engine.
3.6. Explain the principle of 4-stroke diesel engine.
3.7. Explain the principle of 4-stroke petrol engine.
3.8. Explain the principle of 2-stroke diesel engine.
3.9. Explain the principle of 2-stroke petrol engine.
3.10. Distinguish between 4-stroke cycle and 2-stroke cycles.
3.11. Distinguish between diesel engine and petrol engine.
3.12. State the function of carburettor.
3.13. State the functions of fuel pump.
3.14. State the functions of Governor.

4.1. Explain the function of a boiler.

4.2. Classification of boilers.
4.3. Compare fire tube boiler with water tube boiler.
4.4. Explain construction and working principle of simple vertical boiler.
4.5. Describe construction and working principle of Cochran boiler.
4.6. Explain construction and working principle of Lancashire boiler.
4.7. Describe construction and working principle of Babcock and Wilcox boiler.
4.8. Explain construction and working principle of Benson boiler
4.9. Describe Lamont boiler with a neat sketch.
4.10. List different mountings of a boiler.
4.11. Mention the necessity of Water level indicator
4.12. Write the necessity of Pressure gauge.
4.13. State the necessity of Stop valve
4.14. Mention the necessity of Feed check valve.
4.15. Write the necessity of Safety valve.
4.16. State the necessity of Fusible plug.
4.17. Explain the working principle of Super heater.
4.18. Describe the working principle of Super heater.
4.19. Explain the working principle of Air pre heater.

5.1. Define turbine.

418
 5.2. Explain the principle of working of a steam turbine.
5.3. Classify the turbine based on action of steam.
5.4. Explain the working principle of impulse turbine
5.5. Explain the working principle of Reaction turbine
5.6. Compare impulse turbine with reaction turbine.
5.7. Describe the working principle of the De Level and Parson’s reaction turbines.
5.8. Classify the water turbines.
5.9. Explain the construction and working of Pelton wheel.
5.10. Explain the construction and working of Francis turbine
5.11. Explain the construction and working of Kaplan turbine
5.12. Compare Pelton wheel, Francis turbine and Kaplan turbine

6.1. Define Pump

6.2. Differences between a centrifugal pump and a reciprocating pump
6.3. Explain the principle of operation of centrifugal pump.
6.4. Explain the constructional details of centrifugal pump.
6.5. Describe working principle and construction of double stage reciprocating pump.
6.6. Explain the principle of jet pump and submersible pump.
6.7. State the purpose of lubrication.
6.8. State the properties of a lubricant
6.9. List the types of lubricants with examples.
6.10. Mention the application of lubricants.

Suggested Student Activities

1. Prepare a chart for the various Formulae used.

2. Draw the constructional features of an I.C Engine, types of turbines and pumps.
3. Sketch the layout of a steam generation plant.
4. Quiz
5. A visit to nearby power plant station to identify motors, pumps.

CO-PO Mapping Matrix

Communication

Lifelong learning
Basic knowledge

Discipline Knowledge

Engineering Tools

Ethics
Engineer and society

Environment &
Experiments and

Individual and Team

Linked PO
practice

sustainability

CO\P
work

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO 10
O

419
CO1 2 3 - - 2 - - - - 3 1,2,5,10

CO2 2 3 - - 3 - - - - 3 1,2,5,10

CO3 - 3 - - 3 1 - - - 3 2,5,6,10

CO4 - 3 - - 3 1 - - - 3 2,5,6,10

CO5 - 3 - - 3 1 - - - 3 2,5,6,10

CO6 - 3 - - 3 - - - - 3 2,5,10

Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE)

Test Units Marks

Mid Sem 1 1 and 2 20
Mid Sem 2 3 and 4 20
Slip Test 1 1 and 2 5
Slip Test 2 3 and 4 5
Assignments - 5
Seminars - 5
Total 60

QUESTION PAPER PATTERN FOR MID SEMESTER EXAMS

Sl.No Description Level No of Marks for Choice Total Marks

Questions each
question

0 Part-A Remembering(R) 4 1 Nil 4 Marks

1
0 Part-B Understanding(U) 4 3 2 6 Marks
2
0 Part-C Application(A) 4 5 2 10
3 Marks
Total Marks 20
Marks

MID SEM-I EXAM

S.No Unit No R U A

5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-I 1,2
5(b) 7(b)

420
 6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-II 3,4
6(b) 8(b)

Total Questions 4 4 4

MID SEM-II EXAM

S.No Unit R U A
No
1 Unit-III 1,2 5(a) 7(a)
5(b) 7(b)
2 Unit-IV 3,4 6(a) 8(a)
6(b) 8(b)
Total Questions 4 4 4

The length of answer for each question framed in respect of Part-A, B&C shall not exceed
¼ of a page side, 1 page side and 2page sides respectively.

421
 QUESTION PAPER PATTERN FOR SEMESTER END EXAM

Marks for Total

No of
Sl.No Description Level each Choice Mark
Questions
question s

01 Part-A Remembering(R) 8 1 Nil 8 Marks

02 Part-B Understanding(U) 8 3 4 12 Marks

03 Part-C Application(A) 8 5 4 20 Marks

Total Marks 40 Marks

Questions to be set for SEE

Unit No
R U A

I
Q1 Q9(a) Q13(a)
II

III
Q2 Q10(a) Q14(a)
IV
Q4
Q9(b), Q13(b)
V Q5,Q6
Q11(a), Q11(b) Q15(a), Q15(b)
Q3
Q10(b), Q14(b)
VI Q7,Q8
Q12(a), Q12(b) Q16(a), Q16(b)

Total Questions 8 8 8

State Board of Technical Education and Training,Telangana

Model Question paper
DEEE IV semester Mid Semester-I Examination

Corse Code:18EE-404C Duration:1 hour

Course Name: General Mechanical Engineering Max.Marks:20

422
 PART-A
Answer all questions, Each Question carries one mark 4x1 = 4 Marks

1. State Hooke’s law

2. Define Poisson’s ratio
3. State the function of shafts
4. Give the expression for Polar moment of inertia of solid shaft

PART-B
Answer two questions. Each question carries three marks 2x 3 = 6 Marks

5. a) Define factor of safety

OR

b) Define Modulus of elasticity

6. a) Classify shafts.

OR

b) Give the expression for Polar moment of inertia of hollow shaft.

PART-C
Answer two questions. Each question carries five marks 2x 5 = 10 Marks

7. a) State the relationship between elastic constants

OR

b) Draw typical stress-strain curve for an M S Specimen under tension.

8. a) Explain the terms involved in simple torsion equation.

OR

c) Design the size of solid shaft from strength point of view.

State Board of Technical Education and Training,Telangana

Model Question paper
DEEE IV semester Mid Semester-II Examination

Corse Code:18EE-404C Duration:1 hour

Course Name: General Mechanical Engineering Max.Marks:20

423
 PART-A
Answer all questions, Each Question carries one mark 4x1 = 4 Marks

1. Define I.C. Engine

2. State the functions of fuel pump in an IC engine
3. State the necessity of boiler water level indicator
4. State the function of superheater

PART-B
Answer two questions. Each question carries three marks 2x 3 = 6 Marks

5. a) Classify heat engine

OR

b) State the functions of carburetor in an IC engine

6. a) Classify boilers.

OR

b) Compare fire tube boilers and water tube boilers in any three aspects.

PART-C
Answer two questions. Each question carries five marks 2x 5 = 10 Marks

7. a) Explain the construction of I.C. Engines

OR

b) Distinguish between diesel engine and petrol engine in any five aspects.

8. a) Explain the operation of Lamont boiler with a neat sketch.

OR

b) Explain the operation of Benson boiler with a neat sketch.

State Board of Technical Education and Training, Telangana

Model Question paper
DEEE IV semester
Semester End Examination

Corse Code: 18EE-404C Duration:2 hours

Course Name: General Mechanical Engineering Max.Marks:40Marks

424
 PART-A
Answer all questions 8x1 =8 Marks

1) State Hooke’s law

2) State the function of economizer
3) State the purpose of lubrication
4) Define IC engine
5) Classify turbines based on action of steam
6) Classify water turbines
7) State the desirable properties of lubricants
8) List the types of lubricants

PART-B
Answer four questions 4 x 3 = 12
Marks

9) a) Mention different types of stresses

OR

c) Compare impulse turbine and reaction turbine in any three aspects.

10 a) State the function of speed governor in an IC engine.

OR

b) List the applications of lubricants.

11 a) Compare impulse turbine and reaction turbine in any three aspects.

OR

b) State the working principle of steam turbine.

12 a) Classify hydraulic turbines.

OR

b) Compare centrifugal pump and reciprocating pump in any three aspects.

PART - C

Instructions: (1) Answer the following questions

(2) Each question carries five marks. Marks: 4 X 5 = 20

13 a) Draw typical stress-strain curve for an M S Specimen under tension

425
 OR

c) Explain the working of Parson’s reaction turbine with a neat sketch.

14 a) Explain the working of four stroke diesel engine with a neat sketch.

OR

b) Explain the principle of operation of centrifugal pump.

15 a) Explain the working principle of Pelton wheel

OR

b)  Explain the working principle of Kaplan turbine

16 a) Explain the principle of operation of jet pump.

OR

b) Distinguish between a centrifugal pump and a reciprocating pump in any five aspects.

DIGITAL ELECTRONICS

Course Title : Digital Electronics Course Code : 18EE-405C

Semester : IV Course Group : Core
Teaching Scheme in Periods : 45:15:0 Credits :3
(L:T:P)

426
Methodology : Lecture + Tutorial Total Contact Periods :60
CIE : 60 Marks SEE : 40 Marks
(Continuous Internal Evaluation) (Semester End Examination)

Pre requisites

The student should have a basic knowledge of Science and Mathematics in Secondary Education and
knowledge of basics of Electrical Engineering and Analog Electronics.

Course Outcomes
CO1 : Perform Data conversion between basic Numbering systems

CO2 : Apply Boolean theorems to minimize digital circuits.

CO3 : Design Combinational Logic circuits using logic gates.
CO4 : Construct flip-flop circuits.
CO5 : Construct counters and shift registers.
CO6 : Perform A/D and D/A Conversion

Blue Print of Marks for SEE

Unit Unit Name Periods Questions to be set for SEE
No R U A
1 Number Systems 08
2 Boolean Algebra and Q1 Q9(a) Q13(a)
12
Logic Gates
3 Combinational circuits 12
4 Basics of Sequential Q2 Q10(a) Q14(a)
08 Q4
Circuits
5 Registers and Counters Q9(b), Q14(b),
12 Q5,Q6
Q11(a), Q11(b) Q15(a), Q15(b)
Q3
6 A /D and D/A Converters Q10(b), Q13(b),
08 Q7,Q8
Q12(a), Q12(b) Q16(a), Q16(b)
Total 60 8 8 8

Course Content
UNIT 1 – Number Systems Duration: 08 Periods (L:6 - T:2)

Number systems - Binary operations - 1’s Compliment - 2’s Compliment – Conversion of one number
system to another number system - Weighted and un-weighted Codes - Priority Bit

UNIT 2 - Boolean Algebra and Logic Gates Duration: 12 Periods (L:9 - T: 3)

Boolean Algebra - Boolean Laws and Theorems - Basic Logic Gates - Concept of Duality - De-Morgan’s
Theorem - Universal Gates- ExOR gate – ExNor gate - Canonical and Standard Forms of Boolean Function

427
- Simplification of Boolean expression upto 3 variables using Karnaugh’s Maps - realizing simplified
expression by Logic Gates.

UNIT 3 - Combinational Circuits Duration: 12 Periods (L:9 - T: 3)

Combinational circuits - Half and Full Adders – Multiplexer - De-Multiplexer - Decoder - Encoders

UNIT 4 - Basics of Sequential Circuits Duration: 08 Periods (L:6 - T: 2)

Sequential Circuits – Need of Clock - Triggering Types – Flip-flops - Asynchronous Inputs –555 Timer IC –
Multivibrators.

UNIT 5 - Registers and Counters Duration: 12 Periods (L:9 - T: 3)

Registers - Counters – Modulus of Counters -Asynchronous Counter (4-bit)- Synchronous Counter (4-bit)

UNIT 6 - A-to D and D-to A Converters Duration: 08 Periods (L:6 - T: 2)

Analog and Digital signals - Analog to Digital converter – Digital to Analog converter – Specifications of
ADC and DAC – Applications of ADC and DAC

Recommended Books

1 Digital Systems-principles and applications. Ronald J. Tocci, Neal S.Widmer, GregoryL.Moss, 10 th

edition
2 Digital Fundamentals by T. L. Floyd, Pearson International Publications, Ninth
Edition, 2000.
3 Digital Computer Electronics by Malvino and leach. 3rd edition Tata McGraw-Hill Education
4 Modern Digital Electronics by R P Jain, Tata McGraw-Hill Education, 2003.

428
 Suggested E-Learning references

1. www.nptel.ac.in
2. http://freevideolectures.com/Course/3164/Digital-Electronics
3. http://www.freebyte.com/electronics/
4. https://www.circuitlogix.com
5. http://www.vlab.co.in
6. www.electronics-tutorials.ws
7. http://www.allaboutcircuits.com
8. http://ocw.mit.edu/

Suggested Learning Outcomes

After completion of the subject, the student shall be able to

1.1 List various Number systems with their radix.

1.2 Convert a given decimal number into Binary numbers.
1.3 Convert a given Binary number into decimal numbers.
1.4 Convert a given decimal number into Hexadecimal numbers.
1.5 Convert a given Hexadecimal number into decimal numbers.
1.6 Convert a given binary number into hexadecimal number system.
1.7 Convert a given hexadecimal number into binary number system.
1.8 Perform binary addition, subtraction and Multiplication.
1.9 Write 1's complement and 2's complement numbers for a given binary number.
1.10 Perform subtraction of binary numbers in 1’s complement method.
1.11 Perform subtraction of binary numbers in 2's complement method.
1.12 Define weighted and Un-weighted codes
1.13 Write binary equivalent number for a number in BCD.
1.14 Convert binary number to equivalent BCD.
1.15 Compare Binary and BCD.
1.16 Write binary equivalent number for a number in Gray code
1.17 Convert binary number to Gray code.
1.18 State the specific applications of Gray code.
1.19 Write binary equivalent number for a number in Excess-3 code.

429
1.20 Convert binary number to Excess-3 code.
1.21 .State the importance of Parity Bit.

2.1 Define bit, byte and word.

2.2 Define Boolean Function and Truth table.
2.3 State the Boolean Postulates.
2.4 Define Basic gates AND, OR, NOT
2.5 Explain Basic gates AND, OR, NOT with output expression, symbol and truth Table.
2.6 Define Universal gates: NAND, NOR
2.7 Explain Universal gates: NAND, NOR with output expression, symbol and truth Table.
2.8 Define EX-OR Gate.
2.9 Explain EX-OR Gate with output expression, symbol and truth Table.
2.10 Define EX-NOR Gate.
2.11 Explain EX-NOR Gate with output expression, symbol and truth Table.
2.12 State De Morgan’s Theorems
2.13 Draw the simplified logic diagram of given Boolean expression (upto 3 variables) using Boolean
Postulates along with De Morgan’s Theorems.
2.14 Write output expression of a given Logic Diagram along with truth table.
2.15 Realize Basic Gates using Universal Gates.
2.16 Realize EXOR gates using Universal Gates.
2.17 Realize EXNOR gates using Universal Gates.
2.18 Differentiate between Canonical and Standard forms of Boolean expression.
2.19 Convert a given Boolean expression in SOP forms.
2.20 Convert a given Boolean expression in POS forms.
2.21 Identify Pairs, Quads and Octets in Karnaugh’s maps.
2.22 Draw the simplified logic diagram of given Boolean expression (upto 3 variables) using
Karnaugh’s Maps.

3.1 Define Combinational Circuit.

3.2 Develop the logical diagram of a Half-adder along with expression and Truth table output.
3.3 Develop the logical diagram of a Full-adder along with expression and Truth table output.
3.4 Realize Full-adder using Half-adder and basic gates.
3.5 Explain the operation of a 4-bit parallel adder developed using Full-Adder.
430
3.6 Define a Multiplexer.
3.7 Explain the working of 8:1 Multiplexer along with Truth table and Logical Diagram.
3.8 Realize Logic gates using suitable Multiplexer.
3.9 Realize SOP expressions (of 3 variables) using suitable Multiplexer.
3.10 Define a De-Multiplexer.
3.11 Explain the working of 1:8 De- Multiplexer along with Truth table and Logical Diagram.
3.12 Define a Decoder.
3.13 Explain the working of 3 to 8 Decoder along with Truth table and Logical Diagram.
3.14 Realize SOP expressions (of 3 variables) using suitable Decoder.
3.15 Define an Encoder.
3.16 Explain the working of Decimal to BCD encoder circuit.

4.1 Define a sequential Circuit.

4.2 Compare combinational and sequential circuits.
4.3 State the need for clock.
4.4 State the concept of Edge Triggering.
4.5 Define Level Triggering.
4.6 Explain the working of clocked R-S Flip-Flop (NAND gate implementation) with truth table.
4.7 Explain the working of clocked J-K Flip-Flop with truth table
4.8 Define Race-around condition.
4.9 Explain the Edge triggering method used to overcome Race-around condition.
4.10 Explain the Master Slave JK Flip Flop mentioning how it overcomes Race-around condition.
4.11 Explain the working of clocked D Flip-Flop with truth table.
4.12 Explain the working of clocked T Flip-Flop with truth table.
4.13 Realize D Flip flop using J-K Flip-Flop.
4.14 Realize T Flip flop using J-K Flip-Flop.
4.15 Mention the applications of Flip-Flops.
4.16 Define Asynchronous inputs.
4.17 State the need for Preset input.
4.18 State the need for Clear input.
4.19 Explain the internal block diagram of 555 Timer IC.
4.20 Define a Multivibrator.
4.21 Explain the working of Monostable multivibrator using 555 IC.

431
4.22 Explain the working of Astable multivibrator using 555 IC.
4.23 Explain the working of Bi-stable multivibrator using Flip-Flops.

5.1 State the need of a register

5.2 Classify Registers.
5.3 Explain the working of 4-bit shift left registers with a circuit and timing diagram.
5.4 Describe the working of 4-bit shift right registers with a circuit and timing diagram.
5.5 Explain the working of 3 bit Ring counter with a circuit and timing diagram.
5.6 Describe the working of a twisted ring counter developed by 3-bit ring counter with circuit and
timing diagram.
5.7 Define a counter
5.8 Differentiate between counter and timer.
5.9 Define Modulus of a counter.
5.10 Explain the working of 4-bit Asynchronous Up counter with a circuit and timing diagram.
5.11 Describe the working of 4-bit Asynchronous Down counter with a circuit and timing diagram.
5.12 Explain the working of 4-bit Asynchronous Up-Down counter with a circuit and timing diagram.
5.13 Describe the working of Asynchronous decade counter with a circuit and timing diagram.
5.14 Explain the working of 4-bit Synchronous counter with a circuit and timing diagram.
5.15 Distinguish between Asynchronous and Synchronous counters.

6.1 Define Analog signal.

6.2 Define a Digital signal.
6.3 State the need for A/D conversion and D/A conversion.
6.4 State the basic principle of D/A conversion.
6.5 Define resolution.
6.6 Define Accuracy.
6.7 Define Monotonicity.
6.8 State the settling time of D/A converter.
6.9 Describe the working of 4-bit D/A converter using Binary weighted resistors.
6.10 Explain the working of 4-bit D/A converter using R-2R ladder network.
6.11 Describe the working of 3-bit Flash Type A/D Converter.
6.12 Explain the A/D conversion using successive approximate method.
6.13 Explain the working of Counter type A/D converter.
432
 6.14 Identify the fastest A/D converter and justify.
6.15 Mention the applications of ADC.
6.16 State the applications of DAC.

Suggested Student Activities

1 Student identifies different digital devices used in day to day life by a common man at home.
2 Discuss about the drawbacks of digital devices like performance AC remotes at different
temperatures etc.
3 Student reads a mini project from a magazine on a topic related to this course and presents a seminar
to share the idea of it.
4 Group discussion
5 Surprise test

CO-PO Mapping Matrix

Communication

Lifelong learning
Basic knowledge

Discipline Knowledge

Engineering Tools

Ethics
Engineer and society

Environment &
Experiments and

Individual and Team

Linked PO
practice

sustainability

work

433
CO\P
PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO 10
O
CO1 3 2 - - - - - - - 3 1,2,10

CO2 - 3 - - 2 - - 2 - 3 2,5,8,10

CO3 - 3 - - 3 - - 2 - 3 2,5,8,10

CO4 - 3 - - 3 - - - - 3 2,5,10

CO5 - 3 - - 3 - - - - 3 2,5,10

CO6 - 3 - - 3 - - - - 3 2,5,10

Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE)

Test Units Marks

Mid Sem 1 1 and 2 20
Mid Sem 2 3 and 4 20
Slip Test 1 1 and 2 5
Slip Test 2 3 and 4 5
Assignments - 5
Seminars - 5
Total 60

QUESTION PAPER PATTERN FOR MID SEMESTER EXAMS

Sl.No Description Level No of Marks for Choice Total Marks

Questions each
question
0 Part-A Remembering(R) 4 1 Nil 4 Marks
1
0 Part-B Understanding(U) 4 3 2 6 Marks
2
0 Part-C Application(A) 4 5 2 10
3 Marks
Total Marks 20
Marks

MID SEM-I EXAM

434
 S.No Unit No R U A

5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-I 1,2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-II 3,4
6(b) 8(b)

Total Questions 4 4 4

MID SEM-II EXAM

S.No Unit R U A
No
1 Unit-III 1,2 5(a) 7(a)
5(b) 7(b)
2 Unit-IV 3,4 6(a) 8(a)
6(b) 8(b)
Total Questions 4 4 4
The length of answer for each question framed in respect of Part-A, B&C shall not exceed
¼ of a page side, 1 page side and 2page sides respectively.

QUESTION PAPER PATTERN FOR SEMESTER END EXAM

Marks for Total

No of
Sl.No Description Level each Choice Mark
Questions
question s
01 Part-A Remembering(R) 8 1 Nil 8 Marks
02 Part-B Understanding(U) 8 3 4 12 Marks
03 Part-C Application(A) 8 5 4 20 Marks
Total Marks 40 Marks

Questions to be set for SEE

Unit No
R U A
I
Q1 Q9(a) Q13(a)
II
III Q4
Q2 Q10(a) Q14(a)
IV
V Q3 Q5,Q6 Q9(b), Q13(b)

435
 Q11(a), Q11(b) Q15(a), Q15(b)
Q10(b), Q14(b)
VI Q7,Q8
Q12(a), Q12(b) Q16(a), Q16(b)
Total Questions 8 8 8

State Board of Technical Education and Training, Telangana

Model Question paper
DEEE IV Semester
Mid Semester-I Examination

Corse Code: 18EE-405C Duration: 1 Hour

Course Name: Digital Electronics Max.Marks: 20

PART-A

Answer all questions, Each Question carries one mark 4x1 = 4 Marks

1) Convert binary number 1001(2) to Decimal.

2) Write the 1’s compliment of 1001(2).
3) Draw the symbol of two input AND gate.
4) List the Universal gates.
PART-B

Answer the following questions. Each question carries three marks 2x 3 = 6 Marks

5) a) Convert the following hexadecimal numbers into decimal equivalent B2F8.

(OR)
b) Define weighted and Un-weighted codes
6) a) Realize basic gates using NAND gate.
(OR)
b) State De-Morgan’s laws.

436
 PART-C

Answer the following questions. Each question carries five marks 2x5 = 10Marks

7)
a) State the Unique feature of Gray code and its application
(OR)
b) Perform binary subtraction of 100101(2) from 110011(2) using 2’s complement method.

8)
a) Define EX-OR and EX-NOR Gates and write their Truth Table, output expression and draw Symbol.
(OR)
b) Simplify Boolean expressions using K-map and draw the logic diagram.

f=ABC +ABC+ABC+ABC

State Board of Technical Education and Training, Telangana

Model Question paper
DEEE IV Semester
Mid Semester-II Examination

Corse Code: 18EE-405C Duration: 1 Hour

Course Name: Digital Electronics Max.Marks: 20

PART-A

Answer all questions, Each Question carries one mark 4x1 = 4 Marks

1) List any two combinational circuits.

2) Define Multiplexer.
3) Define sequential circuit.
4) List any two applications of flip-flops.
PART-B

Answer the following questions. Each question carries three marks 2x 3 = 6 Marks

5) a) Develop the Truth table, output expression and logical diagram of a Half-adder.
(OR)
b)Explain the working of 4:1 Multiplexer with Truth table .
6) a) State the concept of Edge triggering.
(OR)
b) Define asynchronous inputs.

437
 PART-C

Answer the following questions. Each question carries five marks 2x5 = 10Marks

7) a) Realize Full-adder using Half-adder and basic gates.

(OR)
b) Develop a 4-bit parallel adder using Full-Adder and explain its operation

8) a) Explain the working of clocked J-K flip-flop with truth table.

(OR)
b) Discuss the methods to overcome race around condition in J-K flip-flops.

State Board of Technical Education and Training, Telangana

Model Question paper
DEEE IV Semester
Semester End Examination

Corse Code: 18EE-405C Duration: 2 Hours

Course Name: Digital Electronics Maximum .Marks: 40

PART-A

Answer all questions 8x1 = 8 Marks

1) Convert binary number 0111(2) to Decimal.

2) Write the truth table for an Half-adder.
3) List the different types of registers.
4) Draw the symbol of D-type Flip-Flop.
5) State the need for a Register.
6) Define Counter.
7) Define Analog Signal.
8) Define Resolution of a D/A converter.
PART-B
Answer the following questions 4x3= 12 Marks
9)

438
 a) Subtract 11110(2) from 10101(2) by using 2’s Compliment method.
(OR)
b) Differentiate between Counters and Timers in three aspects.
10)
a) Define a Combinational Circuit.
(OR)
b) State the need for A/D and D/A conversion.
11)
a) Draw the circuit of of 4-bit shift left registers.
(OR)
b) Differentiate between Synchronous and Asynchronous counters.
12)
a) State the basic principle of D/A conversion.
(OR)
b) An 8-bit D/A convertor has a step size of 20mV.Determine the full-scale output and percentage
resolution.

PART-C
Answer the following questions 4x 5=20 Marks
13)
a) Convert the following Boolean function into SOP and POS form
f (A,B,C)= A + A B C + A B
(OR)
b) Explain the working of 4-bit Asynchronous Up counter with a circuit and timing diagram

14)
a) Explain the working of 8:1 Mux along with Truth table and Logical Diagram.
(OR)
b) Explain the working of a 3-bit flash type ADC.

15)
a) Explain shifting data bit-by-bit in a 3-bit shift - right register with relevant diagram.
(OR)
b) Explain the working of Three bit synchronous up counter with block diagram, truth table and
timing diagram.

16)
a) Explain the working of Counter type A/D converter
(OR)
b) Explain A/D conversion using successive approximate method.

439
 ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING DRAWING PRACTICE

Course Title : Electrical Engineering Drawing Practice Course Code : 18EE-406P

Semester : IV Course Group : Practical
Teaching Scheme in Periods :15:0:30 Credits : 1.5
(L:T:P)
Methodology :Lecture + Practical Total Contact Periods :45
CIE : 60 Marks SEE : 40 Marks
(Continuous Internal Evaluation) (Semester End Examination)

Pre requisites

The student should have knowledge of Engg. Graphics.

Course Outcomes

CO1 : Draw various Electrical symbols & fuses

CO2 : Draw the sectional views of transformers

CO3 : Draw the cross sectional view of different types of underground cables
CO4 : Develop DC & AC machine windings.
CO5 : Draw the line supports and layout of substations
CO6 : Draw various Power system protection Equipment

Blue Print of Marks for SEE

440
Unit Unit Name Periods Questions to be set for SEE
No R U/A
1 Electrical symbols & 06
fuses Q1
2 Transformers 09
Q5(a)
3 Underground Cables 06
Q2
4 D.C & A.C windings 09

5 Line Supports and 06 Q3 Q5(b) Q6(a)

Substations
6 Power System Protection 09 Q4 Q6(b)
Equipments
Total 45 4 4

Course Content

1. Electrical symbols & fuses Duration: 6 Periods (L:2 - P:4)

Graphical Electrical symbols of different electrical devices - Views of fuses

2. Transformers Duration: 9 Periods (L:3 - P:6)

Single- phase single stepped core type transformer - Core sections, sectional views, Three
phase three stepped core type transformers- Core sections, sectional views.

3. Underground Cables Duration: 6 Periods

(L:2 - P:4)

Cross sectional views of single core, 2 core, 3 core, 3.5 core & 4 core cables, SL & H type
cables.

4. DC &AC winding Duration: 9 Periods (L:3 - P:6)

Simplex lap and wave winding for DC armature - Single layer lap and wave winding for 1-
phase and 3- phase AC machines

5. Line Supports and Substations layout Duration: 6 Periods (L:2 - P:4)

Supporting steel towers –Poles – Stays & Guys - single line diagram substations - Single line
diagram of Grid connected Solar PV system

6. Power system Protection Equipment Duration: 9 Periods (L:3 - P:6)

Lightning arrestors – Circuit breakers - Earthing

441
 Recommended Books

1. “Electrical Engineering Drawing” by S.K.Bhattacharya, NewAge International

Publishers
2. “Electrical Drafting” - S.F. DEVALAPUR EEPB
3. “Electrical Drawing” - K.L. NARANG

Suggested E-Learning references

1. www.nptel.ac.in
2. https://www.academia.edu
(https://www.academia.edu/26976158/ELECTRICAL_ENGINEERING_drawing_by_Dr._S_
K_Bhattacharya.pdf)

Specific Learning Outcomes

After completion of the subject, the student shall be able to

1.1 Draw standard symbols of electrical components: Constant Resistor and variable
Resistor, Constant Inductor and variable inductor, Constant capacitor and variable
capacitor.
1.2 Draw standard symbols of electrical components: DC Voltage Source, DC current source,
Battery, Single phase AC voltage source, three phase AC voltage source, transformer,
Ammeter, Voltmeter, Powerfactor meter and Wattmeter.
1.3 Draw standard symbols of electrical fixtures: On way Switch and two ways Switch,
Normally Open & Normally Close Push buttons, Fuse, Circuit breaker, Isolators, Ground
and Electrical Switchbox.
1.4 Draw standard symbols of electrical fixtures: Wall mounted lamp fixture, Ceiling fan,
Power vent fan, Fluorescent light fixture, Bell, Buzzer, Single and three phase Electric
motors, Motor starter.
1.5 Draw Sectional end view of Rewirable fuse.
1.6 Draw Sectional Elevation of Rewirable fuse.
1.7 Draw Sectional end view of HRC fuse.

442
2.1 Draw the cross section of single stepped core of one limb of transformer.
2.2 Draw the cross section of 2 stepped core of one limb of transformer.
2.3 Draw the cross section of 3 stepped core of one limb of transformer.
2.4 Draw sectional Plan of a single-phase single stepped core type Transformer from
the
given data.
2.5 Draw sectional Plan & Elevation of a single-phase single stepped core type
Transformer from the given data.
2.6. Draw sectional plan of a 3 phase three stepped core type transformers from the given
data.
2.7 Draw sectional Plan & Elevation of a 3 phase three stepped core type transformers
from the given data.

3.1 Draw the cross sectional view of single core cable.

3.2 Draw the cross sectional view of Two core cable.
3.3 Draw the cross sectional view of three core XLPE insulated armoured cable.
3.4 Draw the cross sectional view of 3.5 core XLPE insulated armoured cable.
3.5 Draw the cross sectional view of four core XLPE insulated armoured cable.
3.6 Draw the cross sectional view of H type cable.
3.7 Draw the cross sectional view of S.L type cable.

4.1 Develop winding diagram for a simplex Lap connected DC machine

4.2 Develop winding diagram for a simplex Wave connected DC machine
4.3 Develop winding diagram of a 1-phase single layer lap winding.
4.4 Develop winding diagram of a 1-phase single layer wave winding.
4.5 Develop winding diagram of a 3-phase single layer lap winding.
4.6 Develop winding diagram of a 3-phase single layer wave winding.

5.1 Draw the sketch of 132 KV steel tower of single circuit.

5.2 Draw the sketch of 132 KV steel tower of double circuit.
5.3 Draw the sketch of 220 KV steel towers of single circuit.
5.4 Draw the sketch of 220 KV steel towers of double circuit.
5.5 Draw the sketch of three phase 11KV pole.
5.6 Draw the view of stranded steel wire guy marking all the accessories.
5.7 Draw the single line diagram of 33kV / 11kV substation.
5.8 Draw the single line diagram of 220KV/132 KV substation
5.9 Draw single line diagram of Grid connected solar PV system.
5.10 Draw the elevation of Plinth mounted substation.
5.11 Draw the elevation of Pole mounted substation.

6.1 Draw the dimensioned sketch of Pipe earthing.

443
 6.2 Draw the dimensioned sketch of Plate earthing.
6.3 Draw the sketch of Expulsion type lightning arrestor.
6.4 Draw the sketch of thyrite type lightning arrestor.
6.5 Draw the sketch of metal oxide type lightning arrestor.
6.6 Draw the sketch of Minimum oil circuit breaker with neat labelling.
6.7 Draw the sketch of Vacuum circuit breaker with neat labelling.
6.8 Draw the sketch of SF6 circuit breaker with neat labelling.

Suggested Student Activities

1 Student visits Distribution Transformer i.e., Pole mount and Plinth mount, note down the ratings of
transformer and draw the sketch of the substation mentioning the parts.
2 Student should identify voltage ratings of different electrical lines and supports including LA’s,
Guys etc running near their area and share the information on the same.
3 Group discussion
4 Surprise test

CO-PO Mapping Matrix

Basic knowledge

Engineer and society

Communication

Lifelong learning
Discipline Knowledge

Engineering Tools

Ethics
Experiments and

Environment &

Individual and Team

Linked PO
practice

sustainability

CO\P PO
work

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9
O 10
CO1 - 1 3 3 - - 2 1 - 3 2,3,4,7,8,10

444
CO2 1 3 3 3 - - 2 1 - 3 1,2,3,4,7,8,10

CO3 - 3 3 3 - - 2 1 - 3 2,3,4,7,8,10

CO4 - 3 3 3 - - 2 1 - 3 2,3,4,7,8,10

CO5 - 3 3 3 - - 2 1 - 3 2,3,4,7,8,10

CO6 - 3 3 3 - - 2 1 - 3 2,3,4,7,8,10

Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE)

Test Units Marks

Mid Sem 1 1 and 2 20
Mid Sem 2 3 and 4 20
Slip Test 1 1 and 2 5
Slip Test 2 3 and 4 5
Assignment 1 5
Seminars 1 5
Total 60
QUESTION PAPER PATTERN FOR MID SEMESTER EXAMS

Sl.No Description Level No of Marks for Choice Total Marks

Questions each
question
0 Part-A Remembering(R)/ 2 4 Nil 8 Marks
1 Understanding(U)
0 Part-B Understanding(U) 2 12 1 12 Marks
2 / Application(A)
Total Marks 20
Marks

MID SEM-I EXAM

S.No Unit No R/U U/A

1 Unit-I Q1 Q3(a)

2 Unit-II Q2 Q3(b)

445
 Total Questions 2 2

MID SEM-II EXAM

S.No Unit No R/U U/A

1 Unit-III Q1 Q3(a)

2 Unit-IV Q2 Q3(b)

Total Questions 2 2

QUESTION PAPER PATTERN FOR SEMESTER END EXAM

Marks for Total

No of
Sl.No Description Level each Choice Mark
Questions
question s
01 Part-A Remembering(R) 4 4 Nil 16 Marks
02 Part-B Understanding(U)/ 4 12 2 24 Marks
Application(A)
Total Marks 40 Marks
Unit No Questions to be set for SEE
R/U U/A
I
Q1
II Q5(a)
III
IV Q2

V Q3 Q5(b) Q6(a)
VI Q4 Q6(b)
Total 4 4

446
 STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION &TRAINING ,TELANGANA
DIPLOMA IN ELECTRICAL & ELECTRONICS ENGG.
SUB CODE: 18EE-406P
ELECTRICAL ENGG.DRAWING PRACTICE
MID SEM -I EXAM MODEL PAPER
TIME: 1 HOUR TOTAL MARKS: 20
_________________________________________________________________________________
PART – A Marks: 2 X 4M= 8
Instructions: (1) Answer all questions
(2) Each question carries Four marks.
1. Draw the following electrical symbols
i) Battery
ii) Buzzer
iii) Capacitor
iv) Ammeter
v) fuse
2. Draw the cross section of 2 stepped core of one limb of transformer
PART - B Marks: 1 x12M = 12
Instructions: (1) Answer the following question.
(2) Each question carries twelve marks.

3. (a) Draw the following views of a single phase 220/110 V 10 KVA transformer
a) Front elevation
b) Plan in full section
Core: 1. Cross section of the core =one step core
2. Diameter of the circumcircle =7.5 cm
3. Distance between core centres =15 cm
Yoke height =8 cm
LT winding: 1.Outside diameter of LT coil =9 cm
2.Inside diameter of LT coil=8 cm
3. Height of LT winding =23 cm
4. Number of turns per limb=50
HT winding: 1.Outside diameter of HT coil =13.5 cm
2. Inside diameter of LT coil=11 cm
3. Height of LT winding =23 cm
4. Number of turns per limb=100
Total height of the transformer =40 cm
(OR)
3(b) Draw Sectional Plan and Elevation of Rewirable fuse.

447
 STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION &TRAINING ,TELANGANA
DIPLOMA IN ELECTRICAL & ELECTRONICS ENGG.
SUB CODE: 18EE-406P
ELECTRICAL ENGG.DRAWING PRACTICE
MID SEM -II EXAM MODEL PAPER
TIME: 1 HOUR TOTAL MARKS: 20
_________________________________________________________________________________
PART – A Marks: 2 X 4M= 8
Instructions: (1) Answer all questions
(2) Each question carries Four marks.

1. Draw the cross sectional view of Two core cable.

2. Draw the table to develop winding diagram of a Single phase 4 pole induction motor
with 24 slots, single layer full pitched lap winding.

PART - B Marks: 1 x12M = 12

Instructions: (1) Answer the following question.
(2) Each question carries twelve marks.

3(a) Develop winding diagram for a DC machine with 4 Pole 24 slot simplex Wave
progressive winding with table.

OR

3(b) Draw the cross sectional view of four-core XLPE insulated armoured cable.

448
 STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION &TRAINING ,TELANGANA
DIPLOMA IN ELECTRICAL & ELECTRONICS ENGG.
SUB CODE: 18EE-406P
ELECTRICAL ENGG.DRAWING PRACTICE
SEMESTER END EXAM MODEL PAPER
TIME: 2 HRS TOTAL
MARKS: 40
_________________________________________________________________________________
PART – A Marks: 4 X 4M= 16
Instructions: (1) Answer all questions
(2) Each question carries Four marks.
1. Draw Sectional end view of HRC fuse.
2. Draw the cross sectional view of 3 core armoured cable
3. Draw the single line diagram of 33kV / 11kV substation
4. Draw the free hand sketch of Thyrite type lightning arrester

PART - B Marks: 2x12M = 24

Instructions: (1) Answer all questions.
(2) Each question carries twelve marks.

5(a) Draw the elevation of Plinth mounted substation.

OR

5(b) Draw the dimensioned sketch of Plate earthing.

6(a) Draw single line diagram of Grid connected solar PV system.

OR

6(b) Draw the sketch of Minimum oil circuit breaker with neat labeling.

449
 AC MACHINES LAB PRACTICE

Course Title : AC Machines Lab Practice Course Code : 18EE-407P

Semester : IV Course Group : Practical
Teaching Scheme in Periods :15:0:30 Credits : 1.5
(L:T:P)
Methodology :Lecture + Practical Total Contact Periods :45
CIE : 60 Marks SEE : 40 Marks
(Continuous Internal Evaluation) (Semester End Examination)

Pre Requisites
This course requires the knowledge of AC machines Transformers and Alternators.

Course Outcomes

Course Outcome

CO1 Evaluate the performance of single phase transformer by conducting suitable tests.

CO2 Analyze the load sharing between two Single phase transformers when they are operated
in parallel

CO3 Familiarize with Three phase Transformers

CO4 Determine the dielectric strength of transformer oil

CO5 Determine regulation of an Alternator by conducting suitable tests

CO6 Synchronise the given Alternator with Supply Mains

450
 Suggested Learning Outcomes

After completion of the subject, the student shall be able to

1.0 Evaluate the performance of single phase transformer by conducting suitable tests.
1.1 Identify the terminals on 1-phase transformer.
1.2 Conduct turns ratio test on given single phase transformer.
1.3 Conduct O.C. and S.C. tests on 1-phase Transformer and from the result
a) Draw the equivalent circuit.
b) Calculate efficiency at various loads and power factors.
c) Find the load at which maximum efficiency occurs.

1.4 Obtain efficiency of 1-phase Transformer by conducting load test.

1.5 Obtain regulation of 1-phase Transformer by conducting load test.
1.6 Obtain the efficiency and regulation of two similar 1-phase transformers by conducting
Sumpner’s test.

3.0 Analyze the load sharing between two Single phase transformers when they are operated
in parallel
2.1 Connect two identical 1-ph transformers in parallel and analyze the load sharing.

3.0 Familiarize with Three phase Transformers

3.1 Verify the relation between (i) Phase Voltage & Line Voltage (ii) Phase current & Line Current of
three phase transformer in Y-Y topology.
3.2 Verify the relation between (i) Phase Voltage & Line Voltage (ii) Phase current & Line Current of
three phase transformer in Y- Δ topology.
3.3 Verify the relation between (i) Phase Voltage & Line Voltage (ii) Phase current & Line Current of
three phase transformer in Δ -Y topology.
3.4 Verify the relation between (i) Phase Voltage & Line Voltage (ii) Phase current & Line Current of
three phase transformer in Δ - Δ topology.

Note: Three single phase transformers may be used instead of a three phase transformer.

4.0 Determine the dielectric strength of transformer oil

4.1 Obtain the Dielectric Strength of transformer oil using oil testing kit.

5.0 Determine regulation of an Alternator by conducting suitable tests

5.1 Obtain voltage regulation by conducting (direct) load test on Alternator.
5.2 Obtain the regulation of Alternator by using synchronous impedance method.

6.0 Synchronise the given Alternator with Supply Mains

6.1 Synchronise the given Alternator with supply mains by using bright lamp method

451
 Recommended Books

1. B.L. Theraja-Electrical Technology - Vol -II S.Chand& Co.

2. M.G Say -AC machines
3. P.S. Bhimbra -Electrical machines - Khanna Publishers
4. A.E. Fritzgerald, C. Kingsley and S. Umans Electrical machinery-McGraw Hill
5. MV Deshpande-Electric machines - Wheeler publishing.
6. BR Gupta and VandanaSinghal - Fundamentals of Electric machines

Suggested E-Learning references

1. http://electrical4u.com/
2. www.nptel.ac.in
3. https://www.siemens.com/content/dam/internet/siemens-com/global/products-services

CO-PO Mapping Matrix

Communication

Lifelong learning
Basic knowledge

Discipline Knowledge

Engineering Tools

Ethics
Engineer and society
Experiments and

Environment &

Individual and Team

Linked PO
practice

sustainability

CO\P PO
work

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9
O 10
CO1 - 3 3 - 2 - 2 3 - 3 2,3,5,7,8,10

CO2 - 3 3 - 2 - 2 3 - 3 2,3,5,7,8,10

CO3 - 3 3 - 2 - 2 3 - 3 2,3,5,7,8,10

CO4 - 3 3 - 2 - 2 3 - 3 2,3,5,7,8,10

CO5 - 3 3 - 2 - 2 3 - 3 2,3,5,7,8,10

CO6 - 3 3 - 2 - 2 3 - 3 2,3,5,7,8,10

STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION &TRAINING ,TELANGANA

DIPLOMA IN ELECTRICAL & ELECTRONICS ENGG.

452
 MID SEM - I
Course Code: 18EE-407P Duration: 1 hours

Course Name: AC Machines Lab Practice Max.Marks:20

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Note: Answer allotted Question.

Instructions to the Candidate:

(i)Record the results on a graph sheet if required, and conclude your observation of the experiment

(ii) Draw the circuit diagram for illustration; choose appropriate values when not mentioned in the
question

1. Identify the terminals on 1-phase transformer and determine the turn ratio on transformer
2. Conduct O.C. and S.C. tests on 1-phase Transformer and from the result
a) Draw the equivalent circuit.
b) Calculate efficiency at various loads and power factors.
c) Find the load at which maximum efficiency occurs.
3. Obtain efficiency of 1-phase Transformer by conducting load test.
4. Obtain regulation of 1-phase Transformer by conducting load test.
5. Obtain the efficiency and regulation of two similar 1-phase transformers by conducting
Sumpner’s test.
6. Connect two identical 1-ph transformers in parallel and analyze the load sharing.

STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION &TRAINING ,TELANGANA

DIPLOMA IN ELECTRICAL & ELECTRONICS ENGG.
MID SEM - II
453
Corse Code: 18EE-407P Duration:1 hours

Course Name: AC Machines Lab Practice Max.Marks:20

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Note: Answer allotted Question.

Instructions to the Candidate:

(i)Record the results on a graph sheet if required, and conclude your observation of the experiment

(ii) Draw the circuit diagram for illustration; choose appropriate values when not mentioned in the
question

1. Verify the relation between (i) Phase Voltage & Line Voltage (ii) Phase current & Line Current
of three phase transformer in Y-Y topology.

2. Verify the relation between (i) Phase Voltage & Line Voltage (ii) Phase current & Line Current
of three phase transformer in Y- Δ topology.

3. Verify the relation between (i) Phase Voltage & Line Voltage (ii) Phase current & Line Current
of three phase transformer in Δ -Y topology.

4. Verify the relation between (i) Phase Voltage & Line Voltage (ii) Phase current & Line Current
of three phase transformer in Δ - Δ topology.

5. Obtain the Dielectric Strength of transformer oil using oil testing kit.

STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION &TRAINING, TELANGANA

DIPLOMA IN ELECTRICAL & ELECTRONICS ENGG.
SEMESTER END EXAMINATION
Corse Code: 18EE-407P Duration:2 hours
454
Course Name: AC Machines Lab Practice Max.Marks:40

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Note: Answer allotted Question.

Instructions to the Candidate:

(i)Record the results on a graph sheet if required, and conclude your observation of the experiment

(ii) Draw the circuit diagram for illustration; choose appropriate values when not mentioned in the
question

1. Identify the terminals on 1-phase transformer and determine the turn ratio on transformer
2. Conduct O.C. and S.C. tests on 1-phase Transformer and from the result
a) Draw the equivalent circuit.
b) Calculate efficiency at various loads and power factors.
c) Find the load at which maximum efficiency occurs.

3. Obtain efficiency of 1-phase Transformer by conducting load test.

4. Obtain regulation of 1-phase Transformer by conducting load test.
5. Obtain the efficiency and regulation of two similar 1-phase transformers by conducting
Sumpner’s test.

6. Connect two identical 1-ph transformers in parallel and analyze the load sharing.
7. Verify the relation between (i) Phase Voltage & Line Voltage (ii) Phase current & Line Current
of three phase transformer in Y-Y topology.
8. Verify the relation between (i) Phase Voltage & Line Voltage (ii) Phase current & Line Current
of three phase transformer in Y- Δ topology
9. Verify the relation between (i) Phase Voltage & Line Voltage (ii) Phase current & Line Current
of three phase transformer in Δ -Y topology.
10. Verify the relation between (i) Phase Voltage & Line Voltage (ii) Phase current & Line Current
of three phase transformer in Δ - Δ topology.
11. Obtain the Dielectric Strength of transformer oil using oil testing kit.
12. Obtain voltage regulation by conducting (direct) load test on Alternator.
13. Obtain the regulation of Alternator by using synchronous impedance method.
14. Synchronise the given Alternator with supply mains by using bright lamp method

ELECTRICAL CAD LAB PRACTICE

Course Title : Electrical CAD Lab Practice Course Code : 18EE-408P
Semester : IV Course Group : Practical
Teaching Scheme in Periods :15:0:30 Credits : 1.5
(L:T:P)

455
Methodology :Lecture + Practical Total Contact Periods :45
CIE : 60 Marks SEE : 40 Marks
(Continuous Internal Evaluation) (Semester End Examination)

Pre requisites

This course requires the knowledge of basic commands of CAD software.

Course Outcomes

Course Outcome

CO1 Draw the symbols of Electrical components

CO2 Draw the wiring layouts
CO3 Draw the views of Electrical machines
CO4 Draw the single line diagram of the Substations
CO5 Draw the HV line supports
CO6 Draw the views of Earthing

Suggested Learning Outcomes

After completion of the subject, the student shall be able to

1.0 Draw the symbols of Electrical components

1.1 Draw standard symbols of electrical components: Constant Resistor and variable
Resistor, Constant Inductor and variable inductor, Constant capacitor and variable
capacitor, transformer.
1.2 Draw standard symbols of electrical components: DC Voltage Source, DC current source,
Battery, Single phase AC voltage source, three phase AC voltage source, Wall mounted
lamp fixture, Ceiling fan.
1.3 Draw standard symbols of electrical fixtures: On way Switch and two way Switch,
Normally Open & Normally Close Push buttons, Fuse, Circuit breaker, Isolators and
Ground.

2.0 Draw the wiring layouts

2.1 Draw the wiring layout for a given Single bedroom house.

456
 2.2 Draw the Wiring diagram of 3 phase Induction motor with energy meter, 1-phase
preventer, Y- Δ starter with control panel/switchboard.
2.3 Draw the wiring layout of Pump shed for given dimensions.
2.4 Draw the wiring layout of workshop(with 2 or 3 Induction motors)

3.0 Draw the views of Electrical machines

3.1 Draw the cross section of single stepped core of one limb of transformer.
3.2 Draw the cross section of 2 stepped core of one limb of transformer.
3.3 Draw the cross section of 3 stepped core of one limb of transformer.
3.4 Draw sectional Plan of a single-phase single stepped core type Transformer from the
given data.
3.5 Draw sectional plan of a 3 phase three stepped core type transformers from the given
data.
3.6 Draw Plan & Elevation of a 3 phase transformers with cooling tubes.
3.7 Draw Elevation & End view of a 3 Squirrel cage Induction motor.
3.8 Draw Elevation & End view of a 3 Slip ring Induction motor.

4.0 Draw the single line diagram of the Substations

4.1 Draw the single line diagram of 33kV / 11kV substation.

4.2 Draw single line diagram of Grid connected solar PV system.

5.0 Draw the HV line supports

5.1 Draw the sketch of 132 KV steel tower of single circuit.

5.2 Draw the sketch of 132 KV steel tower of double circuit.
5.3 Draw the sketch of 220 KV steel towers of single circuit.
5.4 Draw the sketch of 220 KV steel towers of double circuit.

6.0 Draw the views of Earthing

6.1 Draw the dimensioned sketch of Plate earthing.

6.2 Draw the dimensioned sketch of Pipe earthing

Recommended Books

1. Computer Aided Electrical Drawing

457
 - YOGESH, NAGARAJA, NANDAN PHI Publication
2. Electrical Drafting - S.F. DEVALAPUR EEPB
3. Electrical Drawing - K.L. NARANG
4. Electrical Engineering Drawing – S. K. BHATTACHARYA
5. QCAD - An Introduction to Computer-Aided Design - By Andrew Mustun

Suggested E-Learning references

1. http://www.faveodesign.co.uk/CAD_Drawings.html
2. http://cad.about.com/od/Learn_CAD/a/The-Fundamentals-Of-Drafting.htm
3. http://transport.itu.edu.tr/PDF/iml332e/Fundamentals%20of%20CAD.

CO-PO Mapping Matrix

Basic knowledge

Engineer and society

Communication

Lifelong learning
Discipline Knowledge

Engineering Tools

Ethics
Experiments and

Environment &

Individual and Team

Linked PO
practice

sustainability

CO\P PO
work

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9
O 10
CO1 - 1 3 3 - - 2 1 - 3 2,3,4,7,8,10

CO2 1 3 3 3 - - 2 1 - 3 1,2,3,4,7,8,10

CO3 - 3 3 3 - - 2 1 - 3 2,3,4,7,8,10

CO4 - 3 3 3 - - 2 1 - 3 2,3,4,7,8,10

CO5 - 3 3 3 - - 2 1 - 3 2,3,4,7,8,10

CO6 - 3 3 3 - - 2 1 - 3 2,3,4,7,8,10

STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION &TRAINING ,TELANGANA

DIPLOMA IN ELECTRICAL & ELECTRONICS ENGG.
MID SEM - I
Corse Code: 18EE-408P Duration: 1 hour

Course Name: Electrical CAD Lab Practice Max.Marks:20

458
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Note: Answer allotted Question.

Instructions to the Candidate:

(i)Record the results on a graph sheet if required, and conclude your observation of the experiment

(ii) Draw the circuit diagram for illustration; choose appropriate values when not mentioned in the
question

1 Draw standard symbols of electrical components: Constant Resistor and variable Resistor,
Constant Inductor and variable inductor, Constant capacitor and variable capacitor,
transformer.
2 Draw standard symbols of electrical components: DC Voltage Source, DC current source,
Battery, Single phase AC voltage source, three phase AC voltage source, Wall mounted lamp
fixture, Ceiling fan.
3 Draw standard symbols of electrical fixtures: On way Switch and two way Switch, Normally
Open & Normally Close Push buttons, Fuse, Circuit breaker, Isolators and Ground.
4 Draw the wiring layout for a given Single bedroom house

.
5 Draw the Wiring diagram of 3 phase Induction motor with energy meter, 1-phase preventer,
Y- Δ starter with control panel/switchboard.
6 Draw the wiring layout of Pump shed for dimensions given as below:
The distance between the LT pole and pump set shed (5m x 3m x 3m) is 10m. Assume any
missing data.
7 Draw the wiring layout of given workshop.

STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION &TRAINING ,TELANGANA

DIPLOMA IN ELECTRICAL & ELECTRONICS ENGG.
MID SEM - II
Corse Code: 18EE-408P Duration:1 hour

Course Name: Electrical CAD Lab Practice Max.Marks:20

459
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Note: Answer allotted Question.

Instructions to the Candidate:

(i)Record the results on a graph sheet if required, and conclude your observation of the experiment

(ii) Draw the circuit diagram for illustration; choose appropriate values when not mentioned in the
question

1 Draw the cross section of single stepped core of one limb of transformer.
2 Draw the cross section of 2 stepped core of one limb of transformer.
3 Draw the cross section of 3 stepped core of one limb of transformer.
4. Draw sectional Plan of a 1-phase, 220/660 V, 2 kVA core-type transformer with the following
data : Cross-section of the core is One step, Diameter of the circle 6 cm, Distance between core
centres 13cm.
LT Winding: Outer diameter of 1st layer 9cm Inner diameter of 1st layer 6.5 cm
HT Winding: Outer diameter of HT winding 11 cm Inner diameter of HT winding 9·5 cm.
5. Draw sectional plan of a 3-phase, 220/660 V, 10 kVA core-type transformer with the following
data: Cross-section of the core is 3 stepped Diameter of the circle 6·5 cm Distance between core
centres 18·5 cm.
LT Winding: Outer diameter of 1st layer 9·25 cm Inner diameter of 1st layer 7·0 cm Outer
diameter of 2nd layer 12·1 cm Thickness of each layer 1·2 cm
HT Winding: Outer diameter of HT winding 17·0 cm Inner diameter of HT winding 12·5 cm
6 Draw Plan & Elevation of a 3 phase transformers with cooling tubes.
7 Draw Elevation & End view of a 3 Squirrel cage Induction motor.
8 Draw Elevation & End view of a 3 Slip ring Induction motor.
9 Draw the single line diagram of 33kV / 11kV substation.
10 Draw single line diagram of Grid connected solar PV system.

STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION &TRAINING, TELANGANA

DIPLOMA IN ELECTRICAL & ELECTRONICS ENGG.
SEMESTER END EXAMINATION
Corse Code: 18EE-408P Duration:2 hours

Course Name: Electrical CAD Lab Practice Max.Marks:40

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
460
Note: Answer allotted Question.

Instructions to the Candidate:

(i) Choose appropriate values when not mentioned in the question

a. Draw standard symbols of electrical components: Constant Resistor and variable Resistor,
Constant Inductor and variable inductor, Constant capacitor and variable capacitor, transformer.
b. Draw standard symbols of electrical components: DC Voltage Source, DC current source,
Battery, Single phase AC voltage source, three phase AC voltage source, Wall mounted lamp
fixture, Ceiling fan.
c. Draw standard symbols of electrical fixtures: On way Switch and two way Switch, Normally
Open & Normally Close Push buttons, Fuse, Circuit breaker, Isolators and Ground.
d. Draw the wiring layout for a given Single bedroom house.

e. Draw the Wiring diagram of 3 phase Induction motor with energy meter, 1-phase preventer, Y- Δ
starter with control panel/switchboard.
f. Draw the wiring layout of an irrigation pump set of 7·5 kW is to be installed at a distance of 15 m
from a 3-phase, 415 V, distribution line. The pump room dimensions are 3 m × 5 m, –3·5 m
height. Efficiency and power factors are 85% and 0·9 respectively. Assume any missing data.
g. Draw the wiring layout of workshop

h. Draw the cross section of single stepped core of one limb of transformer with diameter of circle
as 6 cm.
i. Draw the cross section of 2 stepped core of one limb of transformer with diameter of circle as 8
cm.
j. Draw the cross section of 3 stepped core of one limb of transformer with diameter of circle as 7.5
cm.
k. Draw sectional Plan of a 1-phase, 220/660 V, 2 kVA core-type transformer with the following
data : Cross-section of the core is One step, Diameter of the circle 6 cm, Distance between core
centres 13cm.
LT Winding: Outer diameter of 1st layer 9cm Inner diameter of 1st layer 6.5 cm
HT Winding: Outer diameter of HT winding 11 cm Inner diameter of HT winding 9·5 cm.

461
 l. Draw the sectional plan of a 3-phase, 220/660 V, 10 kVA core-type transformer with the
following data: Cross-section of the core is 3 stepped Diameter of the circle 6·5 cm Distance
between core centres 18·5 cm.
LT Winding: Outer diameter of 1st layer 9·25 cm Inner diameter of 1st layer 7·0 cm Outer
diameter of 2nd layer 12·1 cm Thickness of each layer 1·2 cm
HT Winding: Outer diameter of HT winding 17·0 cm Inner diameter of HT winding 12·5 cm
m. Draw Plan & Elevation of a 3 phase transformers with cooling tubes.
n. Draw Elevation & End view of a 3 Squirrel cage Induction motor.
o. Draw Elevation & End view of a 3 Slip ring Induction motor.
p. Draw the single line diagram of 33kV / 11kV substation.
q. Draw single line diagram of Grid connected solar PV system.
r. Draw the sketch of 132 KV steel tower of single circuit.
s. Draw the sketch of 132 KV steel tower of double circuit.
t. Draw the sketch of 220 KV steel towers of single circuit.
u. Draw the sketch of 220 KV steel towers of double circuit.
v. Draw the dimensioned sketch of Plate earthing.
w. Draw the dimensioned sketch of Pipe earthing

DIGITAL ELECTRONICS LAB PRACTICE

Course Title :Digital Electronics Lab Practice Course Code :18EE-409P

Semester :IV Course Group :Practical
Teaching Scheme in
:15:0:30 Credits :1.5
Periods(L:T:P)
Total Contact
Methodology :Lecture + Practical :45
Periods
CIE :60 marks SEE :40 Marks

462
 Pre requisites

This course requires basic understanding of Boolean Algebra and Logic Gates.

Course Outcomes

Course Outcome

CO Verify the truth tables of Logic gates

1

CO Minimize the given Boolean expression using Boolean theorems and K-

2 Maps

CO Verify simple combinational circuits.

3

CO Analyze the operation of Flip-Flops.

4

CO Apply the knowledge of Flip-Flops to design counters.

5

Suggested Learning Outcomes

After completion of the subject, the student shall be able to

1.0 Verify the truth tables of Logic gates

1.1 Identify the different parts of the digital trainer kit and precautions to be followed in handling ICs.
1.2 Identify Digital ICs, noting down pin details from data sheet and pins of ICs.
1.3 Verify the Truth Table of Basic logic gates AND, OR and NOT.
1.4 Verify the truth table of universal gates NAND and NOR gates.
1.5 Verify the truth table of XOR and XNOR gates.
1.6 Implement Basic Gates using NAND and NOR Gates and validate their operation.
1.7 Implement XOR and XNOR gates using NAND and NOR Gates and Validate their operation.

463
 2.0 Minimize the given Boolean expression using Boolean theorems and K-Maps
2.1 Verify De Morgan's theorems.
2.2 Verify commutative, associative and distributive Boolean laws using suitable logic gates.
2.3 Verify the reduced expression of the given Boolean expression using Boolean theorems and K-Maps.

3.0 Verify simple combinational circuits.

3.1 Verify the truth table of Half-adder circuit.

3.2 Verify the truth table of Full-adder circuit.
3.3 Verify the operation of 4:1 Multiplexer.
3.4 Verify the operation of 1:4 De-Multiplexer
3.5 Verify operation of 3 to 8 line Decoder.

4.1 Analyze the operation of Flip-Flops.

4.1. Verify the truth table of RS Flip flop.

4.2. Verify the truth table of clocked J-K Flip-Flop
4.3. Verify the truth table of clocked D - Flip-Flop.
4.4. Verify the truth table of clocked T- Flip-Flop.
4.5. To realize D - Flip-Flop using J-K Flip-Flop and validate their operation.
4.6. To realize T - Flip-Flop using J-K Flip-Flop and validate their operation.

5.0 Apply the knowledge of Flip-Flops to design counters.

5.1 Verify the operation of a 3-bit or 4-bit ring counter using suitable flip-flop IC.
5.2 Verify the operation of a 3-bit or 4-bit Asynchronous UP counter using suitable flip-flop IC.
5.3 Verify the operation of a 3-bit or 4-bit Asynchronous DOWN counter using suitable flip-flop IC.
5.4 Verify the operation of a 3-bit or 4-bit Synchronous UP counter using suitable flip-flop IC.

Recommended Books

1 Digital Systems-principles and applications. Ronald J. Tocci, Neal S.Widmer, GregoryL.Moss,

10th edition
2 Digital Fundamentals by T. L. Floyd, Pearson International Publications, Ninth Edition, 2000.
3 Digital Computer Electronics by Malvino and leach. 3rd edition Tata McGraw-Hill Education
4 Modern Digital Electronics by R P Jain, Tata McGraw-Hill Education, 2003.

Suggested E-Learning references

464
 1. www.nptel.ac.in
2. http://freevideolectures.com/Course/3164/Digital-Electronics
3. http://www.freebyte.com/electronics/
4. https://www.circuitlogix.com
5. http://www.vlab.co.in
6. www.electronics-tutorials.ws
7. http://www.allaboutcircuits.com
8. http://ocw.mit.edu/

CO-PO Mapping Matrix

Basic knowledge

Engineer and society

Communication

Lifelong learning
Discipline Knowledge

Engineering Tools

Ethics
Experiments and

Environment &

Individual and Team

Linked PO
practice

sustainability

CO\P PO
work

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9
O 10
CO1 - 3 3 2 2 - 2 3 - 3 2,3,4,5,7,8,10

CO2 - 3 3 - 2 - 2 3 - 3 2,3,5,7,8,10

CO3 - 3 3 - 2 - 2 3 - 3 2,3,5,7,8,10

CO4 - 3 3 - 2 - 2 3 - 3 2,3,5,7,8,10

CO5 - 3 3 - 2 - 2 3 - 3 2,3,5,7,8,10

State Board of Technical Education and Training,Telangana

Model Question paper

DEEE IV MID SEM I

465
 Course Code: 18EE-409P Duration:1 hour

Course Name: Digital Electronics Lab Practice Max.Marks:20

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Instructions to the Candidate:

(i)Answer any One of the following Questions.

(ii)Record the results on a graph sheet if required, and conclude your observation of the experiment

(iii) Draw the circuit diagram for illustration; choose appropriate values when not mentioned in the
question

1 Identify the different parts of the digital trainer kit and precautions to be followed in handling ICs.
2 Identify Digital ICs, noting down pin details from data sheet and pins of ICs.
3 Verify the Truth Table of Basic logic gates AND, OR and NOT.
4 Verify the truth table of universal gates NAND and NOR gates.
5 Verify the truth table of XOR and XNOR gates.
6 Implement Basic Gates using NAND and NOR Gates and validate their operation.
7 Implement XOR and XNOR gates using NAND and NOR Gates and Validate their operation.
8 Verify De Morgan's theorems.
9 Verify commutative, associative and distributive Boolean laws using suitable logic gates.

State Board of Technical Education and Training, Telangana

Model Question paper

DEEE IV MID SEM II

Course Code: 18EE-409P Duration:1 hour

466
 Course Name: Digital Electronics Lab Practice Max.Marks:20

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Instructions to the Candidate:

(i)Answer any One of the following Questions.

(ii)Record the results on a graph sheet if required, and conclude your observation of the experiment

(iii) Draw the circuit diagram for illustration; choose appropriate values when not mentioned in the
question

1 Verify the reduced expression of the below Boolean expression using Boolean theorems and K-
Maps.

2 Verify the truth table of Half-adder circuit.

3 Verify the truth table of Full-adder circuit.
4 Verify the operation of 4:1 Multiplexer.
5 Verify the operation of 1:4 De-Multiplexer
6 Verify operation of 3 to 8 line Decoder.
7 Verify the truth table of RS Flip flop.
8 Verify the truth table of clocked J-K Flip-Flop
9 Verify the truth table of clocked D - Flip-Flop.
10 Verify the truth table of clocked T- Flip-Flop.

State Board of Technical Education and Training, Telangana

DEEE IV Semester End Examination

Model Question paper

Course Code: 18EE-409P Duration:2 hours

467
 Course Name: Digital Electronics Lab Practice Max.Marks:40

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Instructions to the Candidate:

(i)Answer any One of the following Questions.

(ii)Record the results on a graph sheet if required, and conclude your observation of the experiment

(iii) Draw the circuit diagram for illustration; choose appropriate values when not mentioned in the
question

1 Identify the different parts of the digital trainer kit and precautions to be followed in handling
ICs.
2 Identify Digital ICs, noting down pin details from data sheet and pins of ICs.
3 Verify the Truth Table of Basic logic gates AND, OR and NOT.
4 Verify the truth table of universal gates NAND and NOR gates.
5 Verify the truth table of XOR and XNOR gates.
6 Implement Basic Gates using NAND and NOR Gates and validate their operation.
7 Implement XOR and XNOR gates using NAND and NOR Gates and Validate their operation.
8 Verify De Morgan's theorems.
9 Verify commutative, associative and distributive Boolean laws using suitable logic gates.
10 Verify the reduced expression of the below Boolean expression using Boolean theorems and K-

Maps.
11 Verify the truth table of Half-adder circuit.
12 Verify the truth table of Full-adder circuit.
13 Verify the operation of 4:1 Multiplexer.
14 Verify the operation of 1:4 De-Multiplexer
15 Verify operation of 3 to 8 line Decoder.
16 Verify the truth table of RS Flip flop.
17 Verify the truth table of clocked J-K Flip-Flop
18 Verify the truth table of clocked D - Flip-Flop.
19 Verify the truth table of clocked T- Flip-Flop.
20 To realize D - Flip-Flop using J-K Flip-Flop and validate their operation.
21 To realize T - Flip-Flop using J-K Flip-Flop and validate their operation
22 Verify the operation of a 3-bit or 4-bit ring counter using suitable flip-flop IC.
23 Verify the operation of a 3-bit or 4-bit Asynchronous UP counter using suitable flip-flop IC.
24 Verify the operation of a 3-bit or 4-bit Asynchronous DOWN counter using suitable flip-flop IC.
25 Verify the operation of a 3-bit or 4-bit Synchronous UP counter using suitable flip-flop IC.
ADVANCED COMMUNICATION SKILLS AND LIFE SKILLS
Course Title : Advanced Communication Skills and Course Code : 18EE- 410P
Life Skills

Semester : IV Course Group : Practical

468
Teaching : 15:0:30 Credits : 1.5
Scheme in
Periods- L: T:P

Methodology : Lecture + Practical Total Contact : 45

Periods

CIE : 60 Marks SEE : 40 Marks

Rationale:
This course is designed to impart writing skills and employability skills to the students of diploma which will
help them in obtaining and maintaining the employment.
Prerequisites:
This course requires the basic knowledge of vocabulary, grammar and four language learning skills, viz.
Listening, Speaking, Reading and Writing.
Course Outcomes:

Modules At the end of the course the students will have the ability
to:

Prepare a presentation.
Use presentation aids effectively.
Presentation Skills Develop public speaking skills.
Learn to make PowerPoint Presentations effectively.
Present a Paper using appropriate body language.

Learn kinds of reports.

Learn the format of a report.
Writing Reports Organise ideas.
Develop essential vocabulary useful to write scientific and
technical reports.

Learn the techniques to face an interview.

Learn the etiquette to communicate with employers.
Interview Skills Learn the dos and don’ts of an interview.
Learn the frequently asked questions in interviews.
Use appropriate body language.
Learn to face interviews telephonically.
Gain the confidence to face an interview by attending
mock interview.

469
 Learn the dos and don’ts of a Group Discussion.
Participate in a Group Discussion in a healthy manner.
Use effective non-verbal communication.
Group Discussion Use appropriate phrases and expressions useful in agroup
discussion.

Learn workplace etiquette.

Identify the knowledge, skills and attributes useful at
workplace.
Workplace Awareness Build strong workplace relationships.
Learn professional ethics.
Understand gender equality at the workplace
Develop a sense of responsibility towards thesociety.

Learn various writing formats useful at workplace.

Develop an ability to apply technical information in
documentation.
Revise and edit written documents effectively.
Develop corresponding skills - learn the kinds of business
Writing Skills Useful at Workplace letters - the format of a business letter.
Learn effective e-mail writing skills.
Learn Business Memos.
Learn Notes and Narratives.
Learn Forms and Applications.
Prepare templates for different purposes.
Prepare an agenda of a meeting.
Prepare the minutes of a meeting.
Prepare Notices / Circulars for various purposes.
Prepare Press release.

CO-PO Matrix

Course Outcome Linked PO

CO 1 Making effective presentations R/U/A 1, 2, 3,4, 5,6,7,8,9,10
CO 2 Writing scientific and technical reports R/U/A 1,2,3,4, 5,6,7,8,9,10
CO 3 Learn to face oral and telephonic interviews R/U/A 1,2,3,4, 7,9,
CO 4 Learn to face group discussion R/U/A 1,2,3,7,8,9
CO 5 Learn to write various formats useful at R/U/A 1,2,3,5,7,8,9,10
workplace
CO6 Learn workplace etiquette and ethics R/U/A 1,2,3,7,8,9,10

470
Course Contents:

VII. Presentation Skills Duration: 6 periods

VIII. Writing Reports Duration: 9 periods
IX. Interview Skills Duration:9 periods
X. Group Discussion Duration: 6 periods
XI. Workplace Awareness Duration: 6 periods
XII. Writing Skills Useful at Workplace Duration: 9 periods

Suggested Student Activities:

 Paper Presentations
 Seminars
 Mock Interviews
 Telephonic Interviews
 Group Discussions
 Role Plays
 Creating advertisements
 Five-minute activities
 Creating a model of workplace

Evaluation Pattern:

III.Continuous Internal Examination: 60 Marks

d. Mid Sem - I 20 marks

Syllabus:
i. Presentation Skills
ii. Writing Reports

e. Mid Sem – II: 20 Marks

Syllabus:
i. Interview Skills
ii. Group Discussion
f. Internal assessment: 20 marks

471
 iv. Seminars: 10 marks
v. Assignments: 5 marks
vi. Lab record submission: 5 marks

IV. Semester End Examination : 40 Marks

a. Write an essay on a given topic or participate in an activity: 15 Marks

b. Interview or Group Discussion: 15 Marks
c. Viva Voce 10 marks

References:
Adair, John. Effective Communication. London: Pan Macmillan Ltd., 2003.
Ajmani, J. C. Good English: Getting it Right. New Delhi: Rupa Publications, 2012.
Amos, Julie-Ann. Handling Tough Job Interviews. Mumbai: Jaico Publishing, 2004.
Collins, Patrick. Speak with Power and Confidence. New York: Sterling, 2009.
Fensterheim, Herbert and Jean Baer. Don't Say Yes When You Want To Say No. New
York: D
Raman, Meenakshi & Sangeeta Sharma. Technical Communication: Principles and
Practice. Second Edition. New Delhi: Oxford University Press, 2011
E-Learning Resources:
http://www.dailywritingtips.com/
http://www.englishdaily626.com/c-errors.php
http://www.owlnet.rice.edu/~cainproj/
http://www.thehumorsource.com/
http://www.indiabix.com/group-discussion/topics-with-answers/
http://networketiquette.net/
https://public.wsu.edu/~brians/errors
http://www.bbc.co.uk/worldservice/learningenglish/radio/specials/15

472
 BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATION (C-18)
FOURTH SEMESTER 18EE-410P
ADVANCED COMMUNICATION SKILLS AND LIFE SKILLS
MID SEM - I
Time : 1 Hour Total Marks: 20
Marks

Part – A 10 marks
Instruction: Answer any one of the following questions.

1. Write the guidelines for preparing a PowerPoint presentation.

2. How do you prepare yourself for presenting a technical paper?
3. Mention a few presentation aids and how do you use them effectively?

Part – B 10 marks

Instruction: Answer any one of the following questions.

4. Write the format of a report and describe it.

5. Write a report on the accident you have seen recently.
6. Give the outline of a project report and describe it.

473
 BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATION (C-18)
FOURTH SEMESTER18EE-410P
ADVANCED COMMUNICATION SKILLS AND LIFE SKILLS
MID SEM - II
Time : 1 Hour Total Marks: 20 Marks

Part – A 10 marks
Instruction: Answer any one of the following questions.

1. What are the dos and don’ts for a formal interview?

2. What at least ten frequently asked questions in a formal interview?
3. How do you prepare for a telephonic interview?

Part – B 10 marks

Instruction: Answer any one of the following questions.

4. What are the dos and don’ts of a group discussion?

5. Mention some phrases and expressions commonly used in a group discussion.
6. Write a short paragraph on the steps you take while participating in a group
discussion.

474
 BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATION (C-18)
FOURTH SEMESTER 18EE-410P
ADVANCED COMMUNICATION SKILLS AND LIFE SKILLS
SEMESTER END EXAM
Time : 3 Hours
Total Marks: 40 Marks

Part – A 10 marks

Instruction: Pick any one question from the given lot.

1. Prepare the outline of a project report and describe it.
2. Write the guidelines for preparing the slides of a PowerPoint presentation.
3. Write the minutes of the meeting conducted at the Principal’s chamber to
conduct the annual day celebrations. Prepare the agenda of the annual day
celebrations.
4. Describe the workplace etiquette.
5. Prepare a press note for the ‘Job Mela’ which is going to be conducted at your
institute.

Part – B 15 marks

6. Interview / Group Discussion

Part – C 15 marks
7. Viva Voce

475
 DEEE SKILL UPGRADATION ACTIVITY SHEET

Course Title : Skill Upgradation Credits :2.5

Semester : IV Total Contact Periods : 105
Methodology : Activities

Suggested Course Outcomes

CO.1 Address the identified needs of the community collaboratively to facilitate positive
social change.
a. Prepare a chart related to the topics covered in the present semester.
b. Listen to expert talk, guest lecture, youtube video and write a summary.
c. Participate in Haritha Haram and submit a small report about the activities.
d. Prepare a report / PPT / poster on waste water recycling or any eco-friendly practices.
e. Seminar on problems with possible solutions in the campus or nearby places
f. Group discussions or enacting a play on topics creating awareness about socio-economic
problems
g. Take up a case study on identification of latest technologies to tackle day to day problems
such as pollution control or traffic management and submit a report / PPT/ poster
h. Participate in NCC

(PO5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10)

CO.2 Listen attentively to others and respond appropriately

a. Listen to expert talk, guest lecture, youtube video and write a summary.
b. Participating in Group discussions or enacting a play on topics creating awareness about
socio-economic problems that can be mitigated by technologies.
c. Participate in quiz on technical aspects or current affairs
d. Participate in Mock Interview

(PO5, 7, 8, 9, 10)

CO.3 Adapt your style to the occasion, task, and audience

a. Group discussions or enacting a play on topics creating awareness about socio-economic
problems that can be mitigated by technologies.
b. Seminar on problems with possible solutions in the campus or nearby places
c. Participate in Mock Interview

476
 (PO5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10)

CO.4 Articulate ideas in various formats including oral, written, nonverbal, visual, and
electronic devices.
a. Prepare a chart related to the topics covered in the present semester.
b. Refer to an e-journal and submit a summary report on upcoming technologies.
c. Visit factory / industry and submit a report/PPT on the observations made.
d. Prepare a mini project and submit report.
e. Prepare a report / PPT / poster on waste water recycling or any eco-friendly practices.
f. Take up a case study on identification of latest technologies to tackle day to day problems
such as pollution control or traffic management and submit a report / PPT/ poster
g. Seminar on problems with possible solutions in the campus or nearby places
h. Participate in Mock Interview

(PO5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10)

CO.5 Demonstrate ability to recognize and effectively manage ambiguous ideas,

experiences and situations
a. Take up a case study on identification of latest technologies to tackle day to day problems
such as pollution control or traffic management and submit a report / PPT/ poster
b. Seminar on problems with possible solutions in the campus or nearby places

(PO5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10)

CO.6 Analyze the interconnections between individuals and society as well as how
individual actions have an impact on others.
a. Participate in Haritha Haram and submit a small report about the activities.
b. Participate in Swatch Bharath and write an essay on the importance of the program
c. Participate in NCC

(PO5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10)

CO.7 Utilize others’ ideas, strengths, knowledge, and abilities to foster an inclusive
environment & Develop and sustain healthy and meaningful relationships with others
a. Prepare a mini project and submit report.
b. Participate in Haritha Haram and submit a small report about the activities.
c. Participate in Swatch Bharath and write an essay on the importance of the program
d. Participate in NCC

(PO5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10)

CO.8 Ability to recognize their strengths and those of others to work towards a shared
vision.
a. Prepare a mini project and submit report.
b. Participate in Haritha Haram and submit a small report about the activities.

477
 c. Participate in Swatch Bharath and write an essay on the importance of the program
d. Participate in NCC

(PO5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10)

CO.9 Act in alignment with one’s own values to contribute to one’s life-long growth and
learning.
a. Physical activities such as sports, yoga, meditation and other relaxation techniques

(PO5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10)

CO.10 Gain, process, and act upon knowledge regarding the effects of individual,
community, national, and international level choices on ecosystems and people.
a. Prepare a report / PPT / poster on waste water recycling or any eco-friendly practices.
b. Take up a case study on identification of latest technologies to tackle day to day problems
such as pollution control or traffic management and submit a report / PPT/ poster
c. Take up a case study on identification of latest technologies to tackle day to day problems
such as pollution control or traffic management and submit a report / PPT/ poster
d. Seminar on problems with possible solutions in the campus or nearby places

(PO5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10)

CO Outcome CO/PO
Mapping

CO1 Address the identified needs of the community collaboratively to 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10

facilitate positive social change.
CO2 Listen attentively to others and respond appropriately 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10

CO3 Adapt your style to the occasion, task, and audience 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10

CO4 Articulate ideas in various formats including oral, written, nonverbal, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10

visual, and electronic devices.
CO5 Demonstrate ability to recognize and effectively manage ambiguous 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10
ideas, experiences and situations
CO6 Analyze the interconnections between individuals and society as well 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10
as how individual actions have an impact on others.
CO7 Utilize others’ ideas, strengths, knowledge, and abilities to foster an 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10
inclusive environment & Develop and sustain healthy and
meaningful relationships with others
CO8 Ability to recognize their strengths and those of others to work 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10
towards a shared vision
CO9 Act in alignment with one’s own values to contribute to one’s life- 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10
long growth and learning.
CO10 Gain, process, and act upon knowledge regarding the effects of 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10
individual, community, national, and international level choices on
ecosystems and people.

478
 Note: The above COs may map to other POs from 1 to 4 apart from PO’s 5 to 10 depending on
the topic

Suggested Student Activities

1. Prepare a chart related to the topics covered in the present semester.

2. Refer to an e-journal and submit a summary report on upcoming technologies.
3. Visit factory / industry and submit a report/PPT on the observations made.
4. Prepare a mini project and submit report.
5. Listen to expert talk, guest lecture, youtube video and write a summary.
6. Participate in Haritha Haram and submit a small report about the activities.
7. Prepare a report / PPT / poster on waste water recycling or any eco-friendly practices.
8. Take up a case study on identification of latest technologies to tackle day to day problems such as
pollution control or traffic management and submit a report / PPT/ poster
9. Participate in Swatch Bharath and write an essay on the importance of the program
10. Group discussions or enacting a play on topics creating awareness about socio-economic
problems
11. Physical activities such as sports, games, yoga, meditation and other relaxation techniques
12. Participate in quiz on technical aspects or current affairs
13. Seminar on problems with possible solutions in the campus or nearby places
14. Participate in NCC
15. Participate in Mock interviews

Note: The above student activities will be assessed using rubrics. A sample rubrics template is given
below. The subject teacher can assess students using rubrics with atleast four relevant aspects.

479
 RUBRICS MODEL (For assessing Presentation skills)

Aspects Needs improvement Satisfactory Good Exemplary

Collect much Collects
Collects very Collects a
Information with some basic
Collection limited great deal of
very information with
of data information information with
limited relevance little bit of
relevance
to the topic irrelevance
Presents data well;
Presents data well Presents data in an
Presentation Clumsy but presentation
but need to improve understandable yet
of data presentation of data needs to be more
clarity concise manner
meaningful
Performs all
Fulfill Performs very Performs very Performs
duties of
team’s roles little duties but little duties and is nearly all
assigned
& duties Unreliable. inactive duties
team roles
Rarely does Usually does Always does
Normally
Shares the assigned the assigned the assigned
does the
work work; often work; rarely work without
assigned
equally needs needs having to be
work
reminding reminding reminded
Usually does Talks good;
Listens, but
Interaction with most of the but never Listens and
sometimes
other team talking; rarely show interest speaks a fair
talks too
mates allows others in listening to amount
much
to speak others
Audibility and Very little
Hardly audible and Audible most of the
clarity in audibility and Audible and clear
unclear time with clarity
speech clarity
Some depth of
Lacks content Insight and depth
Little depth of content
Understanding understanding and of content
content understanding is
content is clearly a work in understanding are
understanding evident but needs
progress evident
improvement
Content is Content is accurate
Content is accurate
inaccurate and but some Content is
and information is
information is not information is not accurate and
Content not presented in a
presented in a presented in a information is
Presentation logical order
logical order logical order but is presented in a
making it difficult
making it difficult still generally easy logical order
to follow
to follow to follow

Suggested additional aspects for assessing Leadership Qualities:

1. Carrying self
2. Punctuality
3. Team work abilities
4. Moral values

480
 5. Communication skills
6. Ensures the work is done in time

Suggested additional aspects for assessing “Participation in social task”

1 Interested to know the current situation of society.

2 Shows interest to participate in given social task.
3 Reliable
4 Helping nature
5 Inter personal skills
6 Ensures task is completed

Suggested additional aspects for assessing “Participation in Technical task”

1. Updated to new technologies

2. Identifies problems in society that can be solved using technology
3. Interested to participate in finding possible technical solutions to identified project
4. Reliable
5. Interpersonal skills

Suggested additional aspects for Carrying Self:

1 Stand or sit straight.

2 Keep your head level.
3 Relax your shoulders.
4 Spread your weight evenly on both legs.
5 If sitting, keep your elbows on the arms of your chair, rather than tightly against your sides.
6 Make appropriate eye contact while communicating.
7 Lower the pitch of your voice.
8 Speak more clearly.

481
DIPLOMA IN ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING
V- SEMESTER

482
 V Semester
TEACHING AND EXAMINATION SCHEME

Teaching Scheme Examination Scheme

semesterTotal Periods per

Instruction Continuous
periods internal Semester end examination
Sl. Course per week evaluation

Credits
Course Name
No. Code

marksTotal

marks for
IIMid sem.

evaluationInternal

MarksMax.

MarksMin.
IMid sem.

including
passing
Min.
L T P

internal
Industrial
Management
1 18EE-501F 3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35
and
Entrepreneurship
2 18EE-502C AC Motors 3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35
Program
3 18EE-503E 3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35
Elective – I
Program
4 18EE-504E 3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35
Elective- II
Electrical
5 18EE-505C Estimation and 3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35
Utilization
AC Motors Lab
6 18EE-506P 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 14 100 35
Practice
Power
7 18EE-507P Electronics Lab 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
Practice
Programmable
Logic
8 18EE-508P 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
Controllers Lab
Practice
Programming in
9 18EE-509P 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
C Lab Practice
10 18EE-510P Project work 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
  2.
11 0 0 7 105 0 0 Rubrics 
Skill up gradation 5
Total 20 5 17 630 25 200 200 200 400 170 1000 425
Activities: student performance is to be assessed through Rubrics
Program Elective – I
  18EE-503E (A) Industrial Electronics
  18EE-503E (B) Power Electronics
Program Elective – II
  18EE-504E (A) Switchgear and Protection
  18EE-504E (B) Advanced Protection of Power Systems

483
 INDUSTRIAL MANAGEMENT AND ENTREPRENEURSHIP
Course Title : Industrial Management Course Code : 18EE-501F
and Entrepreneurship Course Group : Foundation
Semester :V Credits :3
Teaching Scheme in : 45:15:0 Total Contact Periods : 60 Periods
Periods (L:T:P) SEE : 40 Marks
Methodology : Lecture + Tutorial (Semester End Examination)
CIE : 60 Marks
(Continuous Internal Evaluation)
This course is common for DEEE, DCME,DECE and DEIE

Prerequisites
This course requires the basic knowledge of management and entrepreneurship skills.

Course Outcomes
CO1 To become aware of business and management concepts.

CO2 Analyze the various rules and regulations required for the planning of factory and its staff.

CO3 Analyze balance sheet and various budget issues.

CO4 Analyze the material required and its management economically.

CO5 Analyze the quality management and know the analysis procedure for quality.

CO6 Able to establish a small scale industry by knowing the entrepreneurship skills.

Blue Print of Marks for SEE

Unit Unit Name Periods Questions to be set for SEE

484
 No

R U A

1 Overview of Business,
Management Process
8
and Organization
Management
Q1 Q9(a) Q13(a)
2 Human resource
Management 10

3 Finance Management
10 Q4

Q2 Q10(a) Q14(a)
4 Material Management
10

5 Project Management Q9(b), Q13(b),

10 Q5,Q6
Q11(a), Q11(b) Q15(a), Q15(b)
Q3
6 Entrepreneurship and Q10(b), Q14(b),
12 Q7,Q8
Supporting Institutions Q12(a), Q12(b) Q16(a), Q16(b)

Total 60 8 8 8

Course Content

Upon completion of the course the student should be able to

UNIT 1 - Overview of Business, Management Process and Organization Management

Duration 8 (L:6 T:2)
Business - types of business in various sectors- service, manufacturing & trade- Industrial sectors –
Engineering, process, Textile, Chemical, Agro industries – Globalization and effect of globalization –
advantages and Disadvantages- Intellectual Property Rights (I.P.R.)- Concept of management – levels of
management – Scientific management – by FW Taylor – Principles of management- functions of
management – Administration – management, Organization – types of organization( line, line & staff,
staff & project) – Departmentation – Classification (centralized, decentralized, Authority, Responsibility,
and span of control – Forms of Ownership – Proprietorship – Partnership – Joint stock – Co-operative
society and Government sectors.

UNIT 2 - Human resource Management Duration 10 (L:7.5 T:2.5)

Personal Management – Staffing – Introduction to HR planning – Recruitment procedures – Types of
Trainings –Personal training – skill development training – Leaderships – types – Motivation – Maslow’s

485
 theory – Causes of accidents – safety precautions – Indian Factory Act – Workmen’s compensation Act –
Industrial disputes Act- ESI Act.

UNIT 3 - Finance Management Duration 10 (L:7.5 T:2.5)

Introduction – Objectives of Financial Management – Types of capitals – sources of raising capital –
Types of budgets – production budgets – labour budgets – Concept of Profit loss Account – Concept of
balance sheet – proforma – types of taxes – brief concepts of – Income Tax, GST.

UNIT 4 - Material Management Duration 10 (L:7.5 T:2.5)

Inventory Management – objectives of Inventory Management – ABC Analysis – Economic order
Quality – Purchasing – Objectives of purchasing – Functions – Procedures – Material Management.

UNIT 5 - Project Management Duration 10 (L:7.5 T:2.5)

Introduction – CPM & PERT – concept of Break event Analysis – quality system - Definition of Quality ,
concept of Quality , Quality policy, Quality control, Quality Circle, Quality Assurance, Introduction to
TQM- Kaizen 5’s and 6 sigma concepts, ISO 9000 series standards- Merits and drawbacks of ISO series
standards.

UNIT 6- Entrepreneurship and Supporting Institutions Duration 12 (L:9 T:3)

Qualities of entrepreneur-Manager- entrepreneur and technical entrepreneur-Advantages of being an
entrepreneur-Functions of entrepreneur-Types of entrepreneur and their meaning- Role of
entrepreneurship in economy development-Barriers to entrepreneurship-Mention different types of
industries-Definitions of small scale industry-Features of SSI-Mention the objectives of developing SSIs-
Scope of SSI in terms of various activities-Merits of SSIs-Explain the important steps involved in starting
an SSI-Definition of startup company-start up development basis-state level and national level sources of
information-various central Government institutions and their functions(like NSIC,SIDO,SISI and SSIB)-
Telangana State industry policy-Demographic merits of Telangana state to set up SSIs-Names of state
level institutions and their functions(Like SSIDC,DIC,APIITCO)-Banks that support SSIs like
SIDBI,APSFC-Thrust areas and core sector as per Telangana state industry policy-Classification of the
projects as per TSIP-Special assistance schemes for women and SC/ST entrepreneurs-Features of TS-
IPASS.

Recommended Books

1. Industrial Engg&Management by Dr. O.P. Khanna - Dhanpath Rai & sons New Delhi
2. Business Administration &Management Dr. S.C. Saxena& W.H. Newman&E.Kirby Warren-
SahityaBhavan Agra
3. The process of Management by Andrew R. McGill - Prentice Hall
4. Industrial Management by Rustom S. Davar - Khanna Publication
5. Total Quality Management, S Raja Ram, M Shivashankar
6. Industrial management and organizational behaviour, K.K.Ahuja

Suggested E-Learning references

1.http:jiem.org/index.php/jiem
2. https://dipp.gov.in
3. www.worldwidelearn.com/online-education-guide/business/industrial-management-major.html

486
Suggested Learning Outcomes

1.1 Define Business

1.2 State the Types of Business ( Service, Manufacturing, Trade)
1.3 Explain about the various industrial sectors like engineering, process, textile, Agro based
industries.
1.4 State the need for Globalization.
1.5 List the Advantages & Disadvantages of globalization w.r.t. India.
1.6 Explain the importance of Intellectual Property Rights (I.P.R.)
1.7 Define Management.
1.8 Explain the concept of management
1.9 Explain the Different Levels of management
1.10 Explain Administration & management
1.11 State the principles of scientific management by F.W.Taylor
1.12 State the principles of Management by Henry Fayol (14 principles)
1.13 List the Functions of Management
i) Planning ii) Organizing iii) Directing iv) Controlling
1.14 Define Organization
1.15 List the Types of organization :a) Line b) Line & staff c) Functional d) Project
1.16 Explain the four types of organization.
1.17 Define departmentalization.
1.18 Explain the following types of departmentalization
i) Centralized & Decentralized ii) Authority & Responsibility iii) Span of Control
1.19 Explain the Forms of ownership
i)Proprietorship ii) Partnership iii) Joint stock iv) Co-operative Society v)Govt. Sector

2.1 Define Personal Management.

2.2 Explain the functions of Personal Management
2.3 Define Staffing .
2.4 State the importance of HR Planning.
2.5 Explain the various Recruitment Procedures.
2.6 Explain the need for Training &Development .
2.7 State the various types of training procedures( Induction, Skill Enhancement etc)

487
2.8 State the different types of Leaderships.
2.9 Explain the Maslow’s Theory of Motivation.
2.10 Explain the Causes of accident and the Safety precautions to be followed.
2.11 Explain the importance of various Acts – Indian Factory Act, ESI Act, Workmen Compensation
Act, Industrial Dispute Act etc.

3.1 State the Objectives of Financial Management.

3.2 State the Functions of Financial Management.
3.3. State the necessity of Capital Generation & Management.
3.4 List the types of Capitals.
3.5 List the Sources of raising Capital.
3.6 Explain the Types of Budgets
i) Production Budget (including Variance Report ) ii) Labour Budget.
3.7 Explain Profit& Loss Account ( only concepts) .
3.8 Explain the proforma of Balance Sheet.
3.9 Explain GST and Income Tax .

4.1. Define Inventory Management (No Numerical).

4.2 State the objectives of Inventory Management.
4.3 Explain ABC Analysis.
4.4 State Economic Order Quantity.
4.5 Explain the Graphical Representation of Economic Order Quantity.
4.6 State the objectives of Purchasing.
4.7 State the functions of Purchase Department.
4.8 Explain the steps involved in Purchasing.
4.9 State the Modern Techniques of Material Management.

5.1 State the meaning of Project Management.

5.2 Explain the CPM& PERT Techniques of Project Management.
5.3 Distinguish between CPM & PERT techniques.
5.4 Identify the critical path and find the project duration using CPM & PERT techniques
(solve problems on CPM and PERT).
5.5 Explain the concept of Break Even Analysis.
5.6 Define Quality.

488
5.7 State the concept of Quality.
5.8 Explain the various Quality Management systems.
5.9 Explain the importance of Quality policy, Quality control, Quality Circle.
5.10 State the principles of Quality Assurance.
5.11 State the concepts of TQM, Kaizen 5’s and 6 sigma.
5.12 State the constituents of ISO 9000 series standards.
5.13 Merits and draw backs of ISO 9000 series standards.

6.1 Explain the concept of entrepreneurship.

6.2 Mention the qualities of entrepreneur.

6.3 Distinguish between manager-entrepreneur and technical entrepreneur.

6.4 Mention the advantages of being an entrepreneur.

6.5 List the functions of entrepreneur.

6.6 Mention the important types of entrepreneur and their meaning.

6.7 Explain the role of entrepreneurship in economic development.

6.8 Mention the barriers to entrepreneurship.

6.9 Mention different types of Industries.

6.10 Define Small scale industry.

6.11 List the features of SSI.

6.12 Mention the objectives of developing SSIs.

6.13 Explain the scope of SSI in terms of various activities.

6.14 List the merits of SSIs.

6.15 Explain the important steps involved in starting an SSI.

6.16 Define a startup company.

6.17 Explain various startup development phases

6.18 Name the state level and National level sources of information

6.19 Mention the various Central government institutions and their functions

(like NSIC , SIDO, SISI_SSIB)

6.20 Explain Telangana state industry policy.

6.21 Mention the demographic merits of Telangana state to set up SSIs.

489
 6.22 Mention the names of State level institutions and their functions (like SSIDC, DIC, APITCO)

6.23 List the banks that support SSIs like SIDBI, APSFC.

6.24 List the thrust areas and Core sectors as per Telangana state industry policy.

6.25 Classify the projects as per TSIP.

6.26 Mention Special assistance schemes for women and SC/ST entrepreneurs.

6.27 Mention the features of TS-iPASS.

Suggested Student Activities

1.Student visits Library to refer to Management courses.

2.Student observes the solo and partnership business establishments near by and prepare a report about
the activities.
3. Identify any one product, being manufactured in local industry, study the process they are following for
manufacturing the product, submit handwritten report.
4. Visit a nearby industry, make a report on Plant layout, type of production, quality system is put in
practice and quality tools they are using in work place.
5. Motivate student to take case study on plant maintenance of nearby industry, observe type of
maintenance they undertake in their industry.
6. Each student should prepare a detailed project report on selected product.
7. Visit a local industry and list the safety precautions carried out there.
8. Meet a local Entrepreneur and prepare a report on his success story.
9.Quiz.
10.Group discussion.
11. Surprise test.

Execution Mode:
1. Maximum of 5 students in each batch should do any one of the following type activity or similar
activity related to the course and before take up, get it approved from concerned Teacher.
2. Each batch should conduct different activity and no repeating should occur.
3. Submit a brief report on the activity done on 4-6 pages, A4 size hand written paper. Papers should be
simple stapled or tagged. Avoid plastic based files for submitting of reports.
4. Activities can be carried off-class.
5. Assessment shall be made based on quality of activity/presentation/demonstration and report.

CO-PO Mapping Matrix

490
 Communication

Lifelong learning
Basic knowledge

Discipline Knowledge

Engineering Tools

Ethics
Engineer and society
practice Experiments and

sustainability Environment &

work Individual and Team

Linked
PO

CO PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO 10
1,2
CO1 2 2 3

CO2 2 2 2 3 3 2 1,2,5,6,7

CO3 2 2 3 3 1,2,9

CO4 2 2 2 3 2 1,2,5,7

CO5 2 3 2 2 1,2,5,10

CO6 2 2 2 3 3 1,2,3,7,10

Internal Evaluation

Test Units Marks

Mid Sem 1 1 and 2 20

Mid Sem 2 3 and 4 20

Slip Test 1 1 and 2 5

Slip Test 2 3 and 4 5

Assignments - 5

Seminars - 5

Total 60

QUESTION PAPER PATTERN FOR MID SEMESTER EXAMS

No of Marks for
Sl.No Description Level Choice Total Marks
Questions each question

01 Part-A Remembering(R) 4 1 Nil 4 Marks

491
 02 Part-B Understanding(U) 4 3 2 6 Marks

03 Part-C Application(A) 4 5 2 10 Marks

Total Marks 20 Marks

MID SEM-I EXAM

S.No Unit No R U A

5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-I 1,2
5(b) 7(b)

6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-II 3,4
6(b) 8(b)

Total Questions 4 4 4

MID SEM-II EXAM

S.No Unit No R U A

1 Unit-III 1,2 5(a) 7(a)

5(b) 7(b)

2 Unit-IV 3,4 6(a) 8(a)

6(b) 8(b)

Total Questions 4 4 4

The length of answer for each question framed in respect of Part-A, B&C shall not exceed
¼ of a page side, 1 page side and 2page sides respectively

QUESTION PAPER PATTERN FOR SEMESTER END EXAM

No of Marks for
Sl.No Description Level Choice Total Marks
Questions each question

01 Part-A Remembering(R) 8 1 Nil 8 Marks

02 Part-B Understanding(U) 8 3 4 12 Marks

492
 03 Part-C Application(A) 8 5 4 20 Marks

Total Marks 40 Marks

Questions to be set for SEE

Unit No
R U A

I
Q1 Q9(a) Q13(a)
II

III
Q2 Q10(a) Q14(a)
IV Q4

Q9(b), Q13(b),
V Q5,Q6
Q11(a), Q11(b) Q15(a), Q15(b)
Q3
Q10(b), Q14(b),
VI Q7,Q8
Q12(a), Q12(b) Q16(a), Q16(b)

Total Questions 8 8 8

STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION &TRAINING ,TELANGANA

DIPLOMA IN ELECTRICAL & ELECTRONICS ENGG.
SUB CODE: 18EE-501F
INDUSTRIAL MANAGEMENT AND ENTREPRENEURSHIP
MID SEM -I EXAM MODEL PAPER
TIME: 1 HOUR TOTAL MARKS: 20

493
_________________________________________________________________________________
Important Note: Wherever any question has choice, marks will be allotted only to first attempted
question. No marks will be allotted for extra questions answered

PART – A Marks: 4Q X 1= 04
Instructions: (1) Answer all questions
(2) Each question carries Onemark.

1. Define business.
2. Define organization.
3. What are the different types of Leaderships?
4. Define personnel management.

PART - B Marks: 2Q x 3 = 06
Instructions: (1) Answer all questions
(2) Each question carries Three marks.
5.(a) State the need for Globalization .

OR

5.(b) Briefly explain Proprietor form of business ownership.

6.(a) Briefly explain the need for Training & Development .

OR

6.(b) What are the Causes of accident in an industry.

PART - C Marks: 2Q x 5= 10
Instructions: (1) Answer all questions
(2) Each question carries Five marks.
7.(a) State the principles of Scientific management by F.W.Taylor.

OR

7.(b) Explain the line and staff type of organisation.

8.(a) Explain the Maslow’s Theory of Motivation.

OR

8.(b) Explain various features of Indian Factory Act.

STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION &TRAINING ,TELANGANA

DIPLOMA IN ELECTRICAL & ELECTRONICS ENGG.
SUB CODE: 18EE-501F
INDUSTRIAL MANAGEMENT AND ENTREPRENEURSHIP
MID SEM -II EXAM MODEL PAPER

494
TIME: 1HOUR TOTAL MARKS: 20
_________________________________________________________________________________
Important Note: Wherever any question has choice, marks will be allotted only to first attempted
question. No marks will be allotted for extra questions answered

PART – A Marks: 4Q X 1= 04
Instructions: (1) Answer all questions
(2) Each question carries Onemark.

1. List the types of Capitals.

2. Mention any two objectives of financial management.
3. Define inventory management.
4. List any two objectives of purchasing.

PART - B Marks: 2Q x 3 = 06
Instructions: (1) Answer all questions
(2) Each question carries Three marks.
5. (a) What is the necessity of Capital Generation?

OR

5.(b) Briefly explain Profit & Loss Account .

6.(a) State the Modern Techniques of Material Management.

OR

6.(b) What are the steps involved in Purchasing?

PART - C Marks: 2Q x 5= 10
Instructions: (1) Answer all questions
(2) Each question carries Five marks.
7.(a) Explain about production budget.

OR

7.(b) Explain the proforma of balance sheet.

8.(a) Explain ABC analysis .

OR

8.(b) Explain the Graphical Representation of Economic Order Quantity.

18EE-501F
STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION &TRAINING , TELANGANA
DIPLOMA IN ELECTRICAL & ELECTRONICS ENGG.
SUB CODE: 18EE-501F
INDUSTRIAL MANAGEMENT AND ENTREPRENEURSHIP

495
 SEMESTER END EXAM MODEL PAPER
TIME: 2 HOURS TOTAL MARKS: 40
________________________________________________________________________________

PART – A Marks: 8Q X 1= 8
Instructions: (1) Answer all questions
(2) Each question carries one mark.
1. Define Staffing.

2. List the types of Capitals.

3. State the concept of Quality.

4. List the functions of entrepreneur.

5. What is meant by Project Management?

6. What is meant by Quality Assurance?

7. Define Small scale industry.

8. Define a startup company.

PART - B Marks: 4Qx3=12

Instructions: (1) Answer any Four Questions
(2) Each question carries Three marks.

9.(a) Write salient features of partnership type of business ownership.

OR

9.(b) Explain briefly the importance of Quality policy .

10.(a) What is meant by GST?

OR

10.(b). Mention the barriers to entrepreneurship.

11.(a) What are the concepts of TQM?

OR

11.(b) Explain the importance of Quality control.

12.(a) Explain briefly the role of entrepreneurship in economic development.

OR

12.(b) Mention the features of TS-iPASS.

496
 PART - C Marks: 4Qx5=20
Instructions: (1) Answer any Four Questions
(2) Each question carries Five marks

13.(a) Explain the principles of Management by Henry Fayol.

OR

13.(b) Explain the concept of Break Even Analysis .

14.(a) Explain the labour budget.

OR

14.(b) Explain the important steps involved in starting an SSI .

15.(a)Draw a network diagram and find out project duration for the following activities.

Activity 1-2 1-3 1-4 2-6 3-5 4-5 5-6 6-7

Duration 4 2 3 5 1 2 2 7
in days

OR

15.(b) Explain the importance of quality circle .

16.(a) Explain briefly Telangana state industry policy .

OR

16.(b) What are the special assistance schemes provided for women entrepreneurs.

AC MOTORS

Course Title : AC Motors Course Code : 18EE-502C

Semester :V Course Group : Core
Teaching Scheme in Periods : 45:15:0 Credits :3

497
(L:T:P) Total Contact Periods : 60
Methodology : Lecture + Tutorial SEE : 40 Marks
CIE : 60 Marks (Semester End Examination)
(Continuous Internal Evaluation)

Pre requisites

This course requires the knowledge of Basic Principles of Electricity and Magnetism,

Course Outcomes
CO1 : Describe the construction and working of Synchronous Motor
CO2 : Apply different starting methods and select a suitable 3 phase induction motor for particular
application.
CO3 : Describe the construction & working of 3 Phase Induction Motors
CO4 : Draw the Torque-Slip curves and evaluate the performance of 3 phase induction Motor.
CO5 : Apply different starting and speed control methods of 3 phase Induction Motor
CO6 : Describe the construction & working of single Phase Motors

Blue Print of Marks for SEE

Unit Unit Name Periods Questions to be set for SEE

No
R U A

1 Synchronous Motors 12 Q4 Q1 Q9(a) Q13(a)

2 Starters and Applications 08

498
 of Synchronous Motors

3 3 phase Induction
08
Motors
Q2 Q10(a) Q14(a)
4 Characteristics of 3
12
phase Induction Motor

5 Starters and Speed

Q9(b), Q13(b),
Control of 3 phase 08 Q5,Q6
Q11(a), Q11(b) Q15(a), Q15(b)
Induction Motor Q3
6 Single phase and Special Q10(b), Q14(b),
12 Q7,Q8
purpose Motors Q12(a), Q12(b) Q16(a), Q16(b)

Total 60 8 8 8

Course Content

UNIT - 1. Synchronous Motors Duration: 12 Periods ( L: 9 -T: 3)

Introduction - Rotating Magnetic field, synchronous speed, parts of synchronous Motor – Excitation of
rotor -working Principle – Back EMF – Resistance and synchronous Reactance – Effects of Load, Phasor
diagrams – Load Angle, power relation, Effects of change of Excitation at constant Load, Phasor
diagrams for: (a) Normal, (b)Under and c)Over excitation conditions, Effects of Excitation on Armature
current and power factor, Relation between Back EMF applied voltage, Simple problems - V – Curves
and inverted V – curves ,constant power lines.

UNIT - 2. Starters and Applications of Synchronous Motors Duration : 8 Periods ( L: 6 -T: 2)

Starting Device necessity – Methods of starting, phenomenon of hunting and its undesirable effects –
Methods to prevent hunting - synchronous condenser- calculation of KVA / KVAR Rating – problems -
Applications of synchronous motor.

UNIT – 3 Three phase Induction Motors Duration: 8 Periods ( L: 6 -T: 2)

Introduction – Constructional features – types of rotors - Principle of working &self starting features,
actual rotor speed - synchronous speed – slip - Effect of loading on slip – frequency and magnitude of
rotor EMF and reactance – Expression for rotor current on no load and On Load – problems - Induction

499
motor as a generalized transformer - Losses and Power transfer stages from stator to rotor - efficiency –
Relation between rotor copper losses , Rotor output and rotor input derivation and problems.

UNIT - 4. Characteristics of 3 phase Induction Motor Duration : 12 Periods ( L: 9 - T: 3)

Torque equation –Starting torque - condition for maximum torque – Relation Between full load torque,
starting Torque and maximum torque – Torque slip curves – modes of operation of induction machine –
braking of induction motor (no derivation and problems) - effects and variation of rotor resistance and
reactance on starting, full load and maximum torque - Effect of supply voltage on torque and speed –
problems - No load and blocked rotor tests - circle diagram from test data – Evaluation of torque –
efficiency - problems.

UNIT - 5 Starters and Speed Control of 3-phase Induction Motor

Duration : 8 Periods ( L: 6 -T: 2)
Starters for Induction motor – necessity of starters - Direct Switching - D.O.L starter - Star / Delta starter
- Auto Transformer starter -rotor resistance starters- Block Diagram of soft starter –Advantages and
Disadvantages- Double cage rotor motor – Improvement in performance features - Speed variation of
induction motors - Application of induction motors - Comparison of Synchronous and induction motors.

UNIT - 6 Single phase and Special purpose Motors Duration : 12 Periods ( L: 9 - T: 3)

Essential parts and constructional features of single phase motors – self starting -split phase, capacitor
start - capacitor run - shaded pole induction motor- Principle of working – Accessories like capacitors,
centrifugal switch – function –reversal of rotation - Applications - relative merits - A.C series motor –
principles of working – sparking elimination methods - applications - Universal motor- principle of
working, speed control and applications- Stepper motor-principle of working and applications- Servo
motor - principle of working and applications – linear induction motors – principle of working and
applications – BLDC and PMDC motors – principle of working and applications

Recommended Books

1. Electrical Technology by B.L. Theraja

2. Electrical Technology by J.B. Gupta
3. Electrical Technology by H. Cotton

500
4. Performance and design of A.C. Machines by M.G, Say
5. Performance of A.C. Machines by Langsdorf
6. Electrical motors applications and control by M.V. Deshpande

Suggested E-Learning references

1.http://electrical4u.com/
2. www.nptel.ac.in
3. https://ocw.mit.edu/courses/electrical-engineering-and-computer-science/

Suggested Learning Outcomes

After completion of the subject, the student shall be able to

1.1 State the Principle of Production of Rotating Magnetic Field in 3-phase System.
1.2 Describe the construction of synchronous motor.
1.3 State the parts of synchronous motor and explain.
1.4 Explain the principle of working of synchronous motor.
1.5 Describe the performance of synchronous motor on Load with phasor diagrams.
1.6 Explain the effects of varying excitation at constant load with phasor diagrams.
1.7 Describe the significance of ‘V’ curve.
1.8 Draw the ‘V’ curves for different loads.
1.9 Describe the significance of inverted ‘V’ curve.
1.10 Draw the inverted ‘V’ curve for different loads.

2.1 Explain the starting method of synchronous motor by Auxiliary motor.

2.2 Explain the starting method of synchronous motor by Damper winding.
2.3 Describe the phenomenon of HUNTING.
2.4 State “How HUNTING is prevented”?
2.5 Explain how a Synchronous motor can be used as a Synchronous condenser.
2.6 Solve simple problems on power factor correction.
2.7 State the applications of synchronous motor.

3.1 Explain the advantages of Induction Motors.

3.2 Describe the construction of slip ring Induction motor.

501
3.3 Explain the construction of squirrel cage Induction motor.
3.4 State the working principle of 3 phase induction motor.
3.5 Explain working of 3 phase induction motor on no load.
3.6 Describe working of 3 phase induction motor on Load.
3.7 Explain how an induction motor is treated as a generalized transformer.
3.8 Describe Power flow diagram and Efficiency.
3.9 Solve simple problems on Power and Efficiency.

4.1 Derive Torque Equation

4.2 Draw Torque – Slip characteristics of induction motor.
4.3 List various modes of operation of induction machine.
4.4 Name different braking methods.
4.5 Describe the plugging of three phase induction motor.
4.6 Describe the rheostatic braking of three phase induction motor.
4.7 Describe the regenerative braking of three phase induction motor.
4.8 Derive the expression for full load torque.
4.9 Explain the expression for starting torque.
4.10 Derive the expression for maximum torque.
4.11 Derive the relation between full load torque, starting Torque and maximum torque.
4.12 Solve simple problems on Torque.
4.13 Explain No-load test on induction motor.
4.14 Describe blocked rotor test on induction motor.
4.15 Draw circle diagram with the help of no-load and blocked rotor tests.
4.16 Solve problems on circle diagram.

5.1 List different types of starters used for induction motors.

5.2 Sketch the circuit diagram and explain the working of D.O.L. starter.
5.3 Sketch the circuit diagram and explain the working of Star/Delta Starter.
5.4 Sketch the circuit diagram and explain the working of Auto - Transformer starter.
5.5 Sketch the circuit diagram and explain the working of Rotor resistance starter.
5.6 Explain the working of Soft starter with block diagram
5.7 State the advantages of soft starter over conventional starters.
5.8 Explain construction features of double cage rotor motor.
5.9 Describe the speed control of inductor motors by Frequency changing.

502
5.10 Explain the speed control of inductor motors by Pole changing method.
5.11 Describe the speed control of inductor motors by Injecting voltage in rotor circuit.
5.12 Explain the speed control of inductor motors by Cascading method.
5.13 State the applications of inductor motors
5.14 Compare synchronous motors with induction motors.

6.1 State the types of single phase induction motors.

6.2 Describe the constructional features of single phase induction motor.
6.3 Explain the principle of working of single phase Induction motor by double field revolving
theory.
6.4 Describe the principle of working of single phase Induction motor by cross field theory.
6.5 Why a Single-phase Induction motor is not Self starting?
6.6 Describe the working of split phase motor
6.7 Describe the working of capacitor start motor
6.8 Describe the working of capacitor run motor
6.9 Mention the differences between capacitor start and capacitor run induction motors
6.10 Describe the working of shaded pole motor
6.11 State the applications of single phase induction motors
6.12 Compare single phase with three phase induction motors
6.13 Explain the working of linear induction motor.
6.14 State the applications of linear induction motor
6.15 Describe the working of single phase AC Series motor.
6.16 Explain the methods to eliminate sparking in AC series motor.
6.17 State the applications of single phase AC Series motor.
6.18 Explain the working of universal motor.
6.19 Explain the speed control of universal motor.
6.20 State the applications of single phase universal motor.
6.21 Explain the principle of working of Stepper motor.
6.22 State the applications of Stepper motor.
6.23 Describe the principle of working of Servo motor.
6.24 State the applications of Servo motor.
6.25 Describe the principle of working of PMDC motor.
6.26 State the applications of PMDC motor.
6.27 Describe the principle of working of BLDC motor.

503
6.28 State the applications of BLDC motor.

Suggested Student Activities

1. Student visits Library to refer to Electrical Manuals

2. Student visits the Lab to identify the available electrical equipments
3. Each Student has to prepare and submit at least 3 pages of self hand written report on (Construction
details, type of windings used, Insulating materials used, applications etc.,) Preferably by visiting a
nearby Substation/ Power station/ Industry/ Factory etc., considering any one of the following topics.
(a). 3-ph Induction motor- Squirrel-cage and Slip-ring type.
(b). Speed control of Induction motor.
(c). Types of Starters.
(d). 3-ph Synchronous Motors.
(e). 1-ph motors...
4. Quiz
5. Group Discussion
6. Surprise Test

CO-PO Mapping Matrix

504
 Communication

Lifelong learning
Discipline Knowledge

Engineering Tools

Ethics
Engineer and society
Basic knowledge

practice Experiments and

sustainability Environment &

work Individual and Team

Linked
PO

CO PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO 10

CO1 2 2 2 3 1,2,3,10

CO2 2 3 2 2 2,3,5,10

CO3 2 2 3 3 1,2,3,10

CO4 2 2 3 2 2 1,2,3,5,10

CO5 3 3 2 2 2,3,5,10

CO6 2 2 3 3 3 1,2,3,5,10

Internal Evaluation

Test Units Marks

Mid Sem 1 1 and 2 20

Mid Sem 2 3 and 4 20

Slip Test 1 1 and 2 5

Slip Test 2 3 and 4 5

Assignments - 5

Seminars - 5

Total 60

QUESTION PAPER PATTERN FOR MID SEMESTER EXAMS

Sl.No Description Level No of Marks for Choice Total Marks

Questions each question

01 Part-A Remembering(R) 4 1 Nil 4 Marks

02 Part-B Understanding(U) 4 3 2 6 Marks

03 Part-C Application(A) 4 5 2 10 Marks

505
 Total Marks 20 Marks

MID SEM-I EXAM

S.No Unit No R U A Remarks

1 Unit-I 1,2 5(a) 7(a)

5(b) 7(b)

2 Unit-II 3,4 6(a) 8(a)

6(b) 8(b)

Total Questions 4 4 4

MID SEM-II EXAM

S.No Unit No R U A Remarks

1 Unit-III 1,2 5(a) 7(a)

5(b) 7(b)

2 Unit-IV 3,4 6(a) 8(a)

6(b) 8(b)

Total Questions 4 4 4

The length of answer for each question framed in respect of Part-A, B&C shall not exceed
¼ of a page side, 1 page side and 2page sides respectively

QUESTION PAPER PATTERN FOR SEMESTER END EXAM

No of Marks for
Sl.No Description Level Choice Total Marks
Questions each question

01 Part-A Remembering(R) 8 1 Nil 8 Marks

02 Part-B Understanding(U) 8 3 4 12 Marks

03 Part-C Application(A) 8 5 4 20 Marks

Total Marks 40 Marks

506
 Questions to be set for SEE
Unit No
R U A

I
Q1 Q9(a) Q13(a)
II

III
Q2 Q10(a) Q14(a)
IV Q4

Q5,Q Q9(b), Q13(b),

V
6 Q11(a), Q11(b) Q15(a), Q15(b)
Q3
Q7,Q Q10(b), Q14(b),
VI
8 Q12(a), Q12(b) Q16(a), Q16(b)

Total Questions 8 8 8

18EE-502C
STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION &TRAINING ,TELANGANA
DIPLOMA IN ELECTRICAL & ELECTRONICS ENGG.
SUB CODE: 18EE-502C
AC MOTORS
MID SEM -I EXAM MODEL PAPER
TIME: 1HOUR. TOTAL MARKS: 20
_________________________________________________________________________________
PART – A Marks: 4 X 1= 4
Instructions: (1) Answer all questions
(2) Each question carries one mark.

1. Define ‘V’ curve.

2. On which parameters inverted ‘V’ curve is drawn.
3. Why damper winding is used.
4. List any two applications of synchronous motor.

507
 PART - B Marks: 2 x 3 = 6
Instructions: (1) Answer all questions.
(2) Each question carries three marks.

5.(a) State the parts of synchronous motor

OR
5.(b) Describe the significance of inverted ‘V’ curve.

6.(a) Explain the phenomenon of HUNTING.

OR
6. (b) State “How HUNTING is prevented”?

PART - C Marks: 2 x 5= 10
Instructions: (1) Answer all questions.
(2) Each question carries five marks.

7.(a). Explain the principle of working of synchronous motor.

OR
7.(b). Describe the construction of synchronous motor.

8.(a). Explain the starting method of synchronous motor by Auxiliary motor.

OR
8.(b). Explain how a Synchronous motor can be used as a Synchronous condenser.

18EE-502C
STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION &TRAINING ,TELANGANA
DIPLOMA IN ELECTRICAL & ELECTRONICS ENGG.
SUB CODE: 18EE-502C
AC MOTORS
MID SEM -II EXAM MODEL PAPER
TIME: 1HOUR. TOTAL MARKS: 20
_________________________________________________________________________________
PART – A Marks: 4 X 1= 4
Instructions: (1) Answer all questions
(2) Each question carries one mark.

1. Write the types of three phase induction motors.

2. In which type of three phase induction motor adding of external resistance is not possible.
3. Write the expression for starting torque.
4. Write the tests on three phase induction motor.

508
 PART - B Marks: 2 x 3 = 6
Instructions: (1) Answer all questions.
(2) Each question carries three marks.

5.(a). Write the Power flow diagram of three phase induction motor.

OR

5.(b). Write the advantages of three phase induction motors.

6.(a). Draw the Torque - Slip characteristics of induction motor.

OR
6.(b). Derive the expression for maximum torque

PART - C Marks: 2 x 5 = 10
Instructions: (1) Answer all questions.
(2) Each question carries five marks.

7.(a). Explain the construction of slip ring Induction motor.

OR
7.(b). Explain the working principle of squirrel cage Induction motor

8.(a). Explainthe procedure to conduct No-load test on induction motor.

OR
8.(b).Explainthe procedure to conduct blocked rotor test on induction motor

18EE-502C
STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION &TRAINING ,TELANGANA
DIPLOMA IN ELECTRICAL & ELECTRONICS ENGG.
SUB CODE: 18EE-502C
AC MOTORS
SEMESTER END EXAM MODEL PAPER
TIME: 2 HOURS TOTAL MARKS: 40

PART – A Marks : 8 X 1= 8
Instructions: (1) Answer all questions
(2) Each question carries one mark.

1. Draw inverted ‘V’ curves for different loads.

2. What are the types of three phase induction motors.
3. List any two starters used for three-phase induction motor.
4. Draw the graph between armature current and field current of three-phase synchronous motor.
5. List any two methods of speed control of three-phase squirrel cage induction motor.
6. Suggest suitable starter for a three-phase 10 HP induction motor.
7. Write the types of starting methods of single phase induction motor.

509
8. State any two applications of Stepper motor.

PART - B
Marks: 4 × 3= 12

Instructions: (1) Answer all questions.

(2) Each question carries three marks.

9.(a) State the parts of synchronous motor

OR
9.(b) Draw the sketch of D.O.L. starter

10.(a) Write any six advantages of Induction Motors

OR

10.(b) State the types of single phase induction motors.

11.(a) Draw the sketch of Auto - Transformer starter

OR

11.(b) State the applications of three phase inductor motors.

12.(a) State the working principle of single phase universal motor

OR

12.(b) State the applications of Stepper motor.

PART – C

Marks: 4 × 5= 20

Instructions: (1) Answer all questions.

(2) Each question carries five marks.

13.(a) Explain the performance of synchronous motor on Load with phasor diagrams

OR

13. (b) Sketch the circuit diagram and explain the working of Rotor resistance starter

14.(a) Derive the relation between full load torque, starting Torque and maximum torque.
OR

510
14.(b) Explain the working of capacitor start motor

15.(a) Explain the speed control of induction motor by change of frequency.

OR

15.(b) Compare synchronous motors with induction motors

16.(a) Explain the methods to eliminate sparking in single phase AC Series motor

OR

16.(b) Explain the working of PMDC motor

INDUSTRIAL ELECTRONICS

Course Title : Industrial Electronics Course Code : 18EE-503E(A)

Semester :V Course Group : Elective
Teaching Scheme in Periods : 45:15:0 Credits :3
(L:T:P) Total Contact Periods : 60
Methodology : Lecture + Tutorial SEE : 40 Marks
CIE : 60 Marks (Semester End Examination)
(Continuous Internal Evaluation)
This course is common with DECE – 18EC-502C

Pre requisites
This course requires the knowledge of electronic devices and semiconductor devices operation

Course Outcomes

511
CO1 : Compare various power electronic device characteristics; identify their Application and identify
the use of UPS and SMPS.

CO2 : Identify the use of choppers, rectifiers and inverters.

CO3 : Apply sensor for various applications

CO4 : Explain different welding techniques

CO5 : Use the concepts of PLC & SCADA for industrial applications

CO6 : Develop an understanding of control systems

Blue Print of Marks for SEE

Unit Unit Name Periods Questions to be set for SEE

No
R U A

1 Power Electronic Q4
12
Devices
Q1 Q9(a) Q13(a)
2 Choppers, rectifiers and
08
inverters

3 Transducers &
10
Ultrasonics
Q2 Q10(a) Q14(a)
4 Industrial Heating
10
&Welding

5 PLCs & Programming 12 Q3 Q5,Q6 Q9(b), Q13(b),

Q11(a), Q11(b) Q15(a),

512
 Q15(b)

6 Control Engineering Q14(b),

Q10(b),
8 Q7,Q8 Q16(a),
Q12(a), Q12(b)
Q16(b)

Total 60 8 8 8

Course Content
UNIT 1 - Power Electronic Devices Duration: 12 Periods (L: 9– T:3)
Different thyristor family devices- circuit symbols - Constructional details of SCR- Working of SCR
using two Transistor analogy- Volt-Ampere characteristics of SCR- Ratings of SCR- forward break over
voltage, latching current, holding current, turn on triggering time, turn off time of SCR- volt-ampere
characteristics of Diac & Triac under forward/Reverse bias- SUS, SBS, SCS & LASCR- SCR circuit
triggering by UJT - input and Output waveforms- Use of SCR in single phase and three phase Power
rectifiers- Volt-ampere characteristics of Diac - Volt-ampere characteristics of Triac- Phase control circuit
using Diac and Triac for AC power control- input and output waveforms. Need for protection of power
devices- Important specifications of power electronic devices from Manufacturer’s data sheet - Important
applications of power electronic devices- working of a) Off Line UPS b) Online UPS- PWM Voltage
control of UPS- Limitations of series Voltage regulated power supplies- Working of SMPS with block
diagram- Applications of SMPS- Working of Servo stabilizer .

UNIT 2 - Choppers, rectifiers and inverters.

Duration:08 Periods (L: 6– T:2)

Need for a chopper- types of choppers- principle of operation of choppers-need for a controlled rectifier-
single phase half-wave controlled rectifier- single phase full -wave controlled rectifier- 3-phase half-wave
controlled rectifier- 3- phase full -wave controlled rectifier-Define inverters- need for an inverter- types of
inverters- series inverter- parallel inverter.

UNIT 3 - Transducers &Ultrasonics Duration:10 Periods (L: 7.5– T:2.5)

Classification of transducers on the basis of principle of operation and applications- Working principle,
construction and applications of strain gauge- Working principle, construction and applications of
potentiometric transducer- Working principle, construction of capacitive and inductive transducers-
Important applications of transducers- Working principle, construction and applications of LVDT-

513
Working principle and construction of Piezo electric transducer-Uses for the Piezo electric transducer-
Working principle of RTD & Thermocouple transducer- Important applications of above transducers-
Application of transducer in Accelerometer, servomotors, and Tachogenerators-Methods of generating
ultrasonic waves-Draw and explain pulsed-echo ultrasonic flaw detector- Principle of MEMS devices-
Their uses in modern smart phones and other devices.

UNIT 4 - Industrial Heating &Welding Duration:10 Periods (L: 7.5– T:2.5)

Industrial heating methods- Principle of induction heating- Applications of induction heating-HF power
source for induction heating - Principle of dielectric heating- Electrodes used in dielectric heating &
method of coupling to RF generator- Applications of dielectric heating. Welding- types of Electrical
welding- Principle of resistive welding- Circuit of AC resistive welding - Applications of resistive
welding- Other welding Techniques.

UNIT 5 - PLCs & Programming Duration:12 Periods (L: 9– T:3)

Need for PLC- principle of PLCs- advantages and disadvantages of PLC’s- functional block diagram of
PLC- Ladder diagrams and sequence listing- ladder diagram for OR, AND, XOR logic and PLC code-
importance of PLC timers with examples. importance of PLC counters with examples- features of popular
PLCs like Siemens , Allenbradly- applications of PLCS- importance of SCADA- typical SCADA
system- applications of SCADA.

UNIT 6 - Control Engineering Duration:8 Periods (L: 6– T:2)

Definition of the System and Control system and its classification- Basic block diagram of control
system-Open loop control system with examples-Merits and demerits of open loop control-
Closed loop system with the help of a block diagram- Examples for closed loop system-
Comparison of Open and closed loop control systems- Transfer function-block diagram
reduction techniques- simple problems on reduction techniques.

Recommended Books

1. Power Electronics by P.C.Sen Tata McGraw-Hill Education

514
 2. Industrial Electronics and Control by S.K.Bhattacharya, S.Chatterjee TTTI Chandigarh –TES
3. Industrial And Power Electronics (Paperback) By: G. K. Mithal (Author) | Khanna
Publishers
4.  Control Systems Engineering by I. J. Nagrath And M. Gopal New Age Publisher,
New Delhi
5. PLCs & SCADA : Theory and Practice by Rajesh Mehra, Vikrant Vij- Laxmi
Publications

Suggested E-Learning references

1. http://electrical4u.com/
2. www.nptel.ac.in
3. www.Techopedia.com
4. www.circuitdigest.com

Suggested Learning Outcomes

Upon completion of this course a student should be able to

1.1 List different thyristor family devices.

1.2 Sketch the circuit symbols for each device.
1.3 Explain constructional details of SCR.
1.4 Explain the working of SCR using two Transistor analogy.
1.5 Explain the Volt-Ampere characteristics of SCR.
1.6 Mention the important ratings of SCR.
1.7 Define forward break over voltage, latching current, holding current, turn on triggering time,
turn off time of SCR.
1.8 Distinguish between SUS, SBS, SCS & LASCR

515
1.9 Explain SCR circuit triggering by UJT with a circuit diagram andDraw input and Output
waveforms.
1.10 Mention the use of SCR in single phase and three phase Power rectifiers.
1.11 Explain the working and Volt-ampere characteristics of Diac
1.12 Explain the working and Volt-ampere characteristics of Triac.
1.13 Explain the Phase control circuit using Diac and Triac for AC power control and Draw the input
and output waveforms.
1.14 Give important specifications of power electronic devices from Manufacturer’s data sheet.
1.15 List the six important applications of power electronic devices.
1.16 With a block diagram explain the working of a) Off Line UPS b) Online UPS
1.17 Explain the limitations of series Voltage regulated power supplies
1.18 Explain the working of SMPS with block diagram
1.19 Mention any 3 applications of SMPS.
1.20 Explain the working of Servo stabilizer.

2.1 Define choppers.

2.2 What is the need for a chopper?
2.3 List the types of choppers.
2.4 Explain the principle of operation of choppers.
2.5 What is the need for a controlled rectifier?
2.6 Draw and explain the principle of operation of single phase half-wave controlled
rectifier.
2.7 Draw and explain the principle of operation of single phase full -wave controlled
rectifier.
2.8 Draw and explain the principle of operation of 3-phase half-wave controlled rectifier.
2.9 Draw and explain the principle of operation of 3- phase full -wave controlled rectifier.
2.10 Define inverters.
2.11 What is the need for an inverter?
2.12 List the types of inverters.
2.13 Draw and explain the operation of series inverter.
2.14 Draw and explain the operation of parallel inverter.

516
3.1 Classify transducers on the basis of principle of operation and applications.
3.2 Explain the working principle, construction and applications of strain gauge.
3.3 Explain the working principle, construction and applications of potentiometric
transducer.
3.4 Explain the working principle, construction of capacitive and inductive transducers.
3.5 Mention the 6 important applications of above transducers.
3.6 Explain the working principle, construction and applications of LVDT.
3.7 Explain the working principle and construction of Piezo electric transducer.
3.8 List any 3 uses for the Piezo electric transducer
3.9 Explain the working principle of RTD & Thermocouple transducer.
3.10 Mention any 6 important applications of above transducers.
3.11 Explain the application of transducer in Accelerometer, servomotors, and
Tachogenerators.
3.12 Draw and explain pulsed-echo ultrasonic flaw detector
3.13 Explain the principle of MEMS devices
3.14 Mention their use in modern smart phones and other devices

4.1 Classify industrial heating methods.

4.2 Explain the principle of induction heating.
4.3 List four applications of induction heating.
4.4 Draw the circuit of HF power source for induction heating and explain its working.
4.5 Explain the principle of dielectric heating.
4.6 Explain the electrodes used in dielectric heating & method of coupling to RF generator.
4.7 Mention the applications of dielectric heating.
4.8 Define welding.
4.9 List 4 types of Electrical welding
4.10 Explain the principle of resistive welding.
4.11 Draw the basic circuit of AC resistive welding and explain its working.
4.12 Mention applications of resistive welding.
4.13 Mention the applications of other welding Techniques.

517
 5.1 Explain the need for PLC
5.2. Explain the basic principle of PLCs.
5.3. List out the advantages and disadvantages of PLC’s.
5.4. Draw and explain the functional block diagram of PLC.
5.5. Explain the Ladder diagrams and sequence listing.
5.6. Draw ladder diagram for OR logic and write the PLC code.
5.7. Draw ladder diagram for AND logic and write the PLC code.
5.8. Draw ladder diagram for XOR logic and write the PLC code
5.9. Explain the importance of PLC timers with examples.
5.10. Explain the importance of PLC counters with examples.
5.11. List the features of popular PLCs like Siemens , Allenbradly .
5.12. List any 4 applications of PLCS in the industry.
5.13. Mention the importance of SCADA.
5.14. Explain a typical SCADA system.
5.15. List the applications of SCADA.

6.1 Define system and Control system.

6.2. Classify control systems
6.3. Explain the basic block diagram of control system
6.4. Explain an open loop control system.
6.5. Give examples for open loop control system.
6.6. Give three merits and demerits of open loop control.
6.7. Explain the closed loop system with the help of a block diagram.
6.8. Give Examples for closed loop system
6.9. Compare Open loop and closed loop control systems.
6.10. Define Transfer function
6.11. Explain block diagram reduction techniques.
6.12. Solve simple problems using the above techniques.

Suggested Learning Outcomes

518
 1. Collect specifications and data sheets of various power electronic components.
2. Analyze the various components used and connections in the UPS available in the Institution
facility.
3. Compare various wielding techniques and their relevance to situation
4. Participate in the Quiz &discussion
5. Search internet for knowing latest trends in industrial electronics
6. Student visits to Library to refer to Manuals and related books of industrial electronics.

CO-PO Mapping Matrix

Engineer and society

Communication

Lifelong learning
Basic knowledge

Discipline Knowledge

Engineering Tools

Ethics
sustainability Environment &

work Individual and Team

practice Experiments and

Linked
PO

CO PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO 10

CO1 3 2 2 1,2,10

CO2 2 2 2 2,4,10

519
CO3 2 2 2 2,4,10

CO4 2 2 2 2,4,10

CO5 2 2 2 2 2,4,5,10

CO6 2 2 2 2 2,4,5,10

Internal Evaluation

Test Units Marks

Mid Sem 1 1 and 2 20

Mid Sem 2 3 and 4 20

Slip Test 1 1 and 2 5

Slip Test 2 3 and 4 5

Assignments - 5

Seminars - 5

Total 60

QUESTION PAPER PATTERN FOR MID SEMESTER EXAMS

Sl.No Description Level No of Marks for Choice Total Marks

Questions each question

01 Part-A Remembering(R) 4 1 Nil 4 Marks

02 Part-B Understanding(U) 4 3 2 6 Marks

03 Part-C Application(A) 4 5 2 10 Marks

Total Marks 20 Marks

MID SEM-I EXAM

S.No Unit No R U A

5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-I 1,2
5(b) 7(b)

6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-II 3,4
6(b) 8(b)

520
 Total Questions 4 4 4

MID SEM-II EXAM

S.No Unit No R U A

1 Unit-III 1,2 5(a) 7(a)

5(b) 7(b)

2 Unit-IV 3,4 6(a) 8(a)

6(b) 8(b)

Total Questions 4 4 4

The length of answer for each question framed in respect of Part-A, B&C shall not exceed
¼ of a page side, 1 page side and 2page sides respectively

QUESTION PAPER PATTERN FOR SEMESTER END EXAM

Marks for
No of
Sl.No Description Level each Choice Total Marks
Questions
question

01 Part-A Remembering(R) 8 1 Nil 8 Marks

02 Part-B Understanding(U) 8 3 4 12 Marks

03 Part-C Application(A) 8 5 4 20 Marks

Total Marks 40 Marks

Questions to be set for SEE

Unit No
R U A

I Q4
Q1 Q9(a) Q13(a)
II

III Q2 Q10(a) Q14(a)

IV

521
 Q9(b), Q13(b),
V Q5,Q6
Q11(a), Q11(b) Q15(a), Q15(b)
Q3
Q10(b), Q14(b),
VI Q7,Q8
Q12(a), Q12(b) Q16(a), Q16(b)

Total Questions 8 8 8

18EE-503E(A)
STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION &TRAINING ,TELANGANA
DIPLOMA IN ELECTRICAL & ELECTRONICS ENGG.
SUB CODE: 18EE-503E(A)
INDUSTRIAL ELECTRONICS

MID SEM -I MODEL PAPER

TIME: 1HOUR TOTAL MARKS: 20
_________________________________________________________________________________

PART – A Marks: 4Q X 1= 4
Instructions: (1) Answer all questions
(2) Each question carries one mark.

1. List different thyristor family devices

2.Draw the symbol of SCR, SCS.
3. Define choppers.
4. List the types of Inverters.

PART - B Marks: 2Q x 3 = 6
Instructions: (1) Answer all questions.
(2) Each question carries three marks.

5.(a)Explain the Volt-Ampere characteristics of SCR.

(OR)
5.(b) Explain the Volt-Ampere characteristics of Triac

522
6.(a).Explain the need for a controlled rectifier.
(OR)
6.(b) Explain the working principle of Chopper.

PART - C Marks: 2Q x 5= 10
Instructions: (1) Answer all questions.
(2) Each question carries five marks.

7.(a)Explain the working of SCR using two Transistor analogy.

(OR)
7.(b) Explain the Phase control circuit using Diac and Triac for AC power control.

8.(a) Explain the working of 3-phase half wave controlled rectifier.

(OR)
8.(b).Explain the working of SMPS with block diagram

523
 18EE-503E(A)
STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION &TRAINING ,TELANGANA
DIPLOMA IN ELECTRICAL & ELECTRONICS ENGG.
SUB CODE: 18EE-503E(A)
INDUSTRIAL ELECTRONICS

MID SEM –II MODEL PAPER

TIME: 1HOUR TOTAL MARKS: 20
_________________________________________________________________________________
PART – A Marks: 4Q X 1= 4
Instructions: (1) Answer all questions
(2) Each question carries one mark.

1. Classify transducers on the basis of principle of operation

2. List any 3 uses for the Piezo electric transducer
3. Classify industrial heating methods
4. Define welding.

PART - B Marks: 2Q x 3 = 6
Instructions: (1) Answer all questions.
(2) Each question carries three marks.

5.(a)Explain the principle of MEMS devices

(OR)
5.(b) Explain the working principle of RTD

6.(a) Explain the principle of resistive welding.

(OR)

6.(b). Explain the principle of dielectric heating

PART - C Marks: 2Q x 5 = 10
Instructions: (1) Answer all questions.
(2) Each question carries five marks.

7.(a) Explain the working principle, construction of LVDT.

(OR)
7.(b) Explain the working principle, construction of strain gauge.

8.(a) Draw the circuit of HF power source for induction heating and explain its working.
(OR)

8.(b). Draw the basic circuit of AC resistive welding and explain its working.

524
 18EE-503E(A)
STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION &TRAINING ,TELANGANA
DIPLOMA IN ELECTRICAL & ELECTRONICS ENGG.
SUB CODE: 18EE-503E(A)
INDUSTRIAL ELECTRONICS
SEMESTER END EXAM MODEL PAPER
TIME: 2 HOURS TOTAL MARKS: 40

PART – A Marks : 8Q X 1= 8
Instructions: (1) Answer all questions
(2) Each question carries one mark.

1. Mention any two applications of SMPS

2. List 4 types of Electrical welding.
3. List types of PLCs.
4. State the need for PLC.
5. List any two applications of PLCs in the industry.
6. List 2 applications of SCADA.
7. Define control system.
8. Define Transfer function.

PART - B
Marks: 4Q×3=12

Instructions: (1) Answer all questions.

(2) Each question carries three marks.

9.(a)Draw the Volt-ampere characteristics of Diac and Triac.

(OR)
9. (b) Explain the basic principle of PLC..

10. (a)Classify transducers on the basis of principle of operation and applications

(OR)
10.(b) Classify control systems and give examples for each control system.

11. (a)Draw the ladder diagram for XOR logic and write the PLC code.
(OR)
11.(b)Explain the importance of SCADA system.

12. (a)Compare Open loop and closed loop control systems.

(OR)
12. (b) Explain the basic block diagram of control system.

PART – C

525
 Marks: 4Q × 5= 20

Instructions: (1) Answer all questions.

(2) Each question carries five marks.

13.(a) Explain the working of online UPS with the help of block diagram.
(OR)

13. (b)Explain the importance of PLC timers with an example.

14. (a)Explain the principle of resistive welding.

(OR)
14.(b)Find the transfer function for the given block diagram.

H2

C(s)
G1 G2
R(s)

H1

H3

15. (a)Draw and explain the functional block diagram of PLC.

(OR)
15.(b)Explain basic SCADA system.

16. (a)Explain the closed loop system with the help of a block diagram
(OR)

16. (b) Explain the open loop system with the help of a block diagram.

526
 POWER ELECTRONICS

Course Title : Power Electronics Course Code : 18EE-503E(B)

Semester :V Course Group : Elective
Teaching Scheme in Periods : 45:15:0 Credits :3
(L:T:P) Total Contact Periods : 60
Methodology : Lecture + Tutorial SEE : 40 Marks
CIE : 60 Marks (Semester End Examination)
(Continuous Internal Evaluation)

Pre requisites

This course requires the knowledge of Electronics engineering(Semiconductor devices and circuits) and
Electrical Machines (DC and AC).

Course Outcomes
CO1 : Compare different power electronic devices and select the device based on the requirement
CO2 : Use different Converters circuits as per requirement.
CO3 : Acquire the knowledge to construct AC regulators and Choppers circuits.
CO4 : Acquire the knowledge to construct and use Inverters and Cyclo-converters circuits.
CO5 : Apply the power electronic drives for speed control of DC / AC Motors and compare
specific power electronics drives.
CO6 : Apply power electronic circuits for specific applications

Blue Print of Marks for SEE

527
 Unit Unit Name Periods Questions to be set for SEE
No
R U A

1 Power Electronic
10
Devices
Q1 Q9(a) Q13(a)
2 Converters 10

3 A.C Voltage regulators

08
and Choppers
Q2 Q10(a) Q14(a)
4 Inverters &Cyclo- Q4
12
converters

5 Speed Control of DC and Q13(b),

Q9(b),
AC Motors 08 Q5,Q6 Q15(a),
Q11(a), Q11(b)
Q15(b)
Q3
6 Applications of Power Q14(b),
Q10(b),
Electronic Circuits 12 Q7,Q8 Q16(a),
Q12(a), Q12(b)
Q16(b)

Total 60 8 8 8

Course Content

UNIT 1 - Power Electronic Devices Duration: 10 Periods (L: 7.5 - T: 2.5)

ISI circuit symbols for each device in thyristor family – Construction, Working principle and static VI
characteristics of devices: SCR, GTO SCR- comparison between SCR and GTO SCR- Two transistor
analogy of SCR , Gate characteristics of SCR, Ratings of SCR: Forward break over voltage, latching
current, holding current, turn on time, turn off time – advantages of SCR as switch -static VI
characteristics and working of DIAC, TRIAC, IGBT - applications of SCR, GTO SCR, DIAC, TRIAC,
IGBT, LASCR - triggering of SCR using UJT - Necessity of Commutation- various methods of Thyristor
Commutation techniques.

UNIT 2– Converters Duration: 10 Periods (L: 7.5 – T: 2.5)

Classification of converters, Advantages and disadvantages of power electronic converters- single phase
half wave controlled converter with R load, R-L load, Need of freewheeling diode- single phase half
wave controlled converter with R-L load with freewheeling diode, single phase full wave full controlled
converter with R load, R-L load - three phase half wave converter with R load.

UNIT 3 – A.C Voltage regulators and Choppers Duration: 8 Periods (L: 6 – T: 2)

528
Single phase half wave and full wave AC voltage regulator with R load - Applications of AC voltage
regulators - Choppers- Classification of Choppers, Four quadrant operation of a chopper, different voltage
control modes of operation, Applications of choppers.

UNIT 4 – Inverters &Cyclo-converters Duration: 12 Periods (L: 9 –T: 3)

Classification of Inverters-basic series Inverter- parallel Inverter- single phase bridge Inverter –
applications of inverters -Cyclo-converter – basic principle of operation- single-phase center tapped
Cyclo-converter- applications of Cyclo-converters.

UNIT 5 - Speed Control of DC and AC Motors Duration: 8 Periods (L: 6 –T: 2)

Advantages of power electronic drives - DC Motor control - Speed control of DC shunt Motor and DC
Series motor by using single phase converters and choppers-Compare chopper controlled drives and
converter controlled drives - AC Motor Controls- speed control of 3 phase induction Motor by using AC
voltage controllers.

UNIT 6 - Applications of Power Electronic Circuits Duration: 12 Periods (L: 9 –T: 3)

Applications of power electronic circuits- Types of disturbances in commercial power supply - devices to
suppress spikes in supply voltages – SMPS - On line and Off line UPS – advantages - applications –
estimation of UPS rating and battery rating for a given load and backup time - Light dimmer Circuit-
Burglar alarm Circuit- Emergency lamp Circuit using SCR—power control circuits using SCR –
Protecting power devices.

Recommended Books

1. Power Electronics– JameelAsghar PHI, New Delhi.

2. Electronics In Industry – George M. Chute & Robert D. Chute
3. Industrial Electronics – G.K.Mithal
4. Power Electronics - P.C.Sen.
5. Industrial Electronics – M.S. Berde
6. Industrial & Power Electronics- Harish Rai.
7. Industrial Electronics and Control - S.K.Bhattacharya&S.Chatterjee
8. Article by R.K.Sugandhi& KK Sugandhi -Thyristor( theory& applications)
9. Power electronics by M.D. Singh &K.B.kanchandani

Suggested E-Learning references

529
1. http://electrical4u.com/
2. www.nptel.ac.in
3. https://ocw.mit.edu/courses/electrical-engineering-and-computer-science/
4. http://www.eng.uwi.tt/depts/elec/staff/rdefour/ee33d/index.html

Suggested Learning Outcomes

After completion of the subject, the student shall be able to

1.1 List different devices of thyristor family.

1.2 Draw the ISI circuit symbols for each device in thyristor family.
1.3 Explain the constructional details of SCR
1.4 Explain the two transistor analogy of SCR.
1.5 Explain the static Volt – Ampere characteristics of SCR with the help of a diagram.
1.6 Draw the Gate characteristics of SCR
1.7 Explain SCR triggering by UJT.
1.8 Mention the ratings of SCR.
1.9 Give the advantages of SCR as a switch.
1.10 Explain the construction of GTO SCR and its static VI characteristics with the help of diagram.
1.11 Compare GTO SCR and SCR.
1.12 Explain the static Volt-ampere characteristics of DIAC with the help of diagram.
1.13 Explain the static Volt-ampere characteristics of TRIAC with the help of diagram.
1.14 Explain the working of Insulated gate Bipolar transistor (IGBT) by giving their static V-I
characteristics.
1.15 State the necessity of Commutation in SCR’s
1.16 Explain various methods of Commutation methods for SCR.
1.17 List applications of SCR, GTO SCR, DIAC, TRIAC, IGBT, LASCR

2.1. Classify converters.

2.2. List the advantages and disadvantages of Power Electronic converters
2.3. Explain the working of single-phase half wave controlled converter with Resistive load..
2.4. Explain the working of single-phase half wave controlled converter with R-L load.
2.5. State the need of freewheeling diode
2.6. Explain the working of single-phase half wave controlled converter with R-L loads and
freewheeling diode
2.7. Explain the working of single phase full wave fully controlled converter with resistive load.
2.8. Explain the working of single phase full wave fully controlled converter with R- L load.
2.9. Explain the working of three-phase half wave controlled converter with Resistive load
2.10. List the applications of Power Electronic converters

3.1 Define AC voltage regulator.

3.2 Explain the working of single phase half wave AC voltage regulator.
3.3 Explain the working of single phase full wave AC voltage regulator.
530
3.4 List the applications of AC voltage regulators.
3.5 Define Chopper.
3.6 Classify choppers.
3.7 Explain the working principle of chopper.
3.8 Describe the voltage control modes of chopper
3.9 Explain the working of step-down chopper.
3.10 Explain the operation of chopper in all four quadrants.
3.11 List the applications of choppers.

4.1 Define inverter.

4.2 Classify inverters.
4.3 Explain the working of series inverter.
4.4 Explain the working of parallel inverter
4.5 Explain the working of single-phase bridge inverter with R load.
4.6 List the applications of inverter.
4.7 Define Cyclo-converter.
4.8 Explain the basic principle of Cyclo-converter.
4.9 Explain the working of single-phase centre tapped Cyclo-converter.
4.10 List the applications of Cyclo-converter.

5.1 List the advantages of power electronic drives.

5.2 List the dis-advantages of power electronic drives.
5.3 Mention the factors affecting the speed of DC Motors.
5.4 Explain the speed control for DC Shunt motor using single phase converters.
5.5 Explain the speed control for DC Series motor using single phase converters
5.6 Explain the speed control for DC Shunt motor and using chopper.
5.7 Explain the speed control for DC Series motor using chopper.
5.8 Compare chopper controlled drives and converter controlled drives
5.9 List the factors affecting speed of the AC Motors.
5.10 Explain the speed control of Induction Motor by using AC voltage controller.

6.1 List any six applications of power electronic circuits.

6.2 List the types of disturbances in commercial power supply.
6.3 List the devices used to suppress spikes in supply voltages.
6.4 Classify UPS
6.5 Draw and explain the block diagram of off-line UPS.
6.6 Draw and explain the block diagram of on-line UPS.
6.7 List the storage batteries used in UPS.
6.8 List the advantages of on-line and off-line UPS
6.9 List the applications of on-line and off-line UPS
6.10 Estimate the UPS rating and battery rating for a given load and backup time
6.11 Explain SMPS with block diagram.
6.12 List the advantages of SMPS.
6.13 Explain the Light dimmer circuit using DIAC/TRIAC with the help of a diagram.

6.14 Explain the power control circuits using SCRs.

6.15 Explain the mechanism of protecting power devices – overvoltage protection – crowbar circuit –
Circuit breakers using SCRs.
6.16 Explain the Burglar alarm circuit using SCR with the help of a diagram.
6.17 Explain the Emergency lamp circuit using SCR with the help of a diagram.

531
 Suggested Student Activities

1. Student visits Library to refer to Electrical Manuals and IEEE papers on related topic
2. Student visits the Lab to experiment with converters, inverters and view the models of different
applications of Power Electronics circuits
3. Visit nearby Industry to familiarize with applications of different power electronic circuits &
drives
4. Quiz
5. Group discussion
6. Surprise test

CO-PO Mapping Matrix

Engineer and society
Basic knowledge

Communication

Lifelong learning
Discipline Knowledge

Engineering Tools

Ethics
sustainability Environment &

work Individual and Team

practice Experiments and

Linked
PO

CO PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO 10

CO1 3 2 2 1,2,10

CO2 2 2 2 2,4,10

CO3 2 2 2 2,4,10

CO4 2 2 2 2,4,10

CO5 2 2 2 2 2,4,5,10

CO6 2 2 2 2 2,4,5,10

Internal Evaluation

Test Units Marks

Mid Sem 1 1 and 2 20

532
 Mid Sem 2 3 and 4 20

Slip Test 1 1 and 2 5

Slip Test 2 3 and 4 5

Assignments - 5

Seminars - 5

Total 60

QUESTION PAPER PATTERN FOR MID SEMESTER EXAMS

Sl.No Description Level No of Marks for Choice Total Marks

Questions each question

01 Part-A Remembering(R) 4 1 Nil 4 Marks

02 Part-B Understanding(U) 4 3 2 6 Marks

03 Part-C Application(A) 4 5 2 10 Marks

Total Marks 20 Marks

MID SEM-I EXAM

S.No Unit No R U A

5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-I 1,2
5(b) 7(b)

6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-II 3,4
6(b) 8(b)

Total Questions 4 4 4

MID SEM-II EXAM

S.No Unit No R U A

1 Unit-III 1,2 5(a) 7(a)

5(b) 7(b)

2 Unit-IV 3,4 6(a) 8(a)

6(b) 8(b)

533
 Total Questions 4 4 4

The length of answer for each question framed in respect of Part-A, B&C shall not exceed
¼ of a page side, 1 page side and 2page sides respectively

QUESTION PAPER PATTERN FOR SEMESTER END EXAM

Marks for
No of
Sl.No Description Level each Choice Total Marks
Questions
question

01 Part-A Remembering(R) 8 1 Nil 8 Marks

02 Part-B Understanding(U) 8 3 4 12 Marks

03 Part-C Application(A) 8 5 4 20 Marks

Total Marks 40 Marks

Questions to be set for SEE

Unit No
R U A

I
Q1 Q9(a) Q13(a)
II

III
Q2 Q10(a) Q14(a)
IV Q4

Q9(b), Q13(b),
V Q5,Q6
Q11(a), Q11(b) Q15(a), Q15(b)
Q3
Q10(b), Q14(b),
VI Q7,Q8
Q12(a), Q12(b) Q16(a), Q16(b)

Total Questions 8 8 8

18EE-503E(B)
STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION &TRAINING ,TELANGANA
DIPLOMA IN ELECTRICAL & ELECTRONICS ENGG.
SUB CODE: 18EE-503E(B)
POWER ELECTRONICS
MID SEM -I MODEL PAPER
TIME: 1HOUR TOTAL MARKS: 20
_________________________________________________________________________________

PART – A Marks: 4Q X 1= 4
Instructions: (1) Answer all questions

534
 (2) Each question carries one mark.

1. List different devices of thyristor family

2. Draw the ISI symbols for a) SCR, b) GTO SCR
3. Classify converters in any two aspects.
4. What is the need of freewheeling diode in converter

PART - B Marks: 2Q x 3 = 6
Instructions: (1) Answer all questions.
(2) Each question carries three marks.

5.(a) Define latching current and holding current of SCR.

OR
5.(b) Draw the static Volt-ampere characteristics of DIAC with the help of a diagram.

6.(a) Draw the input and output waveforms of single-phase half wave controlled converter with
resistive load.

OR
6. (b) Write the advantages of Power Electronic converters

PART - C Marks: 2Q x 5= 10
Instructions: (1) Answer all questions.
(2) Each question carries five marks.

7.(a). Explain the two-transistor analogy of SCR with equivalent circuit.

OR
7.(b). Explain the static Volt-ampere characteristics of TRIAC with the help of a diagram.

8.(a). Explain the working of single phase full wave bridge converter with R- L load.
OR
8.(b). Explain the working of three-phase half wave controlled converter with Resistive load

18EE-503E(B)
STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION &TRAINING ,TELANGANA
DIPLOMA IN ELECTRICAL & ELECTRONICS ENGG.
SUB CODE: 18EE-503E(B)
POWER ELECTRONICS
MID SEM –II MODEL PAPER
TIME: 1HOUR TOTAL MARKS: 20
_________________________________________________________________________________
PART – A Marks: 4Q X 1= 4
Instructions: (1) Answer all questions
(2) Each question carries one mark.

535
 1. Give the classification of choppers.
2. List any two applications of AC voltage regulators.
3. Classify inverters in any one aspect.
4. List any two applications of Cyclo-converters.

PART - B Marks: 2Q x 3 = 6
Instructions: (1) Answer all questions.
(2) Each question carries three marks.

5.(a).Explain the working of single phase half wave AC voltage regulators.

OR

5.(b).Explain the working principle of chopper.

6.(a). Draw the input and output waveforms of series inverter.

OR
6.(b). Draw the circuit of parallel inverter

PART - C Marks: 2Q x 5 = 10
Instructions: (1) Answer all questions.
(2) Each question carries five marks.

7.(a).Explain the working of single phase full wave AC voltage regulator.

OR
7.(b). Describe the voltage control modes of chopper

8.(a). Explain the working of single-phase bridge inverter with R load.

OR
8.(b).Explain the basic principle of Cyclo-converter

18EE-503E(B)
STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION &TRAINING ,TELANGANA
DIPLOMA IN ELECTRICAL & ELECTRONICS ENGG.
SUB CODE: 18EE-503E(B)
POWER ELECTRONICS
SEMESTER END EXAM MODEL PAPER
TIME: 2 HOURS TOTAL MARKS: 40

PART – A Marks : 8Q X 1= 8
Instructions: (1) Answer all questions
(2) Each question carries one mark.

536
 1. Draw the ISI symbols for a) TRIAC, b) LASCR
2. Define AC regulator
3. List any two applications of choppers.
4. Classify inverters based on any one aspects.
5. Draw the circuit of single phase full converter.
6. Write any two speed control methods of DC motor.
7. List any two types of UPS.
8. List any two advantages of SMPS.

PART - B
Marks: 4Q×3=12

Instructions: (1) Answer all questions.

(2) Each question carries three marks.

9.(a). Draw the Gate characteristics of SCR.

OR
9.(b). List the factors affecting speed of the AC Motors.

10.(a). List the applications of AC voltage regulators

OR
10.(b). List any six applications of power electronic circuits

11.(a). List the advantages of power electronic drives.

OR
11.(b). Compare chopper controlled drives and converter controlled drives in any three
aspects.

12.(a). List the types of disturbances in commercial power supply.

OR
12.(b). List the advantages of online UPS.

PART – C

Marks: 4Q × 5= 20

Instructions: (1) Answer all questions.

(2) Each question carries five marks.

13.(a). Explain the static Volt-ampere characteristics of DIAC with the help of a diagram.
OR
13.(b). Explain the speed control of Induction Motor by using AC voltage controller.

537
 14.(a). Explain the operation of chopper in all four quadrants.
OR
14.(b). Draw the block diagram of an off-line UPS.

15.(a). Explain the speed control for DC Series motor using chopper.

OR
15.(b). Explain the speed control of Induction Motor by using AC voltage controller.

16.(a). Explain the Burglar alarm circuit using SCR with the help of a diagram.

OR

16.(b). Explain the power control circuit using SCR.

SWITCHGEAR AND PROTECTION

Course Title : Switchgear and Protection Course Code : 18EE-504E(A)
Semester :V Course Group : Elective
Teaching Scheme in : 45:15:0 Credits :3
Periods (L:T:P) Total Contact Periods : 60
Methodology : Lecture + Tutorial SEE : 40 Marks
CIE : 60 Marks (Semester End Examination)
(Continuous Internal Evaluation)

Pre requisites
538
This course requires the basic knowledge of mathematics and science.
This course requires the knowledge of AC Machines, Transmission lines

Course Outcomes

CO1 : Classify Switchgear and Fuses

CO2 : Describe the function of High Voltage Circuit Breakers and Evaluate the Short Circuit KVA
CO3 : Classify Protective Relays
CO4 : Describe the Schemes of Protection for Alternators and Transformers
CO5 : Explain Protection Schemes for Transmission Lines and Feeders
CO6 : Explain the importance of Lightning Arrestors and necessity of Neutral Earthing

Blue Print of Marks for SEE

Unit Unit Name Periods Questions to be set for SEE

No
R U A

1 Switches & Fuses 06 Q4

2 Circuit Breakers & Q1 Q9(a) Q13(a)

14
Reactors

3 Protective Relaying 10 Q2 Q10(a) Q14(a)

539
 4 Protection of Alternators
10
and Transformers

5 Protection of
Q9(b), Q13(b),
Transmission Lines and 10 Q5,Q6
Q11(a), Q11(b) Q15(a), Q15(b)
Feeders Q3
6 Lighting Arrestors and Q10(b), Q14(b),
10 Q7,Q8
Neutral Grounding Q12(a), Q12(b) Q16(a), Q16(b)

Total 60 8 8 8

Course Content
UNIT 1 -Switches & Fuses Duration: 6 Periods (L: 4.5 – T: 1.5)
Switch gear– Isolators, Load break switch, Air break switches, Earth Switches – Fuse - Types of fuses
based on rated current - Fusing current, Fusing factor, cut-off characteristics –time current
characteristics-HRC fuse-Liquid power fuse-application of fuses

UNIT 2 – Circuit Breakers & Reactors Duration: 14 Periods (L: 10.5– T: 3.5)
Circuit breakers - phenomenon of arc - arc voltage, arc current –Arc quenching- Circuit breakers
classification based on the medium of arc quenching– Working of O.C.B, A.B. C.B, SF6 C.B & VCB
and their comparisons.
Reactors –their necessity - Types of reactors– Equation for short circuit KVA .

UNIT 3 – Protective Relaying Duration: 10 Periods (L: 7.5 – T: 2.5 )

Relay Requirements - Features of relays – Classifications based on principle of operation and time of
operation –solenoid plunger type-attracted armature relays - Construction and working of induction type
over current relays – Directional Over current relay-Numerical over current relay- Impedance distance
relay.

UNIT 4 – Protection of Alternators and Transformers Duration: 10 Periods (L: 7.5 – T: 2.5 )
Protection of Alternators Schemes - Probable faults- Differential protection - Earth fault protection –
Split phase protection - Field suppression protection - Protection of Transformer - Possible faults in the

540
transformer – Precautions required for protection – Differential protections - Protection against excessive
heating of transformer oil - Buchholz relay.

UNIT 5 - Protection of Transmission Lines and Feeders Duration: 10 Periods (L: 7.5 – T: 2.5)
Transmission line and feeder protection- Pilot wires - Distance and impedance relays in Transmission
lines - Combined protection using definite distance and time distance relays – Protection of radial feeders,
parallel feeders, and ring main feeders- Bus bar protection.

UNIT 6: Lighting Arrestors and Neutral Grounding Duration: 10 Periods (L: 7.5 – T: 2.5)
Surge Protection- Need for Surge Protection -Surge types and causes of surges – Scheme of surge
protection with diagram - Various types of LA’s –Rod gap, Horn gap, expulsion type, valve type, metal
oxide, - Neutral grounding and its Methods.

Recommended Books
1. Principle of Power systems - V.K. Mehta
2. Electrical power systems - S.L. Uppal
3. Text book of Electrical power systems - SONY, Gupta Bhatnagar
4. Electrical power systems- JB Gupta
5. Electrical power Systems - CL Wadhwa
6. Switch gear and Protection by Sunil S. Rao
7. Power System Protection And Switchgear by Buvanesh A Oza, Nirmalkumar C Nair, Rases P Mehta
and Vijay H Makwana, McGraw HILL Education(India Pvt. Ltd) Newdelhi
8. J.B.Gupta “Switchgear & Protection”, (edition), Katson Publisher,2008
9. MadhavaRao T.S., 'Power System Protection - Static Relays', McGraw Hill, New
Delhi,2nd Edition, 21st reprinted, 2008.
10. Handbook of Switchgears by BHEL
11. Testing , commissioning , operation and maintenance of electrical equipment by
Sunil S Rao ,Khanna Publications

Suggested E-Learning references

1. electrical4u.com
2. www.nptel.ac.in
3. https://ocw.mit.edu/courses/electrical-engineering-and-computer-science/
4. http://www.pdfsdocuments.com/testing-commissioning-operation-maintenanceelectrical-
equipments.pdf
5. youtube videos on circuit breakers
6. youtube videos on protective relays
7. nptel videos on switchgear protection

541
Suggested Learning Outcomes
1.1 State the types of faults in power system and their effects.
1.2 Define switch gear.
1.3 Classify switch gear with respect to voltage level
1.4 State the purpose of isolators, load break switches,air break switches and earth switches
1.5 List the uses and limitations of different types of switches.
1.6 Explain fuse as protective device.
1.7 Define the following
i) Rated current ii) Fusing current iii) Fusing factor
1.8 Draw and explain cut- off characteristics of fuse
1.9 Draw and explain Time-current characteristics of a fuse
1.10 List types of fuses
1.11 Explain the working principle of HRC fuse
1.12 Explain the working principle of Liquid power fuse

2.1 Explain the phenomenon of arc, arc voltage, arc current.

2.2 State factors responsible for arc formation.
2.3 Describe the methods of arc quenching.
2.4 Classify the circuit breakers based upon medium of arc quenching.
2.5 Describe with neat diagram the working of oil circuit breaker(OCB).
2.6 Explain with a legible sketch the principle of working of Air blast circuit breaker.
2.7 Explain with a legible sketch the principle of working of SF 6 circuit breaker.
2.8 Explain with a legible sketch the principle of working of Vacuum circuit breaker.
2.9 State the importance of current limiting reactors in power systems.
2.10 List the types of reactors.
2.11 Describe the construction of the different types of reactors.
2.12 Draw the schematic diagram of reactor connections.
2.13 State the importance of short circuit KVA.
2.14 Solve simple problems on short circuit KVA

3.1 State the basic requirements of relays

542
3.2 State the important features of relays.
3.3 Classify the relays based upon
i) Principle of Operation ii) Time of operation.
3.4 Describe the working of solenoid plunger type relay
3.5 Describe the working of attracted armature relays.
3.6 List the uses of attracted armature relays.
3.7 Describe the construction and working of induction type over current relay.
3.8 Define the current setting, time setting of relays.
3.9 Explain the principle of obtaining directional property in induction relays.
3.10 Describe the working of directional over current induction relay.
3.11 List the applications of directional over current induction relay.
3.12 Explain with block diagram the working of numerical over current relay
3.13 Explain the principle of working of impedance relay.
3.14 List the applications of impedance relay.
3.15 Describe the current differential protection.
3.16 Describe the voltage differential protection

4.1 List the probable faults in Alternator Stator and rotor.

4.2 State the effects of faults on Alternator Stator and rotor.
4.3 Describe the scheme of protection against excessive heating of stator and rotor.
4.4 Explain the differential protection for alternator stator.
` 4.5 Explain the earth fault protection for rotor.
4.6 Explain the split phase protection of alternator against inter turn short circuits.
4.7 Explain the need and working of field suppression protection.
4.8 List the possible faults in a transformer and mention their effects.
4.9 List the precautions to be taken for applying differential protection to transformers.
4.10 Explain differential protection of transformer.

4.11 Explain the working of Buchholz relay.

5.1 Explain the different schemes of protection for single and duplicate bus bars.
5.2 Describe the transmission line and feeder protection.
5.3 Explain pilot wires and their effects.
5.4 Explain the protection of transmission lines using impedance relays.
5.5 Explain combined protection of transmission line using definite distance and time distance relays
543
 5.6 Explain protection of radial feeders using time graded relays.
5.7 Explain protection of parallel feeders using directional relays.
5.8 Explain protection of ring main feeder using directional relays.
5.9 Explain differential protection for parallel feeders of transmission lines.

6.1 Define surge.

6.2 List the types of surges
6.3 Give reasons for the cause of surges.
6.4 Explain the working principle of Lightning arrester with diagram.
6.5 List the six types of lightning arrestors for outdoor applications
6.6 Describe the construction and working of following types of lightning arrestors.
i) Rod gap ii) Horn gap iii) Expulsion type iv) valve type v) Metal oxide
6.7 List the applications of above lightning arrestors.
6.8 Explain the necessity of neutral grounding .
6.9 Give the merits and demerits of neutral grounding.
6.10 Describe the following methods of neutral grounding
i) Solid grounding ii) Resistance grounding iii) Reactance grounding iv) Voltage transformer
grounding v) Zig-zag transformer grounding .
6.11 Compare the different methods of neutral grounding

Suggested Student Activities

1. Student visits Library to refer to Switchgear and Protection subject related books
2. Visit nearby substation and prepare a report
3. Quiz
4. Group discussion
5. Surprise test
6. Register for MOOCS courses

544
CO-PO Mapping Matrix

Communication

Lifelong learning
Basic knowledge

Discipline Knowledge

Engineering Tools

Ethics
Engineer and society
practice Experiments and

sustainability Environment &

work Individual and Team

Linked
PO

CO PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO 10

CO1 2 2 2 3 1,2,3,10
CO2 2 2 3 2 1,2,3,10
CO3 2 2 2 3 1,2,5,10
CO4 2 2 2,10
CO5 3 2 2,10
CO6 2 3 2,10

Internal Evaluation

Test Units Marks

Mid Sem 1 1 and 2 20

Mid Sem 2 3 and 4 20

Slip Test 1 1 and 2 5

Slip Test 2 3 and 4 5

Assignments - 5

545
 Seminars - 5

Total 60

QUESTION PAPER PATTERN FOR MID SEMESTER EXAMS

No of Marks for
Sl.No Description Level Choice Total Marks
Questions each question

01 Part-A Remembering(R) 4 1 Nil 4 Marks

02 Part-B Understanding(U) 4 3 2 6 Marks

03 Part-C Application(A) 4 5 2 10 Marks

Total Marks 20 Marks

MID SEM-I EXAM

S.No Unit No R U A

5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-I 1,2
5(b) 7(b)

6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-II 3,4
6(b) 8(b)

Total Questions 4 4 4

MID SEM-II EXAM

S.No Unit No R U A

1 Unit-III 1,2 5(a) 7(a)

5(b) 7(b)

2 Unit-IV 3,4 6(a) 8(a)

6(b) 8(b)

Total Questions 4 4 4

The length of answer for each question framed in respect of Part-A, B&C shall not exceed
¼ of a page side, 1 page side and 2page sides respectively

QUESTION PAPER PATTERN FOR SEMESTER END EXAM

546
 No of Marks for
Sl.No Description Level Choice Total Marks
Questions each question

01 Part-A Remembering(R) 8 1 Nil 8 Marks

02 Part-B Understanding(U) 8 3 4 12 Marks

03 Part-C Application(A) 8 5 4 20 Marks

Total Marks 40 Marks

Questions to be set for SEE

Unit No
R U A

I
Q1 Q9(a) Q13(a)
II

III
Q2 Q10(a) Q14(a)
IV Q4

Q9(b), Q13(b),
V Q5,Q6
Q11(a), Q11(b) Q15(a), Q15(b)
Q3
Q10(b), Q14(b),
VI Q7,Q8
Q12(a), Q12(b) Q16(a), Q16(b)

Total Questions 8 8 8

STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION &TRAINING ,TELANGANA

DIPLOMA IN ELECTRICAL & ELECTRONICS ENGG.
SUB CODE: 18EE-504E (A)
SWITCHGEAR AND PROTECTION
MID SEM -I MODEL PAPER
TIME: 1HOUR TOTAL MARKS: 20
_________________________________________________________________________________
Important Note: Wherever any question has choice, marks will be allotted only to first attempted
question. No marks will be allotted for extra questions answered
PART – A Marks: 4Q X 1= 04
Instructions: (1) Answer all questions
(2) Each question carries One mark.
1. Define switchgear.
2. State the use of an isolator.
3. Define Arc.
4. State the use of a Reactor.
PART - B Marks: 2Q x 3 = 06

547
 Instructions: (1) Answer all questions
(2) Each question carries Three marks.
5(a) List the types of fuses .
or
5(b) Write the differences between isolator and earth switch
6(a) Classify circuit breakers based on arc quenching medium
Or
6(b) Mention any three advantages of SF6 circuit breakers

PART - C Marks: 2Q x 5= 10
Instructions: (1) Answer all questions
(2) Each question carries Five marks.
7(a) Explain the purpose of Isolators, Air break switches and Earth switches
or
7(b) Explain operation of HRC fuse with diagram.
8(a) An Vacuum circuit breaker is used on the HV side of the transformer in a substation .
Explain why it is preferred over air blast circuit breaker.
Or
8(b) Draw the schematic diagram of reactor connections.

STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION &TRAINING ,TELANGANA

DIPLOMA IN ELECTRICAL & ELECTRONICS ENGG.
SUB CODE: 18EE-504E (A)
SWITCHGEAR AND PROTECTION
MID SEM -II MODEL PAPER
TIME: 1HOUR TOTAL MARKS: 20
_________________________________________________________________________________
PART – A Marks: 4Q X 1= 04
Instructions: (1) Answer all questions
(2) Each question carries One mark.

1. Define Over Current Relay.

2. Define PSM.
3. List the protection schemes ofAlternator.
4. List the possible faults in a transformer.

548
 PART - B Marks: 2Q x 3 = 06
Instructions: (1) Answer all questions.
(2) Each question carries Three marks.

5(a) State the basic requirements of relays

or
5(b) List the applications of impedance relay

6(a) State the effects of faults on Alternator Stator

or
6(b) Describe the current differential protection of transformer

PART - C Marks: 2Q x 5= 10
Instructions: (1) Answer all questions
(2) Each question carries Five marks.

7(a) Describe the working of induction type over current relay

or
7(b) Explain the working of Buchholz relay

8(a) Explain the working of field suppression protection of alternator

or
8(b) Describe the working of solenoid plunger type relay

18EE-504E (A)
STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION &TRAINING , TELANGANA
DIPLOMA IN ELECTRICAL & ELECTRONICS ENGG.
SUB CODE: 18EE-504E (A)
SWITCHGEAR AND PROTECTION
SEMESTER END EXAM MODEL PAPER
TIME:2 HOURS TOTAL MARKS: 40
________________________________________________________________________________
PART – A Marks: 8Q X 1= 8
Instructions: (1) Answer all questions
(2) Each question carries one mark.
1. Distinguish between a fuse and a switch.
2. List the methods of arc quenching.
3. State the basic requirements of a relay.
4. List any four methods of Neutral grounding.
5. Mention the probable faults in alternator.
6. State the use of pilot wires in protection.
7. Draw the protection scheme for single bus bar arrangement.

549
8. Define surge.
PART - B Marks: 4Qx3=12
Instructions: (1) Answer any Four Questions
(2) Each question carries Three marks.

9(a) State the use of Air break Switch.

Or
9(b)State the uses of Distance Relay
10(a) Describe the arcing phenomenon.
Or
10(b)State the need for Surge Protection
11(a)State the types of Feeders
Or
11(b)Draw the protection scheme of radial feeders using time graded relays.
12(a)State the causes of surges
Or
12(b)Write the necessity of neutral earthing

PART - C Marks: 4Qx5=20

Instructions: (1) Answer any Four Questions
(2) Each question carries Five marks
13(a) Explain the working of oil circuit breaker with a neat sketch.
Or
13(b)Explain protection of parallel feeders using directional relays.
14(a)Explainearth fault protection for stator of an alternator.
Or
14(b)Explain with a neat figure the working of Valve type Lighting Arrestor.
15(a) Explain the protection of transmission lines by definite distance relay.
Or
15(b) Explain protection of ring main feeder using directional relays.
16a)Explainreactance grounding
Or
16(b)Explain the working principle of expulsion type lighting arrestor with diagram.
ADVANCED PROTECTION OF POWER SYSTEMS
Course Title : Advanced Protection of Course Code : 18EE-504E(B)
Power Systems Course Group : Elective
Semester :V Credits :3
Teaching Scheme in : 45:15:0 Total Contact Periods : 60
Periods (L:T:P) SEE : 40 Marks
Methodology : Lecture + Tutorial (Semester End Examination)
CIE : 60 Marks
(Continuous Internal Evaluation)

Pre requisites
This course requires the basic knowledge of mathematics and science.
This course requires the knowledge of AC Machines, Transmission lines

Course Outcomes

550
CO1 : Classify High Voltage Circuit Breaker

CO2 : Classify Protective Relays.

CO3 : State the principles of static relays.
CO4 : Describe the protection schemes of alternator and transformers
CO5 : Explain the protection schemes for transmission lines and feeders
CO6 : Describe digital relay

Blue Print of Marks for SEE

Unit Unit Name Periods Questions to be set for SEE

No
R U A

1 Principles of switchgear Q4
10
and circuit breakers Q1 Q9(a) Q13(a)
2 Protective Relaying 10

3 Static relays 08

4 Protection of Alternators Q2 Q10(a) Q14(a)

12
and transformers

5 Protection of 08 Q3 Q5,Q6 Q9(b), Q14(b),

Transmission Lines and Q11(a), Q11(b) Q15(a), Q15(b)
Feeders

551
 6 Basic Elements of Q10(b), Q13(b),
12 Q7,Q8
Digital Protection Q12(a), Q12(b) Q16(a), Q16(b)

Total 60 8 8 8

Course Content
UNIT 1 -Principles of switchgear and circuit breakers Duration: 10 Periods (L:7.5– T:2.5)
Switch gear – Isolators, Load break, air break&earthing switches - phenomenon of arc - arc voltage -arc
current – arc quenching - Circuit breakers and their classification based on the medium of arc quenching
– Working of O.C.B, A.B.C.B, SF6C.B & VCB - their comparisons.

UNIT 2 – Protective Relaying Duration: 10 Periods (L:7.5– T:2.5)

Requirements of relays – Classification of Relays –solenoid plunger type - attracted armature relays-
merits and demerits - Construction and working of induction type over current relays – Directional Over
current relay - Impedance relay.

UNIT 3 – Static relays Duration: 08 Periods (L: 6 – T: 2)

Comparators and static relay characteristics - Relays as comparators –Amplitude and Phase comparison
schemes–General equation for comparators for different types of relays –Static comparators–Coincidence
circuits–Phase splitting methods–Hall effect comparators –Operating principles –Use of level detectors –
Time delay circuits –Filters

UNIT 4 - Protection of Alternators and transformers Duration: 12 Periods (L: 9– T: 3)

Protection of Alternators - Scheme of protection - probable faults in alternators - Differential protection -
Earth fault protection for stator and rotor – Split phase protection - Field suppression protection
-Protection of Transformer - Possible faults in the transformer – Precautions required for protection –
Differential protections and Buchholz relay

UNIT 5 - Protection of Transmission Lines and Feeders Duration: 8 Periods (L: 6 – T: 2)

Transmission line and feeder protection- Pilot wires, protection of transmission lines - Combined
protection using definite distance and time distance relays – Protection of radial feeders, parallel feeders,

552
and ring main feeders - Bus bar protection-Single bus bar, duplicate bus bars-surges-lightning arresters-
applications of lightning arresters

UNIT 6: Basic Elements of Digital Protection Duration: 12 Periods (L:9-T:3)

Application of Numerical relays for Interconnected power system – networks - Basic Components of a
Digital Relay - Signal Conditioning – Subsystems – Transducers - Surge Protection Circuits - Analog
Filtering - Analog Multiplexers - Conversion Subsystem - Signal Aliasing Error - Sample and Hold
Circuit - Digital Multiplexing - Digital-to-Analog Conversion -Analog-to-Digital Conversion -Digital
Relay Subsystem - Benefits of digital relays-numerical relay applications

Recommended Books

1. Principle of Power systems - V.K. Mehta

2. Electrical power systems - S.L. Uppal
3. Text book of Electrical power systems - Sony GuptaBhatnagar
4. Electrical power systems- JB Gupta
5. Electrical power Systems - CL Wadhwa
6. Switch gear and Protection by Sunil S. Rao

Suggested E-Learning references

1. electrical4u.com
2. www.nptel.ac.in
3. https://ocw.mit.edu/courses/electrical-engineering-and-computer-science/

Suggested Learning Outcomes

1.1 State the types of faults in power system and their effects.
1.2 Define switch gear.
1.3 Classify switch gear with respect to voltage level
1.4 State the purpose of isolators, load break switches ,air break switches and earthing switches
1.5 Explain the phenomenon of arc, arc voltage, arc current and its effects.
1.6 State factors responsible for arc formation.
1.7 Describe the methods of arc quenching.
1.8 Classify the circuit breakers based upon medium of arc quenching.

553
1.9 State the principle of oil circuit breaker
1.10 Explain with legible sketch the working principle of Air blast circuit breaker
1.11 Explain with legible sketch working principle of SF 6 circuit breaker
1.12 Explain with legible sketch working principle of vacuum circuit breaker

2.1 State the basic requirements of relays

2.2 State the important features of relays.
2.3 Classify the relays based upon
i) Principle of Operation ii) Time of operation.
2.4 Describe the working of solenoid plunger type relay
2.5 Describe the working of attracted armature relays.
2.6 List the uses of attracted armature relays.
2.7 Describe the construction and working of induction type over current relay.
2.8 Describe the current setting, time setting and application of above relays.
2.9 Explain the principle of obtaining directional property in induction relays.
2.10 Describe the working of directional over current induction relay.
2.11 List the applications of directional over current induction relay.
2.12 Explain the principle of working of definite time distance impedance relay.
2.13 List the applications of impedance relay.
2.14 Describe the current differential protection.
2.15 Describe the voltage differential protection

3.1 State the advantages of static relays over electromagnetic relays

3.2 Explain with block diagram the construction of static protective relays
3.3 Describe how relays are used as comparators
3.4 Mention the types of amplitude comparators
3.5 Explain with a legible sketch the circulating current type integrating comparator
3.6 List the static phase comparators
3.7 Explain coincidence type phase comparators
3.8 Explain Hall Effect type of phase comparators
3.9 State the purpose of level detector in static relaying
3.10 State the need for time delay circuit in static relaying

4.1 State the probable faults in Alternator Stator and rotor.

554
4.2 State the effects of faults on Alternator Stator and rotor.
4.3 Describe the scheme of protection against excessive heating of stator and rotor.
4.4 Explain the differential protection for alternator stator.
4.5 Explain the earth fault protection for rotor.
4.6 Explain the split phase protection of alternator against inter turn short circuits.
4.7 Explain the need and working of field suppression protection.
4.8 List the possible faults in a transformer and mention their effects.
4.9 List the precautions to be taken for applying differential protection to transformers.
4.10 Explain differential protection of transformer.

4.11 Explain the working of Buchholz relay and its protection scheme for transformer.

5.1 Explain the different schemes of protection for single and duplicate bus bars.
5.2 Describe the transmission line and feeder protection.
5.3 Explain pilot wires and their effects.
5.4 Describe the protection of transmission lines using distance and impedance relays.
5.5 Explain the combined protection by using definite distance and time distance relays.
5.6 Describe about protection of radial feeders using time graded relays.
5.7 Explain protection of parallel feeders using directional relays.
5.8 Explain protection of ring main feeder using directional relays.
5.9 Explain differential protection for parallel feeders of transmission lines.
5.10 Define surge
5.11 List the types of surges
5.12 Give reasons for the causes of surges
5.13 Explain the working principle of Lightning arrester with diagram.
5.14 List the types of lightning arrestors for outdoor applications
5.15 Describe the construction and working of following types of lightning arrestors.
i) Rod gap ii) Horn gap iii) Expulsion type iv) valve type v) Metal oxide
5.16 List the applications of above lightning arrestors.

6.1 Explain with block diagram the working of digital relay

6.2 State the advantages of digital relay
6.3 State the limitations of digital relay
6.4 State the purpose of sample and hold circuit
6.5 Explain with block diagram the working of numerical over current relay
555
 6.6 Explain with block diagram the working of transformer numerical differential relay
6.7 Mention the applications of numerical relays for interconnected power system

Suggested Student Activities

1. Student visits Library to refer to Electrical Manuals

2. Visit nearby substation and prepare a report
3. Quiz
4. Group discussion
5. Surprise test

CO-PO Mapping Matrix

Basic knowledge

Engineer and society

Communication

Lifelong learning
Discipline Knowledge

Engineering Tools

Ethics
practice Experiments and

sustainability Environment &

work Individual and Team

Linked
PO

CO PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO 10

CO1 2 2 2 3 1,2,3,10
CO2 2 3 2 2 1,2,3,10
CO3 2 2 3 3 1,2,5,10
CO4 2 2 3 2 2 2,10
CO5 3 3 2 2 2,10
CO6 2 2 3 3 3 2,10

556
Internal Evaluation

Test Units Marks

Mid Sem 1 1 and 2 20

Mid Sem 2 3 and 4 20

Slip Test 1 1 and 2 5

Slip Test 2 3 and 4 5

Assignments - 5

Seminars - 5

Total 60

QUESTION PAPER PATTERN FOR MID SEMESTER EXAMS

No of Marks for
Sl.No Description Level Choice Total Marks
Questions each question

01 Part-A Remembering(R) 4 1 Nil 4 Marks

02 Part-B Understanding(U) 4 3 2 6 Marks

03 Part-C Application(A) 4 5 2 10 Marks

Total Marks 20 Marks

MID SEM-I EXAM

S.No Unit No R U A

5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-I 1,2
5(b) 7(b)

6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-II 3,4
6(b) 8(b)

Total Questions 4 4 4

MID SEM-II EXAM

557
 S.No Unit No R U A

1 Unit-III 1,2 5(a) 7(a)

5(b) 7(b)

2 Unit-IV 3,4 6(a) 8(a)

6(b) 8(b)

Total Questions 4 4 4

The length of answer for each question framed in respect of Part-A, B&C shall not exceed
¼ of a page side, 1 page side and 2page sides respectively

QUESTION PAPER PATTERN FOR SEMESTER END EXAM

No of Marks for
Sl.No Description Level Choice Total Marks
Questions each question

01 Part-A Remembering(R) 8 1 Nil 8 Marks

02 Part-B Understanding(U) 8 3 4 12 Marks

03 Part-C Application(A) 8 5 4 20 Marks

Total Marks 40 Marks

Questions to be set for SEE

Unit No
R U A

I
Q1 Q9(a) Q13(a)
II

III
Q2 Q10(a) Q14(a)
IV Q4

Q9(b), Q13(b),
V Q5,Q6
Q11(a), Q11(b) Q15(a), Q15(b)
Q3
Q10(b), Q14(b),
VI Q7,Q8
Q12(a), Q12(b) Q16(a), Q16(b)

Total Questions 8 8 8

558
 STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION &TRAINING ,TELANGANA
DIPLOMA IN ELECTRICAL & ELECTRONICS ENGG.
SUB CODE: 18EE-504E (B)
ADVANCED PROTECTION OF POWER SYSTEMS
MID SEM -I MODEL PAPER
TIME: 1HOUR TOTAL MARKS: 20
_________________________________________________________________________________
Important Note: Wherever any question has choice, marks will be allotted only to first attempted
question. No marks will be allotted for extra questions answered

PART – A Marks: 4Q X 1= 04
Instructions: (1) Answer all questions
(2) Each question carries One mark.
1.Define switchgear.
2. Define Arc.
3. Define Relay.
4.State any two requirements of relay.

PART - B Marks: 2Q x 3 = 06
Instructions: (1) Answer all questions
(2) Each question carries Three marks.
5(a) Classify different types of switchgear .
or
5(b) State any one method of arc quenching.

6(a) Classify relays based on principle of operation

Or
6(b) List the applications of Impedance Relay.

559
 PART - C Marks: 2Q x 5= 10
Instructions: (1) Answer all questions
(2) Each question carries Five marks.

7(a) Explain with neat sketch the working of Air Blast Circuit Breaker.

or
7(b) Draw a neat sketch of SF6 Circuit Breaker.

8(a) Explain the working of directional Over current Relay.

Or
8(b) Describe the Current Differential Protection.

STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION &TRAINING ,TELANGANA

DIPLOMA IN ELECTRICAL & ELECTRONICS ENGG.
SUB CODE: 18EE-504E (B)
ADVANCED PROTECTION OF POWER SYSTEMS
MID SEM -II MODEL PAPER
TIME: 1HOUR TOTAL MARKS: 20
_________________________________________________________________________________
PART – A Marks: 4Q X 1= 04
Instructions: (1) Answer all questions
(2) Each question carries One mark.

1. Define Static Relay.

2. Define Comparator.
3. List the protection schemes of Alternator.
4. List the possible faults in a transformer.

PART - B Marks: 2Q x 3 = 06
Instructions: (1) Answer all questions.
(2) Each question carries Three marks.

5(a) State the advantages of Static relay over Electromagnet relay

or
5(b) State the need for time delay in Static relaying

6(a) State the effects of faults on Alternator Stator

or
6(b) Describe the protection of Excessive heating of Alternator

560
 PART - C Marks: 2Q x 5= 10
Instructions: (1) Answer all questions
(2) Each question carries Five marks.

7(a) Explain the Hall Effect type of Phase comparator

or
7(b) Explain the coincidence type phase comparators

8(a) Explain the differential protection for alternator stator.

or
8(b) Explain the working of Buchholz Relay and its protection scheme for transformer.

18EE-504E(B)
STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION &TRAINING , TELANGANA
DIPLOMA IN ELECTRICAL & ELECTRONICS ENGG.
SUB CODE: 18EE-504E(B)
ADVANCED PROTECTION OF POWER SYSTEMS

SEMESTER END EXAM MODEL PAPER

TIME: 2 HOURS TOTAL MARKS: 40
________________________________________________________________________________
PART – A Marks: 8Q X 1= 10
Instructions: (1) Answer all questions
(2) Each question carries one mark.
1. Define Arc.
2. State any two requirements of relays.
3. Define comparator.
4. List possible faults in transformer
5. Define surge
6. State the need for pilot wire protection scheme.
7. Define digital relay.
8. Mention any two advantages of numerical relay over conventional relays.
PART - B Marks: 4Qx3=12
Instructions: (1) Answer any Four Questions
(2) Each question carries Three marks.
9(a) State any one method of arc quenching.
Or
9(b)State the advantages of static relay over electromagnet relay
10(a)Describe how relays are used as comparators.

561
 Or
10(b)State the purpose of sample and hold circuit.
11(a)List any three types of lightning arrestor.
Or
11(b)List types of surges.
12(a)List the applications of digital relays.
Or
12(b)State the limitations of digital relays.

PART - C Marks: 4Qx5=20

Instructions: (1) Answer any Four Questions
(2) Each question carries Five marks
13(a) Explain the working of induction type over current relay.
Or
13(b)Explain the protection of parallel feeders using directional relay.
14(a)Explain about earth fault protection for stator of alternator.
Or
14(b)Explain with block diagram the working of numerical over current relay.
15(a) Explain the protection of transmission lines by definite distance relay.
Or
15(b) Explain protection scheme of double bus bars.
16a)Explain with block diagram the working of digital relay.
Or
16(b)Explain with block diagram the working of transformer numerical differential relay.
ELECTRICAL ESTIMATION AND UTILIZATION
Course Title : Electrical Estimation and Utilization Course Code : 18EE-505C
Semester : V
Teaching Scheme in Periods : 45:15:0 Course Group :Core
(L:T:P) Credits :3
Methodology : Lecture + Tutorial
CIE : 60 Marks Total Contact Periods :60
(Continuous Internal Evaluation) SEE : 40 Marks
(Semester End Examination)

Pre requisites

This course requires the knowledge of basic principles of electricity, electrical workshop, types of loads
in domestic and industrial use. It also requires fundamental understanding of types of lamps, heating
devices, welding meaning, various motors and their characteristics.

Course Outcomes

CO1 : Infer various wiring systems and estimate the materials required for domestic wiring

CO2 : Estimate the materials required for power loads, irrigation pumps and earthing system
CO3 : Estimate materials required for over head line and distribution substations.

562
CO4 : Perceive laws of illumination and requirements of good lighting
CO5 : Analyze electric heating, methods of electric heating and welding
CO6 : Analyze train electrification and speed time curves , tractive effort and various traction
equipment used

Blue Print of Marks for SEE

Unit Unit Name Periods Questions to be set for SEE

No R U A
1 Wiring Systems and
Estimation of Lighting / 10
Domestic Load
Q1 Q9(a) Q13(a)
2 Estimation of Power
Loads, Irrigation Pumps 10
and Earthing system
3 Estimation of OH Lines
and Distribution 10 Q4
Q2 Q10(a) Q14(a)
Substations
4 Electrical Lighting 10
5 Electrical Heating and Q5, Q9(b), Q13(b),
Welding 10
Q6 Q11(a), Q11(b) Q15(a), Q15(b)
Q3
6 Electric Traction Q7, Q10(b), Q14(b),
10
Q8 Q12(a), Q12(b) Q16(a), Q16(b)
Total 60 8 8 8

Course Content

UNIT 1 – Wiring systems and Estimation of Lighting / Domestic Load

563
 Duration: 10 Periods (L: 7.5 – T: 2.5)
Types of house wiring systems - Various types of cables – Various types of Main switches - Different
types of fuses , fuse carriers, isolators and MCBs -Types of service mains - Estimation of domestic
lighting installation and their specifications - quantity of materials required – Estimation and selection of
interior wiring system suitable to a given building

UNIT 2 – Estimation of Power Loads, Irrigation Pumps and Earthing system

Duration: 10 Periods (L: 7.5 – T: 2.5)

Wiring layouts - Estimate for a small workshop - Estimate for the installation of Irrigation pump up to 10
HP - Estimate for the installation of submersible pump - estimation of materials required in electrical
Earthing

UNIT 3 - Estimation of OH Lines and Distribution Substations

Duration: 10 Periods (L: 7.5– T: 2.5)

Distribution lines of 11 kV and 400Volt OH lines - estimation - Cross arms - clamps - insulators -
Estimation of quantity of materials required for structures- pole mounted substation and plinth mounted
substation –Indian Electricity act 2003.

UNIT 4 - Electrical Lighting Duration: 10 Periods (L: 7.5 – T: 2.5)

Nature of light and its production, Terms and definitions plane and solid angle, luminous flux, Lumen,
C.P. Illumination, brightness, polar curve, MHCP, MSCP, MHSCP, Lux meter- types of lamps
Requirements of good lighting different types of lamp fittings laws of illumination Terms and factors
used in design of lighting schemes for indoor –Illumination levels for indoor and outdoor applications-
problems-LED lamps-Environmental aspects

UNIT 5 – Electrical Heating and Welding Duration: 10 Periods (L: 7.5 – T: 2.5)
Advantages of electric heating requirements of good heating material and materials generally employed,
resistance heating Principle and applications Electric arc furnaces direct and indirect types applications
Induction heating core type and coreless type Applications Dielectric heating – principle and
applications.

564
Types of welding Principle and applications of Resistance welding spot welding seam welding butt
welding Arc welding Metal Arc welding Carbon Arc welding Welding generator - welding transformer -
Sequence welding circuits

UNIT 6 - Electric Traction Duration: 10 Periods (L:7.5 - T: 2.5)

Introduction-different systems of train electrification-speed time curves different types of train services,
urban and sub-urban-factors affecting scheduled speed -problems -Coefficient of adhesion-factors
affecting the coefficient of adhesion-Tractive effort - Traction motors A.C&D.C––over head equipment-
Current collecting gears-Booster transformer– MAGLEV

Recommended Books

1. Electrical motors applications and control byM.V.Deshpande

2. Electrical power by S.L.Uppal
3. Electrical power by J.B.Gupta
4. Electrical Technology VolIIIbyBLTheraja
5. Electric Traction by H.Partab
6. Electric Traction A.T. Dover
7. Electric Traction Hand Book Sir Isqqc Pitman & sons ltd., London
8. Utilisation of Electrical Energy.(in SI units) E.O. Taylor (Indian Edition)
9. A course in Electrical Power (in SI units) J.B. Gupta
10. S.L.UppalElectrical Wiring ,Estimating & costing Electrical wiring
11. Electrical Drawing – Balbir Singh
12. Electrical wiring – Aurora
13. J.B.Gupta Estimating & costing

Suggested E-Learning references

1. http://electrical4u.com/
2. www.nptel.ac.in
3. https://youtube.com

565
 4. https://3.imimg.com/data3/JA/HU/MY-7591709/copper-earthing-electrodes.pdf

Suggested Learning Outcomes

After completion of the subject, the student shall be able to

1.1 List the different types of wires used in House wiring.

1.2 List the different types of single phase and three phase cables
1.3 State the uses of standard wire gauge.
1.4 Specify the gauge of wire and number of strands in a multi strand by giving its current carrying
capacity
1.5 List the different types of wiring systems
1.6 Explain Surface conduit wiring system
1.7 Explain Concealed wiring system.
1.8 List the various types of Main Switches
1.9 State the specifications of MCB
1.10 State the types of MCBs
1.11 State the applications of MCCB, ELCB and RCCB.
1.12 State the applications of Distribution board
1.13 Specify the fuse carrier material used and the applications of Rewirable (Kit Kat) fuses
1.14 Specify the fuse carrier material used and the applications of Open type fuse
1.15 Specify the fuse carrier material used and the applications of Cartridge fuses
1.16 Explain different types of service mains
1.17 Select the service main suited to the given situation
1.18 List the schedule of rates used in preparing estimate.
1.19 Estimate the material requirement for indoor wiring given the plan of a building and draw the
Wiring Layout of a Single Room
1.20 Estimate the material requirement for indoor wiring given the plan of a building and draw the
Wiring Layout of a 2-BHK House
1.21 Describe the test procedure to conduct Polarity Test of wiring in an electrical installation.
1.22 Explain the procedure for conducting Insulation test before energizing a new domestic installation.

2.1 Draw the wiring layout for an office building

2.2 Prepare layout and draw single line wiring diagrams as per standard practice for a given set of
machines in a workshop / electrical laboratory.(Upto 3 motors)
2.3 Calculate the suitable wire sizes for various circuits
2.4 Estimate the materials used for installation of 3 phase induction motor with DOL starter
2.5 Estimate the materials used for installation of 3 phase induction motor with Y-∆ starter
2.6 Select the type of wiring and service mains used for the irrigation pump set
2.7 List the materials used in the installation of the irrigation pump set.
2.8 Prepare an estimate for electrifying the irrigation pump set scheme
2.9 Prepare estimation for submersible pump installation

566
2.10 State the purpose of earthing
2.11 State the types of earthing.
2.12 Select the suitable type of earthing for a given installation as per IS3043.
2.13 Prepare the estimate for pipe earthing.
2.14 Prepare the estimate for plate earthing.
2.15 State the concept of maintenance free chemical gel earthing.
2.16 Explain the method of chemical gel earthing.

3.1 State the requirements of line supports used in overhead lines

3.2 List the factors influencing the selection of line supports
3.3 List the types of line supports
3.4 State the need for cross arms
3.5 State the types of cross arms
3.6 Calculate the total number of insulators required for the given scheme
3.7 Select the type of insulators to be used for overhead lines.
3.8 Select the type, size and number of cross arms required for the overhead line
3.9 Determine the size and total length of overhead conductor required for the line giving due
consideration for the sag to be allowed
3.10 Estimate the quantity of all materials required for given 11 KV overhead lines as per standard
practice followed by NEC
3.11 Estimate the quantity of all materials required for given 400V overhead lines as per standard
practice followed by NEC
3.12 Estimate the quantity of material required for pole mounted transformer substations
3.13 Estimate the quantity of material required for plinth mounted transformer substation
3.14 State the salient features of Indian Electricity Act 2003
3.15 State the function of Central Electricity Authority.

4.1 Explain the nature of light and its propagation

4.2 Define the following terms.
a) Plane and solid angles b) Luminous flux c) Luminous intensity d) Lumen
e) Candle power f) Illumination g) Brightness
h) Polar curve i) MHCP j) MSCP k) MHSCP
4.3 List the types of lamps used for illumination for different situations such as domestic,
industrial, decoration, advertisement and street lighting schemes.
4.4 Define glare.
4.5 State the requirements of good lighting
4.6 Explain different types of lamp fittings.
4.7 State the uses and advantages of each type of fitting
4.8 State and explain the laws of illumination
4.9 Solve problems on laws of illumination.
4.10 Define the terms:
a) Utilization factor b) Depreciation factor c) Waste light factor d) Reflection factor

567
 e) Reduction factor f) Absorption factor g) Luminous efficiency
h) Specific energy consumption i) Space height ratio
4.11 Calculate the number of lamps required for simple indoor lighting scheme
4.12 State the purpose of lux meter
4.13 Mention the illumination levels for indoor and outdoor applications
4.14 State the advantages of LED lighting over CFL lamps

5.1 State the advantages of electric heating

5.2 List the requirements of good heating material
5.3 State the materials employed for heating
5.4 Explain resistance heating direct and indirect
5.5 List the industrial applications of resistance heating.
5.6 Explain different methods of temperature control of resistance heating with diagrams.
5.7 Explain direct arc heating
5.8. Explain indirect arc heating
5.9 List the industrial applications of arc heating.
5.10 explain induction heating – (core type and core less type)
5.11 Explain the principle of dielectric heating.
5.12 List the industrial applications of dielectric heating
5.13 State different types of electric welding.
5.14 Explain the principles of
i) Resistance Welding ii) Spot Welding iii) Seam Welding iv) Butt Welding
v) Arc Welding vi) Metal Arc Welding vii) Carbon Arc Welding
5.15 List the conditions for successful welding.
5.16 Explain the characteristics of a welding generator.
5.17 Explain with legible sketch the principle of operation of welding transformer with a
reactance coil.
5.18 Explain the `Sequence Weld' with a block diagram.

6.1 Describe Single phase A.C. and Composite systems.

6.2 State the advantages and disadvantages of electric traction.
6.3 List the types of services (main line, suburban and urban),
6.4 Sketch the speed time curves for i) Main Line ii) sub urban services iii) Urban services.
6.5 State each stage of the speed time curve with appropriate speed used.
6.6 State the importance of speed time curves.
6.7 Define Maximum speed, Average speed and Scheduled speed.
6.8 List the factors affecting the Scheduled Speed.
6.9 Sketch the simplified Speed Time Curves.
6.10 Explain the practical importance of the above curves.
6.11 Write the expression for Maximum Speed, Acceleration and Retardation for Trapezoidal Speed
Time Curve

568
6.12 Solve simple problems on Trapezoidal Speed Time Curve.
6.13 Explain the Tractive Effort.
6.14 Write the expression for Tractive Effort for Acceleration, to overcome gravity pull and train
resistance.
6.15 Define 'Coefficient of Adhesion'.
6.16 List the factors affecting the Coefficient of Adhesion.
6.17 State the methods of improving the Coefficient of Adhesion.
6.18 State the important requirements of traction motors(A.C and D.C)
6.19 State the purpose and material used for catenary
6.20 State the purpose and material used droppers
6.21 State the purpose and material used trolley wires
6.22 State the purpose and material used bow collector
6.23 State the purpose and material used pantograph collector
6.24 State the Need of Booster Transformer
6.25 Draw the Connection diagram of booster transformer
6.26 Explain the Concept of MAGLEV and its applications

Suggested Student Activities

1. Student visits to the houses which are under construction so as to visualize the pipe layout and
accessories fixtures
2. Student visits Distribution Transformer i.e., Pole mount and Plinth mount
3. Visit to nearby field and understand the Irrigation pump estimation
4. Visit to small industry or workshop and estimate the load and rating of the accessories required
5. Group discussion
6. Surprise test
7. Student visits to the Industries, Malls and software companies which operate at night to understand the
importance of Lighting , to shops which provide lighting solutions
8. Prepare a report on illumination required for both indoor and outdoor applications
9. Student visits Industries where Electrical heating methods are employed and their purpose of heating
10. Visit to nearby Welding shop and also to industries which make use of Electric welding process
11. Visit to Traction workshop of Railway and understand its operation
12. Quiz

569
CO-PO Mapping Matrix
Engineer and society
Basic knowledge

Communication

Lifelong learning
Discipline Knowledge

Engineering Tools

Ethics
Experiments and

Environment &

Individual and Team

Linked PO
practice

sustainability

CO\P PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
work

O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CO1 2 3 2 1 2 - 2 1 - 3 1,2,3,4,5,7, 8,10

CO2 2 3 2 1 3 - 3 1 - 3 1,2,3,4,5,7, 8,10

CO3 2 3 2 1 3 - 3 1 - 3 1,2,3,4,5,7, 8,10

CO4 3 2 2 3 3 1,2,5,6,10

CO5 2 2 2 2 2 1,2,5,6,10

CO6 1 2 3 2 3 1,2,5,6,10

Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE)

570
 Test Units Marks
Mid Sem 1 1 and 2 20
Mid Sem 2 3 and 4 20
Slip Test 1 1 and 2 5
Slip Test 2 3 and 4 5
Assignments - 5
Seminars - 5
Total 60

QUESTION PAPER PATTERN FOR MID SEMESTER EXAMS

Sl.No Description Level No of Marks for Choice Total

Questions each Marks
question
01 Part-A Remembering(R) 4 1 Nil 4 Marks
02 Part-B Understanding(U) 4 3 2 6 Marks
03 Part-C Application(A) 4 5 2 10 Marks
Total Marks 20 Marks

MID SEM-I EXAM

S.No Unit No R U A

5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-I 1,2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-II 3,4
6(b) 8(b)

Total Questions 4 4 4

MID SEM-II EXAM

S.No Unit R U A
No
1 Unit-III 1,2 5(a) 7(a)
5(b) 7(b)

571
 2 Unit-IV 3,4 6(a) 8(a)
6(b) 8(b)
Total Questions 4 4 4

The length of answer for each question framed in respect of Part-A, B&C shall not exceed
¼ of a page side, 1 page side and 2page sides respectively.

QUESTION PAPER PATTERN FOR SEMESTER END EXAM

No of Marks
Sl.N Total
Description Level Question for each Choice
o Marks
s question
01 Part-A Remembering(R) 8 1 Nil 8 Marks
02 Part-B Understanding(U) 8 3 4 12 Marks
03 Part-C Application(A) 8 5 4 20 Marks
Total Marks 40 Marks

Questions to be set for SEE

Unit No
R U A
I
Q1 Q9(a) Q13(a)
II
III
Q2 Q10(a) Q14(a)
IV
Q4
Q9(b), Q13(b),
V Q5,Q6
Q11(a), Q11(b) Q15(a), Q15(b)
Q3
Q10(b), Q14(b),
VI Q7,Q8
Q12(a), Q12(b) Q16(a), Q16(b)
Total Questions 8 8 8

572
 STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION & TRAINING, TELANGANA
DIPLOMA IN ELECTRICAL & ELECTRONICS ENGG.
SUB CODE: 18EE-505C
ELECTRICAL ESTIMATION AND UTILIZATION

MID SEM -I MODEL PAPER

TIME: 1 HOUR TOTAL MARKS: 20
____________________________________________________________________________
PART – A Marks: 4 X 1=4
Instructions: (1) Answer all questions
(2) Each question carries one mark.

1. State the uses of standard wire gauge.

2. What is a service main?
3. What is the purpose of earthing?
4. List the materials that are to be used in the Earth pit surrounding the Earth electrode

PART - B Marks: 2 x 3 = 6
Instructions: (1) Answer the following questions.
(2) Each question carries three marks.

5a) List the different types of single phase and three phase cables
OR
5 b) State the types of MCBs

6 a) State the types of earthing.

OR
6 b) Specify the different materials used in pipe earthing

PART - C Marks: 2 x 5= 10
Instructions: (1) Answer the following questions.
(2) Each question carries five marks
7 a) Explain Concealed wiring system
OR
7 b) Estimate the quantity of material required and the cost of materials for wiring a newly
constructed residential building whose plan is shown in Fig below and details of load are given in table
below. Assume any missing data
Location Lamp(60W) Tube Fan(80W) 5A socket 15A socket
light(40W) outlet outlet
Verandah 1 1 1 - -
Reading room 1 1 1 1 1
Bed room-1 1 1 1 1 -
Bed room-2 1 1 1 1 -
Kitchen 1 1 - 1 1

573
 Plan of the House

8 a) Prepare the Estimate of materials suitable for earthing for a 132/33KV substation
OR
8 b) Draw the wiring layout for a workshop

574
 STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION & TRAINING, TELANGANA
DIPLOMA IN ELECTRICAL & ELECTRONICS ENGG.
SUB CODE: 18EE-505C
ELECTRICAL ESTIMATION AND UTILIZATION

MID SEM –II MODEL PAPER

TIME: 1 HOUR TOTAL MARKS: 20

____________________________________________________________________________
PART – A Marks: 4 X 1=4
Instructions: (1) Answer all questions
(2) Each question carries one mark.

1. State the need for cross arms

2. List the types of line supports
3. Define MHCP
4. Define illumination
PART - B Marks: 2 x 3 = 6
Instructions: (1) Answer the following questions.
(2) Each question carries three marks.

5a) List the factors influencing the selection of line supports

.
OR
5 b) State the types of cross arms required for overhead transmission lines

6 a) State the requirements of good lighting

OR
6 b)State the purpose of lux meter.

PART - C Marks: 2 x 5= 10
Instructions: (1) Answer the following questions.
(2) Each question carries five marks.

7 a) Estimate the quantity of material required for pole mounted substation

OR
7 b) Estimate the quantity of material required for plinth mounted substation

8 a) State and explain Lambert’s cosine law of illumination

OR
8 b) State the uses and advantages of each type of fitting

575
 18EE-505C
STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION & TRAINING, TELANGANA
DIPLOMA IN ELECTRICAL & ELECTRONICS ENGG.
SUB CODE: 18EE-505C
ELECTRICAL ESTIMATION AND UTILIZATION
SEMESTER END EXAM MODEL PAPER
TIME: 2 HOURS TOTAL MARKS: 40
_____________________________________________________________________________

PART – A
Instructions: (1) Answer all questions
(2) Each question carries one mark. Marks: 8 X 1 = 8

1. List the different types of wires used in house wiring

2. Define glare
3. State the purpose of using droppers in electric traction
4. Define schedule speed of an electric locomotive
5. List any two applications of direct resistance heating
6. List any two requirements of good heating material
7. List the applications of magnetic levitation
8. Define coefficient of adhesion
PART - B

Instructions: (1) Answer the following questions

(2) Each question carries three marks. Marks: 4 X 3 = 12

9a) State the purpose of earthing in electrical installations

OR

9b) List the industrial applications of Dielectric Heating

10a) List the factors influencing the selection of line supports

OR

10b) State the methods of improving the Coefficient of Adhesion.

11a) List the Conditions for Successful Welding.

OR

11b) Draw the Sequence Weld block diagram

12a) State the Need of Booster Transformer

576
 OR

12 b) State the purpose and material used for pantograph collector

PART - C

Instructions: (1) Answer the following questions

(2) Each question carries five marks. Marks: 4 X 5 = 20

13a) Prepare the Estimate for Plate Earthing.

.
OR

13b) Prepare the quantity estimate and cost of wiring material required for an agriculture pump
set of 3.7 KW 3-Phase, 400 V motor. The distance between the LT pole and the Pump set
shed (5x3x3m) is 12m. Assume missing data where ever necessary

14 a) State and explain the Laws of Illumination

OR

14b) Explain Single phase A.C. and Composite systems of electric traction

15a) With the help of a neat diagram explain the construction and working of vertical core type
induction furnace
OR

15b) Explain with legible sketch the principle of operation of Welding Transformer with a
reactance coil.

16a) State the important requirements of traction motors

OR

16 b) Draw and explain the connection diagram of booster transformer.

577
 AC MOTORS LAB PRACTICE
Course Title : AC Motors Lab Practice Course Code : 18EE-506P
Semester :V Course Group : Practical
Teaching Scheme in : 15:0:30 Credits : 1.5
Periods (L:T:P) Total Contact Periods : 45
Methodology : Lecture + Practical SEE : 40 Marks
CIE : 60 Marks (Semester End
(Continuous Internal Evaluation) Examination)

Pre requisites

This course requires the skills of handling electrical tools, accessories and performing wiring connections

Course Outcomes

Course Outcome
CO1 Identify the parts of A.C motor starters

CO2 Draw and interpret the performance characteristics of single phase and three phase AC Motors by
Conducting load test.
CO3 Draw the circle diagram on AC Motors by conducting suitable experiments.

CO4 Identify and rectify faults in AC motors

CO5 Prepare estimation for a given load by using Government SSR as per BIS norms.

578
Suggested Learning Outcomes

1.0. Identify the parts of A.C motor starters

1.1 Identify the parts of a DOL starter, test its parts locate faults if any. Suggest remedies.

1.2 Identify the parts of a manual star-delta starter, test its parts and locate faults if any. Suggest
remedies.

1.3 Identify the parts of automatic star-delta starter, test its parts and locate faults if any. Suggest
remedies.

1.4 Identify the parts of autotransformer starters, test its parts locate faults if any. Suggest
remedies.

2.0 Draw and interpret the performance characteristics of single phase and three phase AC Motors
by Conducting load test.

2.1. Conduct brake test on 3-phase squirrel cage induction motor.

2.2. Conduct brake test on 3-phase slip ring induction motor

2.3. Perform load test on single phase split phase induction motor.

2.4. Perform load test on single phase universal motor

2.5 Conduct load test on synchronous motor and draw V and inverted V curves

3.0 Draw the circle diagram on AC Motors by conducting suitable experiments.

3.1. Conduct suitable tests and draw circle diagram of squirrel cage induction motor.

3.2. Conduct suitable tests and draw circle diagram of slip ring induction motor

4.0. Identify and Rectify faults in AC motors.

4.1 Identify the part of a given AC Motors.

4.2 Identify and rectify faults in AC Motors.

5.0 Prepare Estimation for a given load by using Government SSR as per BIS norms.

1. (A list of Items and soft copy of SSR may be provided to student)

2. Wiring estimate for a Residential / Commercial building.
3. Prepare an estimate for wiring Irrigation pump set
Note:- The staff can give suitable problems.

579
 CO-PO MAPPING MATRIX

Basic knowledge

Engineer and society

Communication

Lifelong learning
Discipline Knowledge

Engineering Tools

Ethics
practice Experiments and

sustainability Environment &

work Individual and Team

Linked PO

PO
CO PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9
10

CO1 1 3 3 3 3 2 1,2, 3,4,8,9

CO2 1 3 3 3 3 2 1,2, 3,4,8,9
CO3 1 3 3 3 3 2 1,2, 3,4,8,9
CO4 3 3 3 3 2 2,3,4,8,9
CO5 1 3 3 3 2 1,2,7,8,9

State Board of Technical Education and Training, Telangana

580
 DEEE V Semester
MID SEM I MODEL QUESTION PAPER

Course Code: 18EE-506P Duration: 1 Hour

Course Name: AC Motors Lab Practice Max. Marks: 20
Note: Answer allotted Question.

Instructions to the Candidate:

(i)Record the results on a graph sheet if required, and conclude your observation of the experiment.

(ii) Draw the circuit diagram for illustration; choose appropriate values when not mentioned in the
question.

1. Identify the parts of a DOL starter, test its parts locate faults if any. Suggest remedies.
2. Identify the parts of a manual star-delta starter, test its parts and locate faults if any. Suggest
remedies.
3. Identify the parts of automatic star-delta starter, test its parts and locate faults if any. Suggest
remedies.
4. Identify the parts of autotransformer starters, test its parts locate faults if any. Suggest remedies.
5. Conduct brake test on 3-phase squirrel cage induction motor.
6. Conduct brake test on 3-phase slip ring induction motor

State Board of Technical Education and Training, Telangana

DEEE V Semester

581
 MID SEM II MODEL QUESTION PAPER

Course Code: 18EE-506P Duration: 1 Hour

Course Name: AC Motors Lab Practice Max. Marks: 20
Note: Answer allotted Question.

Instructions to the Candidate:

(i)Record the results on a graph sheet if required, and conclude your observation of the experiment.

(ii) Draw the circuit diagram for illustration; choose appropriate values when not mentioned in the
question.

1. Perform Load test on Single phase split phase induction motor.

2. Perform Load test on Single phase universal motor

3. Conduct load test on Synchronous motor and draw V and inverted V curves.

4. Conduct suitable tests and draw circle diagram of squirrel cage induction motor.

5. Conduct suitable tests and draw circle diagram of slip ring induction motor

State Board of Technical Education and Training, Telangana

582
 Model Question paper
DEEE V Semester
SEMESTER END EXAMINATION

Course Code: 18EE-506P Duration: 2 Hours

Course Name: AC Motors Lab Practice Max. Marks: 40
Note: Answer allotted Question.

Instructions to the Candidate:

(i)Record the results on a graph sheet if required, and conclude your observation of the experiment.

(ii) Draw the circuit diagram for illustration; choose appropriate values when not mentioned in the
question.

1. Conduct brake test on 3-phase squirrel cage induction motor.

2 Conduct brake test on 3-phase slip ring induction motor
3. Perform load test on single phase split phase induction motor.
4. Perform load test on single phase universal motor
5. Conduct load test on synchronous motor and draw V and inverted V curves.
6. Conduct suitable tests and draw circle diagram of squirrel cage induction motor.
7. Conduct suitable tests and draw circle diagram of slip ring induction motor
8. Identify the part of a given AC Motors.

9. Identify and rectify faults in AC Motors.

10. Identify the parts of a DOL starter, test its parts locate faults if any. Suggest remedies.
11. Identify the parts of a manual star-delta starter, test its parts and locate faults if any.
Suggest remedies.
12. Identify the parts of automatic star-delta starter, test its parts and locate faults if any.
Suggest remedies.
13. Identify the parts of autotransformer starters, test its parts locate faults if any. Suggest
remedies.

583
 POWER ELECTRONICS LAB PRACTICE
Course Title : Power Electronics Lab Practice Course Code : 18EE-507P
Semester :V Course Group : Practical
Teaching Scheme in : 15:0:30 Credits : 1.5
Periods (L:T:P) Total Contact Periods : 45
Methodology : Lecture + Practical SEE : 40 Marks
CIE : 60 Marks (Semester End Examination)
(Continuous Internal Evaluation)

Pre requisites

This course requires the knowledge of Power electronics

Course Outcomes

Course Outcome
CO Acquire knowledge on specified Power electronic devices and use them
1
CO Use Single phase Half wave and full wave converters for R loads
2
CO Control the speed of DC motors using converters and choppers
3
CO Control the speed of AC motors using AC voltage controller & V/F controller
4
CO Acquire knowledge on inverters
5

584
Suggested Learning Outcomes

1.0 Characteristics of different Power electronic devices

1.1 Draw the Static VI characteristics of SCR
1.2 Draw the Static VI characteristics of IGBT
1.3 Draw the Static VI characteristics of DIAC
1.4 Draw the Static VI characteristics of TRIAC

2.0 Single phase Half wave and full wave converters for R loads
2.1 Verify the working of Single phase half wave controlled converter with R-load.
2.2 Verify the working of Single phase Full wave fully controlled converter with R-load

3.0 Speed Control of DC motors using converters and choppers

3.1 Control the speed of DC shunt motor using single phase fully controlled full wave converter
3.2 Control the speed of DC shunt motor using Chopper

4.0 Speed control of AC motors

4.1 Control the speed of 1 Φ induction motor using AC Voltage controller
4.2 Control the speed of 3 Φ induction motor using V/F controller

5.0 Inverters

5.1 Invert DC supply to AC supply using Series Inverter

5.2 Invert DC supply to AC supply using Parallel Inverter

585
 CO-PO MAPPING MATRIX

Communication

Lifelong learning
Basic knowledge

Discipline Knowledge

Engineering Tools

Ethics
Engineer and society
practice Experiments and

sustainability Environment &

work Individual and Team

Linked PO

PO
CO PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9
10
1,2,3,4,8,9
CO1 1 3 3 3 3 2

1,2,3,4,8,9
CO2 1 3 3 3 3 2

1,2,3,4,8,9
CO3 1 3 3 3 3 2

1,2,3,4,8,9
CO4 1 3 3 3 3 2

1,2,3,4,8,9
CO5 1 3 3 3 3 2

State Board of Technical Education and Training, Telangana

586
 DEEE V Semester
MID SEM I MODEL QUESTION PAPER

Course Code: 18EE-507P Duration: 1 Hour

Course Name: Power Electronics Lab Practice Max. Marks: 20
Note: Answer allotted Question.

Instructions to the Candidate:

(i)Record the results on a graph sheet if required, and conclude your observation of the experiment.

(ii) Draw the circuit diagram for illustration; choose appropriate values when not mentioned in the
question.

1.Draw the Static VI characteristics of SCR

2.Draw the Static VI characteristics of IGBT
3.Draw the Static VI characteristics of DIAC
4.Draw the Static VI characteristics of TRIAC

State Board of Technical Education and Training, Telangana

DEEE V Semester
MID SEM II MODEL QUESTION PAPER

Course Code: 18EE-507P Duration: 1 Hour

Course Name: Power Electronics Lab Practice Max. Marks: 20
Note: Answer allotted Question.

Instructions to the Candidate:

(i)Record the results on a graph sheet if required, and conclude your observation of the experiment.

(ii) Draw the circuit diagram for illustration; choose appropriate values when not mentioned in the
question.

1 Verify the working of Single phase half wave controlled converter with R-load.
2 Verify the working of Single phase Full wave fully controlled converter with R-load
3 Control the speed of DC shunt motor using single phase fully controlled full wave converter
4 Control the speed of DC shunt motor using Chopper

587
 State Board of Technical Education and Training, Telangana
Model Question paper
DEEE V Semester
SEMESTER END EXAMINATION

Course Code: 18EE-507P Duration: 2 Hours

Course Name: Power Electronics Lab Practice Max. Marks: 40
Note: Answer allotted Question.

Instructions to the Candidate:

(i)Record the results on a graph sheet if required, and conclude your observation of the experiment.

(ii) Draw the circuit diagram for illustration; choose appropriate values when not mentioned in the
question.

1 Draw the Static VI characteristics of SCR

2 Draw the Static VI characteristics of IGBT
3 Draw the Static VI characteristics of DIAC
4 Draw the Static VI characteristics of TRIAC

5 Verify the working of Single phase half wave controlled converter with R-load.
6 Verify the working of Single phase Full wave fully controlled converter with R-load

7 Control the speed of DC shunt motor using single phase fully controlled full wave converter
8 Control the speed of DC shunt motor using Chopper

9 Control the speed of 1 Φ induction motor using AC Voltage controller

10 Control the speed of 3 Φ induction motor using V/F controller

11 Invert DC supply to AC supply using Series Inverter

12 Invert DC supply to AC supply using Parallel Inverter

588
 PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS LAB PRACTICE
Course Title : Programmable logic Course Code : 18EE-508P
controllers Lab Practice Course Group : Practical
Semester :V Credits : 1.5
Teaching Scheme in : 15:0:30 Total Contact Periods : 45
Periods (L:T:P) SEE : 40 Marks
Methodology : Lecture + Practical (Semester End Examination)
CIE : 60 Marks
(Continuous Internal Evaluation)

Pre requisites

This course requires the knowledge of Digital Electronics

Course Outcomes

Course Outcome

CO1 Identify the main components of the PLC module, configure the drivers and perform ON/OFF
control logic task using PLC

CO2 Develop the ladder logic program for logic gates, download it to the PLC and run the program

CO3 Develop the ladder logic program for timer & counter functions, download it to the PLC and run
the program

CO4 Execute the ladder programs for PLC based model applications

Suggested Learning Outcomes

1.0 Identify the main components of the PLC module, configure the drivers and switching task
using PLC
1.1 Identify the main components of the PLC module
1.2 Identify different input devices and output field devices used in Industrial automation
1.3 Perform the simple ON/OFF control task using the PLC.
1.4 Perform a relay switching logic task through a PLC unit
1.5 Develop a ladder logic program for Seal-In-circuit (Latch logic) using PLC, download and run the
program.
1.6 Implement latch(Set) and unlatch(Reset) instructions

589
2.0 Develop the ladder logic program for logic gates, download it to the PLC and run the
program
2.1 Develop a ladder logic program for AND,OR and NOT gates, download the program and run it
2.2 Develop a ladder logic program for NAND,NOR, EX-OR and EX-NOR gates PLC, download the
program and run it

3.0 Develop the ladder logic program for timer & counter functions, download it to the PLC and
run the program
3.1 Execute the ladder logic program for T-ON(ON-Delay Timer)
3.2 Execute the ladder logic program for T-OFF(OFF-Delay Timer)
3.3 Execute the ladder logic program for RTON(Retentive on)
3.4 Execute the ladder logic program for CTU(count-Up counter)
3.5 Execute the ladder logic program for CTD(count-down Counter)

4.0 Execute the ladder programs for PLC based model applications
4.1 Execute the ladder logic program for stair case lighting
4.2 Execute the ladder logic program for DOL starter
4.3 Execute the ladder logic program for star delta starter

590
CO-PO Mapping Matrix

Communication

Lifelong learning
Basic knowledge

Discipline Knowledge

Engineering Tools

Ethics
Engineer and society
practice Experiments and

sustainability Environment &

work Individual and Team

Linked PO

PO
CO PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9
10

CO1 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 2,3,4,5,8,9,10

CO2 2 3 2 2 2 2 2,3,4,8,9,10

CO3 2 3 2 2 2 3 2,3,4,8,9,10

CO4 2 3 2 2 2 2 2,3,4,5,6,10

State Board of Technical Education and Training, Telangana

591
 DEEE V Semester
MID SEM I MODEL QUESTION PAPER

Course Code: 18EE-508P Duration: 1 Hour

Course Name: Programmable Logic Controllers Lab Practice Max. Marks: 20
Note: Answer allotted Question.

Instructions to the Candidate:

(i)Record the results on a graph sheet if required, and conclude your observation of the experiment.

(ii) Draw the circuit diagram for illustration; choose appropriate values when not mentioned in the
question.

1. Identify the main components of the PLC module

2. Identify different input devices and output field devices used in Industrial automation
3. Perform the simple ON/OFF control task using the PLC.
4. Perform a relay switching logic task through a PLC unit
5. Develop a ladder logic program for Seal-In-circuit (Latch logic) using PLC, download and run the
program.
6. Implement latch(Set) and unlatch(Reset) instructions
7. Develop a ladder logic program for AND,OR and NOT gates, download the program and run it
8. Develop a ladder logic program for NAND,NOR, EX-OR and EX-NOR gates PLC, download the
program and run it

State Board of Technical Education and Training, Telangana

592
 DEEE V Semester
MID SEM II MODEL QUESTION PAPER

Course Code: 18EE-508P Duration: 1 Hour

Course Name: Programmable Logic Controllers Lab Practice Max. Marks: 20
Note: Answer allotted Question.

Instructions to the Candidate:

(i)Record the results on a graph sheet if required, and conclude your observation of the experiment.

(ii) Draw the circuit diagram for illustration; choose appropriate values when not mentioned in the
question.

1 Execute the ladder logic program for T-ON(ON-Delay Timer)

2 Execute the ladder logic program for T-OFF(OFF-Delay Timer)
3 Execute the ladder logic program for RTON(Retentive on)
4 Execute the ladder logic program for CTU(count-Up counter)
5 Execute the ladder logic program for CTD(count-down Counter)

State Board of Technical Education and Training, Telangana

593
 Model Question paper
DEEE V Semester
SEMESTER END EXAMINATION

Course Code: 18EE-508P Duration: 2 Hours

Course Name: Programmable Logic Controllers Lab Practice Max. Marks: 40
Note: Answer allotted Question.

Instructions to the Candidate:

(i)Record the results on a graph sheet if required, and conclude your observation of the experiment.

(ii) Draw the circuit diagram for illustration; choose appropriate values when not mentioned in the
question.

1. Identify the main components of the PLC module

2. Identify different input devices and output field devices used in Industrial automation
3. Perform the simple ON/OFF control task using the PLC.
4. Perform a relay switching logic task through a PLC unit
5. Develop a ladder logic program for Seal-In-circuit (Latch logic) using PLC, download and run the
program.
6. Implement latch(Set) and unlatch(Reset) instructions
7. Develop a ladder logic program for AND,OR and NOT gates, download the program and run it
8. Develop a ladder logic program for NAND,NOR, EX-OR and EX-NOR gates PLC, download the
program and run it
9. Execute the ladder logic program for T-ON(ON-Delay Timer)
10. Execute the ladder logic program for T-OFF(OFF-Delay Timer)
11. Execute the ladder logic program for RTON(Retentive on)
12. Execute the ladder logic program for CTU(count-Up counter)
13. Execute the ladder logic program for CTD(count-down Counter)
14. Execute the ladder logic program for stair case lighting
15. Execute the ladder logic program for DOL starter
16. Execute the ladder logic program for star delta starter

594
 PROGRAMMING IN C LAB PRACTICE

Course Title :Programming in C Lab Practice Course Code : 18EE-509P

Semester :V Course Group :Practical
Teaching Scheme in
:15:0:30 Credits :1.5
Periods(L:T:P)
Methodology :Lecture + Practical Total Contact Periods :45
CIE :60 marks SEE :40 Marks
(Common to all branches)

Pre requisites

Basic knowledge of Computer Operation.

Course outcomes

Course Outcome

CO1
Write programs using input/output statements, variables and operators

CO2
Work on Constants, Variables, Data Types, Operators and Expressions in C
CO3
Construct programs on Decision making and Looping statements.
CO4
Develop programs using arrays, Strings and structures

Course Content

1. Programming Methodology and Introduction to C Language Duration: 5 Periods

Program - Define High level language and low level language-history of C language -
importance of C language – Define & Differentiate Compiler, Assembler - structure of C
language - programming style of C language - steps involved in executing the C program

2. Understand Constants, Variables and Data Types in C and Understand Operators and
Expressions in C Duration: 15 Periods

Character set - C Tokens - Keywords and Identifiers- Constants and Variables - data
types and classification - declaration of a variable - Assigning values to variables - Define
an operator - Define an expression -Classify operators - List and explain various
arithmetic operators with examples -Illustrate the concept of relational operators - List
logical operators - various assignment operators - Increment and decrement operators -
Conditional operator - List bitwise operators -List various special operators- Arithmetic

595
 expressions- precedence and associativity of operators- Evaluation of expressions -
formatted input and output.

3. Decision making and Looping statements Duration: 10 Periods

Simple if statement with sample program – if else statement – else if statement – switch statement
- Classification of various loop statements- while statement – do-while statement - for loop
statement - break and continue statements.

4. Arrays and Structures Duration: 15 Periods

Arrays - declaration and initialization of One Dimensional - Accessing elements in the Array -
Declaration and initialization of two Dimensional Arrays - sample programs on matrix addition
and matrix multiplication –Strings – String handling functions - Declaration of a Structure –
Structure members – Array of structures.

Teaching
Course Outcome CL Linked PO
Hours

CO1 Write programs using input/output statements, variables R, U, A 1,2,3,4,8,9,10 5

and operators

CO2 Work on Constants, Variables, Data Types, Operators and R, U, A 1,2,3,4,8,9,10 15

Expressions in C

CO3 Construct programs on Decision making and Looping R,U, A 1,2,3,4,8,9,10 10

statements.
CO4 U, A 1,2,3,4,8,9,10 15
Develop programs using arrays, Strings and structures
Total Sessions 45

REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Let Us C -- Yeshwanth Kanetkar BPB Publications

2. Programming in ANSI C -- E. Balaguruswamy Tata McGrawHill
3. Programming with C -- Gottfried Schaum’outline
4. C The complete Reference -- Schildt Tata McGraw Hill

List of Experiments

1. Exercise on structure of C program

2. Exercise on Keywords and identifiers

596
3. Exercise on constants and variables
4. Execution of simple C program
5. Exercise on operators and expressions
6. Exercise on special operators
7. Exercise on input and output of characters
8. Exercise on formatted input and output
9. Exercise on simple if statement
10. Exercise on if else statement
11. Exercise on else if ladder statement
12. Exercise on switch statement
13. Exercise on conditional operator
14. Exercise on while statement
15. Exercise on for statement
16. Exercise on do...while statement
17. Exercise on one dimensional arrays
18. Exercise on two dimensional arrays
19. Exercise on string handling functions.
20. Exercise on structure
21. Exercise on array of structures

PROJECT WORK

597
Course Title :Project Work Course Code : 18EE-510P
Semester :V Course Group : Practical
Teaching Scheme in
:0:0:45 Credits :1.5
Periods(L:T:P)
Total Contact
Methodology : Practical :45
Periods
CIE :60 marks SEE :40 Marks

SCHEME OF INSTRUCTIONS AND EXAMINATION

S. Max Marks
Subject Duration Items Remarks
No
CIE

Mid sem-I
Abstract submission
20
Mid sem-II
Prototype project, content
development, literature
survey and submission of 20
Draft copy

Internal Evaluation
20
PROJECT Final Report
1 WORK 6 Months Internal via and seminar

SEE
External exam
Seminar 20

Viva Voce 20

Total : 100

The Project work shall carry 100 marks and pass marks are 50% a candidate failing to secure the
minimum marks should repeat the Project work.
The project selected should be useful to the society.

DEEE SKILL UPGRADATION ACTIVITY SHEET

598
Course Title : Skill Upgradation Credits :2.5
Semester : V Total Contact Periods : 105
Methodology : Activities

Suggested Course Outcomes

CO.1 Address the identified needs of the community collaboratively to facilitate positive
social change.
a. Prepare a chart related to the topics covered in the present semester.
b. Listen to expert talk, guest lecture, you tube video and write a summary.
c. Participate in Haritha Haram and submit a small report about the activities.
d. Prepare a report / PPT / poster on waste water recycling or any eco-friendly practices.
e. Seminar on problems with possible solutions in the campus or nearby places
f. Group discussions or enacting a play on topics creating awareness about socio-economic
problems
g. Take up a case study on identification of latest technologies to tackle day to day problems
such as pollution control or traffic management and submit a report / PPT/ poster
h. Participate in NCC

(PO5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10)

CO.2 Listen attentively to others and respond appropriately

a. Listen to expert talk, guest lecture, youtube video and write a summary.
b. Participating in Group discussions or enacting a play on topics creating awareness about
socio-economic problems that can be mitigated by technologies.
c. Participate in quiz on technical aspects or current affairs
d. Participate in Mock Interview

(PO5, 7, 8, 9, 10)

CO.3 Adapt your style to the occasion, task, and audience

a. Group discussions or enacting a play on topics creating awareness about socio-economic
problems that can be mitigated by technologies.
b. Seminar on problems with possible solutions in the campus or nearby places
c. Participate in Mock Interview

(PO5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10)

CO.4 Articulate ideas in various formats including oral, written, nonverbal, visual, and
electronic devices.

599
 a. Prepare a chart related to the topics covered in the present semester.
b. Refer to an e-journal and submit a summary report on upcoming technologies.
c. Visit factory / industry and submit a report/PPT on the observations made.
d. Prepare a mini project and submit report.
e. Prepare a report / PPT / poster on waste water recycling or any eco-friendly practices.
f. Take up a case study on identification of latest technologies to tackle day to day problems
such as pollution control or traffic management and submit a report / PPT/ poster
g. Seminar on problems with possible solutions in the campus or nearby places
h. Participate in Mock Interview

(PO5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10)

CO.5 Demonstrate ability to recognize and effectively manage ambiguous ideas,

experiences and situations
a. Take up a case study on identification of latest technologies to tackle day to day problems
such as pollution control or traffic management and submit a report / PPT/ poster
b. Seminar on problems with possible solutions in the campus or nearby places

(PO5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10)

CO.6 Analyze the interconnections between individuals and society as well as how
individual actions have an impact on others.
a. Participate in Haritha Haram and submit a small report about the activities.
b. Participate in Swatch Bharath and write an essay on the importance of the program
c. Participate in NCC

(PO5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10)

CO.7 Utilize others’ ideas, strengths, knowledge, and abilities to foster an inclusive
environment & Develop and sustain healthy and meaningful relationships with others
a. Prepare a mini project and submit report.
b. Participate in Haritha Haram and submit a small report about the activities.
c. Participate in Swatch Bharath and write an essay on the importance of the program
d. Participate in NCC

(PO5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10)

CO.8 Ability to recognize their strengths and those of others to work towards a shared
vision.
a. Prepare a mini project and submit report.
b. Participate in Haritha Haram and submit a small report about the activities.
c. Participate in Swatch Bharath and write an essay on the importance of the program
d. Participate in NCC

(PO5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10)

600
 CO.9 Act in alignment with one’s own values to contribute to one’s life-long growth and
learning.
a. Physical activities such as sports, yoga, meditation and other relaxation techniques

(PO5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10)

CO.10 Gain, process, and act upon knowledge regarding the effects of individual,
community, national, and international level choices on ecosystems and people.
a. Prepare a report / PPT / poster on waste water recycling or any eco-friendly practices.
b. Take up a case study on identification of latest technologies to tackle day to day problems
such as pollution control or traffic management and submit a report / PPT/ poster
c. Take up a case study on identification of latest technologies to tackle day to day problems
such as pollution control or traffic management and submit a report / PPT/ poster
d. Seminar on problems with possible solutions in the campus or nearby places

(PO5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10)

CO Outcome CO/PO
Mapping

CO1 Address the identified needs of the community collaboratively to 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10

facilitate positive social change.
CO2 Listen attentively to others and respond appropriately 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10

CO3 Adapt your style to the occasion, task, and audience 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10

CO4 Articulate ideas in various formats including oral, written, nonverbal, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10

visual, and electronic devices.
CO5 Demonstrate ability to recognize and effectively manage ambiguous 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10
ideas, experiences and situations
CO6 Analyze the interconnections between individuals and society as well 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10
as how individual actions have an impact on others.
CO7 Utilize others’ ideas, strengths, knowledge, and abilities to foster an 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10
inclusive environment & Develop and sustain healthy and
meaningful relationships with others
CO8 Ability to recognize their strengths and those of others to work 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10
towards a shared vision
CO9 Act in alignment with one’s own values to contribute to one’s life- 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10
long growth and learning.
CO10 Gain, process, and act upon knowledge regarding the effects of 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10
individual, community, national, and international level choices on
ecosystems and people.

Note: The above COs may map to other POs from 1 to 4 apart from PO’s 5 to 10 depending on
the topic

Suggested Student Activities

601
 1. Prepare a chart related to the topics covered in the present semester.
2. Refer to an e-journal and submit a summary report on upcoming technologies.
3. Visit factory / industry and submit a report/PPT on the observations made.
4. Prepare a mini project and submit report.
5. Listen to expert talk, guest lecture, you tube video and write a summary.
6. Participate in Haritha Haram and submit a small report about the activities.
7. Prepare a report / PPT / poster on waste water recycling or any eco-friendly practices.
8. Take up a case study on identification of latest technologies to tackle day to day problems such as
pollution control or traffic management and submit a report / PPT/ poster
9. Participate in Swatch Bharath and write an essay on the importance of the program
10. Group discussions or enacting a play on topics creating awareness about socio-economic
problems
11. Physical activities such as sports, games, yoga, meditation and other relaxation techniques
12. Participate in quiz on technical aspects or current affairs
13. Seminar on problems with possible solutions in the campus or nearby places
14. Participate in NCC
15. Participate in Mock interviews

Note: The above student activities will be assessed using rubrics. A sample rubrics template is given
below. The subject teacher can assess students using rubrics with at least four relevant aspects.

RUBRICS MODEL (For assessing Presentation skills)

Aspects Needs improvement Satisfactory Good Exemplary

Collection Collects very Collect much Collects Collects a
of data limited Information with some basic great deal of

602
 very information with
information information with
limited relevance little bit of
relevance
to the topic irrelevance
Presents data well;
Presents data well Presents data in an
Presentation Clumsy but presentation
but need to improve understandable yet
of data presentation of data needs to be more
clarity concise manner
meaningful
Performs all
Fulfill Performs very Performs very Performs
duties of
team’s roles little duties but little duties and is nearly all
assigned
& duties Unreliable. inactive duties
team roles
Rarely does Usually does Always does
Normally
Shares the assigned the assigned the assigned
does the
work work; often work; rarely work without
assigned
equally needs needs having to be
work
reminding reminding reminded
Usually does Talks good;
Listens, but
Interaction with most of the but never Listens and
sometimes
other team talking; rarely show interest speaks a fair
talks too
mates allows others in listening to amount
much
to speak others
Audibility and Very little
Hardly audible and Audible most of the
clarity in audibility and Audible and clear
unclear time with clarity
speech clarity
Some depth of
Lacks content Insight and depth
Little depth of content
Understanding understanding and of content
content understanding is
content is clearly a work in understanding are
understanding evident but needs
progress evident
improvement
Content is Content is accurate
Content is accurate
inaccurate and but some Content is
and information is
information is not information is not accurate and
Content not presented in a
presented in a presented in a information is
Presentation logical order
logical order logical order but is presented in a
making it difficult
making it difficult still generally easy logical order
to follow
to follow to follow

Suggested additional aspects for assessing Leadership Qualities:

1. Carrying self
2. Punctuality
3. Team work abilities
4. Moral values
5. Communication skills
6. Ensures the work is done in time
Suggested additional aspects for assessing “Participation in social task”

1 Interested to know the current situation of society.

2 Shows interest to participate in given social task.
3 Reliable

603
 4 Helping nature
5 Inter personal skills
6 Ensures task is completed

Suggested additional aspects for assessing “Participation in Technical task”

1. Updated to new technologies

2. Identifies problems in society that can be solved using technology
3. Interested to participate in finding possible technical solutions to identified project
4. Reliable
5. Interpersonal skills

Suggested additional aspects for Carrying Self:

1 Stand or sit straight.

2 Keep your head level.
3 Relax your shoulders.
4 Spread your weight evenly on both legs.
5 If sitting, keep your elbows on the arms of your chair, rather than tightly against your sides.
6 Make appropriate eye contact while communicating.
7 Lower the pitch of your voice.
8 Speak more clearly.

604
DIPLOMA IN ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING
VI - SEMESTER

605
 INDUSTRIAL TRAINING

Course Title : Industrial Training Course Code : :18EE-601P

Semester :Traction
VI Course Group : Practical
Teaching Scheme in periods : 0:0:7 Credits : 25
per day (L:T:P)
Methodology : Training Total Duration : 6 months

CIE : 900 SEE : 100

(Continuos Internal Evaluation) (Semester End Examination)

Rationale:Industrial training is introduced in the VI semester for the students as a part of the program to
make the passed out students industry ready thus saving the training and apprenticeship needs in the
industry and also help in capacity building of the Telangana state and the country.
Course Objectives:
To enable the students to

1. Acquaint with Industry environment and culture.

2. Develop professional skills
3. Enhance the usage skills of modern tools
4. Develop Communication and leadership skills.
5. Encourage entrepreneurship
Course Outcomes:
CO Outcome
CO1 Appreciate the organizational setup and hierarchy
CO2 Practice the use of Resource optimization techniques
CO3 Develop core engineering skills
CO4 Develop an understanding of solutions for Environmental issues in the
industry
CO5 Get acquainted to industry culture and professionalism

Evaluation:

1. The student should submit a report describing the profile of the company, Nature of the
job assigned to him /her and other details in a standard format duly attested and approved
by the head of the industry after two weeks and before Four weeks from the date of
joining through e mail. Hard copy of the report may be submitted in person or by post.
2. A candidate shall be assessed twice in the spell of industrial training i.e. at the end of
third month and finally before he/she completed the industrial training
3. The assessment shall be carried out by a committee comprising of a representative of the
Industry where the candidate is undergoing training and a faculty member from the
respective program from the Polytechnic.

606
 For Institution level evaluation of industrial training, a committee consisting following
faculty members (1) Head of Dept. concerned.(2) Faculty member who assessed the student in
the industry (3) any other staff member of departmentconcerned may be formed.

 Evaluation and assessment of Industrial Training, shall be done and marks be awarded
in the following manner, provided the candidates concerned have put up minimum 90%
attendance of Industrial Training.

Industrial assessment at Industry : 600 marks (in two spells of 300 marks each)

Institutional Evaluation : 300 marks

Semester End Examination : 100 marks

(Seminar/viva-voce at Institution)
_________
TOTAL 1000 marks

Assessment parameters at Industry

Assessment I Assessment
Sl No (First II (Second
Learning Parameter
Quarter) Quarter)
1 Attendance and punctuality 20 20

2 Familiarity of tools and material 30 30

3 Engineering skills 50 50

4 Application of knowledge & Problem solving skills 50 50

5 Comprehension and observation 10 10

6 Professionalism/Professional ethics 20 20

7 Safety and environmental consciousness 10 10

8 Communication skills 20 20

9 Supervisory skills 50 50

10 General conduct during the period 40 40

Total marks for Industry Evaluation 300

300
600 marks

Assessment parameters at Institution (End Examination)

607
 Institution Level Evaluation Scheme

Sl Criteria Marks Time

No

1 1st Report Submission 50 within 4 Weeks

2 Seminar-I 50 9th to 10th week

3 2nd Report Submission 50 Within 12 weeks

4 Log book 100 --

5 Seminar-II 50 Before Viva-Voce

Institute Evaluation 300

Total

Semester End Examination

1 Viva-Voce 50 After 24 weeks

2 Presentation/Demonstration 50
of skills

Total 100

The assessment at the institute level will be done by a minimum of three members i.e. Internal
Faculty, Industrial Experts/External Examiner and H.O.D. and the shall be averaged

Learning Outcomes
1.0 Observe Safety Precautions and rules of the industry

1.1. Know the importance of safety in industries

1.2. Understand the safety about personnel protection, equipment protection
1.3. Know the usage of various safety devices
1.4. Precautionary measures to be taken.

2.0 Appreciate organizational set up from top executive to workmen level

2.1. Acquaint with the function of each department/section

2.2. Comprehend the inter relationship among various department/sections.

3.0. Observe the end product ,various Components/ materials used in the production and identify
their source.

608
3.1. Identify the various stages involved in the assembly and production of end product.
3.2. List the final products, their composition and its commercial importance, uses and
Applications.

4.0. Develop an Understanding of various stages involved in processing, sequential arrangement

of different equipment.

4.1. Represent the whole process and each sub processes with a flow diagram
4.2. Observe and appreciate the resource optimization of space (the arrangement of various equipment
and machinery in systematic manner in a less possible area of site), Electricity, Men machinery,
money and Time.
5.1. Explain various analytical methods used in the quality control department
5.1. Practice the Testing methods for quality assurance and bench mark standards
5.2. Practice use of various tools, instruments used for quality checking.

6.0. Observe trouble shooting /servicing /maintenance techniques used during the production

6.1. Observe preventive precautions and maintenance of each equipment in the unit
6.2. Follow Staring andshutting down procedures for the equipment in the unit.

7.0 Identify the various pollutants emitted from the plant/Industry.

7.1. State effects of pollutants.

7.2. Explain handling methods of E waste and pollutants disposal

609